Home

HP LoadRunner Controller User Guide

1. Group Name Down Pending Init Ready Run Rendez Passed Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Stoj z 10 0 0 5 20 0 0 0 0 0 O Script A 5 10 Script _B 5 5 Script_C 5 5 Run new Vusers He can create and run five new Vusers with no effect on those he initialized in the previous step To do this he clicks the arrow on the Run button and selects Run New Five Vusers are immediately created and move directly to the Run state Group Name Down Pending Init Ready Run Rendez Passed Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Stoj z 10 0 CERN 20 0 0 0 0 0 O Script_A 10 10 Script_B 5 5 Script_C 5 5 Note If there were still vusers in the Down state the new Vusers would be taken from them Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Stop running Vusers in Vuser group mode If David wants to stop three of the five running Vusers in Script_A and not wait for them to stop as per their defined schedules in the Run tab he clicks Run Stop Vusers to open the Run Stop Vusers dialog box In the dialog box he makes sure that only the check box by script_a is selected and he enters 3 in the number column Run Stop Vusers Load Generators localhost localhost localhost He then clicks Stop Three of the running Vusers in Script_A move from the Run state to the Gradual Exiting state 267 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 268 Stop run
2. Group Name Down Pending Init Ready Run Sarl Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Stopped 0 0 0 0 10 0 W oO 0 2 0 18 5 1 4 5 1 4 10 gt To stop them gradually He selects the script in the Scenario Groups pane and clicks the Gradual 3g Stop button on the Controller toolbar All Vusers that have been initialized or are already running move to the Gradual Exiting state and then exit the scenario gradually as per their defined schedules Group Name Down Pending Init Ready Run Eara Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Stopped 0 0 0 0 10 0 o oO 0 8 0 12 5 1 4 5 1 4 6 4 Note The group can only be stopped gradually if Wait for the current iteration to end before exiting or Wait for the current action to end before exiting have been selected in the Run Time Setting tab of the Options dialog box For more information see Options gt Run Time Settings Tab on page 232 255 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 256 P Run Stop individual Vusers or Add New Vusers Use Case Scenario This use case scenario describes how David can manipulate the behavior of individual Vusers during the scenario run irrespective of their defined schedules The examples will show how he can run or stop individual Vusers as well as how he can add new Vusers to the scenario Note The examples presented in this section demonstrate options in the Vusers dialog box Not all informa
3. Component Counter Describes the selected component or counter Description Host The name of the monitored machine Measured A hierarchical view of the available components Browse Components the tree and select the component you want to monitor A description of the highlighted component appears in the Component Counter Description box Performance Select the required performance counters For details Counters about the default monitor counters see the relevant reference section for your monitor Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors R lt monitor name gt Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to add monitored server machines and access the dialogs to configure the measurements and data collection method To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Important Before configuring a monitor s measurements many information servers require initial setup The first step of How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 contains links to the setup instructions Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description Advanced Opens the Choose Monitor Engine dialog box for selecting native LoadRunner or SiteScope monitoring gt To monitor a server through LoadRunner select LoadR
4. Iil Load Generators ES a i gt rad with Agent z eL 5 configuration isDmerse wer Controller Monitoring L Firewall a isDmerSe wer Monitor Over Firewall Machine with Agent configuration MI Listener Firewall CispmersS wer Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner gt HTTPS Configuration In the HTTPS configuration only one machine the proxy server is allowed to open a port in the firewall Therefore it is necessary to tunnel all outgoing communications through the proxy server HTTPS Configuration Running Yusers CipmerSsemer l gt Load Generators e A with Agent ea configuration fCisme r Semer Controller CiupmersSemer MI Listener Firewall Firewall ewspme rsemer Monitor Over Firewall vta chine with Agent configuration Cisbme rSemer 3 Configure the Firewall to Allow Agent Access Modify your firewall settings to enable communication between the machines inside the firewall and machines outside the firewall a If your system has a TCP configuration The LoadRunner agent attempts to establish a connection with the MI Listener using port 443 at intervals specified in the Connection Timeout field in the Agent Configuration dialog box To enable this connection allow an outgoing connection for HTTPS service on the firewall for port 443 The agent can then connect to the MI Listener and the MI Listener can conn
5. Enables the Controller to manage load automatically using terminal sessions on the load generator Note When enabled you can see the load generator s name only without adding any extra references Example If you need to use three load generator sessions my_machine my_machine 1 and my_machine 2 then in the load generator list you need only insert the load generator my_machine and enable the Terminal Services Manager for three terminals Number of terminals 3 see below If not enabled you need to insert each of the three terminals as separate load generators my_machine my_machine 1 and my_machine 2 117 Chapter 5 Load Generators UI Elements A Z Description Maximum number of Vusers per terminal The maximum number of Vusers that you want to run in a terminal session This depends on the Vuser type used in the script Default 50 Example For GUI Vusers the maximum is one Vuser for each terminal session Number of terminals The number of terminals you want to use in your scenario You must open a terminal client session for each terminal on which you want to run Vusers during the scenario Default 2 Load Generator Configuration gt UNIX Environment Tab This tab enables you to configure the login parameters and shell type for each UNIX load generator To access Controller toolbar gt l gt Add or Details Important gt This tab is not ava
6. UI Elements A Z Description I Pause Scheduler P Resume Scheduler lt Graph Legend gt Pauses or resumes the scenario schedule Displays statistics for the selected graph For more information see Online Monitor Graphs on page 289 lt Graph Viewing Pane gt Displays the graphs that are listed in the Available Graphs pane For more information see Online Monitor Graphs on page 289 Default Displays four graphs Available Graphs Displays the available online monitor graphs For more information see Online Monitor Graphs on page 289 Scenario Groups pane Displays each Vuser group and it s current status For more information see Scenario Groups Pane on page 282 Scenario Status pane Displays a synopsis of the running scenario For more information see Scenario Status Pane on page 285 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Run Stop Vusers Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to manually control the addition of new Vusers to a running scenario as well as to stop running vusers To access Run tab gt Scenario Groups pane gt Run Stop Vusers Important information gt The dialog box differs depending on which mode you are working in gt Vuser group mode You specify the number of new Vusers to be added to each Vuser group as well as the load generators on which these additional Vusers will run gt Percentage mode You specify
7. 343 Chapter 18 e Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management 344 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Step 1 Connect to Server gt Server URL The URL of the server that contains HP ALM gt Reconnect to server on startup Automatically reconnect to the server every time you start the application gt E Connect 3 Disconnect Connects to the server specified in the Server URL box Only one button is visible at a time depending on your connection status Chapter 18 Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management UI Elements A Z Description Step 2 Authenticate User Information gt User Name Your ALM user name gt Password Your ALM password gt Authenticate on startup Authenticates your user information automatically the next time you open the application This option is only available if you selected Reconnect to server on startup above gt Authenticate Authenticates your user information a gainst the ALM server After your user information has been authenticated the fields in the Authenticate user information area are displayed in read only format The Authenticate button changes to EJ Change User You can log in to the same ALM server using a different user name by clicking Change User entering a new user name and password and then clicking Authenticate again Step
8. Lists the scripts available for the scenario When you select a script its name and path are displayed above the list To display the scripts with their full paths right click the list area and select Show Paths Add Vusers Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to add Vusers to a Vuser group To access gt Design tab gt Scenario Groups pane gt Vusers fff gt Add Vusers Important gt Relevant for manual scenarios in Vuser group mode information only Available when a group is selected in the Scenario Groups pane See also Run Stop Vusers Dialog Box on page 279 75 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 76 User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description eS Browse Enables you to add Vuser scripts to the list of scripts Note To add a VB Vuser script select the usr file FQ Record Opens VuGen where you can record a Vuser script For more information on recording Vuser scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Opens the Run Time Settings dialog box where you can edit the script s run time settings When you modify the run time settings from the Controller LoadRunner runs the script using the modified settings Parameter list Run Time Settings Opens the Parameter list in VuGen where you can create view modify and delete script paramet
9. ccc csseeseeeessecesseecesseseeseeseees 53 CONCEPTS a eS TRE sbivsedesssssvubavensisegessstentieeneeeveeds 54 Load Test Scenarios OVErViEW oo nitore rtre EE EEn ESPETS EEE 54 Mantal Scena Os an a O a EE E EE EE E eE A EA 54 Goals Types for Goal Oriented ScenariS eee eeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeeees 56 TASKS ides Siasadcsdeedeeeee eed d yeaa E ese 60 How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario ieee ee eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeee 60 How to Design a Manual Scenario ccc eeessceeeeeeeessereeeeeeeeseeee 62 How to Change the Scenario Mode Manual Scenario 65 How to View Modify Scripts in the Scenario 65 Referente viscscscesscssssssssssssessessnduenvvnnsvsnsunnsndncesetenedecedetegecedeecsecsdessveessseses 70 Relative Paths for Sctiptsiits cis netics nnnneniWaite dete ctel 70 Vaser SAUSE a n RRR a 71 Design View User Interface sreo a aiei K EEE E 72 Chapter 4 Load GeneratoS cceccsseseccssstecesesecssesseeceessseeeessneee 101 COMCEPtS verses ca seckiese ise devscecesesessavacasssssesavsvaasecsesecsssvawestagsobenebeuedeeeseuedse 102 Load Gen radtors OyVErVvie Westiin asies eatea ea iaaiiai 102 Load Balancing errcenanni iii i i scbuadsiedeveluandeestecsdeeees 102 TASKS EET S N 104 How to Connect to a UNIX Load Generator Without Using RSH 104 How to Add Load Generators to a SCeMATIO eee eee cece eeeee 105 How to Modify Load Generator Details ee eeeeeneeeeeeereeeeeee 106 How to Connect Disconnect a Load Generat
10. pkg_cache_inserts The total number of times that a requested section was not available for use and had to be loaded into the package cache This count includes any implicit prepares performed by the system pkg_cache_num_overflows appl_section_lookups The number of times that the package cache overflowed the bounds of its allocated memory Lookups of SQL sections by an application from its SQL work area appl_section_inserts Inserts of SQL sections by an application from its SQL work area sec_logs_allocated The total number of secondary log files that are currently being used for the database log_reads The number of log pages read from disk by the logger log_writes The number of log pages written to disk by the logger total_log_used locks_held The total amount of active log space currently used in bytes in the database The number of locks currently held lock_list_in_use The total amount of lock list memory in bytes that is in use deadlocks The total number of deadlocks that have occurred lock_escals The number of times that locks have been escalated from several row locks to a table lock Chapter 29 e Database Resource Monitoring Measurement Description x_lock_escals The number of times that locks have been escalated from several row locks to one exclusive table lock or the number of times an exclusive lock on a row caused th
11. Microsoft COM Performance Counters The following tables describe the default counters that can be measured Authentication Metrics Measurement Description Authenticate Frequency of successful method call level authentication When you set an authentication level for an application you determine what degree of authentication is performed when clients call into the application Authenticate Failed Frequency of failed method call level authentication Application Events Measurement Description Activation Frequency of application activation or startup Shutdown Frequency of application shutdown or termination Thread Events Measurement Description Thread Start Rate at which single threaded apartment STA thread for application have been started Thread Terminate Rate at which single threaded apartment STA thread for application have been terminated 586 Chapter 32 Application Component Monitoring Measurement Description Work Enque Event sent if a work is queued in single thread apartment object STA Note These events are not signaled sent in Windows Server 2003 and later Work Reject Event sent if a work is rejected from single thread apartment object STA Note These events are not signaled sent in Windows Server 2003 and later Transaction Events Measurement Description Transaction Duration
12. Output VideoFrame Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the VideoFrame channel This is measured in bps 599 Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Citrix Monitor Dialog Box 600 This dialog box enables you to configure the measurements for the Citrix monitor To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of Citrix Monitor dialog Important Note For Citrix monitoring if the dialog box freezes information after clicking Add you may need to rebuild the localhost cache on the Citrix server machine For more information refer to Document IDs CTX003648 and CTX759510 in the Citrix Knowledge Base http knowledgebase citrix com cgi bin webcgi exe New KB CitrixKB Relevant tasks See also How to Set up the Citrix Monitoring Environment How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Add Adds the selected measurement to the list of measurements in the Measurements on lt machine gt section of the Citrix dialog box Counters Select a resource counter to monitor Select multiple counters using the CTRL key For a definition of each counter click Explain Instances If multiple instances of the selected counter are running select one or more instances to monitor
13. Workload second The workload is a weighted measure of the server requests Some requests could have a different weight than others By default the workload is always 50 times the number of requests Workstation Handler WSH Bytes Received sec The total number of bytes received by the workstation handler per second Bytes Sent sec The total number of bytes sent back to the clients by the workstation handler per second Messages Received sec The number of messages received by the workstation handler per second Messages Sent sec The number of messages sent back to the clients by the workstation handler per second Number of Queue Blocks sec The number of times the queue for the workstation handler blocked per second This gives an idea of how often the workstation handler was overloaded 57 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring SAPGUI Performance Counters The following table lists the most commonly monitored counters Measurement Description Average CPU time The average CPU time used in the work process Average response time Average wait time The average response time measured from the time a dialog sends a request to the dispatcher work process through the processing of the dialog until the dialog is completed and the data is passed to the presentation layer The response time between the SAP GUI and the dispatcher is not included in t
14. 109 Chapter 5 Load Generators UI Elements A Z Description Run Time Quota tab Enables you to specify a maximum number of Vuser types that the load generator should initialize or stop simultaneously See Load Generator Configuration gt Run Time Quota Tab on page 113 Security tab Enables monitoring or running Vusers over a firewall See Load Generator Configuration gt Security Tab on page 114 Status tab Status Displays details about the status of the load Terminal Services tab generator See Load Generator Configuration gt Status Tab on page 116 The Terminal Services Manager which enables you to distribute Vusers running in your load testing scenario on terminal servers See Load Generator Configuration gt Terminal Services Tab on page 116 UNIX Environment tab Enables you to configure the login parameters and shell type for each UNIX load generator See Load Generator Configuration gt UNIX Environment Tab on page 118 Vuser Limits tab Add New Load Generator dialog box only Enables you to modify the maximum number of GUI RTE and other Vusers that the load generator can run See Load Generator Configuration gt Vuser Limits Tab on page 121 Vuser Status tab Load Generator Information dialog box only WAN Emulation tab Displays the status of all the Vusers connected to the load generator See Load Generator Configuration gt Vuser Statu
15. Configuring Terminal Services Settings 198 1 Prerequisite If the LoadRunner Agent is not running as a process select Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt LoadRunner Agent Process to run it as a process Configure the terminal sessions as independent load generators Perform the following steps a Select Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Advanced Settings gt Agent Configuration to open the Agent Configuration dialog box Select Enable Firewall Agent and Enable Terminal Services Click Settings to open the Agent Configuration Over Firewall Settings dialog box In the Local Machine Key field enter a logical virtual load generator name for example machine_ofw Click OK Create one or more terminal sessions on the load generator console machine Keep in mind the following gt For each terminal session run the agent configuration as above For each session specify a different Local Machine Key name for example machine_ofw_1 machine _ofw_2 etc gt If you stop the agent on a terminal session you must reconfigure the settings for that particular session before restarting the agent gt When selecting the load generator for the scenario in the Controller select the local machine key for each individual virtual load generator used 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings This chapter includes Concepts gt WAN Emulation Overview on page 200 gt Typical Network Emulation Settings
16. Description Current Bandwidth Kbits sec The number of kilobytes in the last second Buffering Event Time sec The average time spent on buffering Network Performance The ratio percentage between the current band width and the actual bandwidth of the clip Percentage of Recovered Packets The percentage of error packets that were recovered Percentage of Lost Packets The percentage of packets that were lost Percentage of Late Packets The percentage of late packets Time to First Frame Appearance sec Number of Buffering Events The time for first frame appearance measured from the start of the replay The average number of all buffering events Number of Buffering Seek Events The average number of buffering events resulting from a seek operation Buffering Seek Time The average time spent on buffering events result ing from a seek operation Number of Buffering Con gestion Events The average number of buffering events resulting from network congestion Buffering Congestion Time The average time spent on buffering events result ing from network congestion 559 Chapter 30 Streaming Media Monitoring 560 Measurement Description Number of Buffering Live Pause Events The average number of buffering events resulting from live pause Buffering Live Pause Time The average time spent on buffering events resul
17. For task details beginning with step 2 see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 P How to Set Up the SAPGUI Server Resource Monitor This task describes the working order for setting up the monitoring environment Note The SAPGUI monitor supports SAP server versions 3 1 to 4 6 regardless of the SAP R 3 server s operating system and the platform on which it is installed This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 565 gt Enable the last minute load from the client on page 568 gt Configure the SAPGUI Server Resource monitor from the Controller on page 568 1 Prerequisites Note Once the SAPGUI monitor is activated on the Controller machine you cannot record a SAPGUI protocol script on that machine gt Install the SAPGUI for Windows 6 20 client on the Controller machine gt Install the latest patch for the SAPGUI for Windows 6 20 client The lowest supported level is patch 36 SAPGUI patches can be downloaded from https websmp104 sap ag de patches You will need a valid Service Marketplace username and password to access this site 567 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring 568 2 Enable the last minute load from the client From the SAPGUI client application click F6 to determine whether you can access the st03 transaction and query for last minute load information If this functionality is not already enabled enable
18. Note Only RSH commands that work from the DOS command prompt window work with LoadRunner gt Verify that no output is generated after executing the RSH command 402 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Note You should not generate output from the login profile and cshrc files for example by echo or in any other way including commands that generate output indirectly such as biff Where an existing user generates output in the RSH step that cannot be deleted you should create a new user that does not generate output and who has permissions to run RSH and RCP commands on the server machine gt If connecting to a remote UNIX server with a secured shell PLINK PSCP connection Note Before proceeding with the following prerequisite steps if you are not familiar with the PuTTY application see Secured Shell PLINK PSCP Connection on page 385 gt Verify that the SSH daemon is running on the UNIX server gt Verify that no output is generated after executing the PuTTY commands Note You should not generate output from the login profile and cshrc files for example by echo or by any other form including commands that generate output indirectly such as biff Where an existing user generates output that cannot be deleted you should create a new user that does not generate output gt Verify that PuTTY commands are working without generating any errors Type
19. This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 535 gt Configure the Oracle client server connection on page 535 gt Connect to the monitored server machine and verify the connection on page 536 gt Modify the monitoring sample rate optional on page 537 gt Configure the Oracle monitor from the Controller on page 537 1 Prerequisites gt Ensure that the Oracle client libraries are installed on the Controller machine gt Verify that OracleHome bin is included in the path environment variable If it is not add it gt Ensure that the registries are updated for the version of Oracle that you are using and that they have the following key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE ORACLE gt Verify that the Oracle server you want to monitor is up and running Note that it is possible to monitor several Oracle database servers concurrently Note Only the 32 bit Oracle client should be installed on the Controller machine running the Oracle monitor If you have a 16 bit and a 32 bit Oracle client installation on the Controller machine the 16 bit installation should be uninstalled 2 Configure the Oracle client server connection Set the connection parameters so the Oracle client Controller machine can communicate with the Oracle server s you plan to monitor Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring 536 On the Controller machine set the following configuration parameter either by
20. gt The QuickTest tests you use with LoadRunner should be simple tests designed to pinpoint specific operations gt LoadRunner cannot run nested action iterations gt Do not include references to external actions or other external resources such as an external Data Table file environment variable file shared object repositories and so forth gt Include transactions in your QuickTest test since LoadRunner only provides performance information for data that is included within a transaction Chapter 17 Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner Tasks gt How to Add a QuickTest Script to a Load Test Scenario This task describes how to integrate a QuickTest script into LoadRunner 1 Navigate to the folder containing the script gt For a new scenario click Browse in the New Scenario dialog box gt When adding the script to an existing scenario click Browse in the Add Group Add Script dialog box The Open Test dialog box opens 2 In the Files of Type box select QuickTest Tests 3 Navigate to the appropriate script and add it to your scenario Chapter 17 Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner 336 18 Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management This chapter includes Concepts gt Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Managment Overview on page 338 Tasks gt How to Work with Scenarios in ALM Projects on page 339 gt How to Save Scenarios to ALM Projects on page 340 gt Ho
21. Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Concepts amp Load Test Planning Overview As in any type of system testing a well defined test plan is the first essential step to successful testing Planning your load testing helps you to gt Build test scenarios that accurately emulate your working environment Load testing means testing your application under typical working conditions and checking for system performance reliability capacity and so forth Before running your load test it is important to gt Understand which resources are required for testing Application testing requires hardware software and human resources Before you begin testing you should know which resources are available and decide how to use them effectively gt Define success criteria in measurable terms Focused testing goals and test criteria ensure successful testing For example it is not enough to define vague objectives like Check server response time under heavy load A more focused success criterion would be Check that 50 customers can check their account balance simultaneously and that the server response time will not exceed one minute amp Load Testing Objectives Your test plan should be based on a clearly defined testing objective 34 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios The following table presents common application testing objectives that LoadRunner helps you test as described in Robert W Buc
22. Chapter 8 Multiple IP Addresses 188 IBM AIX To define multiple IP addresses for a single Ethernet card you need IP Aliasing compiled into the kernel To do this use the ifconfig command usr sbin ifconfig int ip address alias netmask mask For example if you want to add IP address 10 0 0 1 to the main interface you need to run as root the following usr sbin ifconfig neO 10 0 0 1 alias netmask 255 255 255 0 To execute this line upon boot create a standard script in the appropriate run level etc rc d rc d Linux To define multiple IP addresses for a single Ethernet card you need IP Aliasing compiled into the kernel To do this use the ifconfig command sbin ifconfig ethO 0 x x x x netmask 255 255 x x up Substitute the new IP address for x x x x and insert the correct information for subnet mask Place this command in the rc local file so that it executes upon boot Solaris 2 5 2 6 7 0 8 0 To configure the hme0 device to support more than one IP address 1 Create entries in etc hosts for each hostname on your physical machine 128 195 10 31 myhost 128 195 10 46 myhost2 128 195 10 78 myhost3 Create etc hostname hme0 n files that contain the hostname for the virtual host n Chapter 8 Multiple IP Addresses Note hostname hme0 0 is the same as hostname hme0 etc hostname hmeO Contains name myhost etc hostname hme0 1 Contains name myhost2 etc hostname hme0 2 Contains
23. Path Translation on page 214 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description lt Path Translation table gt Displays a list of paths translated into formats that can be recognized by different machines You can insert comments by typing the symbol at the start of a line in the table For details see Path Translation Table on page 219 Convert to UNC When selected LoadRunner ignores the path translation table and converts all paths to the Universal Naming Convention Note This option can be used only when the Controller and load generator machines are all Windows based machines Mode The read write permissions for the ppath mnt file which contains the path translation table Path The path to the ppath mnt file which contains the path translation table Options gt Run Time File Storage Tab This tab enables you to specify where LoadRunner should save run time files To access Tools gt Options gt Run Time File Storage tab Important The run time file storage options described below apply information to all the load generators in a scenario To change the settings for an individual load generators see Load Generator Configuration gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 112 Relevant tasks gt How to Configure Scenario Options
24. Subnet Mask The submasks of the IP addresses on the load generator machine Number of IPs added The number of IP addresses added to the load generator machine IP Wizard Summary User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z lt Summary area gt Description Displays a summary of the operations performed by the IP Wizard Take note of the location of the batch file bat This is used to update the routing table if necessary See Update the server s routing table with the new addresses on page 186 Reboot now to update routing tables If you updated the routing table rebooting initializes the Windows device drivers with the new addresses 9 Configuring Terminal Services Settings This chapter includes Concepts gt Terminal Services Overview on page 194 Tasks gt How to Use the Terminal Services Manager on page 196 gt How to Configure Terminal Sessions Over a Firewall on page 197 193 Chapter 9 Configuring Terminal Services Settings Concepts amp Terminal Services Overview 194 You can use LoadRunner s Terminal Services Manager to remotely manage multiple load generators running in your load testing scenario on a terminal server In addition you can use a terminal server to overcome the limitation of being able to run only a single GUI Vuser on a Windows based load generator By opening a terminal server session for each GUI Vu
25. gt Trace the application components exercised by business processes gt Rapidly isolate application components that have a significant impact on end user experience gt Provide developers with precise data on how to make performance improvements amp ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Architecture ERP CRM Diagnostics architecture as shown in the diagram below is composed of the following components aie FF BiS SAP Siebel Oracle Servers Controller f Load Generators f fo r a E aril G B Mediator Analysis 383 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 384 gt Mediator The ERP CRM Mediator Mediator gathers and correlates offline transaction data from the Web database and application servers For information on installing the Mediator see the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide For information on how the Mediator connects to remote Windows and UNIX servers see Connecting the Mediator to a Remote Server on page 385 Controller Before scenario execution the Controller transfers all server information to the Mediator and distributes the percentage of users that will participate in the monitoring After scenario execution the Controller collects the aggregated transaction data files from the Mediators and collates the results The files are then transferred to the results directory per diagnostics type as follows gt Siebel results are transferred to the
26. protocol ipAddr port combination otherwise false ListenState Listening if the protocol ipAddr port combination is enabled on the server Not Listening if it is not The server may be listening but not accepting new clients if its server Login Enable state is false In this case existing clients will continue to function but new ones will not Web Application Server Resource Monitoring User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt WebLogic SNMP Resources Dialog Box on page 528 gt Microsoft Active Server Pages Dialog Box on page 528 527 Chapter 28 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring WebLogic SNMP Resources Dialog Box This dialog box lets you select the items to monitor on the WebLogic SNMP application server To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of the WebLogic SNMP dialog box Relevant tasks How to Set Up the WebLogic SNMP Monitoring Environment How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow See also WebLogic SNMP Performance Counters User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Adds the selected object to the list of measurements Add Note The WebLogic SNMP monitor can only monitor up to 25 measurements Explain gt gt Displays a description of the selected object WebLogic SNMP obj
27. Closes open Run Time Viewers gt Show Vuser Log Opens a script log containing run time information for each Vuser in the group The Vuser script log is refreshed by default every 1000 milliseconds gt Hide Vuser Log Closes the Vuser script logs gt Sort By Name Sorts the groups alphabetically by name Done Failed The number of Vusers that have finished running and the script failed 283 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Done Passed The number of Vusers that have finished running and the script passed Down The number of Vusers that have stopped running Error The number of Vusers that encountered problems Check the Status field on the Vuser dialog box or the output window for a complete explanation of the error Exiting The number of Vusers that have finished running or have been stopped and are now exiting Gradual Exiting The number of Vusers that are completing their iterations or actions before exiting as defined in Tools gt Options gt Run Time Settings Initializing The number of Vusers that are being initialized on the remote machine Pending The number of Vusers that are ready to be initialized and are waiting for an available load generator or are transferring files to the load generator Ready The number of Vusers that have already performed the init section of the script and are ready to run Rendezvou
28. Note The new action is added after the action selected in the Actions grid Edit Action Opens the Edit Action dialog box where you can edit the schedule actions For details see Edit Action Dialog Box on page 148 Delete Action Deletes the selected action Move Action Up Moves the selected action up the grid Move Action Down Moves the selected action down the grid 151 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Copy Schedule Settings From Enables copying group schedule settings from one Vuser group to another in the Scenario Groups pane Vuser group schedules only Note Schedule settings copied include the schedule run mode basic or real world and the set of schedule actions Example To copy group_1 s schedule settings to group_2 select group_2 in the Scenario Groups pane Then click this button and select group_1 Script Path C Program Files HP LoadRunner tutorial basic_script Tegan eS a lt Copy scheduling settings from group A aroup_1 E group_2 group_1 idl Scenario Schedule kij 3 ox cont Schedule Name Schedule 1 Schedule by Scenario Group Run Mode Real world schedule Basic schedule Group schedule for group_2 a a e a Total 10 Yusers Action Propetties Start Group Start immediately after the scenario begins In
29. The upper range includes values from the value you entered and on Example If you enter 10 the upper range of values for the load criteria is from 10 and on Selected The measurement selected for the goal Measurement 179 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Time Interval This wizard page enables you to set thresholds for the measurements you are evaluating in your goal Important gt General information about this wizard is available information here Service Level Agreement Wizard on page 174 gt If you defined load criteria in the Set Load Criteria Page you must set thresholds per each of the defined load ranges If you did not define load criteria you set one threshold value For Average Transaction response time you set threshold values for each transaction Wizard map Goal The Service Level Agreement Wizard contains measured per time Welcome gt Select a Measurement Page gt Select interval Transactions Page gt Set Load Criteria Page gt Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Time Interval See also Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description lt Thresholds table gt The thresholds for your goal If you defined load criteria enter thresholds for each range of values Note If the maximum th
30. This only ensures that no Vusers are added to these scripts but it does not change the original Vuser distribution In other words if you were to finish the step now the four Vusers that are assigned to A would be added to the script while the three each assigned to B and C would not though they would still appear under the number column To distribute these six Vusers to A instead you must first change the percentage columns B and C to 0 Percentage mode Enter the percentage of Vusers to be distributed to each Vuser script Indicates the number of Vusers distributed to each script 281 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Distribute x Vusers among the checked scripts Percentage mode Enter the number of Vusers to be distributed The Vusers will be distributed according to the values you entered in the percentage column Load Generators The load generators assigned to the Vuser group script If you select multiple load generators for a group script the Vusers assigned to the Vuser group script are distributed evenly among the load generators Default value in Percentage mode All Load Generators Note To add a load generator to the list select Add from the list For more details see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 Scenario Groups Pane This pane enables you to monitor
31. To access Tools gt Options gt Output tab Important This tab is available only when the Controller is information operating in Expert mode 229 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Relevant tasks How to Configure Scenario Options on page 216 See also Output Window on page 271 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Defaults Sets the default output options Configuration of the Show Vuser operation Specifies how to handle the Vuser logs gt Max simultaneously displayed The maximum number of Vuser logs that may be displayed simultaneously as well as the maximum number of active UNIX GUI RTE or Web Vusers that the Controller should display by opening up Run Time Viewers on your machine Default value 10 gt Refresh timeout milliseconds How often the Vuser log should be refreshed Default value Every 1000 milliseconds Delete Output window messages upon Reset When selected clears all messages in the Output window when you reset a scenario Options gt Path Translation Tab This tab enables you to perform path translation when storing result and script files on a shared network drive To access Tools gt Options gt Path Translation tab Relevant tasks How to Configure Scenario Options on page 216 See also gt Run Time File Storage Locations on page 213 gt
32. To monitor an Apache server through a firewall use the Web server port by default port 80 Server Properties URL Server statistics information URL To verify the statistics information URL try to view it through the browser using the following format http lt server_name IP address gt lt port_number gt server status auto For example http stimpy 80 server status auto Format Enter the server statistics information URL without the server name Default value server status auto Note The default port number and URL can vary from one server to another Please consult your Web server administrator 518 MS IIS Dialog Box Chapter 27 Web Server Resource Monitoring This dialog box enables you to configure the measurements for the MS IIS monitor To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of MS IIS dialog Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Add Counters Adds the selected measurement to the list of measurements in the Measurements on lt machine gt section of the MS IIS dialog box Select a resource counter to monitor Select multiple counters using the CTRL key For a definition of each counter click Explain Instances If multiple instances of the selected counter
33. book_flight and search_flight 2 Start the SLA wizard In the Service Level Agreement pane click New to open the Service Level Agreement wizard Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements 3 Select the measurement for the SLA On the Select a Measurement page under SLA status determined at time intervals over a timeline select Average Transaction Response Time 4 Select the transactions to evaluate in your goal On the Select a Transaction page select the transactions to be evaluated book_flight and search_flight Available Transactions Selected Transactions H book_flight check_itinerary search_flight logoff logon vuser_end_Transaction vuser_init_Transaction lt Remove Add gt ie 5 Select a load criterion and define appropriate ranges of load optional On the Select Load Criteria page select the load criterion to take into account when evaluating the average transaction response time In this case to see the effect that various quantities of Vusers running on the system has on the average transaction response time of each transaction in the Load Criteria box select Running Vusers Then set the value ranges for the running Vusers Consider less than 20 Vusers to be a light load 20 50 Vusers an average load and 50 Vusers or more a heavy load Enter these values in the Load Values boxes 167 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Note gt You can set up to three in between ranges
34. gt If an enabled load generator is unavailable for a particular scenario run you can exclude it temporarily instead of removing it entirely from your list of load generators gt You can disable load generators to isolate a specific machine to test its performance Name The name of the load generator Platform The platform on which the load generator is installed Temporary directory The location on the load generator where the Controller can store temporary files Default If left empty during a scenario run LoadRunner stores temporary files on the load generator in a temporary directory specified by the load generator s TEMP or TMP environment variables Load Generator Configuration Tabs UI Elements A Z Description Connection Log tab Load Generator Information dialog box only Displays the standard output and standard errors generated as the Controller connects to the selected UNIX load generator You can change the command that the Controller sends to the remote bridge in order to connect to the load generator See Load Generator Configuration gt Connection Log Tab on page 111 Note Available in Expert mode only Run Time File Storage tab Enables you to specify the result directory for the performance data that LoadRunner gathers from each load generator during a scenario See Load Generator Configuration gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 112
35. i Details Opens the Goal Details dialog box which displays a summary of the details of the selected SLA Edit Opens the Service Level Agreement wizard where you can modify the goals defined in the SLA Delete EE E Advanced Deletes the selected SLA Opens the Advanced Options dialog box where you can adjust the tracking period for measurements that are evaluated per time interval over a timeline For more information see Tracking Period on page 163 For user interface details see Advanced Options Dialog Box on page 171 Service Level Agreement list Lists the SLAs defined for the scenario 173 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Service Level Agreement Wizard 174 This wizard enables you to define goals or service level agreements SLAs for your load test scenario To access Design tab gt Service Level Agreement pane gt New Important There are two modes for the Service Level Agreement information wizard The pages included in the wizard depend on the measurement that is selected See the wizard maps below Relevant tasks gt How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 gt gt How to Define Service Level Agreements on page 164 gt How to Define Service Level Agreements Use Case Scenario on page 166 Wizard map Goal measured per time interval The Service Le
36. lt component name gt change evtloglvl EventContext 0 for comp lt component name gt change evtloglvl ObjMgrSessionInfo 0 for comp lt component name gt gt How to Enable Logging on the Oracle Server This task describes how to enable logging on the Oracle server This task includes the following steps gt Verify that the trace diagnostics are enabled on page 409 gt Set the trace file size to unlimited on page 410 1 Verify that the trace diagnostics are enabled Perform the following steps Log on to the Oracle application server with administrator privileges and select the desired module in the Oracle application The Responsibilities dialog box opens Select System Administrator and click OK In the Functions tab select Profile gt System and click Open The System Profile Values dialog box opens In the Display section select Site and Profiles with No Values enter Diagnostics in the Profiles field and then click Find If any diagnostics profiles are disabled denoted by a Yes in the Site column change the setting to No Save your settings 409 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 2 Set the trace file size to unlimited For Oracle 9i On the Oracle server run the following command in the SQL editor Alter system set max_dump_file_size UNLIMITED scope both For Oracle 8i a On the Oracle server run the following command in the SQL editor Alter system se
37. on page 216 gt How to Prepare a Scenario to Run on page 238 See also Run Time File Storage Locations on page 213 231 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Scripts and results Select one of the following options stored gt On the current Vuser machine Saves the run time files on the load generator that is running the Vuser script Note If you select this option you must collate the results before you can perform any analysis You can wait for LoadRunner to collate the results when you launch HP LoadRunner Analysis or you can collate results by choosing Results gt Collate Results Alternatively select Results gt Auto Collate Results to automatically collate the results at the end of each scenario run gt On a shared network drive Saves the scenario results and or the Vuser scripts on a shared network drive A shared network drive is a drive to which the Controller and all the load generators in the scenario have read and write permission Note If you select this option you may need to perform path translation Path translation ensures that the specified results directory is recognized by the remote load generator For information about path translation see Path Translation on page 214 Options gt Run Time Settings Tab This tab enables you to specify scenario run time settings rela
38. path name for the Controller so that all participating machines recognize the same network drive Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Example 1 The scenario runs on a Windows based machine and includes multiple Vusers running on both Windows based and UNIX load generators One remote load generator may map the network drive as F while another load generator maps the same drive as H In a complex situation such as this you need to ensure that all participating load generators recognize the same network drive Example 2 The Scenario Groups Scripts pane in the Design view contains a list of all the Vuser scripts associated with a scenario and their locations A script s location path is always based on the Controller machine s mapping of that location If a load generator maps to the script s path using a different name path translation is required For example assume that the scenario is running on a Windows based machine named pc2 and that a Vuser script is located on a network drive The Controller machine maps the network drive as m Ir_tests If the remote load generator hosting the Vusers also maps the path as m Ir_tests no translation is necessary However if the remote machine maps the path as another drive or path for example r lr_tests you must translate the path to enable the load generator to recognize the script location Note If the Controller and load generator machines are all Windows machines
39. see UNIX Environment Variables on page 107 gt Initialization command Command line options for LoadRunner to use when logging in to a UNIX system This initialization command runs as soon as the shell opens Example You could select ksh and use the following initialization command source profile Chapter 5 Load Generators amp Load Generator Configuration gt Vuser Limits Tab This tab enables you to modify the maximum number of GUI RTE and other Vusers that the load generator can run To access Controller toolbar gt E3 gt Add or Details Relevant tasks gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Defaults Resets values to their defaults Available Types The types of Vusers the load generator should run The types of vusers are gt GUI WinRunner gt RTE gt Other Vusers Maximum Active The maximum number of each type of Vuser that the load generator should run Defaults gt GUI WinRunner 1 gt RTE 1000 gt Other Vusers 5000 Note The maximum number of active Vusers that you specify must not exceed the number of Vusers that you are licensed to run To check your Vuser licensing limitations in the LoadRunner launcher window Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt LoadRunner se
40. select Start gt Programs gt Server Monitor gt Monitor Configuration 2 Add Monitored Servers a To add servers click the Add Server button Type the name or IP address of the server whose resources you want to monitor in the Monitored Server field Note To add several servers simultaneously separate the server names or IP ranges with commas For example 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 5 server server2 From the Available Monitors list select the monitors appropriate for the server being monitored Note Data can only be viewed for the monitors that are enabled with your LoadRunner license key To preview your license key information select Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner HP LoadRunner opens Click the License button to display the LoadRunner license information For certain monitors LoadRunner displays default measurements in the Measurements to be Monitored section You can specify the frequency at which LoadRunner reports the measurement in the Measurement Properties section For details on selecting measurements see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 3 Optional Clone a Monitored Server s Properties If you want to monitor the same properties on different server machines you can clone a selected server s properties using the Clone Monitored Server Properties dialog box To clone a monitored server s propert
41. server machine key is the unique key that you chose when configuring the firewall Agent on the server machine Example 12 12 12 3 serverid gt MS IIS monitor To monitor an IIS server through a firewall use TCP port 139 gt Tuxedo or PeopleSoft Tuxedo monitor For multiple instances of the Tuxedo or PeopleSoft Tuxedo monitor on the same machine enter the port number of each monitor to distinguish each instance using the format lt machine name gt lt port number gt gt WebLogic If If the WebLogic SNMP agent is running on a different port than the default SNMP port use the format lt server name gt lt port number gt Platform The platform of the machine you want to monitor 451 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors SiteScope Server Information User interface elements are described below UI Element A Z Description Name The name of the SiteScope server Port The SiteScope port Default 8888 Use Account Select this option to use a specific SiteScope user account Enter the following account details gt Account The SiteScope account name or number gt Username The user name defined to log in to the SiteScope account gt Password The password defined to log in to the SiteScope account Use Secure HTTP Select this to use a Secure HTTP connection Configuring NT Remote Machine Dialog Box This dialog box enables yo
42. the key 6 16 characters long matching the security key on the other hosts with which it needs to communicate Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication Update Security Key Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to update the security key simultaneously on all the hosts To access Host Security Manager gt Update Security Key button Important When you update the security key the information Host Security Manager s master security key is also updated If the update fails on all the hosts the Host Security Manager s master key is not updated Relevant tasks How to Update Host Security Settings Remotely on page 635 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Update Description Updates the security key on all of the hosts Stops updating the hosts Security Key Confirm Security Key Enter the new security key to be updated on all of the hosts and a second time for confirmation Note The key must be 6 16 characters long Update progress Displays the hosts and their status during and after the update 643 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication Update Security Mode Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to update the security mode simultaneously on selected hosts To access Host Security Manager gt Update Security Mode button Relevant tasks How to Update Host Security Settings Remotely on page
43. to Siebel Diagnostics then click Add Relevant tasks How to Configure Siebel Diagnostics on page 389 See also Siebel Configuration Dialog Box on page 420 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description App Server ID The Siebel server ID For information on generating a list of server IDs see Configure the server machine to enable diagnostics on page 392 Domain The Siebel server domain os Select the Siebel server platform Password Passphrase The user password or passphrase Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules UI Elements A Z Description Private Key File The name of the file where the Private Key is stored This can be found on the Mediator If you specify the file name only without a path the configuration automatically looks for the file in the Mediator s lt LoadRunner gt bin directory Server Log Directory Location where the Siebel application saves the log files SARM The log files can be saved in a shared log directory on the Siebel server or in a separate folder Server Name The name of the Siebel server Server Type The Siebel server type Use Secure Shell Select if you are working with a Secure Shell connection User Name The user name of the server where log files are stored Note For Windows platforms the user should have administrator privileges Q Trou
44. 10 Select the load generator in the list and click Connect Disconnect 106 Chapter 5 Load Generators Reference UNIX Environment Variables To work with a load generator in a UNIX environment your UNIX startup configuration file needs to include specific environment variables To set the environment variables users need to add the env csh script to their startup configuration file UNIX Users Startup Configuration File C shell cshre Bourne and Korn shell profile Add the following line in the startup configuration file source lt load generator installation directory gt env csh For example source opt HP HP_LoadGenerator env csh Load Generators User Interface This section includes gt Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 gt Load Generator Configuration gt Connection Log Tab on page 111 gt Load Generator Configuration gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 112 gt Load Generator Configuration gt Run Time Quota Tab on page 113 gt Load Generator Configuration gt Security Tab on page 114 gt Load Generator Configuration gt Status Tab on page 116 107 Chapter 5 Load Generators gt Load Generator Configuration gt Terminal Services Tab on page 116 gt Load Generator Configuration gt UNIX Environment Tab on page 118 gt Load Generator Configuration gt Vuser Limits Tab on page 121 gt Load Generator Configuration gt
45. 3 Login to Project gt Domain The domain that contains the ALM project Only those domains containing projects to which you have permission to connect to are displayed If you are working with a project in versions of TestDirector earlier than version 7 5 the Domain box is not relevant gt Project Enter the ALM project name or select a project from the list Only those projects that you have permission to connect to are displayed gt Login to project on startup This option is only enabled when the Authenticate on startup check box is selected gt Login 3 E3 Logout Logs into and out of e project 345 Chapter 18 e Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management Upload Scenario Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to open a scenario from an ALM project or save a scenario to an ALM project To access File gt Open gt Click HP ALM File gt Save as gt Click HP ALM User interface elements are described below ua UI Elements A Z Description Upload run time files Uploads only the files needed to replay the scenario Does not upload recording snapshot files and other unnecessary files This results in a shorter download time Upload all files Uploads all of the files associated with this scenario This results in a longer upload time 346 Part IV Working with Firewalls 348 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner Thi
46. Application Lifecycle Management Password Password corresponding to the user name TestPath Path to scenario in Application Lifecycle Management database For example TD Subject LoadRunner Scenario1 If path includes blank spaces use quotation marks Testid Test ID used by ALM only ResultCleanName For use with ResultCycle only Example Res1 ResultCycle Application Lifecycle Management cycle For example LR_60_SP1_247 Note The ResultCycle and ResultCleanName arguments are required if you wish to store the results within the Application Lifecycle Management database 651 Chapter 37 Controller Command Line Arguments Run Time Arguments These arguments specify the run time related scenario settings For more information on scenario settings see Before Running Your Scenario on page 237 TestPath Path to the scenario for example C LoadRunner scenario Scenario rs This argument can also be used for a scenario residing in a Application Lifecycle Management database For example TD Subject LoadRunner Scenario1 If the path includes blank spaces use quotation marks Run InvokeAnalysis Runs the scenario dumps all output messages into res_dir output txt and closes Controller Instructs LoadRunner to invoke Analysis upon scenario termination If this argument is not specified LoadRunner uses the scenario default setting ResultName Full results path
47. CPU utilization Percent of time that the CPU is utilized Disk rate Rate of disk transfers Incoming packets error rate Incoming packets rate Errors per second while receiving Ethernet packets Incoming Ethernet packets per second Interrupt rate Number of device interrupts per second Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring Measurement Description Outgoing packets errors rate Errors per second while sending Ethernet packets Outgoing packets rate Outgoing Ethernet packets per second Page in rate Number of pages read to physical memory per second Page out rate Number of pages written to pagefile s and removed from physical memory per second Paging rate Number of pages read to physical memory or written to pagefile s per second Swap in rate Number of processes being swapped Swap out rate Number of processes being swapped System mode CPU utilization Percent of time that the CPU is utilized in system mode User mode CPU utilization Percent of time CPU is utilized in user mode 487 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring Windows Resource Performance Counters 488 The following default measurements are available for Windows machines Object Measurement Description System Total Processor Time The average percentage of time that all the processors on the system are busy execut
48. Controller Load Generator Machine When running Vusers or monitoring applications over a firewall this direct connection is blocked by the firewall The connection cannot be established by the Controller because it does not have permissions to open the firewall e t oll euler gt f of E Load G n ralor Firewall Firewall No connection Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner LoadRunner solves this problem by using a communication configuration based on HTTPS or secured TCP IP This configuration uses the standard SSL port on the firewall port 443 For more information see Set Up Your Deployment TCP or HTTPS on page 357 A LoadRunner agent is installed on load generators running Vusers over a firewall and on Monitor Over Firewall machines that monitor the servers that are located over a firewall The agent communicates with the MI Listener machine through port 443 in the firewall The MI Listener is a component that serves as a router between the Controller and the LoadRunner agent Port r gt 443 rad g Low Controller MI Listener Firewall Load Generator Machine Agent Machine Machine When the LoadRunner agent connects to the MI Listener the MI Listener keeps a listing of the connection to the agent using a symbolic name that the agent passed to it When the Controller connects to the MI Listener it communicates to the MI Listener through port 50500 A Pot F Port
49. Diagnostics Distribution dialog box click Configure by J2EE NET Diagnostics to enable the module For user interface details see J2EE NET Configuration Dialog Box on page 436 Chapter 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics gt How to View J2EE NET Diagnostics Data in LoadRunner During a Scenario Run This task describes how to view diagnostics data for J2EE NET Diagnostics in LoadRunner for the whole scenario or for a specific transaction during a scenario run This task includes the following steps gt View diagnostics data for the whole scenario on page 433 gt View Diagnostics Data for a Specific Transaction on page 433 View diagnostics data for the whole scenario In the Controller select the Diagnostics for J2EE NET tab HP Diagnostics opens displaying the Scenario Summary dashboard view The Scenario Summary dashboard view displays monitoring versions of the transactions server requests load and probe views for the current run Note If you move to another tab during the scenario run and then return to the Diagnostics for J2EE NET tab the last screen that you viewed will be displayed View Diagnostics Data for a Specific Transaction Perform the following steps 1 Select one of the Transaction graphs for example Transaction Response Time to open the graph 2 Right click the relevant transaction in the graph legend and select Show J2EE NET server side HP Diagnostics opens disp
50. Displays the name of the source machine To Machines Displays the names or URLs of the destination machines Network Delay Time Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to select the network path you want to monitor To access Right click the Network Delay Time graph and select Add Measurements This dialog appears only when you add measurements for the first time Important To run the Network monitor you must have information administrator privileges on the source machine unless you are using the ICMP protocol Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Network Monitoring Environment on page 500 506 Chapter 26 e Network Delay Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Monitor the network delay from machine Displays the name of the machine from which network monitoring begins source machine To add a machine click __ 4d and specify the server name or IP address and machine platform Repeat this for each path you want to monitor Important If there is a firewall between the Controller machine and the source machine enter the server name or IP address of the source machine according to the following format lt MI Listener machine gt lt source machine local key gt where where source machine local key is the Local Machine Key that you chose when configuring the LoadRunner agent on the source machine See Agen
51. ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Overview on page 383 gt ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Architecture on page 383 gt Connecting the Mediator to a Remote Server on page 385 gt Siebel and Siebel DB Diagnostics Modules Overview on page 387 gt Oracle 11i Diagnostics Module Overview on page 387 gt SAP Diagnostics Module Overview on page 387 Tasks gt How to Configure Siebel Diagnostics on page 389 gt How to Configure Siebel DB Diagnostics on page 396 gt How to Configure Oracle 11i Diagnostics on page 401 gt How to Configure SAP Diagnostics on page 406 gt How to Enable and Disable Logging on the Siebel Server on page 407 gt How to Enable Logging on the Oracle Server on page 409 gt How to Set and Disable the Oracle Server Diagnostics Password on page 410 gt How to View Diagnostics Results on page 411 Reference gt LoadRunner Diagnostics Modules User Interface on page 413 381 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Troubleshooting and Limitations on page 425 382 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Concepts amp ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Overview During a performance test LoadRunner s diagnostics modules trace time and troubleshoot individual transactions across the Web application and database servers You can drill down from a slow end user transaction all the way to the bottlenecked method or SQL statement The LoadRunner diagnostics modules enable organizations to
52. Elements A Z Description Edit Scenario Goal Opens the Edit Scenario Goal dialog box where you set the goals for the scenario See Edit Scenario Goal Dialog Box on page 78 Goal The defined goal including the type of goal and the expected target Goal Profile Name The name of the goal profile Load Behavior How and when the Controller should reach the defined goal Load Preview graph A graphical representation of the goal and load behavior defined for the scenario Max Number of Vusers The maximum number of Vuser to run in the scenario Min Number of Vusers The minimum number of Vuser to run in the scenario Scenario Duration The amount of time the scenario should continue running after reaching the defined goal 87 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Scenario Groups Scripts Pane Manual Scenarios This pane displays the Vuser groups scripts that were added to the scenario To access Manual Scenario gt Design tab Important gt Vuser group mode The Design tab displays the information Scenario Groups pane where you can define Vuser groups to run Vuser scripts in a scenario It lists all Vuser groups together with their paths as well as the load generators and number of Vusers assigned to each group gt Percentage mode The Design tab displays the Scenario Scripts pane where you can define Vuser scripts to run in a scenario It l
53. Explains how to use HP LoadRunner Controller in an environment that includes firewalls Welcome to This Guide Part V Working with Diagnostics Explains how to use LoadRunner s Diagnostics modules to identify and pinpoint performance problems in Siebel Oracle SAP J2EE and NET environments Part VI Monitoring Load Test Scenarios Explains how to monitor scenario execution using the LoadRunner online monitors Part VII Appendixes Contains additional information about using LoadRunner Who Should Read This Guide This guide is for the following users of HP LoadRunner gt Performance Engineers gt Project Manager This document assumes that you are moderately knowledgeable about enterprise application development and highly skilled in enterprise system and database administration Documentation Library Guides The Documentation Library consists of the following guides and references available online in PDF format or both PDFs can be read and printed using Adobe Reader which can be downloaded from the Adobe Web site http www adobe com Using this Documentation Library explains how to use the Documentation Library and how it is organized Accessing the Documentation You can access the documentation as follows Welcome to This Guide gt From the Start menu click Start gt LoadRunner gt Documentation and select the relevant document gt From the Help menu click Documentation Library to open th
54. For example C Temp Res_01 ResultCleanName Results name For example Res_01 ResultLocation Results directory For example C Temp 652 38 Working with Digital Certificates This chapter includes Concepts gt Digital Certificates Overview on page 654 gt Using Digital Certificates with Firewalls on page 654 Tasks gt Create and Use Digital Certificates on page 656 Chapter 38 Working with Digital Certificates Concepts amp Digital Certificates Overview A Digital Certificate is an electronic credit card that establishes your credentials when doing business or other transactions on the Web It is issued by a Certification Authority CA It contains the IP address of the machine for which it was issued a validation date and the digital signature of the certificate issuing authority amp Using Digital Certificates with Firewalls 654 When the MI Listener sends its Public Key to the LoadRunner agent it always sends its certificate as well this is the server side certificate The LoadRunner agent can be configured to authenticate the certificate which it received as described in Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner on page 349 If the agent is configured to authenticate the certificate it can verify whether the sender is really the machine that it claims to be by gt Comparing the certificate s IP address with the sender s IP address gt Checking the validation
55. HP Software Product Manuals Web site htto h20230 www2 hp com selfsolve manuals Welcome to This Guide 14 Part Introducing HP LoadRunner 16 2 Understanding LoadRunner This chapter includes Concepts gt Application Load Testing Overview on page 18 gt The HP LoadRunner Solution on page 18 gt HP LoadRunner Terminology on page 19 gt The HP LoadRunner Testing Process Overview on page 21 gt HP LoadRunner Vuser Technology on page 23 gt HP LoadRunner Vuser Types on page 23 gt Vuser Technology on page 25 Reference gt Controller Window on page 27 Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner Concepts amp Application Load Testing Overview Modern system architectures are complex While they provide an unprecedented degree of power and flexibility these systems are difficult to test Whereas single user testing focuses primarily on functionality and the user interface of a system component application testing focuses on performance and reliability of an entire system For example a typical application testing scenario might depict 1000 users that log in simultaneously to a system on Monday morning What is the response time of the system Does the system crash To be able to answer these questions and more a complete application performance testing solution must do the following gt Test a system that combines a variety of software applications and hardware platforms gt Determine the su
56. MM SS Run for 00 05 00 HH MM SS Stop all Yusers 5 every 00 00 30 HH MM S5 Vusers 10 D D 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 02 0 For schedule action details see Schedule Actions on page 142 gt For details about how to add actions see How to Add Actions to the Scenario Schedule on page 136 gt For details about how to edit actions see How to Edit Schedule Actions on page 139 133 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios 134 4 Vuser group schedules only Copy a group s schedule settings to other groups optional When scheduling by Vuser group you can copy a Vuser group s schedule settings to other Vuser groups Note Schedule settings copied include the schedule run mode basic or real world and the set of schedule actions Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Example To copy group_1 s schedule settings to group_2 select group_2 in the Scenario Groups pane click Copy Schedule Settings From and select group_1 Script Path C Program Files HP LoadRunner tutorial basic_script Cogn Fis Po Copy scheduling settings from group Jaroup_1 aa Scenario Schedule 2 T a X gt 7 ox E Schedule Name Schedule 1 Schedule by Scenario Group MY group_1 group_2 Run Mode Real world schedule Basic schedule Group schedule for group_2 Dpt e a Total 10 Yusers Action P
57. Note A vertical line indicates that the Vusers start running simultaneously Duration gt To increase the duration between scheduled actions drag the diamond shaped endpoint to the right gt To decrease the duration between scheduled actions drag the diamond shaped endpoint to the left Stop Vusers To change the number of Vusers to stop running gt To stop fewer Vusers drag the diamond shaped endpoint upwards gt To stop more Vusers drag the diamond shaped endpoint downwards Stop Vusers To change the time interval between stopping Vusers gt To increase the time interval drag the diamond shaped endpoint to the right gt To decrease the time interval drag the diamond shaped endpoint to the left Note A vertical line indicates that the Vusers stop running simultaneously Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Tip To fine tune any of the details of the selected action line use the arrow keys on your keyboard or edit the action in the Actions grid 141 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Reference Schedule Actions A scenario schedule contains a series of actions that instruct the scenario when to start running a Vuser group how to initialize Vusers when to start and stop running Vusers and how long to run an action 142 The following sections describe the available schedule actions gt Start Group on page 142 gt Initialize on page 143
58. Options UI Elements A Z Description Run Time Settings tab Enables you to specify scenario run time settings For details see Options gt Run Time Settings Tab on page 232 Timeout tab Enables you to specify timeout values for certain commands related to the load generator For details see Options gt Timeout Tab on page 235 Options gt Debug Information Tab This tab enables you to configure the settings to determine the extent of the trace to be performed during a scenario run Relevant tasks To access Tools gt Options gt Debug Information tab Important gt This tab is available only when the Controller is Information operating in the Expert mode gt The debug information is written to the Output window How to Configure Scenario Options on page 216 See also Output Window on page 271 223 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Defaults Sets the default debug information settings Keep temporary files The LoadRunner Agent and Controller create temporary files that collect information such as the parameter file sent to the Vuser the output compilation file and the configuration file The Agent files are saved in brr folders in the TMP or TEMP directory of the Agent machine The Controller files are saved in Irr folders in the TMP or TEMP direc
59. PuTTY application see Secured Shell PLINK PSCP Connection on page 385 gt Verify that the SSH daemon is running on the UNIX server gt Verify that no output is generated after executing the PuTTY commands 399 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Note You should not generate output from the login profile and cshrc files for example by echo or by any other form including commands that generate output indirectly such as biff Where an existing user generates output that cannot be deleted you should create a new user that does not generate output gt Verify that PuTTY commands are working without generating any errors Type the following at the DOS command prompt under the bin directory of the installation PLINK EXE lt server machine name gt ssh I lt UNIX user login name gt i lt private key full name if used gt pw lt password or passphrase gt lt command gt Example Security Level A PLINK EXE my_unix ssh my_name pw my_password Is Security Level B PLINK EXE my_unix ssh my_name i my_private_key pw Is Security Level C PLINK EXE my_unix ssh I my_name i my_private_key pw my_passphrase Is gt Check the PSCP EXE command as follows PSCP EXE scp r q lt private key full name if used gt pw lt password or passphrase gt lt local file name gt lt UNIX user login name gt lt server machine name gt lt remote file name gt 2 Ena
60. Resets the Add Action dialog box so that you can add another action Available only after clicking Apply when adding an action Apply Adds the defined action to the Actions grid Leaves the Add Action dialog box open in edit mode so that you can make changes to the action you added or add another action 147 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description lt Action details area gt The details of the new action For details about the schedule actions see Schedule Actions on page 142 Action type The type of action to add Edit Action Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to edit schedule actions To access Use one of the following gt Double click an action in the Actions grid or in the interactive graph gt Design tab gt Scenario Schedule pane gt Actions grid Schedule graph gt Edit Action Important gt In the Actions grid you can edit all actions information gt In the interactive graph you can edit Start Stop Vusers and Duration actions only Relevant tasks y How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 How to Edit Schedule Actions on page 139 See also VVVIYV Actions Grid on page 150 Schedule Actions on page 142 Interactive Schedule Graph on page 154 148 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios User interface elements are described below u
61. Resource Monitoring ccsccscssseeeeeeee 513 COMCE PS ETENEE snonsdessavoessssasasasesssssdibbecebecedeneGecesades sss 514 Web Server Resource Monitoring Overview eee cceeeeeeeseeees 514 Table of Contents TASKS svccccccccsnssvsidevecenvencnnevessesnssssseoesseobs IEE SNASTA SIENTES SSNST 515 How to change the Apache default server properties 515 Referente sarno Saas asa aa ia vasa satbe A 516 Apache Performance Counters eesecccesssececeesseeeesseeeeeesseeeeees 516 Microsoft IIS Performance Counters ec eeeseeecessseeeesseeesesseeeeees 516 Web Server Resource Monitoring User Interface 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeee 517 Chapter 27 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring 521 Concepts eoor ttenni a sesuseossecsesasneascencdeaseses 522 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring Overview ee 522 TASKS ccccccsvsussvstsevccusnnvncacveescennsssds osha eovbuebesss sd avedacceeacdsssaaueveceessveveonnnues 523 How to Set Up the WebLogic SNMP Monitoring Environment 523 REPERON CO iicieieis AA subacute seas ees 525 MS Active Server Pages Performance Counte s se eeeeeeeeeseeeeees 525 WebLogic SNMP Performance Counters ce eeeeeeesseeeeeesreeeeeee 525 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring User Interface 527 Chapter 28 Database Resource Monitoring cseccccessereeeeeee 531 CONCEDES oi E ESS SESAR SE ES E ddoeee gt 532 Database Resource Monitoring Overview s
62. Scripts in LoadRunnet 008 CONCEDES sive o E EOSS SESKIS o E a Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner Overview eeessesessssereeereee About GUI Vuser Scripts e seessesesesessssssecsssssssececssssseeeessssssseeereesssee Guidelines for Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunnet How to Add a QuickTest Script to a Load Test Scenario Chapter 17 Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle ManagGeMe nL cccccccsssssssssssssssscccccccssecsessesssseeeeeeseseesssesseesenees CONCEPTS orior PintenedecedevctauccedesoosbsechtissesssevsDecedededsindncadscedensDavedaveresevenss Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Managment OA A CA EA E A RE T A os Sueveseatesteeed How to Work with Scenarios in ALM Projects seeeeeseeesesseerresssss How to Save Scenarios to ALM Projects sseeeesseesssererrrrsssseerrerressssee How to Add Vuser Scripts from a Application Lifecycle Management Projet eene SEa E SEAE R f rence ni nian a e a aaa A Application Lifecycle Management User Interface eeeeeeee Table of Contents PART IV WORKING WITH FIREWALLS Chapter 18 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunnet 00008 349 CONCEDES eases Fe CAS a A T A AARE 350 About Using Firewalls in LoadRunnet ssseeessseeesessesrersssseereeerrsssseeeess 350 Monitors Over a Firewall oo eee ra eeni ea aaa AASS CEAS 353 E A S EE E E E E 355 How to Set Up Your System to Use Firewalls e
63. Select the number of times the monitor should try resending a packet to a node if the packet is not initially returned Default 0 Q Troubleshooting and Limitations 510 This section describes troubleshooting for the Network Delay monitor If monitoring is unsuccessful and LoadRunner cannot locate the source or destination machines make sure that the specified machines are available to your machine Perform a ping operation At the command line prompt type ping server_name To check the entire network path use the trace route utility to verify that the path is valid Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring For Windows type tracert lt server_name gt For UNIX type traceroute lt server_name gt If the monitoring problem persists once you verify that the machines are accessible and that the network path is valid perform the following procedures 1 If you are using the TCP protocol run lt LoadRunner root folder gt bin webtrace exe from the source machine to determine whether the problem is related to the Controller or the WebTrace technology on which the Network Delay monitor is based If you are using the UDP or ICMP protocols the problem must be related to the Controller and not WebTrace since these protocols are not WebTrace technology based 2 If you receive results by running webtrace exe the problem is related to the Controller Verify that the source machine is not a UNIX machine and co
64. Service Level Agreements 176 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description SLA status determined over the whole run Evaluates a single SLA status for the whole scenario run Select one of the following measurements gt Total Hits per run gt Average Hits hits second per run gt Total Throughput bytes per run gt Average Throughput bytes second per run SLA status determined per time intervals over a timeline Evaluates SLA statuses at set time intervals within the run Select one of the following measurements gt Average Transaction Response Time gt Errors per Second The time intervals at which the SLA statuses are evaluated are known as the tracking period For details see Tracking Period on page 163 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Select Transactions Page This wizard page enables you to select transactions to evaluate as part of your goal Important gt General information about this wizard is available information here Service Level Agreement Wizard on page 174 gt This page is displayed only creating an SLA for Average Transaction Response Time gt In order to define an SLA for Average Transaction Response Time at least one of the Vuser scripts participating in the scenario must include a transaction gt You can select multiple transactions using the CTRL key Wizard map Goal measured per time interv
65. SiteScope server can resolve this name into an IP address using a hosts file DNS or WINS DNS integration Password The password for the remote server or the passphrase for the SSH key file Note When using SSH authentication with public private key based authentication enter the passphrase for the identity file here SSH Authentication Method The authentication method to use for SSH connections The currently supported methods are gt Password Authenticate using a password gt Key File Authenticate using public private key authentication When this option is selected SiteScope uses the private key in the file SiteScope groups identity to authenticate The corresponding public key must be listed in the authorized_keys file on the remote host 454 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors UI Element A Z Description SSH Connection Method The method to use for this connection The currently supported methods are gt Internal Java Libraries Connect using the Java SSH client integrated with SiteScope gt Plink Connect using an external SSH client On Windows SiteScope ships with Plink On UNIX or Linux SiteScope uses an installed client such as OpenSSH SSH Port Number The port that the remote SSH server is listening on Default 22 SSH Version 2 Only Select to force SiteScope to use SSH protocol version 2 only This option only applies when us
66. The WAN Emulator allows you to emulate probable WAN effects over your network thereby creating a more realistic scenario The most typical effects which you can configure are Latency The Latency value you define represents the time in milliseconds that it takes an IP packet to cross the WAN This is usually affected by geographical distance the available bandwidth the network load on the route between the two ends and whether this is a terrestrial link or not Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings Packet Loss The Packet Loss value you define represents the chance of losing IP packets while data travels through a WAN Packets can get lost due to link faults or due to extreme network load Bandwidth The Bandwidth value you define represents your network s capacity to transfer data over the WAN CO Emulated Locations Overview To receive more meaningful results you can configure your WAN Emulation to emulate conditions unique to specific geographic locations For example London and New York To view the results for location individually in Analysis you can group the results of the scenario by the emulated location name In other words for any graph in Analysis all the results of the New York based load generators can be grouped together as can all the results of the London based load generators and so on Note In cases where you have to configure more than one load generator per location mak
67. The number of rows inserted into the database as a result of internal activity caused by triggers Chapter 29 e Database Resource Monitoring Measurement Description open_rem_curs The number of remote cursors currently open for this application including those cursors counted by open_rem_curs_blk open_rem_curs_blk The number of remote blocking cursors currently open for this application rej_curs_blk The number of times that a request for an I O block at server was rejected and the request was converted to non blocked I O acc_curs_blk The number of times that a request for an I O block was accepted open_loc_curs The number of local cursors currently open for this application including those cursors counted by open_loc_curs_blk open_loc_curs_blk The number of local blocking cursors currently open for this application static_sql_stmts The number of static SQL statements that were attempted dynamic_sql_stmts The number of dynamic SQL statements that were attempted failed_sql_stmts commit_sql_stmts The number of SQL statements that were attempted but failed The total number of SQL COMMIT statements that have been attempted rollback_sql_stmts The total number of SQL ROLLBACK statements that have been attempted select_sql_stmts The number of SQL SELECT statements that were executed uid_sql_stmts The number o
68. Transaction Start Duration of COM transactions for selected application Rate at which transactions have started Transaction Prepared Rate at which transactions have completed the prepare phase of the two phase protocol Transaction Aborted Rate at which transactions have been aborted Transaction Commit Rate at which transactions have completed the commit protocol Object Events Measurement Description Object Life Time Duration of object existence from instantiation to destruction Object Create Rate at which new instances of this object are created Object Destroy Rate at which instances of the object are destroyed Object Activate Rate of retrieving instances of a new JIT activated object Object Deactivation Rate of freeing JIT activated object via SetComplete or SetAbort 587 Chapter 32 Application Component Monitoring Measurement Description Disable Commit Rate of client calls to DisableCommit on a context DisableCommit declares that the object s transactional updates are inconsistent and can t be committed in their present state Enable Commit Rate of client calls to EnableCommit on a context EnableCommit declares that the current object s work is not necessarily finished but that its transactional updates are consistent and could be committed in their present form Set Complete Set Ab
69. Vv Start Vusers on page 144 y Duration on page 145 y Stop Vusers on page 146 Start Group The Start Group action defines when to start running a Vuser group Options Description Start immediately after the scenario begins Default LoadRunner starts running the Vuser group as soon as the scenario starts running Start lt 00 00 00 gt HH MM SS after the scenario begins After the scenario starts ranning LoadRunner waits the specified time in hours minutes and seconds before it starts running the Vuser group Start when group lt group name gt finishes LoadRunner starts running the Vuser group immediately after the Vuser group specified in this option has finished running Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Note gt The Start Group action is available for group schedules only and always appears as each group s first schedule action gt The Start Group action is always followed by the Initialize action gt The Start Group action cannot be deleted Initialize The Initialize action instructs LoadRunner to prepare the Vusers so that they are in the Ready state and can run Options Description Initialize all Vusers simultaneously LoadRunner initializes all the Vusers together before running them Initialize XX Vusers every LoadRunner initializes the specified lt 00 00 00 gt HH MM SS number of Vusers gradually according
70. a Measurement Page gt Select Transactions Page gt Set Load Criteria Page gt Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Time Interval See also Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Load Criteria The relevant load criteria that you want to use Example If you want to see the impact of running Vusers on the measurement select Running Vusers To define an SLA without load criteria select None Load Values Valid load value ranges are consecutive there are no gaps in the range and span all values from zero to infinity gt Less than Enter the upper value for the lower range of values for the load criteria The lower range is between 0 and the value you entered It does not include the upper value Example If you enter 5 the lower range of values for the load criteria is between O and 5 but does not include 5 gt Between The in between range of values for the load criteria Enter lower and upper values for this range The lower range is included in this range it does not include the upper value Example If you enter 5 and 10 the in between range of values for the load criteria is from 5 and up to but not including 10 Note You can set up to three in between ranges gt Greater than Enter the lower value for the upper range of values for the load criteria
71. a UNIX Load Generator Without Using RSH This task describes how to connect to a UNIX load generator without using RSH 1 On the UNIX load generator make sure that the agent daemon m_agent_daemon is running If not launch it by running the following command from lt load generator installation directory gt bin m_daemon_setup install If successful you will receive the following message m_agent_daemon lt process ID gt The agent now keeps running even if the user is logged off It only stops running if you run the command explained below or if you reboot the machine Note If you look at the log file m_agent_daemon xxx log in the temp directory you may see communication errors even if the installation succeeded These messages appear because the LoadRunner agent always tries to open Port 443 because any agent can be an MI Listener and the MI Listener always listens to this port and in UNIX machines this port cannot be opened by any user except for the root user However this does not interfere with using this agent for the load generator 2 In the Controller in the Load Generator Information dialog box gt UNIX Environment tab select the Don t use RSH option Connect as usual 104 Chapter 5 Load Generators For details see Load Generator Configuration gt UNIX Environment Tab on page 118 To stop the agent daemon gt Run the following command from the lt LR_root gt bin directory m_dae
72. and a client named bankapp The logon user name was PS and the password was PS Logon LogonServername psft1 7000 LogonUsrName PS LogonCltName bankapp LogonGrpName LogonPasswd PS LogonData amp Middleware Performance Monitoring User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order Add Tuxedo Measurements Dialog Box This dialog box allows you to select the resources to monitor on the Tuxedo client To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of Tuxedo dialog Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow See also Tuxedo Performance Counters Chapter 34 e Middleware Performance Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Add Adds the selected measurement to the list of measurements in the Measurements on lt machine gt section of the Tuxedo dialog box Counters Select a resource counter to monitor Select multiple counters using the CTRL key For a definition of each counter click Explain Instances Object If multiple instances of the selected counter are running select one or more instances to monitor for the selected counter Select the object being monitored on the specified machine MQ Monitor Add Measurements Dialog Box This dialog box enables you toconfigure the monitor by choosing which measurements to monit
73. and the same office network has a constant background load of 50 users performing various word processing and printing tasks You could create a LoadRunner scenario with 200 virtual users signing in to the accounting database and check the server response time To check how background load affects the response time you could run your scenario on a network where you also simulate the load of employees performing word processing and printing activities Examine task distribution In addition to defining the common user tasks examine the distribution of these tasks Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Example Suppose the bank uses a central database to serve clients across many states and time zones The 250 application clients are located in two different time zones all connecting to the same Web server There are 150 in Chicago and 100 in Detroit Each begins their business day at 9 00 AM but since they are in different time zones there should never be more than 150 users signing in at any given time You can analyze task distribution to determine when there is peak database activity and which activities typically occur during peak load time gt How to Define the Load Test Objectives This task describes how to define the load test objectives as part of the load test planning process This task includes the following steps gt Decide on general objectives on page 43 gt State the objectives in measurable ter
74. and uses the Server s resources as if they were local to the client machine 606 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring gt Specify the connection information and measurements in the MQ Monitor Add Measurements dialog For user interface details see MQ Monitor Add Measurements Dialog Box on page 616 607 Chapter 34 e Middleware Performance Monitoring Reference IBM WebSphere MQ Performance Counters The following tables list the available IBM WebSphere MQ monitor measurements Queue Performance Counters The following table describes the Queue Performance counters Measurement Description Event Queue Depth High events per second An event triggered when the queue depth reaches the configured maximum depth Event Queue Depth Low events per second An event triggered when the queue depth reaches the configured minimum depth Event Queue Full events per second An event triggered when an attempt is made to put a message on a queue that is full Event Queue Service Interval High events per second An event triggered when no messages are put to or retrieved from a queue within the timeout threshold Event Queue Service Interval OK events per second An event triggered when a message has been put to or retrieved from a queue within the timeout threshold Status Current Depth Current count of messages on a local queue This measurem
75. and you should contact the HP Software Support Web site www hp com go hpsoftwaresupport for further help If you cannot run the command from the DOS command prompt either then contact your UNIX administrator for further assistance For more information about RSH commands see UNIX Shell on page 507 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Error SSH Command Failed Solution Run the same command from the DOS command prompt to determine if it is a problem with the command or with LoadRunner If it runs at the DOS command prompt the command is valid and you should contact the HP Software Support Web site www hp com go hpsoftwaresupport for further help If you cannot run this command from the DOS command prompt either then contact your UNIX administrator for further assistance 427 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 428 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics This chapter includes Concepts gt J2EE NET Diagnostics Overview on page 430 gt Monitoring Server Requests on page 430 Tasks gt How to Specify J2EE NET Diagnostics Server Details in the Launcher on page 431 gt How to Configure a LoadRunner Scenario to use J2EE NET Diagnostics on page 432 gt How to View J2EE NET Diagnostics Data in LoadRunner During a Scenario Run on page 433 gt How to View Offline J2EE NET Diagnostics Results on page 434 Reference gt LoadRunner J2EE NET Diagnostics Module User Int
76. are primed with a connection to a DRDA database but are inactive num_gw_conn_switches The number of times that an agent from the agents pool was primed with a connection and was stolen for use with a different DRDA database sort_heap_allocated The total number of allocated pages of sort heap space for all sorts at the level chosen and at the time the snapshot was taken post_threshold_sorts The number of sorts that have requested heaps after the sort heap threshold has been reached 539 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring 540 Measurement Description piped_sorts_requested The number of piped sorts that have been requested piped_sorts_accepted The number of piped sorts that have been accepted Database The following table lists the Database counters Measurement Description appls_cur_cons Indicates the number of applications that are currently connected to the database appls_in_db2 total_sec_cons Indicates the number of applications that are currently connected to the database and for which the database manager is currently processing a request The number of connections made by a sub agent to the database at the node num_assoc_agents At the application level this is the number of sub agents associated with an application At the database level it is the number of sub agents for all applications sort_heap_al
77. are running select one or more instances to monitor for the selected counter Object Select the Web Service object being monitored on the specified machine 519 Chapter 27 Web Server Resource Monitoring 520 28 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Web Application Server Resource Monitoring Overview on page 522 Tasks gt How to Set Up the WebLogic SNMP Monitoring Environment on page 523 Reference gt MS Active Server Pages Performance Counters on page 525 gt WebLogic SNMP Performance Counters on page 525 gt Web Application Server Resource Monitoring User Interface on page 527 521 Chapter 28 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring Concepts amp Web Application Server Resource Monitoring Overview You use LoadRunner s Web Application Server Resource monitors to monitor Microsoft Active Server Pages and Weblogic SNMP Web application servers during a scenario run and isolate application server performance bottlenecks gt The Microsoft Active Server Pages ASP monitor displays statistics about the resource usage on the ASP server during the scenario run gt The WebLogic SNMP monitor displays statistics about the resource usage on the WebLogic SNMP server version 6 0 and earlier during the scenario run The WebLogic SNMP monitor uses SNMP to retrieve server statistics 522 Chapter 28 Web Application Server Re
78. are working on a UNIX platform use the gen_ca_cert utility instead To create the CA perform the following steps a Run the gen_ca_cert utility from the lt LoadRunner root folder gt launch_service bin directory b Run the gen_ca_cert command with at least one of the following options gt country_name gt organization name gt common_name This process creates two files in the directory from which the utility was run the CA Certificate cacert cer and the CA Private Key capvk cer To provide different file names use the CA_cert_file_name and the CA_pk_file_name options respectively Chapter 38 Working with Digital Certificates Note By default the CA is valid for three years from when it is generated To change the validation dates use the nb_time beginning of validity and or na_time end of validity options The following example creates two files ca_igloo_cert cer and ca_igloo_pk cer in the current directory M E WINNTASystem32 cemd exe cert cuowiteyouanwe Nureth Pule uryganizatiuniawe Tyluu Makers commun ICL Ch_cert_file_name ca_igloo_cert cer Ch_ph_filc_namc ca_igloo_pki nh_tine 1AAA72A1 naA_time 1171172811 Dune In install the ertiticate use this will anve the ald certificate SFile Name tu install gen ra rert install_add lt File Mane tn install gt c Install the CA using one of the following options gt install lt name
79. box is read only while a scenario is running information Relevant tasks How to Configure a LoadRunner Scenario to use J2EE NET Diagnostics on page 432 See also J2EE amp NET Diagnostics Graphs in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide Chapter 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Enable J2EE NET Diagnostics Enables J2EE NET Diagnostics and allows you to configure the J2EE NET Diagnostics settings Select probes table Q Selects a probe for monitoring At least one probe must be selected Clear the check box to disable a probe for the duration of the scenario Name The name of the probe Group The probe group Host Name The host the probe is running on or the application server on which the probe is installed la Note If you upgraded your Diagnostics installation probes from existing scenarios may appear with a red status Clear any probes that appear in red There is a firewall between the Mediator and the Controller Select if the Diagnostics server or a Diagnostics server in Mediator mode in a distributed environment is located behind a firewall Note If there is a firewall between the LoadRunner Controller and the Diagnostics Server involved in a load test you must configure the Controller and the Diagnostics Server to use the MI Listener to enable the transfer of the offli
80. boxes contain additional options for fine tuning the Controller operation To activate the Expert mode select Tools gt Expert Mode To deactivate Expert mode select Tools and clear the Expert Mode option Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options amp Run Time File Storage Locations When you run a scenario by default the run time files are stored locally on each load generator the machine running the Vuser script The default location of the files is in the temporary directory specified by the load generator s environment variables on Windows TEMP or TMP and on UNIX TMPDIR or TMP If no environment variable is defined the files are saved to the tmp directory Alternatively you can store the run time files on a shared network A shared network drive is a drive to which the Controller and all the load generators in the scenario have read and write permission If you select to save run time files on a shared network drive you may need to perform path translation Path translation ensures that the specified results directory is recognized by the remote load generator For details about path translation see Path Translation on page 214 You select where to store run time files in the Tools gt Options gt Run Time File Storage tab For details see Options gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 231 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options The primary run time files are as follows Run Time File Type Desc
81. by splitting an action in two 1 Make sure that the graph is in Edit mode 2 Select the line that represents the action that you want to split Tip Selecting the action in the Actions grid highlights the corresponding line in the graph Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios 3 Click the Split Action button The selected line splits in two In the Actions grid the original action splits into two equivalent actions each representing half of the original action For example ci gt Splitting a Duration action of 5 minutes results in two Duration actions of 2 5 minutes each gt Splitting a Start Vusers action that starts 20 Vusers results in two Start Vusers actions each starting 10 Vusers 4 Optional Edit each of the actions For details see How to Edit Schedule Actions on page 139 To append an action after the last action 1 Make sure that the graph is in Edit mode 2 In the graph toolbar click New Action as 3 Append new actions as follows gt Start Vusers action Click the graph anywhere above and to the right of the endpoint of the last line of the graph For example Example of Appending a Start Vusers Action From the Schedule Graph e sas AAR y BE 2 FARR 4 Interactive Schedule Gmph Interactive Schedule Graph Click above and to the right of Appended Start Vusers action the end point of the last action gt Duration action Click the graph anywhere directly to the
82. counter you selected into the res_mon dft file e Count the number of new counters in the res_mon dft file and update the ListCount parameter with this number Improve the level of measurement information Optional You can improve the level of measurement information for the SNMP iPlanet SNMP or Check Point FireWall 1 monitor by enabling Measurements with string values to be listed in addition to measurements with numeric values and by enabling the name modifier which displays the string value as an identifying part of the Measurement name In the following example of a measurement using the name modifier the string value of ProcessName sched is displayed in addition to its instance ID 0 5 pge psProcessName 0 sched B 1 init D 2 pageout To enable this feature add the following line to the snmp cfg file in the LoadRunner dat monitors directory SNMP_show_string_nodes 1 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors Note You can select more than one name modifier but the first in the hierarchy will be used Each time the SNMP Add Measurements dialog box opens the information is reread from the snmp cfg file You cannot add the same measurement twice once with a name modifier and once without it If you do so an error message is issued You can modify the list of resources that you want to monitor at any point during the scenario run A scenario does not have to be active in order for you
83. current scenario setting or no more that 100 Vusers To enable and configure Siebel Diagnostics click Configure For user interface details see Siebel Configuration Dialog Box on page 420 Siebel DB Diagnostics Web Page Diagnostics Generates offline Siebel DB Diagnostics graphs The maximum percentage of Vusers for which Siebel DB Diagnostics data can be collected is 10 of the amount of Vusers selected in the For X of all the relevant Vusers in the current scenario setting To enable and configure Siebel DB Diagnostics click Configure For user interface details see Siebel DB Configuration Dialog Box on page 422 Generates offline Web Page Diagnostics graphs The maximum percentage of Vusers for which diagnostics data can be collected is 10 Default Enabled See also Web Resource Graphs in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Oracle 11i Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to set up the Oracle 11i Diagnostics module to communicate with the Mediator To access Select Diagnostics gt Configuration Click Configure next to Oracle 11i Diagnostics Relevant tasks How to Configure Oracle 11i Diagnostics on page 401 See also gt Oracle 11i Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 418 gt Oracle 11i Diagnostics Graphs in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide User interface elemen
84. database servers For more information see the HP Diagnostics User Guide Application Component Monitors Measures statistics related to the Microsoft COM server during a scenario run For more information see Application Component Monitoring on page 583 Application Deployment Solutions Monitors Measures statistics related to the Citrix MetaFrame XP server during a scenario run For more information see Application Deployment Solution Monitoring on page 589 Middleware Performance Monitors Measure statistics related to the Tuxedo and IBM WebSphere MQ servers during a scenario run For more information see Middleware Performance Monitoring on page 601 449 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors Infrastructure Resources Displays information about network client data Monitor points during a scenario run using the Network Cli ent graph For more information see Infrastructure Resources Monitoring on page 621 Security Monitor Displays information about simulated attacks on the server during a scenario run using the Distributed Denial of Service graph For more information see Part VII Appendixes Configuring Monitors User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Add Machine Dialog Box on page 450 gt Configuring NT Remote Machine Dialog Box on page 452 gt Configuring Unix Remote Machine Dialog Box on page 455 gt lt Mo
85. details see How to Configure Security Settings Locally on Hosts on page 633 629 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication After initial security configuration you can update security settings locally or simultaneously across all the hosts in the LoadRunner system from a remote location using the HP Host Security Manager utility This utility is installed on the same machine as the Controller For details see How to Update Host Security Settings Remotely on page 635 amp Remote Security Configuration 630 You can align security settings across all the hosts in LoadRunner simultaneously from a remote location using HP Host Security Manager The utility lists all the hosts in LoadRunner as well as the MI Listeners required to connect to the hosts that are over a firewall where applicable Using Host Security Manager you can update the security key on all the hosts or update the security mode on selected hosts For details see How to Update Host Security Settings Remotely on page 635 This section also includes gt Master Security Key on page 630 gt Considerations for Updating UNIX Load Generators on page 631 Master Security Key To update security settings on the hosts Host Security Manager uses a master key that matches the security keys on all the hosts This enables secure communication between Host Security Manager and the hosts for the purpose of remotely updating the security settings If the mas
86. distributing Vusers on a terminal server Services Agent Configuration Settings Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to define the relevant settings in order to enable the LoadRunner agent on Windows machines To access Run Agent Configuration from Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Advanced Settings gt Settings Relevant tasks How to Configure the LoadRunner Agent on Each Monitor Over Firewall Machine on page 362 See also Agent Configuration Dialog Box on page 368 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Connection Timeout The length of time you want the agent to wait before seconds retrying to connect to the MI Listener machine If zero the connection is kept open from the time the agent is run Default value 20 seconds Connection Type The user s domain if defined in the proxy server HTTP Proxy Domain configuration This option is required only if NTLM is used 369 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 370 UI Elements A Z Description Connection Type HTTP Proxy Names The name of the proxy server This field is mandatory if the Connection Type setting is HTTP Connection Type HTTP Proxy Password The password of the user with connection rights to the proxy server Connection Type HTTP Proxy Port The proxy server connection port This field is mandator
87. does not include File Control Operations 593 Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring 594 Measurement Description Interrupts sec The average number of hardware interrupts the processor receives and services per second It does not include DPCs which are counted separately This value is an indirect indicator of the activity of devices that generate interrupts such as the system clock the mouse disk drivers data communication lines network interface cards and other peripheral devices These devices normally interrupt the processor when they have completed a task or require attention Normal thread execution is suspended during interrupts Most system clocks interrupt the processor every 10 milliseconds creating a background of interrupt activity This counter displays the difference between the values observed in the last two samples divided by the duration of the sample interval Output Session Line Speed This value represents the line speed from server to client for a session in bps Input Session Line Speed Page Faults sec This value represents the line speed from client to server for a session in bps A count of the Page Faults in the processor A page fault occurs when a process refers to a virtual memory page that is not in its Working Set in main memory A Page Fault will not cause the page to be fetched from disk if that page is on the standby list an
88. editing the tnsnames ora file in a text editor or using the Oracle service configuration tool for example Start gt Programs gt Oracle for Windows NT gt Oracle Net8 Easy Config gt anew service name TNS name for the Oracle instance gt TCP protocol gt the host name name of monitored server machine gt the port number usually 1521 gt the database SID the default SID is ORCL For example i tnsnames ora of x File Edit Search Help TOPAZ MERCURY COM DESCRIPTION ADDRESS LIST ADDRESS PROTOCOL TCP HOST night PORT 1521 CONNECT DATA SID ORCL Connect to the monitored server machine and verify the connection a Obtain a username and password for the service from your database administrator and ensure that the Controller has database administrator privileges for the Oracle V tables V SESSTAT VSSYSSTAT V STATNAME V INSTANCE V SESSION b Verify connection with the Oracle server by performing tns ping from the Controller machine Note There may be a problem connecting if the Oracle server is behind a DMZ firewall that limits its communication to application servers accessing it Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring c Run SQL Plus from the Controller and attempt to log in to the Oracle server s with the desired username password server combination d Type SELECT FROM V SYSSTAT to verify that you can view the V SYSSTAT table on the Oracle s
89. for the selected counter Object Select the object being monitored on the specified machine 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Middleware Performance Monitoring Overview on page 602 Tasks gt How to Set Up the Tuxedo Monitor on page 603 gt How to Set Up the IBM WebSphere MQ Monitor on page 605 Reference gt IBM WebSphere MQ Performance Counters on page 608 gt IBM WebSphere MQ Queue Attributes on page 611 gt Tuxedo Performance Counters on page 613 gt Tuxedo tpinit ini File on page 615 gt Middleware Performance Monitoring User Interface on page 615 601 Chapter 34 e Middleware Performance Monitoring Concepts amp Middleware Performance Monitoring Overview 602 A primary factor in a transaction s response time is the Middleware performance usage LoadRunner s Middleware Performance monitors provide you with information about the Middleware performance usage of the Tuxedo and IBM WebSphere MQ servers during a scenario execution To obtain performance data you need to activate the online monitor for the server and specify which resources you want to measure before executing the scenario gt The Tuxedo monitor allows you to measure and view your Tuxedo server performance It provides information about the host machine workstation handler and queue in a Tuxedo system To run the Tuxedo monitor you must install the Tuxedo client libraries
90. for your load test scenario When you run the scenario LoadRunner gathers and stores performance related data When you analyze the run Analysis compares this data against the SLAs and determines SLA statuses for the defined measurements For more information see Service Level Agreements on page 161 Changing Scenario Modes You can convert a scenario from the Vuser group mode to the percentage mode and vice versa The following table describes what happens to the scenario when converting from the one mode to the other Vuser group mode to gt If a Vuser group contains multiple scripts in percentage mode percentage mode the scripts are listed one by one in the Scenario Scripts pane gt In the percentage mode all load generators are assigned to all Vuser scripts by default If multiple load generators are assigned to a Vuser group the Vusers assigned to the scripts in the percentage mode are distributed evenly among the load generators originally assigned to the group If you defined group schedules for the Vuser groups these settings will be lost All profiles will contain schedule by scenario settings only For details about scheduling scenarios see Scheduling Manual Scenarios on page 127 Percentage mode to Vuser gt Each script is converted to a Vuser group group mode gt If you defined multiple load generators for a Vuser script the Vuser group that is created when converting the scenario will also cont
91. gradually and you can specify start running at a time how how long they should run long to run the Vusers and before stopping how many Vusers to stop running at a time Group Each participating Vuser group Each participating Vuser group Not runs according to its own runs according to its own applicable defined schedule that emulates schedule each according to its when a true to life schedule of events own run time settings For each viewing for that Vuser group You can Vuser group you can schedule scenarioin schedule when to start how many Vusers in the group Percentage running the Vuser group how to start and stop running mode many Vusers to run at a time simultaneously or gradually how long to run the Vusers and how many Vusers to stop running at a time and you can specify how long they should run before stopping 131 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Tasks How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow 132 This task describes how to define a schedule for a scenario This task includes the following steps gt gt gt gt Prerequisite on page 132 Define the schedule on page 132 Define actions for the schedule on page 133 Vuser group schedules only Copy a group s schedule settings to other groups optional on page 134 Schedule a start time for the scenario optional on page 135 Prerequisite Make sure that a scenario is open or create a new
92. gt Monitor Over Firewall component Used to monitor the servers that are located over a firewall You install the Monitors over Firewall component on a dedicated machine For installation instructions refer to the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide For information about configuring the Monitor Over Firewall machine see How to Configure Monitors Over a Firewall on page 365 b Perform the initial configuration of the over firewall system See How to Configure the Over Firewall System on page 357 2 Set Up Your System to Run Vusers Over the Firewall Note Before configuring your system to run Vusers over a firewall make sure that you have completed the steps described in How to Configure the Over Firewall System on page 357 To set up your system to run Vusers over a firewall you configure the LoadRunner agent to communicate with the MI Listener on each load generator machine that will be running over the firewall For more information see Configure the LoadRunner Agent on Each Monitor Over Firewall Machine on page 361 You then configure the Controller to recognize the load generator and MI Listener machines For more information see Configure the Controller for Running Over a Firewall on page 361 3 4 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner Configure Your System to Monitoring Servers Over a Firewall See How to Configure the System to Monitor Servers Over a Firewall on page 361 Check Connect
93. gt Valid load value ranges are consecutive there are no gaps in the range and span all values from zero to infinity Load Criteria Running Vusers X Load Values gt Less thart 20 Iv Between x 20 50 Vv Greater than or equal to 50 6 Set thresholds On the Set Threshold Values page you define the acceptable average transaction response times for the transactions taking into account the defined load criteria In this case define the same threshold values for both transactions as follows for a light load a reasonable average response time can be up to 5 seconds for an average load up to 10 seconds and for a heavy load up to 15 seconds Running Vusers Transaction Name lt 20 220 and lt 50 250 book flight n 5 10 15 search_flight 5 10 15 168 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Tip To define the same thresholds for all the transactions you can type the values in the table nearer the bottom of the Set Threshold Values page and click Apply to all transactions Define a tracking period optional When SLA statuses for a measurement are determined at time intervals over a timeline the frequency of the time intervals is determined by the tracking period This step is optional because an internally calculated tracking period of at least 5 seconds is defined by default You can change the tracking period in the Advanced Options dialog box a_ In the Service Level Agreement p
94. in the graph in two The original action in the Actions grid is split into two equivalent actions each representing half of the original action Examples gt Splitting a Duration action of 5 minutes results in two Duration actions of 2 5 minutes each gt Splitting a Start Vusers action that starts 20 Vusers results in two Start Vusers actions each starting 10 Vusers Note Available when the graph is in Edit mode only See Edit View Mode 7 below Real world schedule only Delete Action Deletes a selected action Note Available when the graph is in Edit mode only See Edit View Mode 7 below A Real world schedule only Edit View Mode Switches the graph display between Edit mode and View mode 155 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios 156 UI Elements A Z Description Pause Pauses the schedule during the scenario run When the schedule is paused the red vertical line that indicates the schedule s progress freezes Note Available only when the scenario is running Resume Resumes a paused schedule When the schedule resumes running the red vertical line continues moving across the graph indicating the schedule s progress Note Available only when the scenario is running Show Selected Group Displays only the group selected in the Scenario Groups pane Note Available for group schedules only Show All Groups Displays all Vuser groups particip
95. includes gt Setting up the Monitoring Environment on page 584 gt Configuring the Microsoft COM Monitor Over a Firewall on page 585 D Setting up the Monitoring Environment To monitor the Microsoft COM server performance you must first install the Microsoft COM Server Monitor Probe on the server machine You can then specify which measurements and resources you want the Microsoft COM monitor to measure You select these counters using the Controller s monitor configuration dialog box Note The data sampling rate for the COM monitor is fixed and cannot be modified using the Controller Tools gt Options gt Monitors dialog For more information on installing the Microsoft COM server add in refer to the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide Chapter 32 Application Component Monitoring D Configuring the Microsoft COM Monitor Over a Firewall Before running the Microsoft COM Monitor over a firewall gt Make sure that the MI Listener is installed on any machine including the Controller machine outside of the firewall Refer to the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide for installation instructions gt Configure the firewall agent on the server machine For details see Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner on page 349 gt Specify the correct connection string on the client machine For details see Add Machine Dialog Box on page 450 585 Chapter 32 Application Component Monitoring Reference
96. is cert cer To provide a different name use the cert_file_name option 658 39 Troubleshooting Online Monitors This chapter includes Concepts gt Troubleshooting Online Monitors Overview on page 660 Reference Troubleshooting and Limitations on page 661 Chapter 39 Troubleshooting Online Monitors Concepts amp Troubleshooting Online Monitors Overview 660 LoadRunner monitors allow you to view the performance of the scenario during execution These troubleshooting tips help solve issues related to connecting to the monitor server machine and issues related to network usage Chapter 39 Troubleshooting Online Monitors Reference Q Troubleshooting and Limitations Troubleshooting Server Machine Connections To monitor resources on a server machine you must be able to connect to that machine If monitoring is unsuccessful and LoadRunner cannot locate the specified server make sure that the specified server is available Perform a ping operation by typing ping lt server_name gt from the Controller machine command line Once you verify that the machine is accessible check this table for 661 Chapter 39 Troubleshooting Online Monitors 662 additional tips on troubleshooting the monitor Problem Solution Cannot monitor a Windows machine on a different domain or access denied To gain administrative privileges to the remote machine perform the following from th
97. is connected J oat gt Connect Instructs the Controller to connect the load generator for the scenario The status of the load jhi Disconnect generator changes from Down to Ready gt Disconnect When the load generator is connected the button automatically changes to Disconnect When clicked the status of the load generator changes to Down Delete Removes the load generator from the list The load generator can be removed when it is disconnected only LQ Details Opens the Load Generator Information dialog box where you can view and modify information about the load generator selected in the list See Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 x Disable Instructs the Controller to disable or enable the load generator When a load generator is disabled its Name Status Platform and Details appear in gray 440 Reset Attempts to reset a failed connection 125 Chapter 5 Load Generators 126 UI Elements A Z Description lt Icons gt The Controller monitors a Windows load generator s CPU usage and automatically stops loading Vusers on a load generator when it becomes overloaded You can monitor the status of a machine s CPU usage as follows The load generator is ready There is a problem with the CPU usage of the load generator a The load generator is overloaded lt Load Generator table gt Displays
98. is located at F LoadRunner to specify that the script user1 is located in F LoadRunner scripts you could type scripts user1 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Note When specifying a relative path you can include standard DOS notation and inside the path as shown in the following example M LR my_tests test usr Vuser Statuses The following table describes the possible statuses of Vusers before during and after a scenario run Status Description Down The Vuser is down Pending The Vuser is ready to be initialized and is waiting for an available load generator or is transferring files to the load generator The Vuser will run when the conditions set in its scheduling attributes are met Initializing The Vuser is being initialized on the remote machine Ready The Vuser already performed the init section of the script and is ready to run Running The Vuser is running The Vuser script is being executed on a load generator Rendezvous The Vuser has arrived at the rendezvous point and is waiting to be released by LoadRunner Done Passed The Vuser has finished running The script passed Done Failed The Vuser has finished running The script failed Error A problem occurred with the Vuser Check the Status field on the Vuser dialog box or the output window for a complete explanation of the error Gradual Exiting The Vuser is completing the it
99. local machine specify a directory in which to store all of the collated results after the scenario run gt If you specified a shared network drive as the file storage method specify the directory to which Vuser groups should write during scenario execution 3 Select the appropriate options for subsequent scenario runs 239 Chapter 12 Before Running Your Scenario Note gt When comparing the results of scenario runs in Analysis the graph displays all the result sets by name For example the image below displays the superimposed results sets of two scenario runs res12 and res15 HE Minimum Average HE Maximum gt You can use HP s Web based test management program HP Application Lifecycle Management to store results to a project For information see Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management on page 337 Specify Scenario Run Time Settings You can instruct LoadRunner to allow an individual Vuser or the Vusers in a group to complete the iterations they are running before stopping to complete the actions they are running before stopping or to stop running immediately For details see Options gt Run Time Settings Tab on page 232 240 Chapter 12 Before Running Your Scenario Set up the monitoring environment optional LoadRunner enables you to view data generated during the scenario run using the online monitors Before the run specify the server machines that the C
100. minimum threshold value for the selected measurement Note If the value of the measurement is lower than this threshold during the run Analysis displays an SLA status of Failed for the entire run 181 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements 182 8 Multiple IP Addresses This chapter includes Concepts gt Multiple IP Addresses Overview on page 184 Tasks gt How to Add IP Addresses to a Load Generator on page 185 gt How to Configuring Multiple IP Addresses on UNIX on page 187 Reference gt IP Wizard on page 190 183 Chapter 8 Multiple IP Addresses Concepts amp Multiple IP Addresses Overview 184 Application servers and network devices use IP addresses to identify clients The application server often caches information about clients coming from the same machine Network routers try to cache source and destination information to optimize throughput If many users have the same IP address both the server and the routers try to optimize Since Vusers on the same load generator have the same IP address server and router optimizations do not reflect real life situations LoadRunner s Multiple IP Address feature enables Vusers running on a single load generator to be identified by many IP addresses The server and router recognize the Vusers as coming from different load generators and as a result the testing environment is more realistic This feature can be implemented on Windows and UNIX pl
101. monitoring a network path Open a New Graph Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to open a new graph To access Important information Use one of the following gt Run tab gt Monitors gt Online Graphs gt Open a New Graph gt Right click a graph and select Open a New Graph The graph selected in the graph display area will be replaced by the added graph Relevant tasks How to Display Online Monitor Graphs on page 291 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Open Graph Opens the selected graph and displays it in the graph tree view Display only graphs containing data Select this option to view only those graphs that contain data To view the entire list of online monitor graphs even those that do not contain data clear this option Graph Description Displays a description of the selected graph Select Graph box Lists the online monitor graphs by category To expand a category node click the Tip Graph names displayed in blue contain data Note You can select only one graph at a time 303 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs Overlay Graphs Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to merge or overlay the results of two graphs from the same scenario into a single graph The merging enables you to compare several different measurements at once For example you can make an overlaid g
102. name myhost3 The above changes will cause the virtual hosts to be configured at boot time 2 You can also directly enable or modify logical hosts configuration by running ifconfig directly on one of the logical hosts using the hme0 n naming scheme ifconfig hme0 1 up ifconfig hme0 1 129 153 76 72 ifconfig hme0 1 down To verify the current configuration use ifconfig a 189 Chapter 8 Multiple IP Addresses Reference amp IP Wizard This wizard enables you to create and save new IP addresses on Windows machines To access Start gt Program Files gt LoadRunner gt Tools gt IP Wizard Important This wizard resides on each load generator It enables you information to create and save new IP addresses on Windows machines The new addresses can be a range of addresses defined by the Internet Assignment Numbers Authority They are for internal use only and cannot connect to the Internet This range of addresses is the default used by the IP Wizard Relevant tasks How to Add IP Addresses to a Load Generator on page 185 IP Wizard Welcome Step 1 of 3 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Create new settings Enables you to define new IP settings on the load generator Load previous settings from file Enables you to use an existing file with IP address settings Restore Original Settings Restores original
103. network delay 497 498 run time 472 system resources 477 transaction 474 Web resources 463 Web server resources 513 monitors over firewall 353 configuring properties 365 multiple IP addresses enabling 226 Network Delay Time graph 508 Network Client graph 310 Network Client monitor 621 network client monitor counters 623 Network Delay destination machines 505 Index Network Delay Time graph 308 Network Monitor 497 Network monitor determining bottlenecks 498 monitoring over a firewall 501 packets 498 network monitor troubleshooting 510 New Monitored Server Properties dialog box 367 o online graphs Available Graphs tree 305 customizing 293 data point 473 exporting to HTML 296 freezing 296 freezing during scenario run 296 line color 301 302 managing 296 merging two graphs 296 304 modifying a measurement scale 302 overlaying 296 show hide lines 302 viewing data offline 290 online monitors changing default counters 446 graphs 290 show hide lines 302 viewing data offline 290 online transaction monitoring graphs 474 Oracle 11i Diagnostics disabling diagnostics password request 411 setting diagnostics password 410 Oracle counters 552 Oracle graph 309 P packets 498 Pages Downloaded per Second graph 306 466 669 Index path translation 214 script path 70 path translation table 219 PeopleSoft Tuxedo graph 310 Percentage mode 53 161 627 converting a scenario to Percentage Mode 55 creating a sce
104. of certificate file gt Replaces any previous CA list and creates a new one that includes this CA only gt install_add lt name of certificate file gt Adds the new CA to the existing CA list Note The install and install_add options install the certificate file only Keep the private key file in a safe place and use it only for issuing certificates 657 Chapter 38 Working with Digital Certificates 2 Create a Digital Certificate Note This step describes how to create a digital certificate using the gen_cert exe utility If you are working on a UNIX platform use the gen_cert utility instead To create a digital certificate perform the following steps a Run the gen_cert utility from the lt LoadRunner root folder gt launch_service bin directory b Run the gen_cert command with at least one of the following options gt country_name gt organization_name gt organization_unit_name gt eMail gt common_name It is important to note the following gt The CA Certificate and the CA Private Key files are necessary for the creation of the certificate By default it is assumed that they are in the current directory and are named cacert cer and capvk cer respectively In any other case use the CA_cert_file_name and CA_pk_file_name options to give the correct files and locations gt The certificate file is created in the directory from which the utility was run By default the file name
105. of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis gt The Transactions per Second Failed Stopped graph shows the number of failed and stopped transactions per second y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis gt The Total Transactions per Second Passed graph shows the total number of completed successful transactions per second y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis Chapter 24 Run Time and Transaction Monitoring Note gt If there are no transactions defined in your Vuser script or if no transactions are being executed no data will be displayed in the online monitor graphs gt To generate Web Page diagnostics for each transaction configure the Diagnostics options from the Controller 475 Chapter 24 e Run Time and Transaction Monitoring 476 25 System Resource Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt System Resource Monitors Overview on page 478 gt Windows Resource Monitoring on page 478 gt UNIX Resource Monitoring on page 479 gt Server Resource Monitoring on page 479 gt SNMP Resource Monitoring on page 480 gt SiteScope Resource Monitoring on page 481 gt Firewall Server Performance Monitoring on page 481 Tasks gt How to Set up the UNIX Monitoring Environment on page 482 Reference gt Check Point FireWall 1 Performance Counters on page 485 gt Server Resources Performance Counters on page 485 gt UNIX Resources
106. of times a buffer pool index page was physically written to disk pool_read_time Provides the total amount of elapsed time spent processing read requests that caused data or index pages to be physically read from disk to buffer pool prefetch_wait_time The time an application spent waiting for an I O server pre fetcher to finish loading pages into the buffer pool pool_data_to_estore The number of buffer pool data pages copied to extended storage pool_index_to_estore The number of buffer pool index pages copied to extended storage pool_data_from_estore The number of buffer pool data pages copied from extended storage pool_index_from_estore direct_reads The number of buffer pool index pages copied from extended storage The number of read operations that do not use the buffer pool direct_writes The number of write operations that do not use the buffer pool direct_read_reqs The number of requests to perform a direct read of one or more sectors of data direct_write_reqs The number of requests to perform a direct write of one or more sectors of data direct_read_time The elapsed time in milliseconds required to perform the direct reads Chapter 29 e Database Resource Monitoring Measurement Description direct_write_time The elapsed time in milliseconds required to perform the direct writes cat_cache_lookups The numb
107. on page 200 gt Emulated Locations Overview on page 201 gt Viewing WAN Emulation Monitors on page 202 gt Excluding Machines from WAN Emulation on page 202 Tasks gt How to Integrate WAN Emulation Into Your Scenario on page 204 Reference gt WAN Emulation Best Practices on page 206 Limitations on page 207 199 Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings Concepts amp WAN Emulation Overview HP LoadRunner is integrated with 3rd party software that enables you to accurately test point to point performance of WAN deployed products under real world network conditions By installing this WAN emulation software on your load generator you can introduce highly probable WAN effects such as latency packet loss and link settings As a result of this your scenario performs the test in a more realistic environment that better represents the actual deployment of your application You can create more meaningful results by configuring several load generators with the same unique set of WAN effects and by giving each set a unique location name for example London When viewing scenario results in Analysis you can group metrics from different load generators according to their location names For information on grouping metrics according to an emulated location name see the section that deals with applying filter and sort criteria to graphs in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide D Typical Network Emulation Settings 200
108. on the local text echo font and keyboard layout channel This is measured in bps Output Licensing Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the licensing channel This is measured in bps Output LPT1 Bandwidth Output LPT2 Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the LPT1 channel This is measured in bps This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the LPT2 channel This is measured in bps Output Management Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the client management channel This is measured in bps Output PN Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the Program Neighborhood channel This is measured in bps Output Printer Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the printer spooler channel This is measured in bps Output Seamless Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the Seamless channel This is measured in bps Output Text Echo Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the local text echo data channel This is measured in bps Output Thinwire Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the Thinwire graphics channel This is measured in bps
109. on the machine you want to monitor gt The IBM WebSphere MQ monitor is used to monitor channel and queue performance counters on an IBM WebSphere MQ version 5 x Server The procedures for selecting monitor measurements and configuring the monitors vary according to server type The following sections contain specific configuration instructions for each server type Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring Tasks gt How to Set Up the Tuxedo Monitor This task describes the working order for setting up the monitoring environment Note If Tuxedo 7 1 or higher is installed on the Controller machine more than one Tuxedo application server can be monitored at a time However if Tuxedo 6 5 or below is installed on the Controller machine only one Tuxedo application server can be monitored at a time This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 603 gt Define the Tuxedo Environment Variables on page 604 gt Check the Workstation Listener WSL Process on page 604 gt Configure the Tuxedo monitor from the Controller on page 604 1 Prerequisites Ensure that a Tuxedo workstation client not a native client is installed on the Controller machine Use a Tuxedo 6 x client if a Tuxedo 6 x server is used and Tuxedo 7 1 or above client if a Tuxedo 7 1 or above server is used If you use a Tuxedo 6 5 or earlier server you can still use a Tuxedo 7 1 or later client to monitor it pro
110. only if the Use Secure Connection option is enabled Default disabled User Secure Connection SSL Check Server Certificates Authenticates the SSL certificates that are sent by the server Select Medium to verify that the server certificate is signed by a trusted Certification Authority Select High to verify that the sender IP matches the certificate information This setting is available only if Use Secure Connection is set to True MI Listener Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to configure the MI Listener To access gt Select Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Advanced Settings gt Run lt LoadRunner root folder gt launch_service bin MILsnConfig exe 371 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 372 Important information gt Before configuring the MI Listener gt Open incoming HTTPs service for port 443 The port settings are set by your system administrator gt Stop the LoadRunner agent on the MI Listener machine by right clicking it s icon in the system tray and selecting Close from the popup menu gt After configuring the MI Listener gt Restart the LoadRunner agent by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop or by selecting Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Make sure that no Web Servers are running on the MI Listener or Monitor over Firewall machine These servers use port 443 and will not allow the access required
111. or message mismatch This is because some of the messages from the Controller may not be reaching the LoadRunner agent To solve this problem you should reduce the network traffic or improve the network bandwidth The following steps may help reduce network traffic gt Click the Run Time Settings button and select the General Log node Clear the Enable logging check box gt Initialize all users before running them Run them only after initialization is completed 665 Chapter 39 Troubleshooting Online Monitors 666 Index A activating rstatd 482 Adobe Reader 6 agent daemon 105 Apache counters 516 Application Deployment Solutions monitors 589 Application Lifecycle Management connecting to 339 managing scenarios with 337 Application Lifecycle Managment managing scenarios 338 Auto Load Analysis 30 Available Graphs tree 305 c Check Point FireWall 1 monitor 481 CheckPoint FireWall 1 graph 308 Citrix MetaFrame graph 310 Citrix monitor dialog 600 collate results manually 251 collating data excluding log files 324 Configure SNMP by MIB dialog 493 Configuring 429 Connections graph 307 468 Connections per Second graph 307 468 Controller running from the command line 649 controller_host 219 controller_path 219 converting a scenario to Percentage mode 55 Data Points graph online 473 Database Server Resource monitors 531 DB2 graph 309 default counter changing 446 Dialog 371 ERP CRM Serve
112. page To print a complete guide access the printer friendly link from the Documentation Library Home page Documentation Library Back You can use your browser s Back function to return to the previously displayed page In most browsers you can right click and select Back from the shortcut menu Using This Located on the lower left corner of each content page Opens this section Glossary Located on the lower left corner of each content page Opens a glossary containing definitions of terms and acronyms Topic Types 10 Note This section applies to the LoadRunner Controller VuGen and Analysis User Guides only Welcome to This Guide The content in the above mentioned LoadRunner guides is organized by topics Three main topic types are in use Concepts Tasks and Reference The topic types are differentiated visually using icons P Topic Type Description Usage Concepts Background descriptive or Learn general information amp conceptual information about what a feature does Tasks Instructional Tasks gt Learn about the overall Step by step guidance to help you work with the application and accomplish your goals Task steps can be with or without numbering gt Numbered steps Tasks that are performed by following each step in consecutive order gt Non numbered steps A list of self contained operations that you can perform in any order workflow of a
113. reliability How to Plan the LoadRunner Implementation 44 This task describes how to plan the LoadRunner implementation as part of the load test planning process This task includes the following steps Yy y y Select Vusers on page 47 Define Vuser activities on page 47 Choose testing hardware software on page 48 Define the scope of performance measurements on page 45 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios 1 Define the scope of performance measurements You can use LoadRunner to measure response time at different points in the application Determine where to run the Vusers and which Vusers to run according to the test objectives gt Measuring end to end response time You can measure the response time that a typical user experiences by running a GUI Vuser at the front end GUI Vusers emulate real users by submitting input to and receiving output from the client application You can run GUI Vusers at the front end to measure the response time across the entire network including a terminal emulator or GUI front end network and server Client Middleware Server gt Measuring network and server response times You can measure network and server response time excluding response time of the GUI front end by running Vusers not GUI on the client machine Vusers emulate client calls to the server without the user interface When you run many Vusers from the client machine you can measure how t
114. scenario execution you must stop the scenario before disabling the monitor or changing its frequency Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options UI Elements A Z Description Server Resource Monitors Configures the behavior of the Server Resource monitors gt Data Sampling Rate The sampling rate is the period of time in seconds between consecutive samples Enter the rate at which LoadRunner samples the scenario for monitoring data If you increase the sampling rate the data is monitored less frequently This setting applies to all graphs Default value 3 seconds Note gt This data sampling rate is applied to all server monitors that are subsequently activated It is not applied to server monitors that have already been activated To apply the new data sampling rate to activated server monitors save your scenario and reopen it gt Each monitor has a different minimum sampling rate If the default sampling rate or the rate set here is less than a monitor s minimum sampling rate the monitor will sample data at intervals of its minimum sampling rate For example the minimum sampling rate for the Oracle Monitor is 10 seconds If the sampling rate is set here at less than 10 seconds the Oracle Monitor will continue to monitor data at 10 second intervals Options gt Output Tab This tab enables you to configure how to display running Vusers on the Controller machine
115. select Configuration gt Diagnostics for J2EE NET Setup Relevant tasks How to Specify J2EE NET Diagnostics Server Details in the Launcher on page 431 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Click to verify that you entered the correct information Test for the Diagnostics Server in Commander mode and that there is connectivity between the server and LoadRunner Login The user name with which you log in to Diagnostics Default admin Note The user name that you specify should have view change and execute privileges For more information about user privileges see the HP Diagnostics Installation and Configuration Guide 435 Chapter 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics UI Elements A Z Description Password Enter the password with which you log in to Diagnostics Default admin Port Enter the port number used by the Diagnostic server in Commander mode Default 2006 Note LoadRunner does not support communication with the Diagnostics Server in Commander mode using HTTPS Server Name Enter the name of the machine that is to host the Diagnostics Server in Commander mode J2EE NET Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to set up the J2EE NET Diagnostics module 436 To access Select Diagnostics gt Configuration Click Configure by J2EE NET Diagnostics Important The dialog
116. selecting the relevant hosts Click Update Security Mode and select a security mode Click Update Host Security Manager attempts to update the security setting on the hosts listed under Update progress As it attempts to update each host it displays the update status Updated or Failed before attempting to update the next host If a host is not updated successfully check for possible reasons You can stop the update process by clicking Stop If there is a mismatch between Host Security Manager s master security key and the host s security key the Update Error dialog box opens prompting you for an appropriate action gt Skip host Skip updating this host gt Establish a secure channel using this key Use a different security key to communicate securely with the host gt Communicate over non secure channel Update the security setting over a non secure channel This action is not recommended especially when updating the host security to secure mode You should rather update the security setting locally on the host see How to Configure Security Settings Locally on Hosts on page 633 To apply the selected action to all similar mismatches select Use this solution with all similar mismatches Note The security key update also updates Host Security Manager s master security key If the update fails on all the hosts the Host Security Manager s master key is not updated Chapter 36 Secure Host Communic
117. server information For user interface details see Siebel DB Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 423 Test Connection Tests the connections between the Siebel DB Diagnostics module and the Mediator Note This does not check the connections to the Siebel servers Enable Firewall Select if the Mediator is over a firewall Enable Siebel DB Diagnostics MI Listener Enables Siebel Diagnostics and allows you to configure the Siebel Diagnostics settings The name full name or IP address of the MI Listener machine if you are monitoring over a firewall 422 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules UI Elements A Z Description Name The name of the Mediator used to collect and process the Siebel Diagnostics data Only one Mediator is supported for each diagnostics module Note If you are using a Mediator that is over a firewall enter the local machine key of the Mediator instead of the Mediator machine name Servers Table gt Server Name The name of the Siebel server gt Platform The platform of the Siebel server gt Log Directory The Siebel server directory where Siebel log files SARM are written Siebel DB Server Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to add Siebel servers and add server information To access Select Diagnostics gt Configuration Click Configure next to Siebel DB Diagnostics then cl
118. task gt Follow the steps listed in a numbered task to complete a task gt Perform independent operations by completing steps in a non numbered task Use case Scenario Tasks Examples of how to perform a task for a specific situation Learn how a task could be performed in a realistic scenario 11 Welcome to This Guide Topic Type Description Usage Reference R General Reference Detailed lists and explanations of reference oriented material Look up a specific piece of reference information relevant to a particular context User Interface Reference Specialized reference topics that describe a particular user interface in detail Selecting Help on this page from the Help menu in the product generally open the user interface topics Look up specific information about what to enter or how to use one or more specific user interface elements such as a window dialog box or wizard Troubleshooting and Limitations Q Troubleshooting and Limitations Specialized reference topics that describe commonly encountered problems and their solutions and list limitations of a feature or product area Additional Online Resources 12 Increase your awareness of important issues before working with a feature or if you encounter usability problems in the software Troubleshooting amp Knowledge Base accesses the Troubleshooting page on the HP Software
119. termination For information on how to invoke the Controller from the command line see Invoke the Controller from the command Line on page 649 For a list of rules relating to invoking the Controller from the command line see Command Line Arguments Rules on page 650 Tasks Chapter 37 Controller Command Line Arguments Invoke the Controller from the command Line This task describes how to invoke the Controller from the command line and enter command line arguments This task includes the following steps gt gt Prerequisite on page 649 Invoke the Controller from the command line and enter the desired command line arguments on page 649 Prerequisite Before invoking the Controller from the command line you should be familiar with the rules relating to command line arguments For details see Command Line Arguments Rules on page 650 Invoke the Controller from the command line and enter the desired command line arguments Type wlrun in the command line followed by the desired arguments Notes gt The arguments are case sensitive gt Each argument should be preceded by a dash Example wirun TestPath C LoadRunner scenario Scenario Irs Run 649 Chapter 37 Controller Command Line Arguments Reference Command Line Arguments Rules 650 When you invoke the Controller from the command line the following rules apply gt If the Controller is invoked with n
120. the Controller for running vusers or monitoring over the firewall define the load generator settings as described in Load Generators Dialog Box on page 124 For the server name be sure to use the same Local Machine Key setting as in the Agent Configuration Then define the settings in the MI Listener Configuration Dialog Box on page 371 using the same MI Listener name as in the Agent Configuration Note You cannot change the temporary directory on the host running or monitoring Vusers over the firewall 4 Configure the Servers to Monitor and Define Measurements for Collection You configure the monitor settings from the Monitor Over Firewall machine using the Monitor Configuration tool Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Advanced Settings gt Monitor Configuration You select the type of monitors to run and the server whose resources you want to monitor add the measurements to monitor for each server and specify the frequency with which you want the monitored measurements to be reported For detailed information about how to use the Monitor Configuration tool see How to Configure Monitors Over a Firewall on page 365 gt How to Configure the LoadRunner Agent on Each Monitor Over Firewall Machine 362 On each load generator machine that will be running over a firewall and on each Monitor Over Firewall machine you configure the LoadRunner agent to communicate with the MI Listener The MI Listener serv
121. the External Client This option can be used when needing to pass specific options to the external client being executed Valid substitution variables are gt root This will be translated to the SiteScope directory gt user This will be translated to the user name entered into the remote machine gt password This will be translated to the password entered into the remote gt host This will be translated to the host name entered into the remote machine Disable Connection Caching Select to turn off connection caching for this remote machine By default SiteScope caches open connections 453 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors UI Element A Z Description Key File for SSH connections Select the file that contains the private key for this connection Default SiteScope groups identity This setting only applies when the authentication method is Key File Login The login for the remote server If the server is within the same domain as the SiteScope machine include the domain name in front of the user login name Example domainname user If you are using a local machine login account for machines within or outside the domain include the machine name in front of the user login name Example machinename user NT Server Address The IP address or UNC style name of the monitored Windows server Note The address can be an IP hostname if the
122. the actions of all the Vusers and Vuser groups in the scenario To access Run tab Relevant tasks gt How to Run a Scenario on page 249 gt Control Vusers During a Scenario Run Use Case Scenario on page 252 282 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description lt Right click menu gt Additional actions available only via the right click menu gt Reset IDs Resets the IDs of the Vusers in the group gt Run Vusers Until Complete Runs the selected Vusers until complete If you run Vusers in the Down or Error state the Controller initializes and then runs the Vusers gt Run One Vuser Until Complete Instructs the Controller to run a randomly selected Vuser in the Vuser group until it completes running The Vuser Log opens displaying run time information about the Vuser For more information see Vuser Script Log on page 287 gt Pause Vusers Temporarily pauses running the Vusers group The status of the Vuser group changes from Running to Paused Note that pausing a Vuser group affects its transaction response time gt Enable Enables the Vuser group to participate in the scenario gt Disable Disables the Vuser group so that it no longer participates in the scenario gt Show Vusers Opens a Run Time Viewer for each Vuser in the group which displays the vuser executing its script gt Hide Vusers
123. the following information gt Name The name of the load generator gt Status The status of the load generator gt Ready The load generator is connected gt Connecting The load generator is in the process of connecting gt Active The load generator is running Vusers gt Down The load generator is not connected gt Failed A connection with the load generator could not be established gt Platform The type of platform on which the load generator is running gt Details If the connection fails displays details about why it failed lt Right click menu gt gt Filter Hosts Enables you filter the load generator list by status gt Load Default List Loads the default list of load generators gt Save List As Default Saves the current list of load generators as the default list gt Sort Hosts Enables you to sort the Load Generator table by a selected column To sort the table in ascending descending order click the relevant table heading 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios This chapter includes Concepts gt Scheduling Manual Scenarios Overview on page 128 gt Scheduling by Scenario or Group on page 128 gt Schedule Run Modes on page 130 Tasks gt How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 gt How to Add Actions to the Scenario Schedule on page 136 gt How to Edit Schedule Actions on page 139 Reference gt Schedule Actions on page 142 gt Schedul
124. the percentage of Vusers to be added to each script as well as the load generators on which these additional Vusers will run gt When you add Vusers to a running scenario or Vuser group the current scheduler settings are automatically applied to all new Vusers For example if the scenario or Vuser group has a set duration of five minutes all Vusers that are subsequently added run only for the remaining part of that time period Vusers that are added to a scenario or Vuser group which has finished running are not affected by schedule settings and run according to the scenario run time settings Relevant tasks gt How to Run a Scenario on page 249 gt Control Vusers During a Scenario Run Use Case Scenario on page 252 279 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 280 User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description J Init Distributes the added Vusers to their designated load generators so that they are ready to execute their scripts The Controller first initializes the Vusers in your scenario that have not yet run and then adds additional Vusers as required to reach the defined quantity gt Run Initialized Runs the Vusers in the scenario that have already been initialized gt Note You cannot run more Vusers than are currently initialized using this option gt Run New Runs the number of Vusers you speci
125. time settings Notes gt When you modify the run time settings from the Controller LoadRunner runs the script using the modified settings To restore the initial settings previously set using VuGen click the Refresh button and select Run Time Settings gt If run time settings for a script were not defined in VuGen the Controller displays its own default settings for Log and Think Time Default VuGen settings are displayed for all other nodes Details Opens the Group Script Information dialog box where you can view and modify the Vuser group script s settings For details see Group Information Dialog Box on page 81 or Script Information Dialog Box on page 94 where respectively View Script Opens the script in VuGen where you can view and edit the Vuser script For more information on editing scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide 89 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 90 UI Elements A Z Description lt Groups Scripts table gt Displays the following information about the Vuser groups scripts selected for the scenario gt D Indicates that the Vuser group script is participating in the scenario gt Group Script Name The name of the Vuser group script gt Script Path The path of the Vuser script In Vuser group mode if the Vuser group includes more than one script the scripts names are listed Clicking the cell s drop down arrow displays
126. to Run a Scenario on page 249 User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description Opens VuGen where you can record a Vuser script For more information on recording Vuser scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide 78 Record Enables you to add Vuser scripts to the list of scripts eS Browse y P P Note To add a VB Vuser script select the usr file 96 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Run Time Settings Opens the Run Time Settings dialog box where you can edit the Vuser script s run time settings Notes gt Modifying the run time settings for one Vuser modifies the run time settings for all the Vusers in the group that are using the same script gt When you modify the run time settings from the Controller LoadRunner runs the script using the modified settings gt If run time settings for a script were not defined in VuGen the Controller displays its own default settings for Log and Think Time Default VuGen settings are displayed for all other nodes Parameter list Opens the Parameter list in VuGen where you can create view modify and delete Vuser script parameters For details see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Group Name Load Generator Name The name of the group to which the selected Vuser belongs The loa
127. to enable the module and to define server information For user interface details see Oracle 11i Configuration Dialog Box on page 417 gt How to Configure SAP Diagnostics 406 This task describes how to configure the SAP Diagnostics module to communicate with the Mediator and how to define the servers that you want to monitor in order to generate diagnostics data This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 406 gt Enable the SAP Diagnostics module on page 407 1 Prerequisites gt Make sure that the ERP CRM Mediator is installed The Mediator which collects and processes the diagnostics data is installed on the Controller machine as part of the LoadRunner Full Setup SAPGUI Client must be installed on the Mediator machine For information on installing the ERP CRM Mediator on a dedicated machine see the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide gt Make sure that the load test scenario is not already running You must configure the diagnostics module before running the load test scenario gt Manually define transactions in the Vuser script To ensure that valid diagnostics data is generated manually define the transactions in the Vuser script rather than using automatic transactions Make sure to disable the following options in the Run Time Settings General Miscellaneous node Define each action as a transaction and Define each step as a transaction Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM
128. to monitor the resources on a remote machine 447 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors Reference Monitor Types All of the monitors allow you to view a summary of the collected data at the conclusion of the scenario Using LoadRunner Analysis you can generate a graph for any of the monitors For more information see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide The online monitors are divided into the following categories Web Resource Monitors Provide information about the number of Web con nections throughput volume HTTP responses server retries and downloaded pages at the Web servers dur ing the scenario run For more information see Web Resource Monitors on page 463 Run Time and Display the transaction rate and response times and Transaction Monitors the number and status of Vusers participating in the scenario as well as the number and types of errors that the Vusers generate For more information see Run Time and Transaction Monitoring on page 471 System Resource Measure the Windows UNIX Server SNMP and Site Monitors Scope resources used during a scenario run For more information see System Resource Monitoring on page 477 Network Delay Monitors Displays information about the network delays on your system For more information see Network Delay Monitoring on page 497 Firewall Monitor Measures statistics related to the firewall servers dur ing the scenario ru
129. total number of SQL ROLLBACK statements that have been attempted select_sql_stmts The number of SQL SELECT statements that were executed uid_sql_stmts The number of SQL UPDATE INSERT and DELETE statements that were executed ddl_sql_stmts The number of SQL Data Definition Language DDL statements that were executed int_auto_rebinds The number of automatic rebinds or recompiles that have been attempted int_commits The total number of commits initiated internally by the database manager int_rollbacks The total number of rollbacks initiated internally by the database manager int_deadlock_rollbacks The total number of forced rollbacks initiated by the database manager due to a deadlock A rollback is performed on the current unit of work in an application selected by the database manager to resolve the deadlock binds_precompiles The number of binds and pre compiles attempted Application Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring The following table lists the Application counters Measurement Description agents_stolen The number of times that agents are stolen from an application Agents are stolen when an idle agent associated with an application is reassigned to work on a different application num_assoc_agents total_sorts At the application level this is the number of sub agents associated with an application At the database level i
130. total number of Vusers currently running on all load generators Ready The number of Vusers that completed the initialization section of the script and are ready to run Chapter 24 Run Time and Transaction Monitoring Status Description Finished The number of Vusers that have finished running This includes both Vusers that passed and failed Error The number of Vusers whose execution generated an error Check the Status field in the Vuser view or the Output window for a complete explanation of the error User Defined Data Points Graph The User Defined Data Points graph displays the real time values of user defined data points You define a data point in your Vuser script by inserting an Ir_user_data_point function at the appropriate place user_data_point for GUI Vusers and Ir user_data_point for Java Vusers Action1 Ir_think_time 1 Ir_user_data_point data_point_1 1 Ir_user_data_point data_point_2 2 return 0 For Vuser protocols that support the graphical script representations such as Web and Oracle NCA you insert a data point as a user defined step Data point information is gathered each time the script executes the function or step For more information about data points see the HP LoadRunner Online Function Reference By default LoadRunner displays all of the data points in a single graph The legend provides information about each data point If desired you can hid
131. view Vusers and to monitor scenario status Note You cannot use VuGen to run a GUI Vuser script You use the Controller to run a GUI Vuser script as part of a scenario you use QuickTest to run a GUI Vuser script in standalone mode 331 Chapter 17 Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner Understanding GUI Vuser Technology GUI Vusers measure real end to end response times End to end response times represent the total time that a user waits for a response after submitting a request End to end response times include GUI response times as well as network and server response times Enctto Bnd response time inducing GU Cient Network 332 Chapter 17 Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner amp Guidelines for Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner When creating test scripts in QuickTest that are going to be used as GUI Vuser scripts in a LoadRunner testing scenario you need to follow certain guidelines to ensure smooth integration of the script For detailed explanations about creating tests in QuickTest see the QuickTest documentation This section also includes Limitations on page 333 Including Transactions on page 333 Adding Statements on page 334 Yy vyv vyv y Designing Tests for LoadRunner on page 334 Limitations QuickTest offers several features that are designed specifically for integration with LoadRunner Some QuickTest features however may not be available when they are integrate
132. with a different Diagnostics Server in Commander mode or if you change the port it is using Update the LoadRunner configuration settings for HP Diagnostics In the HP Diagnostics Commander enter the details for the Diagnostics Server in Commander mode For user interface details see Diagnostics for J2EE NET Setup Dialog Box on page 435 Chapter 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics gt How to Configure a LoadRunner Scenario to use J2EE NET Diagnostics 432 This task describes how to capture J2EE NET diagnostics metrics in a LoadRunner scenario and how to select the probes that will be included in the scenario This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisite on page 432 gt Enable J2EE NET Diagnostics on page 432 1 Prerequisite gt Start application server Make sure that the application server you are monitoring has already been started gt Make sure that the load test scenario is not already running You must configure J2EE NET diagnostics before running the load test scenario 2 Enable J2EE NET Diagnostics Perform the following steps a In the Controller select Diagnostics gt Configuration to open the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box Then select Enable the following diagnostics and specify the percentage of Vusers for which you want to collect J2EE NET Diagnostics data For user interface details see Diagnostics for J2EE NET Setup Dialog Box on page 435 b In the
133. with the script see View Vusers associated with the script on page 69 gt Files associated with the script see View files associated with the script on page 69 gt Open the script in VuGen by clicking the View Script button see View Edit a script in VuGen on page 68 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios gt View the script s run time settings by clicking the Run Time Settings button see Modify a script s run time settings on page 67 and Modify multiple scripts run time settings on page 67 Modify a script s run time settings gt To view or modify a script s run time settings in the Scenario Groups Scripts pane right click the script and select Run Time Settings gt To view or modify run time settings of a script associated with a particular Vuser in the Vusers dialog box Scenario Groups pane gt Vusers right click the Vuser and select Run Time Settings Modifying the run time settings for one Vuser in a group modifies the run time settings for all the Vusers in that group that are using the same script gt To modify run time settings for multiple scripts see Modify multiple scripts run time settings below Note gt For details about specific run time settings see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide gt When you modify the run time settings from the Controller LoadRunner runs the script using the modified settings Modify multiple scripts run time settings T
134. within the database manager instance being monitored local_cons_in_exec The number of local applications that are currently connected to a database within the database manager instance being monitored and are currently processing a unit of work con_local_dbases The number of local databases that have applications connected 538 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring Measurement Description agents_registered The number of agents registered in the database manager instance that is being monitored coordinator agents and subagents agents_waiting_on_token The number of agents waiting for a token so they can execute a transaction in the database manager idle_agents agents_from_pool The number of agents in the agent pool that are currently unassigned to an application and are therefore idle The number of agents assigned from the agent pool agents_created_empty_pool The number of agents created because the agent pool was empty agents_stolen The number of times that agents are stolen from an application Agents are stolen when an idle agent associated with an application is reassigned to work on a different application comm_private_mem The amount of private memory that the instance of the database manager has currently committed at the time of the snapshot inactive_gw_agents The number of DRDA agents in the DRDA connections pool that
135. you add a Vuser group to the scenario after all the original Vusers have already started running the new group starts running immediately 144 Duration Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios The Duration action instructs LoadRunner to continue running the scenario in the current state for the specified amount of time Options Description Run until completion The scenario runs until all the Vusers have finished running Note In real world schedules this option is available after the first Start Vusers action only and if selected causes all subsequent actions to be deleted Run for XX days and lt 00 00 00 gt HH MM SS The scenario runs in its current state for the specified amount of time in days hours minutes and seconds before continuing with the next action Default 5 minutes Note In a real world schedule if you select this option and this Duration action is not followed by any other action the scenario continues to run indefinitely Run indefinitely Basic schedule only The scenario runs indefinitely 145 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Stop Vusers The Stop Vusers action instructs LoadRunner to stop running Vusers Options Description Stop XX Vusers Simultaneously LoadRunner stops running the Default specified number of Vusers at once Stop XX Vuser YY Vusers every LoadRunner stops running the lt 00 00 00 gt HH MM SS
136. 000900 00 1100 Design tab Run tab Diagnostics tab Status bar 27 Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner 28 To access Start gt Program Files gt LoadRunner gt LoadRunner gt Load Testing tab gt Run Load Test Start gt Program Files gt LoadRunner gt Applications gt Controller Important By default upon opening the Controller the New information Scenario dialog box is displayed To disable this option clear the Show at Startup option For details see New Scenario Dialog Box on page 84 Relevant tasks gt How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 How to Run a Scenario on page 249 VV YV How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description amp New Scenario Opens New Scenario dialog box For user interface details see New Scenario Dialog Box on page 84 Open Scenario Enables you to open an existing scenario O amp Save Scenario Enables you to save the active scenario Goal oriented scenario Run view only Edit scenario goal Opens the Edit Scenario Goal dialog box where you define goals for a goal oriented scenario For user interface details see Edit Scenario Goal Dialog Box on page 78 4 Load Generators Opens the Load Generators dialog box where you can add new load gen
137. 1 COMES pts e o rarr a a A E E A 602 Middleware Performance Monitoring Overview seeeeeeeees 602 Table of Contents TASKS siecccccccsscccssseveassunnveresesecesssisbsosuecssssotenissocscesessaccestssigesecscveescesescees 603 How to Set Up the Tuxedo Monitor ou eee ceeeeeeeessereeeeeeeeeee 603 How to Set Up the IBM WebSphere MQ Monitor eee 605 RETO ON CO E ETE dens canedesee cate 608 IBM WebSphere MQ Performance Counters 0 0 0 0 eee eeseseeeeeeereeeeeee 608 IBM WebSphere MQ Queue Attributes 2 ee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 611 Tuxedo Performance Counters eeesssceecesssecessseceseesseeeessaeeeees 613 Tuxedo tpinit ini File cece ceeeesssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 615 Middleware Performance Monitoring User Interface eee 615 Chapter 34 Infrastructure Resources Monitoring ssccccseee 621 CONGCEPUS vedccseseticrececvecccsnnnaeddososdoosddsobsssbsvaseecssdestiascacsd c vwvunnatavecedseses 622 Infrastructure Resources Monitoring Overview eseese 622 RELEFEN CO EEEE cecsushaseasasvasensnessbonevintie E ET 623 Network Client Performance Countels ce eeeeecesseceessreeeeesseeees 623 PART VI APPENDIXES Chapter 35 Secure Host COMMUNICATION 0 0 cece eeseeeeeeeeee 627 CONGCE PES isieccccsstnnescsecccsesenanavaosoodecstssabiisbedssdecssdestisscncedcsensvanvatarecesseens 628 Secure Host Communication Overview eee ceeeeeeeessseeeeeeeee 628 Host Security Configuration 0 0 eee eeeee
138. 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Enable firewall Enables LoadRunner to monitor or run Vusers over a firewall Note If this option is selected the Temporary directory box in the load generator s details area at the top of the dialog box is disabled and if a location was defined it is erased Enable SSL Support Enables an encrypted connection between the Controller and load generator Firewall Settings gt Enable running Vusers over Firewall Enables LoadRunner to run Vusers on a load generator outside the firewall gt Enable Monitoring over Firewall Enables LoadRunner to monitor the load generator over a firewall gt MI Listener The name of the MI Listener that the load generator uses to communicate over the firewall 115 Chapter 5 Load Generators amp Load Generator Configuration gt Status Tab This tab displays details about the status of the load generator To access Controller toolbar gt E gt Details Relevant tasks How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Details Error and other run time information about the selected load generator Load Generator Status The status of the load generator Load Generator Confi
139. 11 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring 612 Measurement Set Event Attributes Event Queue Service Interval High gt QSVCINT integer where integer is a value expressed as milliseconds in the range of 0 and 999 999 999 inclusive Note this value is shared with Queue Service Interval OK gt QSVCIEV type where type is the word HIGH OK or NONE enabling service interval high events enabling service interval ok events or disabling the generation of the event respectively Event Queue Service Interval OK gt QSVCINT integer where integer is a value expressed as milliseconds in the range of 0 and 999 999 999 inclusive Note this value is shared with Queue Service Interval High gt QSVCIEV type where type is the word HIGH OK or NONE enabling service interval high events enabling service interval ok events or disabling the generation of the event respectively Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring Tuxedo Performance Counters The following table lists the available Tuxedo monitor measurements It is recommended to pay particular attention to the following measurements Busy Clients Active Clients Busy Clients Idle Clients and all the queue counters for relevant queues Monitor Measurements Machine Busy Clients The percent of active clients currently logged in to the Tuxedo applica
140. 18 gt SAP Configuration Dialog Box on page 419 gt Siebel Configuration Dialog Box on page 420 gt Siebel DB Configuration Dialog Box on page 422 gt Siebel DB Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 423 gt Siebel Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 424 Diagnostics Distribution Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to enable the ERP CRM diagnostics modules To access Select Diagnostics gt Configuration Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 414 Important information gt The Diagnostics Distribution dialog box is disabled during scenario execution You must enable and configure the diagnostics modules before running the scenario gt The settings that you configure are per scenario All scripts in the scenario will run under the same diagnostics configuration Relevant tasks gt How to Configure Siebel Diagnostics on page 389 gt How to Configure Siebel DB Diagnostics on page 396 gt How to Configure Oracle 11i Diagnostics on page 401 gt How to Configure SAP Diagnostics on page 406 gt How to Configure a LoadRunner Scenario to use J2EE NET Diagnostics on page 432 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Disable Enables Disables Web Page Diagnostics graphs Click to enable and configure the relevant diagnostics Configure apie Indicates that the diagnostics type i
141. 5 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring b Run the following MQSC command ALTER QMGR PERFMEV ENABLED Set the queue attributes For a list of queue attributes see IBM WebSphere MQ Queue Attributes on page 611 Note If you encounter an MQ Server error message starting with the characters MQRC_ refer to the WebSphere MQ family support Web site http www 306 ibm com software integration mqfamily support 3 Add the monitored server to the Controller b c In the Controller Run view click the IBM WebSphere MQ graph in the graph tree and drag it into the right pane Right click the graph and select Add Measurements or click anywhere on the graph and select Monitors gt Add Measurements The IBM WebSphere MQ dialog box opens In the Monitored Server Machines section click Add The Add Machine dialog box opens The first time that you add measurements enter the server name or IP address of the machine you want to monitor The format of the server name is lt machine name gt lt port number gt Select the platform on which the machine runs and click OK In the Resource Measurements section of the IBM WebSphere MQ dialog box click Add 4 Configure the IBM WebSphere MQ monitor The IBM WebSphere MQ monitor connects to the IBM WebSphere MQ server via the MQ Client Connection installed on the Controller machine In MQ Client environments the client machine connects to an MQ Server instance
142. 54 Using Digital Certificates with Firewalls eee eee seeeeesereeeeeeseeees 654 TASKS stedectcececest debs ciavevennies cocueewiannesareendreasnceseteguecevvosed cccvuvieancuesadesasaies 656 Create and Use Digital Certificates ee eeeeeesseeeeesreeeeeesneeeeees 656 Appendix A Troubleshooting Online Monitors cceseeeeseeees 659 Concepts enean esi iR in asi ee Ss 660 Troubleshooting Online Monitors OvervieW ssseeseersssserererrrrrseree 660 R ferencen aa OaE RST e E ESS 661 Table of Contents 18 Welcome to LoadRunner Controller Welcome to the HP LoadRunner Controller User Guide This guide presents an overview of the HP LoadRunner testing process and describes how to create and run HP LoadRunner scenarios using HP LoadRunner Controller in a Windows environment HP LoadRunner is HP s tool for application performance testing LoadRunner stresses your entire application to isolate and identify potential client network and server bottlenecks How This Guide Is Organized Part I Part Il Part III Part IV This guide contains the following parts Introducing HP LoadRunner Introduces HP LoadRunner Controller and describes how you use it for load testing Designing Load Test Scenarios Explains how to create a scenario for load testing Running Load Test Scenarios Explains how to run a scenario and how to view the system s performance during the scenario Working with Firewalls
143. 61 Chapter 30 Streaming Media Monitoring 562 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring Overview on page 564 Tasks gt How to Set Up the PeopleSoft Tuxedo Resource Monitor on page 565 gt How to Set Up the SAPGUI Server Resource Monitor on page 567 Reference gt PeopleSoft Tuxedo Performance Counters on page 569 gt SAPGUI Performance Counters on page 572 gt Siebel Server Manager Performance Counters on page 573 gt ERP CRM Server Resounce Monitoring User Interface on page 575 Troubleshooting and Limitations on page 580 563 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring Concepts amp ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring Overview 564 You use LoadRunner s ERP CRM server resource monitors to monitor ERP CRM servers during a scenario run and isolate server performance bottlenecks gt The PeopleSoft Tuxedo monitor displays statistics about the resource usage of a PeopleSoft Tuxedo server during the scenario run gt The Siebel Server Manager monitor displays statistics about the resource usage of a Siebel Server Manager during the scenario run gt The SAPGUI monitor displays statistics about the resource usage of an SAP R 3 system during the scenario run You can use the SAPGUI monitor to view gt gt Yy Yy YV YV Yy yY the number of configured instances for each SAP system data for all application instanc
144. 635 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description caus Updates the security mode on the selected hosts Stops updating the hosts Secure mode Select a security mode gt Non secure Allows non secure communication gt Secure Enforces secure communication Update progress Displays the hosts their previous status if known and their status during and after the update 644 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication Q Troubleshooting This section describes troubleshooting for secure host communication Cannot Run Scenario Over Secure Channels Problem description When you try to run a scenario over secure channels the scenario cannot initialize because cannot connect to Controller or load generator Troubleshooting Verify that the reason the scenario cannot run is because of a security key mismatch try to run the same scenario with the same hosts from a local Controller If a Security Key Mismatch error is displayed in the error log then the keys do not match and you need to align the security keys on all the host machines Scenario Run Fails Load Generator Status is Changed to Resource Failure Problem description When trying to run a scenario over secure channels the scenario fails to run and the load generator status changes to Resource Failure Troubleshooting When trying to run a scenario over secure channels if the security key
145. 95 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Available Select the measurements you want to add To select more Measurements than one measurement use the CTRL key For a list of available measurements see UNIX Resources Performance Counters on page 486 Description Displays a description of the selected measurement 496 26 Network Delay Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Network Monitoring Overview on page 498 Tasks gt How to Set Up the Network Monitoring Environment on page 500 gt How to Configure the UNIX Source Machine for Network Monitoring on page 502 Reference gt Network Delay Monitoring User Interface on page 505 Troubleshooting and Limitations on page 510 497 Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring Concepts amp Network Monitoring Overview 498 Network configuration is a primary factor in the performance of applications A poorly designed network can slow client activity to unacceptable levels You use Network monitoring to determine whether your network is causing a delay in the scenario You can also determine the problematic network segment In a true Web or client server system there are many network segments A single network segment with poor performance can affect the entire system The following diagram shows a typical network To go from the server machine to the
146. 99 best practices 206 emulated locations 201 excluding machines 202 limitations 207 monitoring 202 typical network settings 200 wan emulation running a scenatio 204 Web Resource monitors 463 Connections graph 468 Connections per Second graph 468 Hits per Second graph 464 HTTP Response per Second graph 465 Pages Downloaded per Second graph 466 Retries per Second graph 467 SSLs per Second graph 468 Throughput graph 464 Web Server Resource monitors 513 WebLogic SNMP graph 309 Windows Resources graph 307 671 Index 672
147. A versions 11 5 0 and later Enter the version of your Oracle application server in VuGen s run time settings to enable the built in trace mechanism Note To check the version of your Oracle server log on to the Oracle server and select Help gt About Oracle The version of your Oracle server is displayed in the Oracle Application field To enter your Oracle application version open the script in VuGen and select Vuser gt Run Time Settings In the Oracle NCA Client Emulation node select the version of Oracle NCA that you are using in the Diagnostics gt Application Version field Note If the Oracle 11i trace cannot be enabled using the built in mechanism you can enable it manually in the Vuser script using the nca_set_custom_dbtrace and nca_set_dbtrace_file_index functions This may occur if you are using a custom application that does not have a standard user interface 5 Enable the Oracle 11i Diagnostics module To enable the Oracle 11i Diagnostics module a Select Diagnostics gt Configuration to open the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box Then select Enable the following diagnostics and specify the percentage of Vusers for which you want to collect Oracle 11i Diagnostics data For user interface details see Diagnostics Distribution Dialog Box on page 413 405 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules b In the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box click Configure next to Oracle 11i Diagnostics
148. Ale F 3 g f B i omm Controller MI Listener i Load Generator Machine Machine Frewol Agent Machine 351 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner The Controller uses a symbolic name for the agent and provides the MI Listener machine s name If there has been a connection from the agent with the same symbolic name to this MI Listener the connection is made between the Controller and the agent Once you have a connection with the agent you can run or monitor Vusers over a firewall Fs Port Port pu 50500 443 i Controller MI Listener ji Machine Firewall Load Generator Machine Agent Machine Example of Over Firewall Deployment The following diagram is a basic example of a LoadRunner deployment over a firewall Load Generator Controller Customer Server Ml Listener Monitor Over Firewall hta chine As explained in the previous section the LoadRunner agent is installed on both the load generator machine and the Monitor Over Firewall machine During installation the LoadRunner agent is added as a Windows service 352 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner The MI Listener serves as a router between gt The agent on the load generator machine and the Controller enabling the Controller to run Vusers over a firewall gt The agent on the Monitor Over Firewall machine and the Controller enabling the Controller to monitor the servers that are located over
149. Anaea EREE AERE dete debe 163 Wea SKS R DEEE EEE E OEE A 164 How to Define Service Level Agreements sssesesssseresssssssssereeessee 164 How to Define Service Level Agreements Use Case Scenario 166 RETELEN GO ss acccccesscesiseareeceseicadi n ea aa o a n a E deseesuscssdeusceessesesess 171 Service Level Agreements User Interface eeeeeeeeeeerrereerrerrees 171 Chapter 7 Multiple IP Addresses cscccccsssssscessescessescesssseeeeeeee 183 CONCEDES oeni apitar aean n E E a a aa aaa 184 Multiple IP Addresses Overview ssseesssssseeeeerrrssssssrrrsssseerrerersssseeeess 184 TASKS EEEE E EE E REEE EE E TA A E E ANE 185 How to Add IP Addresses to a Load Generator s sseeeseeeseesseesssees 185 How to Configuring Multiple IP Addresses on UNIX eccere 187 Referente niea R EN EEEE NENS 190 IARAA A i r a EEEE E EES ELES E ENNE N EEA 190 Table of Contents Chapter 8 Configuring Terminal Services Settings 00 193 GONGCE PES oeei onanii rese onare AE Aa ES EEE EE 194 Terminal Services OVervieW siriserereeeiiseiiieieie eiei enea E 194 TASKS svccccccscsusnvetiveceunnnnnancosss s so0ssaboe oo0 PE ESENS ENKER ESSEE ei n 196 How to Use the Terminal Services Manager csseeercsssseeerrerrressse 196 How to Configure Terminal Sessions Over a Firewall 197 Chapter 9 Configuring WAN Emulation SettingS scsceee 199 CONCEPTS sso a ENa ERER iis 200 WAN Emulation OvervieW sssseessse
150. Diagnostics Modules 2 Enable the SAP Diagnostics module To enable the SAP Diagnostics module a Select Diagnostics gt Configuration to open the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box Then select Enable the following diagnostics and specify the percentage of Vusers for which you want to collect SAP Diagnostics data For user interface details see Diagnostics Distribution Dialog Box on page 413 b In the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box click Configure next to SAP Diagnostics to enable the module and to define server information For user interface details For user interface details see SAP Configuration Dialog Box on page 419 P How to Enable and Disable Logging on the Siebel Server This task describes how to enable and disable logging on the Siebel server Note Enabling logging on the Siebel server can negatively impact server performance We recommend that you disable logging and restore the default logging settings at the conclusion of the load test scenario This task includes the following steps gt To enable logging on the Siebel server on page 407 gt To disable logging on the Siebel server on page 408 To enable logging on the Siebel server Perform the following steps a Open a command window and run the following command lt Siebel bin directory gt srvrmgr g lt gateway server gt s lt Siebel server gt e lt enterprise server name gt u lt username gt p lt password gt 407 Cha
151. Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to set up the SAP Diagnostics module to communicate with the Mediator To access Select Diagnostics gt Configuration Click Configure next to SAP Diagnostics Relevant tasks How to Configure SAP Diagnostics on page 406 See also SAP Diagnostics Graphs in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Validate Validates the connection to the SAP server When you click Validate the Controller produces a report of all the servers that are available for diagnostics through the Server Host Enable SAP Enables SAP Diagnostics and allows you to configure the Diagnostics SAP Diagnostics settings 419 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules UI Elements A Z Description Name The name of the Mediator used to collect and process the SAP diagnostics data Only one Mediator is supported for each diagnostics module Note If you are using a Mediator that is over a firewall enter the local machine key of the Mediator instead of the Mediator machine name Enable Firewall Select if the Mediator is over a firewall MI Listener The name full name or IP address of the MI Listener machine if you are monitoring over a firewall Application Server The name of the SAP server Router string System number Optional Enter the syste
152. For more details see Planning Load Test Scenarios on page 33 You design scenarios in the Design tab of the Controller After you design the scenario LoadRunner saves the information in a scenario file lrs You can design the following types of scenarios gt Manual Scenarios gt Goals Types for Goal Oriented Scenarios amp Manual Scenarios 54 You build a manual scenario by selecting scripts to run assigning load generators on which to run the scripts and distributing Vusers to run among the scripts You can design a manual scenario in one of the following modes gt Vuser group mode In this mode each script you select for the scenario is assigned to a Vuser group You assign a number of Vusers to each Vuser group that you create You can instruct all Vusers in a group to run the same script on the same load generator or you can assign different scripts and load generators to the various Vusers in a group gt Percentage mode In this mode you define a total number of Vusers to be used in the scenario and assign load generators and a percentage of the total number of Vusers to each script Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios After you define which Vuser groups scripts to run in the scenario you select or build a schedule by which to run the scenario For more information see Scheduling Manual Scenarios on page 127 You can also create service level agreements SLAs which are specific goals that you define
153. HP LoadRunner for the Windows operating systems Software Version 11 00 E Controller User Guide Document Release Date October 2010 Software Release Date October 2010 GY Legal Notices Warranty The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Restricted Rights Legend Confidential computer software Valid license from HP required for possession use or copying Consistent with FAR 12 211 and 12 212 Commercial Computer Software Computer Software Documentation and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U S Government under vendor s standard commercial license Copyright Notices 1993 2010 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Trademark Notices Java is a US trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc Microsoft and Windows are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Oracle is a registered US trademark of Oracle Corporation Redwood City California UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group Documentation Updates The title page of this document contains the following identifying information e Software Version number which indicates the software ve
154. How to Set Up the SAPGUI Server Resource Monitor How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow See also SAPGUI Performance Counters 578 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Advanced To change the default language click Advanced and enter a 2 letter string in the Language field Client Number used in the Client field of the SAP logon details Login Name Login name used to access the SAPGUI server Password Password for the login name Server Name Name of the SAPGUI server Use one of the following formats gt Server Description as displayed in the SAP Logon application gt String in the format server_network_name system_number where server_network_name is the name or IP address of the application server for example pipeline HP com and system_number preceded by is the system number as displayed in the SAP Server Properties dialog box If the system number is omitted 00 is used by default Note If an SAP router string is also specified in the Properties dialog box the server_network_name should be the concatenation of the router string and the application server for example H 199 35 107 9 H 204 79 199 5 H cpce801 579 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring Siebel Server Manager Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box allows
155. IENT_IP METRIC METRIC METRIC METRIC METRIC h h h b h b For each occurrence of CLIENT_IP insert your IP address instead c Run the batch file on the server machine Chapter 8 Multiple IP Addresses 3 Enable the Multiple IP Addresses feature from the Controller Once you define multiple IP addresses you set an option to tell the Controller to use this feature a Inthe Controller Design view select Scenario gt Enable IP Spoofer Note You must select this option before connecting to a load generator b In the Controller s Tools gt Options gt General tab Expert mode only specify how the Controller should allocate the IP addresses per process or per thread For details see Options gt General Tab on page 226 gt How to Configuring Multiple IP Addresses on UNIX The following sections describe how to manually configure multiple IP addresses on UNIX load generators HP 11 0 or higher on page 187 IBM AIX on page 188 Linux on page 188 Yy vyv y yY Solaris 2 5 2 6 7 0 8 0 on page 188 HP 11 0 or higher To define multiple IP addresses for a single Ethernet card you need IP Aliasing compiled into the kernel To do this use the ifconfig command sbin ifconfig lan1 0 x x x x netmask 255 255 x x up Substitute the new IP address for x x x x and insert the correct information for the subnet mask Place this command in the rc local file so that it executes upon boot 187
156. ITONE sssisrororrrrrrro norr ss ist E E E ETE PERSEE 479 Server Resource Monitoring sseeesseerseeeseerrrrssseereeessseereeersssseeereeessee 479 SNMP Resource Monitoring ssseeeesserseeeserrrrssssssrreessseereeerssssssrreeessee 480 SiteScope Resource Monitoring eeesesesserersssssreeressesereeerrsssseereeessee 481 Firewall Server Performance Monitoring eeseeeseseeesrrrreerrereerrerreees 481 TASKS A E T S S S ET 482 How to Set up the UNIX Monitoring ENViIronment eeessssseeeceees 482 Referent aendi aasa E A 485 Check Point FireWall 1 Performance Counters eeeeeeeeeeeereeeee 485 Server Resources Performance Counters essseeeeeseeesrrererrrereerereseees 485 UNIX Resources Performance CoOunters eseseeeereerrrrrerreereerresee 486 Windows Resource Performance Counters ce eeeeeeeeessreeeeeeeeees 488 System Resource Monitors User Interface eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 491 Chapter 25 Network Delay MOnitoring ccsesccsssseeessseeeeeeeee 497 COMGE PtSi incase ssi ities I E ANSE nE SSE R RS 498 Network Monitoring Overview sseseresssssseseerssssereerersssseereesssseeeee 498 E E E E AN 500 How to Set Up the Network Monitoring Environment 00 500 How to Configure the UNIX Source Machine for Network Monitori Scie tenet doce ALAARE EEREN E EAA AA ARAARA 502 Referente rerea EEE AA AR 505 Network Delay Monitoring User Interface eeeeeeerereerrereere 505 Chapter 26 Web Server
157. If you are using the ICMP protocol the destination machine s firewall should not block incoming ICMP_ECHO_REQUEST packets or outgoing ICMP_ECHO_REPLY and ICMP_ECHO_TIMEEXCEEDED packets In addition the firewall protecting the source machine should allow ICMP_ECHO_REPLY and ICMP_ECHO_TIMEEXCEEDED packets to enter and ICMP_ECHO_REQUEST packets to exit gt If you are using the UDP protocol ensure that the UDP protocol can access the destination machine from the source machine The destination machine s firewall should not block outgoing ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE and ICMP_ECHO_TIMEEXCEEDED packets In addition the firewall protecting the source machine should allow ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE and ICMP_ECHO_TIMEEXCEEDED packets to enter Note To run the Network Delay monitor when there are firewalls between the Controller and the source machine you must configure the LoadRunner agent MI Listener and Network Delay monitor for monitoring over a firewall 501 Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring 4 Specify the network monitor paths In the Controller Run tab graph tree view select the Network Delay Time graph and drag it into the right pane Right click the graph and select Add Measurements Define the paths using the following three dialog boxes a Add source and destinations machines For details see the Network Delay Time Dialog Box on page 506 b Define the network monitor path For details see the Adding Destinatio
158. If you disabled the logging feature in the Run Time information Settings Log node the Vuser script log will contain output only if your script contains the Ir_output_message or Ir_message function gt If you selected the Send messages only when an error occurs option in the Log node the Vuser script log will contain output only if there are script errors Relevant tasks How to Run a Scenario on page 249 User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements Description Show Text Tree View Displays the run time information E in text tree format To revert to the previous view click Te the button again Display Displays a snapshot of the Web page where an to error occurred when the error is highlighted in the Vuser log Note To view a snapshot of the Web page where an error occurred you must select the Activate snapshot on error option in the General node of the Run Time Settings dialog box before running the scenario Find Text Enables you to search for text in the Vuser log 287 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 288 UI Elements Description g ww Expand Collapse Node Expands the node so that you can view additional run time information details about the Vuser To revert to the collapsed tree view click the button again lt message icons gt The following icons may can appear in the script log gt Ac
159. Listener is created in the temporary directory of the LoadRunner agent machine The file is removed when the LoadRunner agent disconnects from the MI Listener 2 To start the LoadRunner agent run the command m_daemon_setup install from the lt LoadRunner root folder gt bin directory gt How to Configure Monitors Over a Firewall After you have installed and configured the LoadRunner agent the Monitors over Firewall component the MI Listener and the Controller machine you need to choose the server measurements that you want the Monitor Over Firewall machine to monitor You configure the server monitor properties from the Monitor Over Firewall machine using the Monitor Configuration Dialog Box You can select the type of monitors to run and the server whose resources you want to monitor add the measurements to monitor for each server and specify the frequency with which you want the monitored measurements to be reported The following steps describe how to configure monitors over a firewall gt Open the Monitor Configuration Dialog Box on page 366 gt Add Monitored Servers on page 366 365 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 366 gt Optional Clone a Monitored Server s Properties on page 367 1 Open the Monitor Configuration Dialog Box Select Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Advanced Settings gt Monitor Configuration For machines without the complete LoadRunner installation
160. Load Generator Configuration gt WAN Emulation Tab This tab enables WAN Emulation on your scenario To access Controller toolbar gt E3 gt Add or Details Important gt To enable the WAN Emulator the load generator must information be disconnected If the load generator is connected select it in the Load Generators dialog box and click Disconnect The load generator status changes to Down gt This tab is disabled if gt The load generator is running on a UNIX platform gt The WAN Emulation third party software is not installed gt The load generator is also the Controller Relevant tasks gt How to Integrate WAN Emulation Into Your Scenario on page 204 gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 See also Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings 123 Chapter 5 Load Generators User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Auto Monitoring User Details WAN Emulation settings Opens the third party software WAN Emulation Settings dialog box For detailed information on configuring WAN Emulation using this dialog box see the relevant third party software documentation For information on some typical network emulation settings see Typical Network Emulation Settings on page 200 Note If several load generators are being configured to emulate a specific l
161. NARIOS Chapter 21 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors 441 CONCEPITE EEKE EET OA SAA EAA E E S 442 Monitoring Process Overview eeessesesssseererssssseeeeeerrssreeerrssssereeeeeess 442 Tasks snini aaia rer a a eio E a iS 443 How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow 443 RETEFENCE konnnen eni ia Socwsesusevaeestuasanddeasesssoaas 448 Monitor Ty Pes iesesscccccscsceescek lect cececdece deck eane AAT 448 Configuring Monitors User Interface eee eeeseeeeeesreeeesreeeeeeeee 450 Chapter 22 Web Resource MONitors ccsscccssseeessetceeesseeeesoesee 463 COMGCE PUES sees N e re ae aeaaea Saa A EE AAS 464 Web Resource Monitoring OVerview sssssseesseerrrrsseeererssseeeeeeeeess 464 Referencna a a NVES SANER ESES OnE E S 469 HTTP Status COS cos eneen ei reai toivs veveccvscessseesntedavaasbnceaacsenay 469 Table of Contents Chapter 23 Run Time and Transaction Monitoring 006 471 GONCE PUES aiiis ninna e i a cocscadteasseastuasteacessss 472 Run Time Graphs Overview ciuccicarawiiieieicienieii iiaa 472 Transaction Monitor Graphs Overview ssseeesssssesererrrrssseserereerseseeee 474 Chapter 24 System Resource Monitoring eseessssseseeesssereeseseeeseees 477 Concepts eaea ae e T E A N 478 System Resource Monitors OVervieW eessssesreersssseereeerssssseeesssssee 478 Windows Resource MOonitoring eessssssessserrrsssssseersssseeeeeersssereeeess 478 UNIX Resource MON
162. Network Client online monitor graph is only available during scenarios that run relevant scripts such as FTP POP3 and so forth You can view this graph by dragging it from the Infrastructure Resources Graph section in the graph tree into the right pane of the Run view The graph appears in the graph view area Chapter 35 e Infrastructure Resources Monitoring Reference Network Client Performance Counters The following table describes the Network Client measurements that are monitored Measurement Description Pings per sec Number of pings per second Data transfer bytes per sec Number of data bytes transferred per second Data receive bytes per sec Number of data bytes received per second Connections per sec Number of connections per second Accept connections per Number of connections accepted per seconds sec SSL Connections per sec Number of SSL connections per second SSL Data transfer bytes Number of SSL data bytes transferred per second per sec SSL Data receive bytes per Number of SSL data bytes received per second sec SSL Accept connections Number of SSL connections accepted per seconds per sec 623 Chapter 35 e Infrastructure Resources Monitoring 624 Part VII Appendixes 626 36 Secure Host Communication This chapter includes Concepts gt Secure Host Communication Overview on page 628 gt Host Security Configuration on page 629 gt Remo
163. PUTTYGEN EXE gt PUTTY HLP You can use the Import command from the Conversions menu of PuTTYgen to load the private key in OpenSSH format and ssh com format and then generate it as a PUTTY format key For more information see the PuTTY User Manual which resides in the bin directory of the LoadRunner installation For more information on secured shell connections see the Verifying your UNIX Installation section in the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide For troubleshooting information about connecting to a remote UNIX server see Troubleshooting and Limitations on page 425 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules amp Siebel and Siebel DB Diagnostics Modules Overview LoadRunner s Siebel Diagnostics are split into the following modules gt Siebel Diagnostics Module Enables you to break down Siebel transactions into layers areas sub areas servers and scripts You can also view the transaction chain of calls and call stack statistics to track the percentage of time spent on each part of the transaction Siebel Web Vusers support Siebel Diagnostics For information on how to configure the Siebel Diagnostics module see How to Configure Siebel Diagnostics on page 389 gt Siebel DB Diagnostics Module Helps you to rapidly identify and resolve database performance problems You can view the SQLs for each transaction identify the problematic SQL queries of each script and identify at which point problems occurred Si
164. Performance Counters on page 486 gt Windows Resource Performance Counters on page 488 gt System Resource Monitors User Interface on page 491 477 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring Concepts amp System Resource Monitors Overview You use LoadRunner s System Resource monitors to monitor a machine s system resource usage during a scenario run and isolate server performance bottlenecks A primary factor in a transaction s response time is its system resource usage Using the LoadRunner resource monitors you can monitor the Windows UNIX Server SNMP FireWall server and SiteScope resources on a machine during a scenario run and determine why a bottleneck occurred on a particular machine The resource monitors are automatically enabled when you execute a scenario However you must specify the machine you want to monitor and which resources to monitor for each machine You can also add or remove machines and resources during the scenario run amp Windows Resource Monitoring 478 The Windows Resources monitor shows the Windows resources measured during the scenario run Windows measurements correspond to the built in counters available from the Windows Performance Monitor By default LoadRunner monitors Windows resources using the native LoadRunner monitor engine If you are using the SiteScope monitor engine ensure that SiteScope has been installed on a server You can install SiteScope on the same serve
165. Ready Run Rendez Passed Failed Eror Gradual Exiting Exiting Stopped 3 261 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Note The additional initialized Vusers are taken from the Vusers that are in the Down state If David initializes a greater number of Vusers than there are in the Down state then all of them will be initialized In the example above there were five Vusers in the Down state All of them have been initialized while an additional five have been created 2 Run additional Vusers If David then wants to run five additional Vusers in Script_A immediately and not wait for them to run as per their defined schedules in the Run Stop Vusers dialog box he makes sure that only the check box by script_a is selected and he enters 5 in the number column Run Stop Vusers Load Generators localhost O script_b localhost oO scripte localhost He then has the following two options for how to run these additional Vusers gt Run initialized Vusers He can run five Vusers from those he initialized in the previous step To do this he clicks the arrow on the Run button and selects Run Initialized Five Vusers immediately move from the Ready state to the Run State 262 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios gt Run new Vusers He can create and run five new Vusers with no effect on those he initialized in the previous step To do this he clicks the arrow on the Run button and selects Run New Five Vusers are immed
166. SLA statuses are determined over time intervals you need to define the frequency of the time intervals that is the tracking period For details see Tracking Period on page 163 For user interface details see Advanced Options Dialog Box on page 171 165 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements 4 Results When analyzing your scenario run HP LoadRunner Analysis compares the data collected from the scenario run against the SLA settings and determines SLA statuses which are included in the default Summary Report For more information see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide gt How to Define Service Level Agreements Use Case Scenario 166 This use case scenario describes how to define a service level agreement SLA for Average Transaction Response Time This scenario includes the following steps Background on page 166 Start the SLA wizard on page 166 gt gt gt Select the measurement for the SLA on page 167 gt Select the transactions to evaluate in your goal on page 167 gt Select a load criterion and define appropriate ranges of load optional on page 167 gt Set thresholds on page 168 gt Results on page 170 1 Background The administrator of HP Web Tours would like to know when the average transaction response time for booking a flight and searching for a flight exceeds a certain value Assume that your scenario includes a script that includes the following transactions
167. Support Web site where you can search the Self solve knowledge base Choose Help gt Troubleshooting amp Knowledge Base The URL for this Web site is http h20230 www2 hp com troubleshooting jsp HP Software Support accesses the HP Software Support Web site This site enables you to browse the Self solve knowledge base You can also post to and search user discussion forums submit support requests download patches and updated documentation and more Choose Help gt HP Software Support The URL for this Web site is www hp com go hpsoftwaresupport Welcome to This Guide Most of the support areas require that you register as an HP Passport user and sign in Many also require a support contract To find more information about access levels go to http h20230 www2 hp com new_access_levels jsp To register for an HP Passport user ID go to http h20229 www2 hp com passport registration html HP Software Web site accesses the HP Software Web site This site provides you with the most up to date information on HP Software products This includes new software releases seminars and trade shows customer support and more Choose Help gt HP Software Web site The URL for this Web site is www hp com go software Documentation Updates HP Software is continually updating its product documentation with new information To check for recent updates or to verify that you are using the most recent edition of a document go to the
168. System Resource Monitors User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Add Windows Resources Measurements Dialog Box on page 491 gt Configuring SNMP by MIB Monitor Dialog Box on page 493 gt UNIX Kernel Statistics Dialog Box on page 495 Add Windows Resources Measurements Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to select the Windows resources to monitor The Windows resources correspond to the built in counters available from the Windows Performance Monitor To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements In the Resource Measurements section of the Windows Resources dialog click Add Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 491 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Displays a description of the selected counter Counters The resource counter measurement to monitor Select Measurements multiple counters using the CTRL key For a list of available measurements see Windows Resource Performance Counters on page 488 Instances If multiple instances of the selected counter are running select one or more instances to monitor for the selected counter Object The object to monitor on the specified Windows machine CheckPoint FireWall 1 Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to select the CheckPoint FireWall 1 server reso
169. TCP UDP or ICMP It is recommended that you use the default protocol The default in Windows is TCP and in UNIX is UDP Note When you use TCP or UDP protocols administrator privileges are required on the source machine gt Send request to port Enter the port number to be used by the network path gt Enable display of network nodes by DNS names Enables you to view the DNS name of each node along the network path in addition to its IP address Note Selecting this option will decrease the speed of the Network monitor 509 Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring UI Elements A Z Description Monitoring Frequency Send next packet X milliseconds after receipt of previous packet Select the number of milliseconds the monitor should wait between receiving a packet and sending out the next packet Default 3000 milliseconds Note If you have a long steady scenario you can increase the interval by several seconds Monitoring Packet Retries gt Wait X seconds for packet to return before retrying Select the maximum number of seconds that the monitor should wait for a packet to return before it retries to send the packet Default 3 seconds Note If your network is very large and loaded an internet connection with a low capacity you should increase the value by several seconds If you have a small network such as a LAN you can decrease the value gt Number of retries
170. The following procedure copies the merc_webtrace file to the local disk configures mdrv dat to recognize the process and assigns root permissions to merc_webtrace Copy merc_webtrace from lt LoadRunner_installation gt bin to anywhere on the local disk of the source machine For example to copy the file to the local lt LoadRunner gt directory type cp net tools LoadRunner_installation bin merc_webtrace local lt LoadRunner gt Note All of the source machines that use the same network installation must copy merc_webtrace to the identical directory path on their local disk for example local lt LoadRunner gt since all of them use the same mdrv dat Add the following line to the lt LoadRunner_installation gt dat mdrv dat file in the monitors_server section ExtCmdLine merc_webtrace_path local xxx Log in to the source machine as root Type cd LoadRunner_installation bin to change to the bin directory Type chown root merc_webtrace to make the root user the owner of the merc_webtrace file Type chmod s merc_webtrace to add the s bit to the file permissions To verify type Is I merc_webtrace The permissions should look like rwsrwsi x 503 Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring 504 3 Connect to the Unix Source Machine Through RSH Follow these instructions if the Controller is connected to the source machine through RSH default connection mode In this case you do not need to activate the ag
171. Type the name or IP address of the server whose resources you want to monitor in the Monitored Server field Note To add several servers simultaneously separate the server names or IP ranges with commas For example 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 5 server1 server2 From the Available Monitors list select the monitors appropriate for the server being monitored Note Data can only be viewed for the monitors that are enabled with your LoadRunner license key To preview your license key information select Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner HP LoadRunner opens Click the License button to display the LoadRunner license information x Removes a server or measurement PA Opens the Monored Server Properties dialog box allowing you to modify the settings Measurement Properties Allows you to set a measurement schedule for each measurement to be reported Select the configured server measurement you want to schedule and specify the frequency at which you want LoadRunner to report the measurement Click Apply to save your settings Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner Q Troubleshooting This section describes troubleshooting for working with firewalls in LoadRunner Checking Connectivity To run Vusers or monitor servers over a firewall you must be able to establish a connection between the LoadRunner agent MI Listener and the Controller machine If you encounter connectivity pro
172. Use Case Scenario 252 This use case scenario describes how to override defined schedules and manually control the behavior addition and stopping of Vusers during a scenario run Note For a task related to this scenario see How to Run a Scenario on page 249 David Smith is a load tester at NewSoft Company currently using LoadRunner to test a new product in preparation for its upcoming release His load test contains three Vuser groups Script_A Script_B and Script_C Each group has been assigned ten Vusers and been given the same schedule definitions that is to start two Vusers every ten seconds and to stop two Vusers every ten seconds If David were to leave these schedules as defined the start and stop actions in the scenario groups pane would look as follows Start Group Name Down Pending Init Ready Run Rendez Passed Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Stopped a IBE 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Script 5 5 ScripLB 5 5 Seript_C T5 5 Stop Passed Failed 0 0 Error 0 Rendez 0 Run 15 Down 0 Group Name 3 Pending Init 0 0 Ready 0 Gradual Exiting 3 Exiting 0 Stopped 12 1 1 1 The following table shows the options available to David should he wish to override these defined schedules and manually manipulate the way the Vusers start or stop Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Note Al
173. Vuser Status Tab on page 122 gt Load Generator Configuration gt WAN Emulation Tab on page 123 gt Load Generators Dialog Box on page 124 Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box These dialog boxes enable you to add load generators and view and edit information about a load generator respectively Relevant tasks To access Controller toolbar gt a gt Add New Load Generator dialog box Click Add gt Load Generator Information dialog box Select a load generator and click Details Important After adding a load generator it appears in the Load information Generators list with a Down status How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 See also Load Generators Overview on page 102 User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description More Less Add New Load Generator dialog box only More Less Shows hides the tabs where you configure the load generator s details See Load Generator Configuration Tabs below 108 Chapter 5 Load Generators UI Elements A Z Description Enable load generator to take part in the scenario When selected enables the load generator to participate in the scenario When cleared the load generator is disabled This is useful in the following cases
174. Vuser machine data must travel over several segments server machine Vuser Load Generator _ I segment T segment 2 Ld LI Router SS The Network Delay Time monitor shows the delays for the complete path between the source and destination machines for example the database server and Vuser host The graph maps the delay as a function of the elapsed scenario time Each defined path is represented by a separate line with a different color in the graph To measure network performance the Network monitor sends packets of data across the network When a packet returns the monitor calculates the time it takes for the packet to go to the requested node and return This time is the delay which appears in the Network Delay Time graph Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring Note The delays from the source machine to each of the nodes are measured concurrently yet independently It is therefore possible that the delay from the source machine to one of the nodes could be greater than the delay for the complete path between the source and destination machines 499 Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring Tasks gt How to Set Up the Network Monitoring Environment 500 This task describes how to prepare your environment for network monitoring This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 500 gt Configure the UNIX source machine optional on page 500 gt Conf
175. Web server This graph is useful in indicating when additional connections are needed For example if the number of connections reaches a plateau and the transaction response time increases sharply adding connections would probably cause a dramatic improvement in performance reduction in the transaction response time Connections per Second Graph The Connections Per Second graph shows the number of new TCP IP connections y axis opened and the number of connections that are shut down each second of the scenario x axis This number should be a small fraction of the number of hits per second because new TCP IP connections are very expensive in terms of server router and network resource consumption Ideally many HTTP requests should use the same connection instead of opening a new connection for each request SSLs per Second Graph The SSLs per Second graph shows the number of new and reused SSL Connections y axis opened in each second of the scenario x axis An SSL connection is opened by the browser after a TCP IP connection has been opened to a secure server Because creating a new SSL connection entails heavy resource consumption you should try to open as few new SSL connections as possible once you have established an SSL connection you should reuse it There should be no more than one new SSL connection per Vuser If you set your run time settings to simulate a new Vuser at each iteration using the run time setti
176. a This area displays the selected schedule s details Scenario Schedule KA Schedule Name Schedule 1 Schedule by Scenario C Group 12 Run Mode Real world schedule Basic schedule 10 Global Schedule 8 apt e Total 10 Vusers g g o Action Properties Initialize Initialize each Yuser just before it runs 4 157 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios To access Manual scenario gt Design tab gt Scenario Schedule pane Relevant tasks How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 See also gt Parent Topic Scenario Schedule Pane on page 149 gt Scheduling by Scenario or Group on page 128 gt Schedule Run Modes on page 130 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description E New Schedule Creates a new schedule x Delete Schedule Deletes the selected schedule az Save New Name Saves a new name given to the schedule Note Enabled when you start typing the new name Start Time Opens the Scenario Start Time dialog box You can schedule the scenario to start running gt Without delay As soon as the Start Scenario command is issued gt With a delay of HH MM SS The specified time after the Start Scenario command was issued gt At HH MM SS on lt date gt At a specified time on the specified date Group schedule only Wait for all groups to finish initi
177. a firewall Note You can connect the Controller to load generators over a firewall or Monitor Over Firewall machines without using the MI Listener and LoadRunner agent To do so open port 54345 on a firewall in the load generator Monitor Over Firewall machine s LAN and in the Controller s LAN to allow incoming and outgoing data amp Monitors Over a Firewall To monitor servers over a firewall you need to configure the Monitor Over Firewall machine On the Monitor Over Firewall machine you use the Server Monitor configuration tool to select which servers to monitor and to define specific measurements that LoadRunner collects for each monitored server To enable monitoring of your servers over a firewall you install the Monitor Over Firewall component on a dedicated machine Important Before you configure your system to monitor your servers over a firewall ensure that you have completed the configuration steps described in How to Configure the Over Firewall System on page 357 After you have set up your LoadRunner system to work with firewalls you need to configure the monitor settings on the Monitor Over Firewall machine 353 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner You use the Server Monitor configuration tool to select which servers to monitor and to define specific measurements that LoadRunner collects for each monitored server For more information see How to Configure Monitors Over a Firewal
178. able describes the default counters that can be monitored Measurement Description Errors per Second The number of errors per second Requests Wait Time The number of milliseconds the most recent request was waiting in the queue Requests Executing The number of requests currently executing Requests Queued The number of requests waiting in the queue for service Requests Rejected The total number of requests not executed because there were insufficient resources to process them Requests Not Found The number of requests for files that were not found Requests sec The number of requests executed per second Memory Allocated Errors During Script Run Time The total amount of memory in bytes currently allocated by Active Server Pages The number of failed requests due to run time errors Sessions Current The current number of sessions being serviced Transactions sec The number of transactions started per second R WebLogic SNMP Performance Counters The following tables describe the measurements and server properties that can be monitored 525 Chapter 28 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring Server Table The Server Table lists all WebLogic SNMP servers that are being monitored by the agent A server must be contacted or be reported as a member of a cluster at least once before it will appear in this table Servers are on
179. ace This section includes in alphabetical order gt Graph Configuration Dialog Box on page 298 gt Measurement Configuration Dialog Box on page 301 gt Open a New Graph Dialog Box on page 303 gt Overlay Graphs Dialog Box on page 304 Graph Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to customize the online graph settings To access Use one of the following gt Select Monitors gt Online Graphs gt Configure gt Right click a graph and select Configure Important You can apply these settings to all graphs or to a specific information graph only Relevant tasks How to Customize Online Graph and Measurement Settings on page 293 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Apply to all graphs Applies the dialog box settings to all graphs Apply to selected graph Applies the dialog box settings to the selected graph 298 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs UI Elements A Z Description Bar Values Type If the Bar display type is selected determines the type of value that will be displayed in the bar graph Average Last Value Minimum Maximum Display Type The type of graph displayed line graph or bar graph By default each graph is displayed as a line graph Note For the Network Delay graph if you right click the graph and select View Segments you can view the network segments of th
180. achine If the Mediator is already connected to the remote machine using another configuration it maintains that prior connection This may lead to an error if the remote machine user is a non administrator For more information see Microsoft Windows networking limitation Failed to establish connection System error 1219 on page 425 D Connecting to a Remote UNIX Server When monitoring a remote UNIX server the Mediator supports two types of connections Remote Shell RSH RCP Connection For more information on remote shell connections see the Verifying your UNIX Installation section in the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide Secured Shell PLINK PSCP Connection The secured shell connection is based on the SSH protocol which enables a secure connection to a remote machine by an authentication mechanism using RSA and DSA and encrypted communication 385 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 386 SSH Protocol Security The SSH protocol has the following security levels gt Using a user name and password gt Using a user name and key pair without passphrase protection gt Using a user name key pair and a passphrase protected private key SSH Protocol Implementation The Mediator uses PuTTY as an SSH implementation You can find the following PuTTY tools in the bin directory of the LoadRunner installation gt PUTTY EXE gt PAGEANT EXE gt PLINK EXE gt PSCP EXE gt PSFTP EXE gt
181. adRunner Agent Process You need to run the LoadRunner Agent as a process for each terminal session that you are running Chapter 9 Configuring Terminal Services Settings Note For more information about the LoadRunner Agent see Working with the LoadRunner Agent on page 524 3 Launch a terminal client session Be aware of the following gt You must open a Terminal Client session for each terminal that you want to run Vusers on during the scenario gt If you are connecting to an existing Terminal Services session you need to open a Terminal Client session log in to the session and run the LoadRunner Agent as a process 4 Distribute Vusers on the terminal server In the Terminal Services Tab of the Load Generator Information dialog box Select Enable Terminal Services Manager and enter information about the terminals and Vusers that you want to use For more information see Load Generator Configuration gt Terminal Services Tab on page 116 gt How to Configure Terminal Sessions Over a Firewall This task describes how to configure a terminal sessions on a load generator that is located over a firewall You configure the terminal sessions as independent virtual load generators Each virtual load generator must have its own logical name This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisite on page 198 gt Configure the terminal sessions as independent load generators on page 198 197 Chapter 9
182. ads Indicates the number of logical read requests for index pages that have gone through the buffer pool Indicates the number of physical read requests to get index pages into the buffer pool pool_index_writes Indicates the number of times a buffer pool index page was physically written to disk pool_read_time Provides the total amount of elapsed time spent processing read requests that caused data or index pages to be physically read from disk to buffer pool pool_write_time Provides the total amount of time spent physically writing data or index pages from the buffer pool to disk files_closed The total number of database files closed 541 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring 542 Measurement Description pool_async_data_reads The number of pages read asynchronously into the buffer pool pool_async_data_writes The number of times a buffer pool data page was physically written to disk by either an asynchronous page cleaner or a pre fetcher A pre fetcher may have written dirty pages to disk to make space for the pages being pre fetched pool_async_index_writes pool_async_index_reads The number of times a buffer pool index page was physically written to disk by either an asynchronous page cleaner or a pre fetcher A pre fetcher may have written dirty pages to disk to make space for the pages being pre fetched The number of index pages read asynch
183. ailed of result diagnostics and log file collation from each load generator or mediator This information is stored in the collateLog txt file 17 Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner This chapter includes Concepts gt Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner Overview on page 330 gt About GUI Vuser Scripts on page 330 gt Guidelines for Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner on page 333 Tasks gt How to Add a QuickTest Script to a Load Test Scenario on page 335 329 Chapter 17 Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner Concepts amp Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner Overview HP Functional Testing software QuickTest enables you to create complex tests that examine the full spectrum of your application s functionality LoadRunner can integrate QuickTest scripts into a load testing scenario in the form of GUI Vuser scripts These scripts that have already been designed and debugged in QuickTest can be used as the basis of your load test The main advantages of running QuickTest scripts in LoadRunner are gt To check how your application s functionality is affected by heavy load gt To measure the response time that a typical user experiences on the client side while your application is under load end to end response time For example you can add QuickTest scripts to specific points in a LoadRunner scenario to confirm that the application s functionality is not affected by the extra load at tho
184. ain multiple load generators gt If a schedule is defined for the scenario all the schedule settings remain unchanged 55 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Note You can convert from one scenario mode to another at any time For details see How to Change the Scenario Mode Manual Scenario on page 65 amp Goals Types for Goal Oriented Scenarios 56 In a goal oriented scenario you define the goals you want your test to achieve and LoadRunner automatically builds a scenario for you based on these goals You can define the following types of goals for a goal oriented scenario gt Virtual Users This goal tests if your application can run a specified number of Vusers simultaneously Running this type of goal oriented scenario is similar to running a manual scenario gt Pages per Minute Hits per Second Transactions per Second These goals test the strength of your server For each of these goal types you specify a minimum maximum range of Vusers for the scenario to run and in the case of the Transactions per Second goal type you also specify a transaction name Note gt Pages per Minute and Hits per Second goals are for Web Vusers only gt Hits per second relates to HTTP requests per second Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios When you define one of these goal type the Controller divides the target defined by the minimum number of Vusers specified and determines the target number
185. al See also The Service Level Agreement Wizard contains Welcome gt Select a Measurement Page gt Select Transactions Page gt Set Load Criteria Page gt Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Time Interval Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Available Transactions Lists the transactions in the Vuser scripts participating in the scenario To move a script to the Selected Transaction list select it and click Add Selected Transactions Lists the transactions in the Vuser scripts participating in the scenario that have been selected for the SLA To remove a script from this list select it and click Remove 177 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements 178 Set Load Criteria Page This wizard page enables you to select load criteria to take into account when testing your goal Important information gt General information about this wizard is available here Service Level Agreement Wizard on page 174 This page is displayed only when defining an SLA that determines SLA statuses per time interval over a timeline gt In the next wizard step Set Threshold Values page you will set different thresholds per each of the load ranges that you select here Wizard map Goal measured per time interval The Service Level Agreement Wizard contains Welcome gt Select
186. alization When this option is selected all of the Vusers in all of the Vuser groups finish initializing before any of them start running Note When this option is selected Initialize each Vuser just before it runs is not available For details about the Initialize action see Initialize on page 143 158 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Run Mode The mode according to which the schedule will run gt Real world schedule A schedule designed according to a true to life series of events gt Basic schedule A schedule according to which all the Vusers start running run for a given duration and then all stop running For details see Schedule Run Modes on page 130 Default value Real world Note To change the default select Tools gt Options gt Execution tab Schedule by The schedule type gt Scenario Runs all participating Vuser Groups together on the same schedule gt Group Each Vuser group runs on its own schedule For details see Scheduling by Scenario or Group on page 128 Schedule Name The name given to the schedule 159 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios 160 7 Service Level Agreements This chapter includes Concepts gt Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 gt Tracking Period on page 163 Tasks gt How to Define Service Level Agreements on page 164 gt How to Define Servic
187. all daemons which are uncommented including the rstatd daemon d Run rup again If the command still does not indicate that the rstatd daemon is configured contact your system administrator 3 Configure the monitor for a UNIX machine over a firewall optional To monitor a UNIX machine over a firewall you must run a UNIX utility called rpcinfo and identify the rstatd s port number Run rpcinfo p lt hostname gt You will receive a list of all RPC servers registered in the host s portmapper along with the port number This list will not change until rstatd is stopped and rerun Some firewalls allow you to open an RPC program number instead of a port In such cases open program 100001 If are prompted to include a version number specify versions 3 and 4 4 Configure the monitor measurements in the Controller For task details see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 483 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring 484 Click Add in the Resource Measurements on lt machine gt section of the UNIX Resources dialog box to open the UNIX Kernel Statistics dialog box and select the available measurements and server properties For more information see UNIX Kernel Statistics Dialog Box on page 495 For a description of the available UNIX monitor measurements see UNIX Resources Performance Counters on page 486 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring Reference Check Point FireWa
188. ame or short title for the scenario 245 Chapter 12 Before Running Your Scenario 246 13 Running Scenarios This chapter includes Concepts gt Running Scenarios Overview on page 248 Tasks gt How to Run a Scenario on page 249 gt Control Vusers During a Scenario Run Use Case Scenario on page 252 Reference gt Run View User Interface on page 270 247 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Concepts amp Running Scenarios Overview 248 After planning designing and scheduling your scenario you run it to create load on your application and to test its performance Start of run When you instruct LoadRunner to begin the scenario run the Controller checks the scenario configuration information invokes the applications that were selected to run with the scenario and then distributes each Vuser script to its designated load generator When the Vusers are ready they start running their scripts As the scenario starts in the Scenario Groups pane you can watch Vusers gradually start running During run During the scenario run you can see a synopsis of the running scenario in the Scenario Status pane You can also drill down to see which Vuser actions are causing the application problems The Controller s online graphs display performance data collected by the monitors You use this information to isolate potential problem areas in your system End of run The scenario ends when all the Vu
189. ample the Controller must be excluded Accordingly the following machines are excluded by default gt The Controller or the MI Listener and proxy server gt The Diagnostics Commander server In addition to the machines which are excluded by default the integrated 3rd party software may provide an interface for excluding additional machines from the WAN Emulation For a list of some examples of when you may want to exclude additional machines see Additional Reasons to Exclude Machines below Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings Note The option to exclude machines from the WAN Emulation might not be available To check for the availability of this option consult the relevant 3rd party software documentation Additional Reasons to Exclude Machines Examples of situations where you should exclude machines from an emulated WAN include gt In a Multiprotocol scenario that includes a Web server and a database server where information from the database server is not required as a part of the load test In such a case you would exclude the database server gt You may want to exclude all deployment and software upgrade servers gt Where a user runs and stores scripts on a shared network drive 203 Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings Tasks gt How to Integrate WAN Emulation Into Your Scenario 204 This task describes how to run a scenario using WAN Emulation and view the WAN m
190. and indicates that five are currently running and that five are still down Vusers 30 Load Generator Elapsed Time Running Script amp localhost 00 01 03 E Bun Running Script A localhost 00 00 53 R Gradual Stop S Running Script A localhost 00 00 33 Running Script A localhost 00 00 23 Running Script A localhost 00 00 03 n Down Script localhost n Down Script A localhost n Down Script localhost n Down Script A localhost Ax Down Script localhost 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 He then selects Vuser number 1 or any running Vuser that he wishes to stop and then selects one of the stopping options 257 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 258 gt Stop the Vuser gradually David clicks Gradual Stop and the Vuser immediately moves from the Run state to the Gradual Exiting state where it completes its current iteration or action before stopping Group Name ee Ea Init ia Run Rendez Passed Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Stopped 3 15 0 Oo 0 14 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Script A 5 4 1 Script_B 5 EE 5 Stop the Vuser immediately David clicks Stop and the Vuser immediately stops running and moves to the Stopped state Failed 0 Gradual Exiting 0 Exiting 0 Stopped 1 1 Error 0 Passed 0 Down 15 Group Name Pending Init Ready Run Rendez 0 oanig 0 Chapter 13 Running Scenari
191. ane click the Advanced button b Select Tracking period of at least X seconds and select a tracking period The time intervals are calculated by Analysis according to a built in algorithm and as a function of the value you enter here Example If you select a tracking period of 10 and the aggregation granularity for the scenario defined in Analysis is 6 then the tracking period is set to the nearest multiple of 6 that is greater than or equal to 10 that is Tracking Period 12 For details see Tracking Period on page 163 For user interface details see Advanced Options Dialog Box on page 171 169 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements 8 Results When analyzing your scenario run Analysis applies your SLA settings to the default Summary Report and the report is updated to include all the relevant SLA information For example it displays the worst performing transactions in terms of defined SLAs how specific transactions performed over set time intervals and overall SLA statuses For more information see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide 170 Reference Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Service Level Agreements User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Advanced Options Dialog Box on page 171 gt Goal Details Dialog Box on page 172 gt Service Level Agreement Pane on page 173 Advanced Options Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to define a tracking
192. ange the original Vuser distribution In other words should David complete the step now the single Vuser that is assigned to script_a will be stopped while the one each assigned to script_b and script_c will not though they will still appear under the number column To distribute these two Vusers to script_a instead David must first change the percentage columns for these scripts to 0 He then clicks Stop Three of the running Vusers in Script_A move from the Run state to the Gradual Exiting state Group Name Down Pending Init Ready Run alee Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Stopped a 0 0 0 O 12 0 0 0 0 6 0 12 Script 2 4 4 Script _B 5 1 4 Scit E 5 1 4 269 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Reference Run View User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Execution Notes Dialog Box on page 270 gt Output Window on page 271 gt Run Tab on page 276 gt Run Stop Vusers Dialog Box on page 279 gt Scenario Groups Pane on page 282 gt Scenario Status Pane on page 285 gt Transactions Dialog Box on page 286 gt Vuser Script Log on page 287 Execution Notes Dialog Box 270 This page dialog box enables you to log comments while a scenario is running To access Select Scenario gt Execution Notes Relevant tasks How to Run a Scenario on page 249 Important Only enabled while the scenario is running Information Use
193. anual scenario gt Design tab gt Scenario Schedule pane Important Only real world schedules can be modified from the information interactive schedule graph You can modify Start Vusers Duration and Stop Vusers actions To modify a basic schedule you must edit the actions in the Actions grid itself Relevant tasks gt How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 gt How to Add Actions to the Scenario Schedule on page 136 How to Edit Schedule Actions on page 139 See also Parent Topic Scenario Schedule Pane on page 149 Schedule Actions on page 142 VV VY Actions Grid on page 150 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description Real world schedule only New Action Appends a new action after the last action in the graph Append new actions as follows gt Start Vusers Click the graph anywhere to the right of and above the endpoint of the last line of the graph gt Duration Click the graph anywhere to the right of the the endpoint of last line of the graph gt Stop Vusers Click the graph anywhere to the right of and below the endpoint of the last line of the graph Note Available when the graph is in Edit mode only See Edit View Mode 7 below a Real world schedule only Split Action Splits a selected line
194. ard layout channel This is measured in bps Input Licensing Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the licensing channel This is measured in bps Input LPT1 Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the LPT1 channel This is measured in bps Input LPT2 Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the LPT2 channel This is measured in bps Input Management Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the client management channel This is measured in bps Input PN Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the Program Neighborhood channel This is measured in bps Input Printer Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the printer spooler channel This is measured in bps 597 Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring 598 Measurement Description Input Seamless Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the Seamless channel This is measured in bps Input Text Echo Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the local text echo data channel This is measured in bps Input Thinwire Bandwidth Input VideoFrame Bandwidth This value represents the ban
195. are especially useful for determining server performance and isolating the cause of a bottleneck during an initial stress test on a Web server For more information about these counters see Useful Counters for Stress Testing on page 396 Chapter 27 Web Server Resource Monitoring Tasks gt How to change the Apache default server properties This task describes how to modify the Apache default server properties that are defined in the monitor configuration file 1 Open the apache cfg file in the lt LoadRunner root folder gt dat monitors directory 2 Edit the following parameters after the Delimiter statement InfoURL Server statistics information URL ServerPort Server port number SamplingRate Rate milliseconds at which the LoadRunner monitor will poll the server for the statistics information If this value is greater than 1000 LoadRunner will use it as its sampling rate Otherwise it will use the sampling rate defined in the Monitors tab of the Options dialog box 3 Save and close the file Chapter 27 Web Server Resource Monitoring Reference Apache Performance Counters The following table describes the measurements and server properties that can be monitored on the Apache Web server during the scenario run Measurement Description Busy Servers Idle Servers The number of servers in the Busy state The number of servers in the Idle state Apache CPU Usage The percentag
196. area You can add modify and delete actions These actions include starting Vuser groups in group schedules and initializing starting and stopping Vusers You can also define how long each action should continue When creating group schedules you can copy group schedule settings from one Vuser group to another Run Mode Real world schedule Basic schedule 10 Global Schedule 8 wpet e Total 10 Vusers 5 6 77 Action Properties Initialize Initialize each Yuser just before it runs 4 Start Vusers Start 10 Vusers 2 every 00 00 15 HH MM SS Duration Run for 00 05 00 HH MM SS Stop Vusers Stop all Yusers 5 every 00 00 30 HH MM SS 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 02 00 00 To access Manual scenario gt Design tab gt Scenario Schedule pane Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Relevant tasks gt How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 gt How to Add Actions to the Scenario Schedule on page 136 How to Edit Schedule Actions on page 139 See also Parent Topic Scenario Schedule Pane on page 149 Schedule Actions on page 142 VVvVV Y Interactive Schedule Graph on page 154 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Real world schedule only Add Action After Opens the Add Action dialog box where you can define new actions For details see Add Action Dialog Box on page 147
197. arily instead of removing it entirely from your list of load generators You can also disable load generators to isolate a specific machine to test its performance To set attributes for a specific load generator see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 To set global settings for all the load generators participating in the scenario see Options Dialog Box on page 221 amp Load Balancing 102 Load balancing evenly distributes the load generated by Vusers among the requested load generators ensuring an accurate load test When a Windows load generator s CPU usage becomes overloaded the Controller stops loading Vusers on the overloaded load generator and automatically distributes them among load generators taking part in the scenario Only where there are no other load generators in the scenario does the Controller stop loading Vusers Chapter 5 Load Generators You can monitor the status of a machine s CPU usage using the icons in the Load Generators dialog box see Load Generators Dialog Box on page 124 When the CPU usage of a load generator becomes problematic the icon to the left of the load generator name contains a yellow bar When the machine becomes overloaded the icon contains a red bar Note Load balancing is only available in manual scenarios in the percentage mode and in goal oriented scenarios 103 Chapter 5 Load Generators Tasks How to Connect to
198. ario If you do not select the scripts here you can select them in the step When you click OK the scenario opens in the Design tab 3 Add load generators to the scenario Fl Click the Load Generators button In the Load Generators dialog box that opens click Add and enter the details of the load generator you are adding For details about adding load generators see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 63 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 4 Add Vuser groups scripts to the scenario Vuser Group Mode In the Scenario Groups pane create Vuser groups to participate in the scenario To create a group a Click the Add Group button b In the Add Group dialog box gt Give the group a name and assign a number of Vusers to the group gt Select a load generator on which to run the Vusers gt Select a Vuser script Percentage Mode In Scenario Scripts pane add groups to participate in the scenario as follows w a Click the Add Group button and select a Vuser script from the list b In the Scenario Scripts pane s Load Generator column select load generators on which to run the scripts Note By default the script will run on all the load generators in the scenario c When you have selected all the scripts for the scenario in the Scenario Scripts pane s column assign a percentage of the total number of Vusers to each script Assign percentages to the scripts starting with the firs
199. ario Options on page 216 Reference gt Path Translation Table on page 219 gt Configuring Scenario Options User Interface on page 221 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Concepts amp Configuring Scenario Options Overview Before you run a scenario you can configure both the load generator and Vuser behavior for the scenario Although the default settings correspond to most environments LoadRunner allows you to modify the settings to customize the scenario behavior The settings apply to all future scenario runs and generally need to be set only once You configure these settings from the Tools gt Options dialog box Settings related to load generator behavior apply to all the load generators in a scenario Note You can configure settings for an individual load generator that override the global settings for that particular load generator For details see How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 Global scenario configuration settings are unrelated to the Vuser run time settings Run time settings apply to individual Vusers or scripts and contain information about logging think time and the network the number of iterations and the browser For information on setting run time settings see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide amp Expert Mode 212 Expert mode is intended to provide support personnel with access to system information When you work in the Expert mode the Controller dialog
200. atforms and applies to the following protocols Client Server DNS Windows Sockets Custom Javascript Vuser VB Vuser VB Script Vuser E business FTP Palm SOAP Web HTTP HTML Web Services WinSock Web Dual Protocol ERP CRM Oracle NCA Oracle Web Applications 11i PeopleSoft Enterprise SAP Web Siebel Web Legacy RTE Mailing Services Internet Messaging IMAP POP3 SMTP Streaming Data Real Wireless i Mode VoiceXML WAP Chapter 8 Multiple IP Addresses Tasks gt How to Add IP Addresses to a Load Generator The following steps describe how to add IP addresses to a load generator This task includes the following steps gt Run the IP Wizard on the load generator on page 185 gt Update the server s routing table with the new addresses on page 186 gt Enable the Multiple IP Addresses feature from the Controller on page 187 1 Run the IP Wizard on the load generator gt Windows LoadRunner includes an IP Wizard program that you run on Windows load generators to create multiple IP addresses You add new IP addresses to a machine once and use the addresses for all scenarios Run the IP Wizard on the load generator to add a specified number of IP addresses For details see IP Wizard on page 190 After running the wizard restart the load generator machine gt UNIX Manually configure the new IP addresses for UNIX load generators For details see How to Configu
201. ating in the scenario Note Available for group schedules only Open Full View Opens the graph in its own window Note All the options available in the Schedule pane s interactive graph are also available in the full view graph window Zoom In Zooms into the x axis of the graph that is spreads the graph out to view shorter time intervals Zoom Out Zoom out of the x axis of the graph that is displays longer time intervals Zoom Reset Reverts to the default time intervals displayed on the x axis Hide Legend Hides the graph legend Show Legend Shows the graph legend Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description lt End points gt When an action line in the graph is selected two endpoints are displayed gt Dot Starting point of the line gt Diamond The endpoint of a selected line Can be dragged to edit an action For details see How to Edit Schedule Actions on page 139 Note To fine tune any of the details of the selected action line use the arrow keys on your keyboard lt Schedule progress indicator gt A red vertical line that slides across the schedule graph while the schedule is running Note The schedule may run a few seconds ahead of the scenario run lt Time scroll bar gt Appears if when zooming into the graph the graph spreads out wider than the graph area R Schedule Definition Are
202. ating in the scenario gt Script Name The name of the Vuser script gt Script Path The path of the Vuser script If you want to access the script from a location that is relative to the current scenario directory you can replace the actual path with the relative path For details see Relative Paths for Scripts on page 70 gt of Target The percentage of the overall target number of Vusers pages per minute hits per second transactions per second or transaction response time that is automatically distributed to each Vuser script gt Load Generators The load generators assigned to the script If you select multiple load generators for a script the Vusers assigned to the script are distributed evenly among the load generators Default value All Load Generators Note To add a load generator to this list select Add from the list For more details see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 93 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Script Information Dialog Box This dialog box displays details about the selected Vuser group and enables you to modify the group s settings To access Design tab gt Scenario Scripts pane gt Details a Important Available when a script is selected in the Scenario Scripts information pane Relevant to gt Manual scenarios in percentage mode gt Goal oriented scenarios Relevant tasks gt How to View Modify Scripts in the S
203. ation Results If the update was successful Host Security Manager displays the time and status of the security key mode update for each host 637 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication Reference Secure Host Communication Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Add Hosts Dialog Box on page 638 gt Host Security Manager Window on page 639 gt Host Security Setup Dialog Box on page 642 gt Update Security Key Dialog Box on page 643 gt Update Security Mode Dialog Box on page 644 Add Hosts Dialog Box This window enables you to add hosts to the Hosts list in Host Security Manager To access Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Tools gt Host Security Manager gt Add Hosts Relevant tasks How to Register Hosts in Host Security Manager on page 634 User interface elements are described below UI Elements Description Add Adds the Controller and load generators to the list of hosts 638 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication UI Elements Description Controller name or IP Enter the name or IP address of the Controller you want to register in Host Security Manager Note You can enter more than one Controller at a time separated by commas Load Generators name or IP separated by commas Enter the names or IP addresses of the load generator hosts you want to register in Host Security Manager Note You can
204. ay graphs on page 296 gt Export graphs to HTML on page 296 Freeze graphs You can pause a specific graph during a scenario run Select the graph and select Monitors gt Online Graph gt Freeze or right click the graph and select Freeze To resume repeat the above action When resumed the graph displays the data for the paused period as well Overlay graphs You can merge or overlay the results of two graphs from the same scenario into a single graph This enables you to compare several different measurements at once In the Run tab right click one of the online graphs you want to overlay and select Overlay Graphs Note The x axis of both graphs must be the same measurement For details see Overlay Graphs Dialog Box on page 304 Export graphs to HTML You can export graphs displayed on the Run tab to HTML format for offline viewing at a later stage When you export to HTML the legend is also displayed with the graph You can export a single graph or all graphs in the online monitor display Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs To export a single graph a Right click the graph and select Export to HTML b Specify a path and filename for the exported graph report To export all the displayed graph a Select Monitors gt Export Online Graphs to HTML b Specify a path and filename for the exported graphs reports 297 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs Reference Online Monitor Graphs User Interf
205. ays the total number of sent messages with the specified code Chapter 13 Running Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Type The type of message being displayed The following icons indicate the various message types For more information about each type see Type of Message below gt Batch gt Notifications gt a Warnings Type of Message Vusers Filters the output messages to display only certain message types Select one of the following filters gt All messages Displays all message types gt Batch Sent instead of message boxes appearing in the Controller if you are using automation gt Debug Sent only if the debugging feature is enabled in the Controller Expert mode Tools gt Options gt Debug Information For more information see Options gt Debug Information Tab on page 223 gt Errors Usually indicate that the script failed gt Notifications Provides run time information such as message sent using Ir_output_message gt Warnings Indicates that the Vuser encountered a problem but the scenario continued to run Displays the number of Vusers that generated messages with the specified code 273 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 274 R Filtered Tab This tab displays a drilled down view by message Vuser script or load generator For example if you drill down on the Vuser column the Filtered tab displays all the messages with the
206. behavior addition and stopping of Vusers during the scenario run optional You can do the following during the scenario run Note For a use case scenario that explains the differences between the following options see Control Vusers During a Scenario Run Use Case Scenario on page 252 gt Control the behavior of Vuser groups You can initialize run and stop Vuser groups during the scenario run To initialize run or stop an entire Vuser group select the group in the Scenario Groups pane and click the desired button on the main Controller toolbar gt Initialize Vusers ge gt Run Vusers gt Stop Vusers immediately L gt Stop Vusers gradually 3g gt Run or stop individual Vusers You can run or stop specific Vusers within a Vuser group For user interface details see Vusers Dialog Box on page 98 gt Initialize Run additional Vusers or stop currently running Vusers You can manually control the addition of new Vusers to a running scenario as well as stop running Vusers For user interface details see Run Stop Vusers Dialog Box on page 279 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 5 View a log containing run time information about each running Vuser Optional For user interface details see Vuser Script Log on page 287 6 Release Vusers from a rendezvous before the Controller releases them Optional For more information see Rendezvous Points on page 313 7 Log execution notes d
207. ble logging on the Siebel Server For task details see page 407 400 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 3 Enable the Siebel DB Diagnostics module To enable the Siebel DB Diagnostics module a Select Diagnostics gt Configuration to open the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box Then select Enable the following diagnostics and specify the percentage of Vusers for which you want to collect Siebel DB Diagnostics data For user interface details see Diagnostics Distribution Dialog Box on page 413 In the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box click Configure next to Siebel DB Diagnostics to enable the module and to define server information For user interface details see Siebel DB Configuration Dialog Box on page 422 How to Configure Oracle 11i Diagnostics This task describes how to configure the Oracle 11i Diagnostics module to communicate with the Mediator and how to define the servers that you want to monitor in order to generate diagnostics data This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 401 gt gt Enable logging on the Oracle server on page 404 Set or Disable the Oracle Server Diagnostics Password Optional on page 404 gt Select the Oracle NCA application version on page 405 gt Enable the Oracle 11i Diagnostics module on page 405 Prerequisites gt Make sure that the ERP CRM Mediator is installed The Mediator which collects and process
208. blems after installing and configuring all the necessary components check the table below for troubleshooting tips Check To check that the Firewall service was activated on the agent machine 2 y H Port 2 443 MI Listener Machine Load Generator Agent Machine Firewall Solution There should be a traffic light on the right side of the LoadRunner Agent icon on the machine running monitoring Vusers over a firewall If there is no traffic light this indicates that the FirewallServiceActive 1 is not set in the FireWall section of the Agent Settings See Agent Configuration Settings Dialog Box on page 369 a Ais ia Listener Machine Load P Agent Machine Po To check that port 443 is open On the agent machine open a Command Prompt window and type the following telnet lt MI_Listener_IP gt 443 For example telnet 111 111 111 1111 443 If port 443 is open a new Telnet window will open If port 443 is not open contact your network administrator 375 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 376 Check Solution To check that port 443 is available Web server Web server Port 443 MI Listener i Load Generator Machine Firewall Agent Machine If a Web server is running on the MI Listener or Monitor over Firewall machine port 443 will not allow the access required by the listening and monitoring processes Contact yo
209. bleshooting and Limitations This section describes troubleshooting and limitations for ERP CRM Diagnostics Microsoft Windows networking limitation Failed to establish connection System error 1219 Possible causes gt The limitation might be a result of running the LoadRunner agent as a process gt The limitation might appear if the Mediator is already connected to the Server with a prior configuration and if the server user is a non administrator 425 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 426 Solution You can try the following gt Run the LoadRunner agent as a service For more information see Running the LoadRunner Agent as a Service on page 524 gt Disconnect all previous Mediator connections to the server and try to connect again gt To check that a connection exists at the Command prompt run the following net use gt To remove a connection at the Command prompt run the following net use servername sharename DELETE gt Use your own connection to the log directory by supplying the UNC path to the log directory and marking the operating system as WINDOWS When the Mediator runs it will not try to create a connection but will rely on the given UNC path instead Error RSH Command Failed Solution Run the same command from the DOS command prompt to determine if it is a problem with the command or with LoadRunner If it runs at the DOS command prompt the command is valid
210. bove status codes and their descriptions see http Awww w3 org Protocols rfc2616 rfc2616 sec10 html sec10 24 Run Time and Transaction Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Run Time Graphs Overview on page 472 gt Transaction Monitor Graphs Overview on page 474 471 Chapter 24 Run Time and Transaction Monitoring Concepts amp Run Time Graphs Overview 472 The Run Time monitor provides information about the status of the Vusers participating in the scenario and the number and types of errors that the Vusers generate In addition the Run Time monitor provides the User Defined Data Points graph which displays the real time values for user defined points in a Vuser script The Run Time monitor is enabled by default it automatically begins monitoring Vusers at the start of a scenario You can view the following Run Time monitor graphs during a scenario run Running Vusers Graph The monitor s Running Vusers graph provides information about the status of the Vusers running in the current scenario on all load generator machines The graph shows the number of running Vusers while the information in the legend indicates the number of Vusers in each state a Running 14 2 7 632653 3 783389 14 Error 0 0 0 0 0 a Finished 0 0 0 0 0 The Status field of each Vuser displays the current status of the Vuser The following table describes each Vuser status Status Description Running The
211. by the listening and monitoring processes Relevant tasks How to Configure the Over Firewall System on page 357 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Check Client Certificates Select True to request that the client send an SSL certificate when connecting and to authenticate the certificate Default value is False Private Key Password The password that may be required during the SSL certificate authentication process There is no default value Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner Monitor Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to select the type of monitors to run and the server whose resources you want to monitor add the measurements to monitor for each server and specify the frequency with which you want the monitored measurements to be reported Monitor Configuration To access Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Advanced Settin gs gt Monitor Configuration For machines without the complete LoadRunner installation select Start gt Programs gt Server Monitor gt Monitor Configuration Relevant tasks How to Configure Monitors Over a Firewall on page 365 373 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 374 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description TP Adds a server or measurement to the monitored server list
212. cal load generator via a terminal services session The following diagram illustrates how the LoadRunner components work together during a terminal session Client Sessions Terminal Sessions ean ta te S hA6B 424664 Gaeaeaeaeca aa pacat esei Application Under Test Load Generator Controller Terminal Services Manager 195 Chapter 9 Configuring Terminal Services Settings Tasks gt How to Use the Terminal Services Manager 196 This task describes how to set up and use LoadRunner s Terminal Services Manager This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisite on page 196 gt Set up the LoadRunner agent on the load generator on page 196 gt Launch a terminal client session on page 197 gt Distribute Vusers on the terminal server on page 197 1 Prerequisite Make sure that a load generator has been installed on the terminal services machine For more information see the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide 2 Set up the LoadRunner agent on the load generator Perform the following steps a Select Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Advanced Settings gt Agent Configuration or run lt LR gt launch_service bin AgentConfig exe to open the Agent Configuration dialog box b Select Enable Terminal Services and click OK c Restart the LoadRunner Agent as a process by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop or from Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Lo
213. cannot get performance counters for the SQL server version 6 5 on the monitored machine There is a bug in SQL server version 6 5 As a workaround give read permission to the following registry key at the monitored machine use regedt32 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft MSSQLServ er MSSQLServer Microsoft tech note number Q170394 The selected measurements are not displayed in the graph Ensure that the display file and online exe are registered To register the monitor dll s without performing a full installation run the set_mon bat batch file located in LoadRunner bin When monitoring a Windows machine no measurements appear in the graph When monitoring a UNIX machine no measurements appear in the graph Check the built in Windows Performance Monitor If it is not functional there may be a problem with the communication setup Ensure that an rstatd is running on the UNIX machine Refer to UNIX Resource Monitoring on page 479 Troubleshooting Monitor Network Connections If you notice extraordinary delays on the network refer to one of the following sections to increase the performance gt Network Bandwidth Utilization gt Ethernet bus Based Networks gt Working on a WAN or Heavily Loaded LAN 663 Chapter 39 Troubleshooting Online Monitors 664 Network Bandwidth Utilization In most load testing scenario the network card has little impact on scenario perf
214. case only five Their status changes from Down to Pending to Initializing to Ready They then run according to their defined schedules Group Name Down Pending Init Ready Run Rendez Passed Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Stopped 3 alt 0 0 5 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Script 5 5 Script B 5 5 Script_C 5 5 Note Only Vusers that are in the Down state can be initialized Vusers that have been initialized already are unaffected Run a Vuser group If David wants to run all the Vusers in Script_C simultaneously he selects the script in the Scenario Groups pane and clicks the Run Vusers button on the Controller toolbar All Vusers in the group that have not yet started running move to the Run state and begin executing their scripts Failed 0 Stopped 0 Passed 0 Rendez 0 Run 20 Init 0 Pending 0 Ready 0 Error Gradual Exiting 0 0 Exiting 0 Down 10 5 5 Group Name 3 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Stop a Vuser Group If David wants to stop all the Vusers in Script_C from running he has two options gt To stop them immediately He selects the script in the Scenario Groups pane and clicks the Stop Vusers button on the Controller toolbar All Vusers that have been initialized or are already running stop executing their scripts immediately and move directly to the Stopped state
215. cation make sure that each load generator is configured with the same settings For user interface details see Load Generator Configuration gt WAN Emulation Tab on page 123 View WAN metrics in HP LoadRunner Analysis The WAN Emulation starts and stops automatically as you start and stop the scenario WAN metrics are automatically collected during the scenario run You can view all the WAN metrics in the Windows Resources monitor as well as in Analysis using all of the available analysis tools including the option to group metrics by emulated location and to correlate data such as response time with WAN metrics For more information see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide 205 Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings Reference amp WAN Emulation Best Practices We recommend the following when running a scenario with WAN Emulation gt Once the scenario has started check that WAN Emulation is running in one of the following ways gt Check for a confirmation message in the notification messages of the Output window The message should contain the following text WAN Emulation started on host lt host name gt with the following configuration lt config gt gt Ping the load generator from your machine and check that the latency and packet loss behavior is as defined Your machine must not be excluded from WAN Emulation to do this gt If you kill the LR_Bridge exe or magentproc exe processes on a l
216. ce Web Not Found Errors The rate of errors due to requests that could not Service sec be satisfied by the server because the requested document could not be found These are generally reported to the client as an HTTP 404 error code Process Private Bytes The current number of bytes that the process has allocated that cannot be shared with other processes R Web Server Resource Monitoring User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Apache Dialog Box on page 518 gt MS IIS Dialog Box on page 519 517 Chapter 27 Web Server Resource Monitoring Apache Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to configure the measurements and server properties for the Apache monitor To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of Apache dialog Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow How to change the Apache default server properties User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Add Adds the selected measurement to the list of measurements in the Measurements on lt machine gt section of the Apache dialog box Available Select the counter to monitor Select multiple Measurements measurements using the CTRL key Description Displays a description of the selected measurement Server Properties Port Type the port number of the Apache server Note
217. cenario on page 65 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Hae Updates script settings as follows gt Script If the script was modified during a scenario run updates the script details in the scenario gt Run Time Settings If you modified the run time settings from the Controller restores the initial run time settings Opens VuGen where you can view and edit the script For more information on editing scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide LF View Script Note If you use VuGen to make changes to a script while the Controller is running click Refresh and select Script to update the script details in the scenario 94 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Run Time Settings Opens the Run Time Settings dialog box where you can edit the Vuser script s run time settings Notes gt When you modify the run time settings from the Controller LoadRunner runs the script using the modified settings To restore the initial settings previously set using VuGen click the Refresh button and select Run Time Settings gt If run time settings for a script were not defined in VuGen the Controller displays its own default settings for Log and Think Time Default VuGen settings are displayed for all other nodes Command Line The command line options to use when running the script Exampl
218. cenario for you based on these goals This task includes the following steps Prerequisites on page 60 Open a new goal oriented scenario on page 60 Add load generators to the scenario on page 61 Define a goal for the scenario on page 62 gt gt gt gt Assign load generators to each script on page 61 gt gt Assign each script a percentage of the total scenario target on page 62 gt Define service level agreements for the scenario optional on page 62 _ Prerequisites gt Before setting up the scenario decide which goal you want the scenario to reach For details on types of scenario goals see Goals Types for Goal Oriented Scenarios on page 56 gt Before you start designing the scenario record the VuGen scripts that will run in the scenario For details see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide 2 Open a new goal oriented scenario a On the Controller toolbar click the New Scenario button b In the New Scenario dialog box that opens select Goal oriented Scenario Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios c Select scripts to run in the scenario Select scripts in the Available Scripts box and click Add to move them to the Scripts in Scenario box When you click OK the Design tab opens and displays the new scenario Add load generators to the scenario Click the Load Generators button In the Load Generators dialog box that opens click Add and enter the details of the load gen
219. cessseeeceseeeeeesseeeeeeneeeeeeses 629 Remote Security Configuration ee eeseeceessreeceseeesesseeeseeees 630 Host Security Best Practices vst naeia eE EEE 632 TASKS siinne ae aoaaa Sea i e o KNE SSe 633 How to Configure Security Settings Locally on Hosts 633 How to Register Hosts in Host Security Manager cece 634 How to Update Host Security Settings Remotely eee 635 Reference a a cee terasatesascsasevesagat ARS SA RE ES 638 Secure Host Communication Interface eeeeeeeeeseeeeerererrrereereerrees 638 Chapter 36 Controller Command Line Arguments sssseeseseeeseseees 647 COMCE Pt EAEEREN sevens beuederese esses 648 Controller Command Line Arguments Overview cee eens 648 Table of Contents TASKS visivccccccccnnsseecsssccunnnnnanevounvsaess ED EEEE 005s4stvenctcocecesessacnsreeecssereunwens 649 Invoke the Controller from the command Line eee eeeeeeeee 649 RETEREN CE sss ter heb EE TT A EN RRS 650 Command Line Arguments Rules sssseesessssseeeeerrerssseeerrsssseereeressee 650 Application Lifecycle Management Arguments seeereereerrerrerreee 651 Run Time ATSuMe nts si seevevevssevesesesessecsscetecncccecccescsssnsecceeseeevsnantececes 652 Chapter 37 Working with Digital Certificates ee eeeeeee 653 GONCE PUES sesccsssesssisssssssasasenicceccscevecivavcnecesvescubscegess cocetcasdsasesestvacdaasesoss 654 Digital Certificates OVeETVieW eeeceeeseeeeeeesseeecneeesensaeeesensaeeeeses 6
220. code you selected grouped by the Vusers that sent the messages To access Output window gt Summary tab Click the blue link on the column about which you wish to view more information Important The tab is appears when you click on a blue link in the information Summary tab Parent topic Output Window on page 271 See also Summary Tab on page 271 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description a Previous Next View Enables you to move between the various drill down levels Details Displays the full text of the selected output message in the Detailed Message Text area at the bottom of the Output window Export the view Saves the output to a specified file S Refresh ii Refreshes the Filtered tab with new log information that arrived in the Output window updated in the Summary tab lt Message icon gt Displays an icon indicating the type of message by which the current Output view is filtered Active Filter Displays the category or categories by which the current Output view is filtered Chapter 13 Running Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Viewed By Displays the name of the column on which you selected to drill down The following icons indicate the various message types gt Batch gt Notifications gt ZA Warnings gt Detailed Message Text Displays the full t
221. column heading again to reverse the sort order 641 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication Host Security Setup Dialog Box 642 This dialog box enables you to update a host s security settings manually To access On the Controller machine select Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Tools gt Host Security Setup Important When configuring security settings on hosts for the first information time to avoid configuration over non secure channels it is recommended to configure security settings on each host locally using the Host Security Setup utility After initial security configuration you can update security settings locally or simultaneously across all the hosts in the LoadRunner system from the Controller using the HP Host Security Manager utility For details see Remote Security Configuration on page 630 Relevant tasks How to Configure Security Settings Locally on Hosts on page 633 Windows See also Host Security Configuration on page 629 User interface elements are described below UI Elements Select a security mode Description Select one of the following security modes gt Allow non secure communication Allows the host to communicate with other machines over a non secure channel Default gt Enforce secure communication Enforces the host to communicate with other machines over a secure channel If you select this option you must provide
222. consider using the Universal Naming Convention method instead of manually adding path translation information On Windows machines you can tell the Controller to convert all paths to UNC in which case all the machines are able to recognize the path without requiring path translation An example of UNC format is machine_a results 215 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Tasks gt How to Configure Scenario Options 216 The following sections describe how to configure options that will be relevant for all your scenarios You configure these options in the Options dialog box Tools gt Options This task includes the following steps Configure timeout options on page 216 Configure Vuser run time settings on page 216 Configure general scenario options for Expert mode on page 217 gt gt gt gt Configure the default schedule run mode on page 217 gt Configure global run time file storage options on page 218 gt Configure monitoring options on page 218 gt Configure debug information options Expert mode only on page 218 gt Configure output display options Expert mode only on page 218 Configure timeout options Select Tools gt Options gt Timeout tab and specify timeout values for commands related to the load generator For user interface details see Options gt Timeout Tab on page 235 If the command is not executed successfully within the timeout period the load ge
223. context switches Bytes received via The total number of bytes received from the client SQL Net from client over Net8 Logons current The total number of current logons 552 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring Measurement Description Opens of replaced files The total number of files that needed to be reopened because they were no longer in the process file cache User calls Oracle allocates resources Call State Objects to keep track of relevant user call data structures every time you log in parse or execute When determining activity the ratio of user calls to RPI calls gives you an indication of how much internal work is generated as a result of the type of requests the user is sending to Oracle SQL Net roundtrips to from client Bytes sent via SQL Net to client The total number of Net8 messages sent to and received from the client The total number of bytes sent to the client from the foreground process es Opened cursors current The total number of current open cursors DB block changes Closely related to consistent changes this statistic counts the total number of changes that were made to all blocks in the SGA that were part of an update or delete operation These are changes that generate redo log entries and hence will cause permanent changes to the database if the transaction is committed This statistic is a rough indication of total database w
224. cs settings MI Listener The name full name or IP address of the MI Listener machine if you are monitoring over a firewall Name The name of the Mediator used to collect and process the Siebel Diagnostics data Only one Mediator is supported for each diagnostics module Note If you are using a Mediator that is over a firewall enter the local machine key of the Mediator instead of the Mediator machine name Servers Table gt Server Name The name of the Siebel server gt Server ID The Siebel server ID for Siebel application servers only gt Platform The platform of the Siebel server gt Log Directory The Siebel server directory where Siebel log files SARM are written 421 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Siebel DB Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to set up the Siebel DB Diagnostics module to communicate with the Mediator To access Select Diagnostics gt Configuration Click Configure next to Siebel DB Diagnostics Relevant tasks How to Configure Siebel DB Diagnostics on page 396 See also gt Siebel DB Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 423 gt Siebel DB Diagnostics Graphs in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Opens the Siebel DB Server Configuration dialog box where you can add Siebel servers and to enter
225. ctory as recognized by the remote machine For example if the directory scripts is located on the network drive n as mapped by the remote load generator type the path n scripts in the remote_path field 219 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options 220 If a Vuser on the remote UNIX load generator recognizes the above path as m tests you would type this path in the remote_path field gt remote_host is the name or type of the remote load generator For example if all the remote machines are UNIX workstations you could type unix in the remote_host field The options for the remote_host field are the same as the options for the controller_host field listed above The remote_host parameter is optional Examples The examples below show the use of the Path Translation table for a Windows based Controller called Merlin gt Example 1 Vusers are running on a Windows 2003 machine Oasis Merlin maps the network drive as f while Oasis maps it as g loadtest merlin f g loadtest Oasis gt Example 2 Vusers are running on a UNIX machine Ultra Ultra maps the networks drive as u tests load merlin fA u tests load Ultra gt Example 3 The mapping of the network drive by the remote load generator Jaguar is identical to the Controller s mapping so no translation is required This line can be excluded from the Path Translation table merlin n n Jaguar gt Example 4 All Windows based Vuser load genera
226. d and enter the authentication data as a hexadecimal string beginning with Ox in the data field The authentication data value can be obtained from the 577 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring UI Elements Description Login Name The user login name to access the Tuxedo server Default PS Note You can determine the client name from the Irt_tpinitialize statement in the recorded script Password The user password to access the Tuxedo server Default PS Server Name Enter the name of the server The format of the server name is lt machine name gt lt port number gt The default port is 7000 Alternatively you can specify the IP address or the hexadecimal format used by old versions of Tuxedo Note You cannot use quotation marks Client Name Enter the name of the client machine If a Tuxedo server was previously monitored its name is displayed in the Server Name box SAPGUI Logon Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to connect to the SAPGUI server The server information comes from the definitions in the SAP Logon application To access Right click the SAPGUI graph and select Add Measurements This dialog appears only when you add measurements for the first time Important information Once the SAPGUI monitor is activated on the Controller machine you cannot record a SAPGUI protocol script on that machine Relevant tasks
227. d generator assigned to the Vuser s Vuser group To add a load generator to this list select Add from the list For user interface details see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 Select Script Lists the available scripts that have been added to the scenario When you select a script its name and path are displayed above the list To display the scripts with their full paths right click the list area and select Show Paths Vuser Name The name of the selected Vuser 97 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Vusers Dialog Box 98 This dialog box displays the status of the Vusers in the selected Vuser group To access Manual scenario gt Design tab gt Scenario Groups pane gt Vusers fff Relevant tasks gt How to Run a Scenario on page 249 gt Control Vusers During a Scenario Run Use Case Scenario on page 252 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description B Show the Selected Vusers Opens a Run Time Viewer for each selected Vuser x Hide the Selected Vusers Closes the Run Time Viewers that were opened Show Vuser Log Displays a log containing run time information about the Vuser that is refreshed by default every 1000 milliseconds For more information see Vuser Script Log on page 287 it Hide Vuser Log Closes the Vuser log Aun Starts running th
228. d generators that use the rsh shell to establish a connection as the current Windows user due to security considerations To mislead rsh and log in as a user other than the current Windows login select Local user and specify the desired UNIX login name Because modifying the local user name is a security breach for rsh this option should be used only when you encounter a problem connecting to the remote machine 119 Chapter 5 Load Generators 120 UI Elements A Z Description Shell Settings The UNIX shell settings for the remote UNIX load generator Default The Controller connects remotely to the UNIX load generator using rsh remote shell gt Don t use RSH Connects to the remote load generator without using RSH In this case you need to activate the agent daemon on the load generator manually Note If you do want to connect using RSH clear this check box make sure that RSH is enabled on the load generator and make sure that the agent daemon is not already running on the load generator If the agent daemon is running stop it by running the following command from the lt LR_root gt bin directory m_daemon_setup remove gt Default shell The default shell on the UNIX load generator csh C Shell the default bsh Bourne Shell or ksh Korn Shell To work with the load generator your UNIX startup configuration file needs to include specific environment variables For details
229. d hence already in main memory or if it is in use by another process with whom the page is shared Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Measurement Description Pages sec The number of pages read from the disk or written to the disk to resolve memory references to pages that were not in memory at the time of the reference This is the sum of Pages Input sec and Pages Output sec This counter includes paging traffic on behalf of the system Cache to access file data for applications This value also includes the pages to from non cached mapped memory files This is the primary counter to observe if you are concerned about excessive memory pressure that is thrashing and the excessive paging that may result Pool Nonpaged Bytes The number of bytes in the Nonpaged Pool a system memory area where space is acquired by operating system components as they accomplish their appointed tasks Nonpaged Pool pages cannot be paged out to the paging file but instead remain in main memory as long as they are allocated Private Bytes The current number of bytes this process has allocated that cannot be shared with other processes Processor Queue Length The instantaneous length of the processor queue in units of threads This counter is always 0 unless you are also monitoring a thread counter All processors use a single queue in which threads wait for processor cycles This length does not include the thread
230. d with LoadRunner For more information about specific limitations see the QuickTest readme Including Transactions To measure the performance of the server you define transactions A transaction represents an action or a set of actions that you are interested in measuring You define transactions within your Vuser script by enclosing the appropriate sections of the script with start and end transaction statements For example you can define a transaction that measures the time it takes for the server to process a request to view the balance of an account and for the information to be displayed at the ATM 333 Chapter 17 Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner 334 Note LoadRunner only provides performance information for data that is included within a transaction Therefore your QuickTest test must include transactions to be used by LoadRunner For more information about using transactions in QuickTest see the QuickTest documentation Adding Statements You can use the Services object and its associated methods to insert statements that are specifically relevant to performance testing These include Abort GetEnvironmentAttribute LogMessage SetTransactionStatus ThinkTime UserDataPoint StartTransaction and EndTransaction For more information on these methods see the QuickTest documentation Designing Tests for LoadRunner Consider the following design guidelines when designing tests for use with LoadRunner
231. dRunner Agent on fa 443 Each Monitor Over Firewall Machine on yy K page 362 MI Listener Firewall Load Generator Machine Agent Machine gt On the Controller enter the name of the Monitor Over Firewall machine in the Load Generators dialog box and click Connect After about a minute data should start streaming in from the Monitor Over Firewall machine through the MI Listener to the Controller See How to Configure Monitors Over a Firewall on page 365 gt If no data arrives at the Controller try connecting the Controller to the MI Listener as if the Listener were used as a load generator This will help identify the cause of the problem Examine the log file on the Monitor Over Firewall machine by right clicking the LoadRunner Agent icon There should be no error messages gt Start the MI Listener and then manually start the LoadRunner Agent Process by running lt installation gt launch_service bin magnetproc exe on the Monitor Over Firewall machine Allow the Monitor Over Firewall machine sufficient time to connect to the MI Listener then connect the Controller to the Monitor Over Firewall machine If the LoadRunner Agent Process crashes either restart the agent or reboot the Monitor Over Firewall machine 377 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 378 Part V Working with Diagnostics 380 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules This chapter includes Concepts gt
232. date gt Looking for the digital signature in its Certification Authorities list The MI Listener may also require the LoadRunner agent to send a certificate at any point in the session This is called the client side certificate as described in the MI Listener Configuration Settings in Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner on page 349 If the LoadRunner agent owns a certificate it sends it to the MI Listener for the same authentication process If the LoadRunner agent does not own a certificate the communication might not be continued Chapter 38 Working with Digital Certificates An SSL CA list and an SSL Certificate are included in each LoadRunner installation This certificate is the same for all LoadRunner installations which means that it can be obtained by third parties Therefore if you are interested in a more secure process you should create your own Certificate Authority and include it in the list and issue matching certificates for your machines 655 Chapter 38 Working with Digital Certificates Tasks P Create and Use Digital Certificates 656 This task describes how to create a Certification Authority and a Digital Certificate This task includes the following steps gt Create a Certification Authority CA on page 656 gt Create a Digital Certificate on page 658 1 Create a Certification Authority CA Note This step describes how to create a CA using the gen_ca_cert exe utility If you
233. define and edit SLAs in the Controller or in Analysis To define SLAs in the Controller see How to Define Service Level Agreements on page 164 162 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements For details about defining SLAs in Analysis and viewing SLA information in Analysis reports see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide amp Tracking Period When you define an SLAs for measurements that are evaluated over a timeline Analysis determines SLA statuses at specified time intervals within that timeline The frequency of the time intervals is called the tracking period An internally calculated tracking period is defined by default You can change the tracking period by entering a value in the Advanced Options dialog box which Analysis plugs into a built in algorithm to calculate the tracking period For details see Advanced Options Dialog Box on page 171 163 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Tasks gt How to Define Service Level Agreements 164 This task describes how to define service level agreements SLAs You can define service level agreements SLAs which measure scenario goals over time intervals or over a whole scenario run For details see Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 See also the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide Tip For a use case scenario related to this task see How to Define Service Level Agreements Use Case Scenario on page 166 This task includes t
234. der gt Set Results Directory Dialog Box on page 243 gt Summary Information Dialog Box on page 244 Set Results Directory Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to set the location in which the Controller saves scenario run results To access Results gt Results Settings Important If you have an open connection to an HP ALM project information the Controller saves the results to a test set You can also save the results directly to disk using the standard file system Relevant tasks How to Prepare a Scenario to Run on page 238 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Automatically create a results directory for each scenario execution Instructs LoadRunner to create a unique results directory for each scenario run By default the result names are res1 res2 res3 and so on Automatically overwrite existing results directory without prompting for confirmation Instructs LoadRunner to automatically overwrite previous result sets without prompting the user 243 Chapter 12 Before Running Your Scenario UI Elements A Z Description Directory Specify a location in the file system where the Controller will save the results file The Controller creates a subdirectory in the results directory All results are saved within this subdirectory File System Displays the default LoadRunner directory path only wh
235. diagnostics and specify the percentage of Vusers for which you want to collect Siebel Diagnostics data For user interface details see Diagnostics Distribution Dialog Box on page 413 b In the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box click Configure next to Siebel Diagnostics to enable the module and to define server information For user interface details see Siebel Configuration Dialog Box on page 420 395 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules gt How to Configure Siebel DB Diagnostics 396 This task describes how to configure the Siebel DB Diagnostics module to communicate with the Mediator and how to define the servers that you want to monitor in order to generate diagnostics data This task includes the following steps gt gt Prerequisites and recommendations on page 396 Enable logging on the Siebel Server on page 400 Enable the Siebel DB Diagnostics module on page 401 Prerequisites and recommendations gt Make sure that the ERP CRM Mediator is installed The Mediator which collects and processes the diagnostics data is installed on the Controller machine as part of the LoadRunner Full Setup For information on installing the ERP CRM Mediator on a dedicated machine see the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide Note We recommend that you not install the Mediator on a dedicated machine as this will increase the time taken to copy diagnostics files to the results directory Make
236. different aspects of today s system architectures You can use the Vuser types in any combination in a scenario in order to create a comprehensive application test Vuser types are divided into several categories indicating their use within common business environments For example 23 Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner 24 gt Application Deployment Solution Vusers support the Citrix or Remote Desktop Protocol RDP protocols gt Client Server Vusers support database and socket communication protocols gt Distributed Components Vusers support COM DCOM and Microsoft NET protocols gt E business Vusers support AJAX AME HTTP HTML and Web Services protocols gt ERP CRM Vusers provide testing for Oracle NCA SAP and Siebel systems gt Java Vusers support the Jacada CORBA RMI and JMS protocols For a complete list of the available Vuser and protocol types see Vuser Types in the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide GUI Vusers LoadRunner can integrate functional testing scripts in the form of GUI Vuser scripts into a load testing scenario These GUI Vuser scripts are created using HP Functional Testing software QuickTest Professional or WinRunner You can run only a single GUI Vuser on a Windows based load generator Use Citrix to run multiple GUI Vusers For additional information on Windows based GUI Vusers see Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner on page 329 Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRun
237. dit an action from the schedule graph on page 139 Edit an action from the Actions grid Double click the action or select it click Edit Action and edit the action as desired You can also edit other actions before closing the Edit Action dialog box Click Previous or Next to navigate between the actions Edit an action from the schedule graph You can edit real world schedules from the graph you can edit Start Vusers Stop Vusers and Duration actions When you edit actions from the graph the action s details in the Actions grid are updated accordingly To edit an action from the graph do one of the following gt Double click the line in the graph representing the action you want to edit Edit the action in the Edit Action dialog box that opens Click Previous or Next to edit other actions 139 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios 140 p gt Make sure that the graph is in Edit mode select the line in the graph and drag it as follows Action Modification Start Vusers To change the number of Vusers to start running gt To start more Vusers drag the diamond shaped endpoint upwards gt To start fewer Vusers drag the diamond shaped endpoint downwards Start Vusers To change the time interval between starting Vusers gt To increase the time interval drag the diamond shaped endpoint to the right gt To decrease the time interval drag the diamond shaped endpoint to the left
238. ducts gt Identifying Bottlenecks gt Measuring System Capacity 49 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios 50 Measuring End User Response Time Check how long it takes for the user to perform a business process and receive a response from the server For example suppose that you want to verify that while your system operates under normal load conditions the end users receive responses to all requests within 20 seconds The following graph presents a sample load vs response time measurement for a banking application Check account Response information Time seconds Login 10 20 30 40 50 Number of Users Defining Optimal Hardware Configuration Check how various system configurations memory CPU speed cache adaptors modems affect performance Once you understand the system architecture and have tested the application response time you can measure the application response for different system configurations to determine which settings provide the desired performance levels For example you could set up three different server configurations and run the same tests on each configuration to measure performance variations Checking Reliability Determine the level of system stability under heavy or continuous work loads You can use LoadRunner to create stress on the system force the system to handle extended activity in a compressed time period to simulate the kind of activity a system would normally
239. dwidth from client to server traffic on the Thinwire graphics channel This is measured in bps This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the VideoFrame channel This is measured in bps Output Audio Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the audio mapping channel This is measured in bps Output Clipboard Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on he clipboard mapping channel This is measured in bps Output COM1 Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the COM1 channel This is measured in bps Output COM2 Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the COM2 channel This is measured in bps Output COM Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the COM channel This is measured in bps Output Control Channel Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the ICA control channel This is measured in bps Output Drive Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic on the client drive channel This is measured in bps Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Measurement Description Output Font Data Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic
240. e 271 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 272 Parent topic Output Window on page 271 See also Filtered Tab on page 274 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Details Displays the full text of the selected output message in the Detailed Message Text area at the bottom of the Output window Remove all messages Clears all log information from the Output window Export the view Saves the output to a specified file Freeze Resume ee gt Freeze Stops updating the Output window with messages gt Resume Resumes updating the Output window with messages The newly updated log information is displayed in a red frame Detailed Message Text Displays the full text of the selected output message when you click the Details button Generators Displays the number of load generators that generated messages with the specified message code Help Displays an icon if there is a link to troubleshooting for the message Message Code Displays the code assigned to all similar messages The number in parentheses indicates the number of different codes displayed in the Output window Sample Message Text Displays an example of the text of a message with the specified code Scripts Displays the number of scripts whose execution generated messages with the specified code Total Messages Displ
241. e 21 Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner 22 3 Designing the Scenario A scenario describes the events that occur during a testing session A scenario includes a list of machines on which Vusers run a list of scripts that the Vusers run and a specified number of Vusers or Vuser groups that run during the scenario When designing the scenario you set the scenario configuration and scheduling which determines how all the load generators and Vusers behave while the scenario runs You design scenarios using the Controller For information about LoadRunner scenarios see Designing Scenarios on page 53 Running the Scenario You emulate user load on the server by instructing multiple Vusers to perform tasks simultaneously While the scenario runs LoadRunner measures and records the transactions that you defined in each Vuser script You can set the level of load by increasing and decreasing the number of Vusers that perform tasks at the same time and you can also monitor your system s performance online For more information see Running Scenarios on page 247 Monitoring the Scenario You configure the LoadRunner monitoring components to identify bottlenecks on the system and determine which element is causing performance degradation for example file locking resource contention and network overload Use LoadRunner in conjunction with the new network and machine monitoring tools to create load and measure performance at dif
242. e x value y value For information about passing command line argument values to a script see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Files tab Rendezvous tab Displays all files used by the script including the configuration settings file the init run and end portions of the script the parameterization definitions file and the usr file gt To exclude a file from the list clear the check box adjacent to it gt To add a file or directory used by the script click the Add button Note To run Visual C Vusers on a remote load generator you must add the dll of the Vuser to this list gt You can delete the files that you add but not the other files listed Displays the rendezvous points defined for the selected script 95 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Script The name path and type of the selected Vuser script Vusers tab Displays all Vusers associated with the selected script Vuser Information Dialog Box This dialog box displays details about a specific Vuser in a group and lets you modify the load generator and script settings for the Vuser To access Use one of the following gt Manual scenario gt Design tab gt Scenario Groups pane gt Vusers gt JQ Details gt In Vusers dialog box double click Vuser Relevant tasks gt How to View Modify Scripts in the Scenario on page 65 gt How
243. e SiteScope server when setting up the monitor Example The Database Driver for the Oracle thin JDBC driver is oracle jdbc driver OracleDriver Connection Timeout An optional the time out value in seconds that SiteScope should to wait for a database connection to respond Query Timeout An optional the time out value in seconds that SiteScope should to wait for a response from the database query If the database does not respond within the period specified SiteScope will report an error Note Some commonly used databases and database drivers do not support the Query Timeout feature In these cases the Query Timeout value should be set to zero Update every How often the monitor should read the server statistics The default interval is to run or update the monitor once every 10 seconds Important The sum of the Connection Timeout value and Query Timeout value should always be less than the Update every value for the monitor 556 30 Streaming Media Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Streaming Media Monitoring Overview on page 558 Reference gt RealPlayer Client Performance Counters on page 559 gt Media Player Client Performance Counters on page 561 557 Chapter 30 Streaming Media Monitoring Concepts amp Streaming Media Monitoring Overview 558 To isolate server and client performance bottlenecks during a scenario run you monitor the Windows Media Se
244. e specific data points using the legend below the graphs You can also view data points offline after the completion of the scenario For more information see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide 473 Chapter 24 e Run Time and Transaction Monitoring Error Statistics Graph The monitor s Error Statistics graph provides details about the number of errors that accrue during each second of the scenario run The errors are grouped by error source for example the location in the script or the load generator name Vusers with Errors Graph The Vusers with Errors graph provides details about the number of Vusers that generate errors during scenario execution The errors are grouped by error source amp Transaction Monitor Graphs Overview 474 The Transaction monitor displays the transaction rate and response time during a scenario run The Transaction monitor is enabled by default it automatically begins monitoring Vuser transactions at the start of a scenario run To conserve resources you can disable the Transaction monitor from the Controller You can view the following Transaction monitor graphs during a scenario run gt The Transaction Response Time graph shows the average response time of transactions in seconds y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis gt The Transactions per Second Passed graph shows the number of successful transactions performed per second y axis as a function
245. e Level Agreements Use Case Scenario on page 166 Reference gt Service Level Agreements User Interface on page 171 161 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Concepts amp Service Level Agreements Overview Service level agreements SLAs are specific goals that you define for your load test scenario After a scenario run HP LoadRunner Analysis compares these goals against performance related data that was gathered and stored during the course of the run and determines whether the SLA passed or failed Depending on the measurements that you are evaluating for your goal LoadRunner determines the SLA status in one of the following ways SLA Type Description SLA status determined at time intervals over a timeline SLA status determined over the whole run Analysis displays SLA statuses at set time intervals over a timeline within the run At each time interval in the timeline for example every 10 seconds Analysis checks to see if the measurement s performance deviated from the threshold defined in the SLA Measurements that can be evaluated in this way gt Average Transaction Response Time gt Errors per Second Analysis displays a single SLA status for the whole scenario run Measurements that can be evaluated in this way gt Total Hits per run gt Average Hits hits second per run gt Total Throughput bytes per run gt Average Throughput bytes second per run You can
246. e command line for example x value y value For information about passing command line argument values to a script see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios View rendezvous points included in the script 1 In the Scenario Groups Scripts pane right click the script and select Details 2 In the Group Script Information dialog box if the Rendezvous tab is not displayed near the bottom click More If there are rendezvous points included in the script they are displayed in the Rendezvous tab For details about rendezvous points see Rendezvous Points Overview on page 314 View Vusers associated with the script 1 In the Scenario Groups Scripts pane right click the script and select Details 2 In the Group Script Information dialog box if the Vusers tab is not displayed near the bottom click More The Vusers tab displays the Vusers associated with the script View files associated with the script 1 In the Scenario Groups Scripts pane right click the script and select Details 2 In the Group Script Information dialog box if the Files tab is not displayed near the bottom click More By default the Files tab lists all the files in the script s directory only after your script has been added to the script list These files include the configuration settings file the init run and end portions of the script the parameterization definitions file and the usr file To add a f
247. e command prompt net use lt MachineName gt user lt Domain gt lt RemoteMachineUsername gt At the password prompt enter the password for the remote machine Cannot monitor a Windows machine An error message is issued computer_name not found or Cannot connect to the host The Windows machine you want to monitor only enables monitoring for users with administrator privileges To allow monitoring for non admin users you must grant read permission to certain files and registry entries Microsoft tech note number Q158438 The required steps are a Using Explorer or File Manager give the user READ access to windir system32 PERF Cxxx DAT windir system32 PERFHxxx DAT where xxx is the basic language ID for the system for example 009 for English These files may be missing or corrupt If you suspect this expand these files off of the installation cd b Using REGEDT32 give the user READ access to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software Microsoft Windows NT CurrentVersion Perflib and all sub keys of that key c Using REGEDT32 give the user at least READ access to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Control SecurePipeServers winreg Some Windows default counters are generating errors Remove the problematic counters and add the appropriate ones using the Add Measurement dialog box Chapter 39 Troubleshooting Online Monitors Problem Solution You
248. e graph as an area graph or a pie graph Graph Time Indicates the scale for a graph s x axis when it is time based A graph can show 60 to 3600 seconds of activity To see the graph in greater detail decrease the graph time To view the performance over a longer period of time increase the graph time The available graph times are Whole Scenario 60 180 600 and 3600 seconds Network Delay View Available for the Network Delay Time graph only gt SubPaths Displays the delay measurements from the source machine to each of the nodes along the network path gt DNS name Displays the DNS names of the measurements displayed in the legend Refresh Rate The interval at which the graph is refreshed with new data By default the graph is refreshed every five seconds If you increase the refresh rate the data is refreshed less frequently Note In a large load test it is recommended to use a refresh rate of three to five seconds This enables you to avoid problems with CPU resource usage 299 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs 300 UI Elements A Z Description Time Y Axis Scale Specifies how the graph displays the time in seconds on the x axis gt Don t Show Instructs LoadRunner not to display values for the x axis gt Clock Time Displays the absolute time based on the system clock gt Relative to Scenario Start Displays the time relative to the begi
249. e merged help Getting Started Documentation gt Readme Provides last minute news and information about LoadRunner You access the Readme from the Start menu gt HP LoadRunner Quick Start provides a short step by step overview and introduction to using LoadRunner To access the Quick Start from the Start menu click Start gt LoadRunner gt Quick Start gt HP LoadRunner Tutorial Self paced printable guide designed to lead you through the process of load testing and familiarize you with the LoadRunner testing environment To access the tutorial from the Start menu click Start gt LoadRunner gt Tutorial LoadRunner Guides gt HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Describes how to create scripts using VuGen The printed version consists of two volumes Volume I Using VuGen and Volume II Protocols while the online version is a single volume When necessary supplement this user guide with the online HP LoadRunner Online Function Reference gt HP LoadRunner Controller User Guide Describes how to create and run LoadRunner scenarios using the LoadRunner Controller in a Windows environment Also describes how to set up the server monitor environment and configure LoadRunner monitors for monitoring data generated during a scenario gt HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide Describes how to use the LoadRunner Analysis graphs and reports after running a scenario to analyze system performance gt HP LoadRunner Installati
250. e number of graphs displayed right click a graph in the graph display area and select View Graphs or select View gt View Graphs Do one of the following gt Select the number of graphs to display from the options given gt Select Custom Number and enter a number of graphs to display gt To display only one graph double click the graph displayed in the graph display area To return to the previous view double click the graph again Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs gt How to Customize Online Graph and Measurement Settings This task describes ways to customize online graphs and graph measurements gt Configure the graph settings on page 293 gt Configure the measurement settings on page 293 Configure the graph settings You can customize gt The type of graph display gt What to display on the x axis and y axis You can apply these settings to all graphs or to a specific graph only To configure the graph settings in the Run tab select Monitors gt Online Graphs gt Configure or right click a graph and select Configure For user interface details see Graph Configuration Dialog Box on page 298 Configure the measurement settings You can customize the appearance and scale of measurements in a graph and select whether they should be displayed in the graph or hidden from the graph In the Run tab right click a measurement in the graph or legend and select Configure For user inte
251. e of time the CPU is utilized by the Apache server Hits sec The HTTP request rate KBytes Sent sec The rate at which data bytes are sent from the Web server Microsoft IS Performance Counters The following table describes the measurements and server properties that can be monitored on the Microsoft IIS Web server during the scenario run Object Measurement Description Web Service Bytes Sent sec The rate at which the data bytes are sent by the Web service Web Service Bytes Received sec The rate at which the data bytes are received by the Web service Web Service Get Requests sec The rate at which HTTP requests using the GET method are made Get requests are generally used for basic file retrievals or image maps though they can be used with forms 516 Chapter 27 Web Server Resource Monitoring Object Measurement Description Web Post Requests sec The rate at which HTTP requests using the POST Service method are made Post requests are generally used for forms or gateway requests Web Maximum The maximum number of simultaneous Service Connections connections established with the Web service Web Current The current number of connections established Service Connections with the Web service Web Current The number of users that currently have a Service NonAnonymous non anonymous connection using the Web Users servi
252. e output display options Expert mode only Select Tools gt Options gt Output tab and configure how to display running Vusers on the Controller machine For user interface details see Options gt Output Tab on page 229 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Reference Path Translation Table To translate a path from one Windows based computer to another or between Windows based and UNIX machines you create an entry in the Path Translation table This table contains a list of paths translated into formats that can be recognized by different machines Each line of the Path Translation table has the following format lt controller_host gt lt controller_path gt lt remote_path gt lt remote_host gt where gt controller_host is the name or type of the machine that is running the Controller The value of controller_host can be gt lt hostname gt The name of the machine running the Controller for example LOADPC1 gt win The Controller is running on a Windows based computer gt unix The Controller is running on a UNIX machine gt all The Controller is running on a Windows based or a UNIX machine gt controller_path is the path of a specific directory as recognized by the Controller For example if the directory scripts is located on the network drive r as mapped by the Controller type the path r scripts in the controller_path field gt remote_path is the path of a specific dire
253. e rendezvous points defined for the selected script Script The name path and type of the Vuser script selected for the Vuser group Vusers tab Displays all Vusers associated with the selected script Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios amp Multiple Run Time Settings Mode Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to select the mode for modifying run time settings of multiple selected scripts To access Use one of the following gt In the Scenario Groups Scripts pane right click a multiple selection of scripts and select Run Time Settings gt Right click a Vuser group that includes multiple scripts and select Run Time Settings Important gt If one of the selected scripts does not support shared information run time settings then you will only have the option of modifying each script s individual run time settings Individual RTS gt Shared RTS mode is disabled for GUI or Astra LoadTest Vusers gt Some run time settings cannot be modified in Shared RTS mode These settings will not appear in the Run Time Settings window To modify them open the run time settings for each individual script The following nodes will not appear in Shared RTS mode gt Run Logic node for protocols which support the Run Logic node the Iterations box appears in the Pacing node gt Additional Attributes node gt Internet Protocol ContentCheck node gt Java Environment Settings Classpath node gt Nodes wit
254. e scenario z 500 o 400 o 300 2 200 2 2 100 v ir 00 01 00 00 02 00 00 03 00 00 04 00 Elapsed Time Hour Min Sec HTTP Responses per Second Graph The HTTP Responses per Second graph shows the number of HTTP status codes y axis which indicate the status of HTTP requests for example the request was successful or the page was not found returned from the Web server during each second of the scenario run x axis The HTTP responses are grouped by status code You can also group the results shown in this graph by script using the Group By function to locate scripts which generated error codes For a list of status codes and their explanations see HTTP Status Codes on page 469 465 Chapter 23 Web Resource Monitors 466 Pages Downloaded per Second Graph The Pages Downloaded per Second graph shows the number of Web pages y axis downloaded from the server during each second of the scenario run x axis This graph helps you evaluate the amount of load Vusers generate in terms of the number of pages downloaded Note To view the Pages Downloaded per Second graph you must select Pages per second HTML Mode only from the script s run time settings Preferences tab before running your scenario Like throughput downloaded pages per second is a representation of the amount of data that the Vusers received from the server at any given second gt The Throughput graph takes i
255. e selected Vuser ig Gradual Stop Instructs the Controller to complete the current iteration or action before stopping the Vuser Note This option is only available when the Vuser is in the Run state and if you selected the Wait for the current iteration to end before exiting or Wait for the current action to end before exiting option in the Run Time Settings tab of the Options dialog box Sk Stop Stops running the selected Vuser immediately Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description 4d Reset Resets the status of the Vuser to Down LQ Details 99 Add Vuser s Opens the Vuser Information dialog box where you can view details about the selected Vuser Opens the Add Vusers dialog box where you can add more Vusers to the Vuser group lt Filter by script gt Filters the Vusers table by the selected script lt Filter by status gt Filters the Vusers table by the selected Vuser status For details see Vuser Statuses on page 71 lt Right click menu gt gt Filter Vusers Enables you filter the Vuser list by Vuser status gt Renumber Renumbers the list of Vusers in sequential order starting from 1 gt Sort Vusers Enables you to sort the table by a selected column To sort the table in ascending descending order click the relevant table heading lt Vusers table gt Displays the following information about t
256. e sure that each load generator designated for a specific location is configured with the same settings 201 Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings For information on grouping Analysis graph data by emulated location name see the section that deals with applying filter and sort criteria to graphs in the HP Analysis User Guide D Viewing WAN Emulation Monitors The WAN Emulation starts and stops automatically as you start and stop the scenario WAN Emulation monitors are assigned automatically when the scenario run starts and WAN metrics are automatically collected during the scenario run You can view the WAN metrics during the scenario run in the Windows Resources monitor If a load generator is connected over a firewall you must add the monitors manually using the Monitor Over Firewall component For more information see Monitors Over a Firewall on page 353 D Excluding Machines from WAN Emulation 202 In some situations you may need to exclude certain machines from the WAN Emulation for example a software update server This means that you set the WAN Emulator to refrain from affecting traffic from a load generator to the specified machines When a machine is excluded from the WAN Emulation network traffic to that machine does not suffer any WAN effects and will not be included in the WAN Emulation results During a scenario run machines that if emulated may affect the results of the actual scenario for ex
257. e table lock to become an exclusive lock lock_timeouts The number of times that a request to lock an object timed out instead of being granted lock_waits lock_wait_time The total number of times that applications or connections waited for locks The total elapsed time waited for a lock locks_waiting Indicates the number of agents waiting on a lock rows_deleted The number of row deletions attempted rows_inserted The number of row insertions attempted rows_updated The number of row updates attempted rows_ selected int_rows_deleted The number of rows that have been selected and returned to the application The number of rows deleted from the database as a result of internal activity int_rows_updated The number of rows updated from the database as a result of internal activity int_rows_inserted The number of rows inserted into the database as a result of internal activity caused by triggers static_sql_stmts The number of static SQL statements that were attempted dynamic_sql_stmts The number of dynamic SQL statements that were attempted failed_sql_stmts The number of SQL statements that were attempted but failed commit_sql_stmts The total number of SQL COMMIT statements that have been attempted 545 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring 546 Measurement Description rollback_sql_stmts The
258. eate or open the desired scenario Connect to HP Application Lifecycle Management Open a connection to the ALM server and project that you want to store the scenario For task details see Connect to ALM on page 339 Define a test set Define a Application Lifecycle Management test set where to save results as follows a Select Results gt Results Settings The Set Results Directory dialog box opens b Click HP ALM c Enter the required information in the Set Results Directory dialog box For user interface details see Set Results Directory Dialog Box on page 243 Chapter 18 Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management d Click OK 4 Save the scenario to ALM Select File gt Save as and specify the location P How to Add Vuser Scripts from a Application Lifecycle Management Project The following steps describe how to add Vuser scripts from a Application Lifecycle Management project to the Controller s script list You can add the script to either a manual or a goal oriented scenario gt Add a Vuser script to a manual scenario on page 341 gt Add a Vuser script to a goal oriented scenario on page 341 Add a Vuser script to a manual scenario 1 Open a connection to the ALM server and project where the scripts are located For task details see Connect to ALM on page 339 2 In the Scenario Groups pane click the Add Group button 3 In the Add Group dialog box click Browse The Open Te
259. ebel Web Vusers support Siebel DB Diagnostics For information on how to configure the Siebel DB Diagnostics module see How to Configure Siebel DB Diagnostics on page 396 amp Oracle 11i Diagnostics Module Overview Oracle 11i Diagnostics helps pinpoint performance problems on Oracle NCA systems The diagnostics information drills down from the transaction to the SQL statements and to the SQL stages of each statement Oracle NCA Vusers support Oracle 11i Diagnostics For information on how to configure the Oracle 11i Diagnostics module see How to Configure Oracle 11i Diagnostics on page 401 amp SAP Diagnostics Module Overview SAP Diagnostics enables you to pinpoint the root cause of a certain problem i e DBA Network WAS Application OS HW quickly and easily and engage with the relevant expert only without having to present the problem to a whole team of people 387 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules The following table outlines the supported versions and required Kernel patches for the SAP Application Server and the SAPGUI Client Supported Version Required Kernel Patch SAP Application 4 6C 4 6D Kernel Patch 1984 released Server on 11 01 05 SAP note 0451251 4 7 and higher No patch required SAPGUI Client SAPGUI for Windows 6 20 Minimal patch level 48 SAPGUI for Windows 6 40 Minimal patch level 2 For information on how to configure the SAP Diagnostics module s
260. ect back to the agent From this point on the agent listens to commands from the MI Listener 359 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner b If your system has an HTTPS configuration The LoadRunner agent attempts to establish a connection with the MI Listener using the proxy port specified in the Proxy Port field and at intervals specified in the Connection Timeout field in the Agent Configuration dialog box When the connection is established the proxy server connects to the MI Listener To enable this connection allow an outgoing connection for HTTPS service on the firewall for port 443 The proxy server can then connect to the MI Listener and the MI Listener can connect back to the agent through the proxy server From this point on the agent listens to commands from the MI Listener 4 Configure the MI Listener To enable running Vusers or monitoring over a firewall you need to install the MI Listener on one or more machines in the same LAN as the Controller outside the firewall For installation instructions refer to the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide Note gt The Controller installation automatically includes the MI Listener so you can designate the Controller as the MI Listener machine gt The MI Listener can only be installed on Windows machines For information on how to configure the MI Listener see MI Listener Configuration Dialog Box on page 371 360 Chapter 19 Working with Fire
261. ects A tree for browsing the list of available measurements You can select only one object at a time in the tree Microsoft Active Server Pages Dialog Box 528 This dialog box enables you to select the items to monitor on the MS Active Server Pages application server To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of Microsoft Active Server Pages dialog Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow See also MS Active Server Pages Performance Counters Chapter 28 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Add Adds the selected measurement to the list of measurements in the Measurements on lt machine gt section of the Microsoft Active Server Pages dialog box Counters Select a resource counter to monitor Select multiple counters using the CTRL key For a definition of each counter click Explain Instances Object If multiple instances of the selected counter are running select one or more instances to monitor for the selected counter Select the object being monitored on the specified machine 529 Chapter 28 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring 530 29 Database Resource Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Database Resource Monitoring Overvie
262. ecurity Key dialog box where you can Update Security Key update the security key on all the hosts Opens the Update Security Mode dialog box where you Update Security Mode can update the security mode on selected hosts ya Opens the Set Master Key dialog box where you update Set Master Key g A Host Security Manager s master security key 640 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication UI Elements Description History Opens the History dialog box where you can view the history of updates made to the hosts The information displayed includes the date of the update the operation key mode update and the update status Passed Failed lt Hosts table gt Displays the following information gt gt gt Host Name IP The name or IP address of the host Host Type The type of host Controller Load Generator MI Listener When the host is over a firewall the name of the MI Listener through which the host communicates with the other hosts Last Key Update The last time the security key was updated Key Update Status The status of the last security key update Last Security Mode Update The last time the security mode was updated Security Mode Update Status The status of the last security mode update Tip You can sort the details on this page in ascending or descending order by clicking the heading of the column by which you want to sort Click the
263. ecution specify the input that the Vuser submits to the server and measure the server performance You develop Vuser scripts either by recording with HP Virtual User Generator VuGen or by using LoadRunner s Vuser script templates 25 Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner 26 For the database server example above you could create a Vuser script that performs the following actions gt Logs in to the Web application gt Connects to the database server gt Submits an SQL query gt Retrieves and processes the server response gt Disconnects from the server and the Web You can create Vuser scripts on a Windows based platform or program them on a UNIX platform For a list of the supported UNIX platforms see the HP LoadRunner Readme file For more information about Vusers see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner Reference Controller Window The Controller window enables you to design and run load test scenarios and view Diagnostics for J2EE NET data Service Level Agreement Boo Kore PF Advanced CA Mercuy Loadhunner scrgte banchs O Ebasiche 1 C Mercuy Losdhunner scrpts banchst Cick the New button to define SLA cetens foe your load test basici ZECA Mercury LoadFunner scrigts basichs Run for 00 05 00 HH MM SS 0000 00 000200 000400 000600 000800 00 1000 00 1200 Vuners 5 every vane Stop abusers S every CERDOS 000100 000300 000500 000700
264. ed in bytes Total Response Time The total response time Total Tasks The total number of tasks Total Think Time The total think time ERP CRM Server Resounce Monitoring User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Add Measurements Dialog Box on page 575 gt PeopleSoft Tuxedo Logon Dialog Box on page 577 gt SAPGUI Logon Dialog Box on page 578 gt Siebel Server Manager Configuration Dialog Box on page 580 Add Measurements Dialog Box This dialog box allows you to select the PeopleSoft Tuxedo or SAPGUI resources to monitor To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of monitor dialog Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring 576 Relevant tasks How to Set Up the PeopleSoft Tuxedo Resource Monitor How to Set Up the SAPGUI Server Resource Monitor How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow See also PeopleSoft Tuxedo Performance Counters SAPGUI Performance Counters User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Add Adds the selected measurement to the list of measurements in the Measurements on lt machine gt section of the PeopleSoft Tuxedo or SAPGUI dialog box Counters Select a resource counter to monitor Select multiple Measurements counters using the CTRL key For a d
265. ee How to Configure SAP Diagnostics on page 406 388 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Tasks gt How to Configure Siebel Diagnostics This task describes how to configure the Siebel Diagnostics module to communicate with the Mediator and how to define the servers that you want to monitor in order to generate diagnostics data This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 389 gt Configure the server machine to enable diagnostics on page 392 gt Copy files from the Siebel Application Server to the Mediator on gt page 394 Enable the Siebel Diagnostics Module on page 395 Prerequisites gt Make sure that the ERP CRM Mediator is installed The Mediator which collects and processes the diagnostics data is installed on the Controller machine as part of the LoadRunner Full Setup For information on installing the ERP CRM Mediator on a dedicated machine see the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide Make sure that the load test scenario is not already running You must configure the diagnostics module before running the load test scenario Manually define transactions in the Vuser script To ensure that valid diagnostics data is generated manually define the transactions in the Vuser script rather than using automatic transactions Make sure to disable the following options in the Run Time Settings General Miscellaneous node Define each action as a transacti
266. eeeeeeseeeesseeeesensneeeees 406 How to Enable and Disable Logging on the Siebel Server 407 How to Enable Logging on the Oracle Server ee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 409 How to Set and Disable the Oracle Server Diagnostics Password 410 How to View Diagnostics Results 00 0 ccceceesssceeeeeeeessseeeeeeeee 411 Referente oacssiissscssssssesssccseacseesieesveweveecrcoeecosceccusesteececveceescesscecdendssaseaes 413 LoadRunner Diagnostics Modules User Interface eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 413 Table of Contents Chapter 20 Configuring JZ2EE NET Diagnostics ssssceseeees 429 Concepts oisein iioa iii E T sess 430 J2EE NET Diagnostics Overview eessessssseseersssssserrerssssrreeessssssseree 430 Monitoring Server Requests sseeseeseersssseerersssseereereerrssreeeesssseeereeeeess 430 TASKS EE IA SE ESEARO OEEO AAIEN ETA 431 How to Specify J2EE NET Diagnostics Server Details in the ean Cheha eset maaa a a a E 431 How to Configure a LoadRunner Scenario to use J2EE NET Diagnostics oona aana aaraa K a EAE te eate cece tedehedoted doves 432 How to View J2EE NET Diagnostics Data in LoadRunner During a Scenario RUN sieve ssvecssnscssievesevetsestaavepsssevbasnsedesecesmneentedsoes 433 How to View Offline J2EE NET Diagnostics Results cceeees 434 Referentna ar a a n a o a a aaia ada eea 435 LoadRunner J2EE NET Diagnostics Module User Interface 435 PART V MONITORING LOAD TEST SCE
267. efinition of each counter click Explain Instances If multiple instances of the selected counter are running select one or more instances to monitor for the selected counter Object Select the object being monitored on the specified machine Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring PeopleSoft Tuxedo Logon Dialog Box This dialog box configures the connection information for the Tuxedo server To access Right click the Tuxedo graph and select Add Measurements This dialog appears only when you add measurements for the first time Important information If you are using PeopleSoft 7 x you can determine the logon information from the Logon section of the If you are using Tuxedo 6 5 or below the monitor can only connect to one application server during a Controller scenario Once it connects to an application server that server is the only one used by the monitor until the Controller is closed This applies even when all of the counters are deleted from the monitor Relevant tasks How to Set Up the PeopleSoft Tuxedo Resource Monitor How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow User interface elements are described below UI Elements Description Browse recorded script rather than enter the values manually For more information see Tuxedo tpinit ini File on page 615 Advanced To authenticate the Tuxedo monitor click Advance
268. em Resource Monitoring 494 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description MIB File The MIB file which contains the objects you are interested in monitoring gt If you select a specific MIB file then only the objects described in that MIB file are displayed gt If you select All MIBs then all objects retrieved from the agent during the MIB traversal will be displayed gt If no MIB information is available for an object the object is still displayed but with no textual name or description Note To make this monitor aware of new or additional MIBs place new MIB files in the SiteScope templates mib directory Port The port to use when requesting data from the SNMP agent Default Port 161 is the port on which an SNMP agent will typically be listening Retries Server The number of times each SNMP GET request should be retried before SiteScope considers the request to have failed Default 1 retry The name of the server you want to monitor SNMP V3 Authentication Password The authentication password to use for version 3 connections SNMP V3 Authentication Type The type of authentication to use for version 3 connections SNMP V3 Context Engine ID A hexadecimal string representing the Context Engine ID to use for version 3 connections SNMP V3 Context Name The Context Name to use for version 3 connections Cha
269. en connected to HP ALM HP ALM only when connected to HP ALM Enables you to save the results to a Application Lifecycle Management test set Results Name Specify a name for the run results LoadRunner allows you to give descriptive names to each result set This is especially useful for cross results analysis in which LoadRunner superimposes the results of several scenario runs in a single Analysis graph and lets you compare the results of multiple scenario runs The descriptive graph names enable you to distinguish between the results of the multiple runs Results Path Displays the location for the results as specified in Results Name and Directory Avoid using the same name with different paths Only the names appear on the Analysis graphs If the result names are identical it will be difficult to distinguish between the runs Summary Information Dialog Box 244 This dialog box enables you to provide a detailed description of the scenario To access Scenario gt Summary Information Relevant tasks How to Prepare a Scenario to Run on page 238 Chapter 12 Before Running Your Scenario User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Author The name of the scenario s author Description A description of the scenario Scenario Path The name and location of the scenario definition file lrs Subject A subject n
270. enario When you schedule by scenario LoadRunner runs all the Vuser groups participating in the scenario simultaneously That is the schedule defined for running the scenario is applied to all the Vuser groups concurrently and LoadRunner applies each action proportionately to all the Vusers groups For example take a scenario that includes 3 participating Vuser groups as follows Group Name Number of Vusers Group1 10 Group2 20 Group3 30 Total 60 When scheduling by scenario if the schedule instructs LoadRunner to load 30 Vusers when it starts running LoadRunner loads a proportional number of Vusers from each group as follows Group Name Number of Vusers Group1 5 Group2 10 Group3 15 Total 30 Note The same principle applies when viewing the scenario in percentage mode 129 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Scheduling By Vuser Group Note For scenarios in Vuser group mode only When you schedule by Vuser group each Vuser group participating in the scenario runs on its own separate schedule That is for each Vuser group you can specify when to start running the Vuser group how many Vusers in the group to start and stop running within specified time intervals and how long the group should continue running amp Schedule Run Modes 130 You can schedule a scenario to run according to the run time settings defined in the Vuser groups or
271. enerator User Guide Using the Controller you can influence the level of server load by selecting gt which of the rendezvous points will be active during the scenario gt how many Vusers will take part in each rendezvous For example to test a bank server you could create a scenario that contains two rendezvous points The first rendezvous ensures that 1000 Vusers simultaneously deposit cash The second rendezvous ensures that another 1000 Vusers simultaneously withdraw cash If you want to measure how the server performs when only 500 Vusers deposit cash you can deactivate the withdraw rendezvous and instruct 500 Vusers to participate in the deposit rendezvous only Chapter 15 e Rendezvous Points Tasks gt How to Set Up a Rendezvous in a Scenario This task describes set up rendezvous points and policies in a scenario This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 315 gt Set the level of emulated user load on page 315 gt Set the attributes for the rendezvous policy Optional on page 316 1 Prerequisites To set up a rendezvous in the scenario your scenario must include Vuser scripts that have rendezvous points inserted in them For information about inserting rendezvous points into Vuser scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide When you add a Vuser group or script to the scenario LoadRunner scans the included scripts for the names of the rendezvous points and adds them
272. ent applies only to local queues of the monitored queue manager Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring Measurement Description Status Open Input Count Current count of open input handles Input handles are opened so that an application may put messages to a queue Status Open Output Count Current count of open output handles Output handles are opened so that an application may get messages from a queue Channel Performance Counters The following table describes the Channel Performance counters Measurement Event Channel Activated events per second Description Event generated when a channel waiting to become active but inhibited from doing so due to a shortage of queue manager channel slots becomes active due to the sudden availability of a channel slot Event Channel Not Activated events per second Event generated when a channel attempts to become active but inhibited from doing so due to a shortage of queue manager channel slots Event Channel Started events per second Event generated when a channel is started Event Channel Stopped events per second Event generated when a channel is stopped regardless of source of stoppage Event Channel Stopped by User events per second Event generated when a channel is stopped by a user Status Channel State The current state of a channel Channels pass th
273. ent daemon Before running the Network monitor the first time you enter an encrypted user name and password in the Network monitor configuration file On the Windows taskbar click Start point to Programs gt LoadRunner gt Tools and click Password Encoder The Password Encoder window opens In the Password box type your RSH user name and password separated by a vertical bar symbol For example myname mypw Click Generate An encoded string is displayed in the Encoded string field Click Copy to copy the encoded string to the clipboard Add the following line to the lt LoadRunner_installation gt dat monitors ndm cfg file in the hosts section Host lt encrypted string copied from clipboard gt Close and open the current scenario LoadRunner will read the updated configuration file and recognize the source machine for monitoring Connect to the Unix Source Machine Through the Agent Follow these instructions for activating agent daemon on the source machine if the Controller is not connected to the source machine through RSH b c Type m_daemon_setup install from the lt LoadRunner_installation gt bin directory Make sure that the agent daemon is running whenever you activate the Network monitor To stop the Network Delay Monitor agent daemon type m_daemon_setup remove Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring Reference Network Delay Monitoring User Interface This section includes in alp
274. enter more than one load generator at a time separated by commas Host Security Manager Window This window enables you to update security settings remotely on all of the hosts in the load testing system To access Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Tools gt Host Security Manager Important gt You must provide Host Security Manager with a information master security key before you can update the security settings gt Every time you use Host Security Manager to update security settings make sure that the list of hosts is up to date Hosts that were added to the system must be added to the list and those deleted should be deleted from the list To add a host see How to Register Hosts in Host Security Manager on page 634 To delete a host select it and click Delete Relevant tasks How to Update Host Security Settings Remotely on page 635 See also Secure Host Communication Overview on page 628 639 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication User interface elements are described below UI Elements Description Pony fleet Opens the Add Hosts dialog box where you can register hosts in Host Security Manager Enables you to delete hosts from the Hosts list in Host Security Manager Delete Enables you provide the name IP address of the MI Listener that the host or hosts uses to communicate over the firewall Set MI Listener Opens the Update S
275. er User Interface on page 146 127 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Concepts amp Scheduling Manual Scenarios Overview An important factor in the creation of a manual scenario is developing a test that accurately portrays user load behavior the type of load and the timing of the load After you create a scenario you schedule the scenario to start running at a specified time You can limit the execution duration of the scenario or of a Vuser group within the scenario You can also stipulate how many Vusers to start and stop running within a certain time frame You can specify whether LoadRunner should start or stop running all Vusers in a scenario simultaneously or only a certain number of Vusers within a specified amount of time Note Rendezvous points in a Vuser script interfere with a scheduled scenario run If your script contains rendezvous points your scenario will not run as scheduled For details on rendezvous points see Rendezvous Points on page 313 amp Scheduling by Scenario or Group 128 After you have designed a manual scenario you can schedule the participating Vuser groups scripts to run as part of a scenario schedule You can schedule all the groups scripts to run together on one schedule or you can define a separate schedule for each Vuser group For details about manual scenario modes see Manual Scenarios on page 54 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Scheduling By Sc
276. er of times that the catalog cache was referenced to obtain table descriptor information cat_cache_inserts The number of times that the system tried to insert table descriptor information into the catalog cache cat_cache_overflows The number of times that an insert into the catalog cache failed due to the catalog cache being full cat_cache_heap _full The number of times that an insert into the catalog cache failed due to a heap full condition in the database heap pkg_cache_lookups The number of times that an application looked for a section or package in the package cache At a database level it indicates the overall number of references since the database was started or monitor data was reset pkg_cache_inserts The total number of times that a requested section was not available for use and had to be loaded into the package cache This count includes any implicit prepares performed by the system appl_section_lookups Lookups of SQL sections by an application from its SQL work area appl_section_inserts Inserts of SQL sections by an application from its SQL work area uow_log_space_used The amount of log space in bytes used in the current unit of work of the monitored application locks_held The number of locks currently held deadlocks The total number of deadlocks that have occurred 549 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring 550 Mea
277. er runs the scenario using the think time recorded in the script Note If you select this option you may need to increase the number of Vusers in your scenario in order to reach your target Goal Profile Name The goal profile name 79 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 80 UI Elements A Z Description Load Behavior tab Enables you to specify how and when the Controller should reach the target Ramp Up How the Vusers should start running gt Automatic The Controller starts running the default number of Vusers in a batch that is 50 Vusers every two minutes If the maximum number of Vusers defined is less than 50 then it runs all the Vusers gt Reach target X after The amount of scenario time after which Controller should reach the target gt Step up by How rate at which the Controller should reach the target x number of Vusers hits pages every x amount of time Not available for the Transactions per Second and Transaction Response Time goal types Load Preview graph A graphical representation of the goal and load behavior defined for the scenario Scenario Settings tab Enables you to specify the actions to take when the target is reached or if the target is not reached gt Run Time The amount of time in hours minutes and seconds to run the scenario after the target has been reached gt If target cannot be reached The action to be taken if the tar
278. er the channel this measurement will appear as zero If the channel has not been started since the queue manager was started no measurement will be available Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring IBM WebSphere MQ Queue Attributes You set the following queue attributes using the MQSC command ALTER QMGR PERFMEV ENABLED Measurement Set Event Attributes Event Queue gt QDEPTHHI integer where integer is a value expressed as Depth High a percentage of maximum messages allowed and is in the range of 0 to 100 inclusive gt QDPHIEV action where action is the word ENABLED or DISABLED enabling or disabling the generation of the event respectively Event Queue To enable the event for a queue the following attributes of Depth Low the queue must be set gt QDEPTHLO integer where integer is a value expressed as a percentage of maximum messages allowed and is in the range of 0 to 100 inclusive gt QDPLOEV action where action is the word ENABLED or DISABLED enabling or disabling the generation of the event respectively Event Queue gt QDEPTHHI integer where integer is a value expressed as Full a percentage of maximum messages allowed and is in the range of 0 to 100 inclusive gt QDPMAXEV action where action is the word ENABLED or DISABLED enabling or disabling the generation of the event respectively 6
279. eration or action it is running as defined in Tools gt Options gt Run Time Settings before exiting 71 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Status Description Exiting The Vuser has finished running or has been stopped and is now exiting Stopped The Vuser stopped when the Stop command was invoked Design View User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Add Group Dialog Box on page 73 gt Add Script Dialog Box on page 74 gt Add Vusers Dialog Box on page 75 gt Design Tab on page 77 gt Edit Scenario Goal Dialog Box on page 78 gt Group Information Dialog Box on page 81 gt Multiple Run Time Settings Mode Dialog Box on page 83 gt New Scenario Dialog Box on page 84 gt Scenario Goal Pane on page 86 gt Scenario Groups Scripts Pane Manual Scenarios on page 88 gt Scenario Scripts Pane Goal Oriented Scenarios on page 91 gt Script Information Dialog Box on page 94 gt Vuser Information Dialog Box on page 96 gt Vusers Dialog Box on page 98 72 Add Group Dialog Box Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios This dialog box enables you to add Vuser groups to participate in a scenario To access Manual scenario gt Design tab gt Scenario Groups Scripts pane gt Add Group wj Important While a scenario is running you can add Vuser groups to information the scenario and enable them However if you add a Vuser group after all the Vusers i
280. erator you are adding For details about the Add Load Generator dialog box see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 Assign load generators to each script In the Scenario Scripts pane for each script click the Load Generators column and select a load generator on which to run the script Scenario Scripts Script Name Script Path A basic_script C Program Files HP LoadRunner tutorial basic_script 100 lt All Load Generatfr y e 5 th c E All Generators E R Note By default the script will run on all the load generators in the scenario 61 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 5 Define a goal for the scenario In the Scenario Goal pane click the Edit Scenario Goal button In the dialog box that opens define the goal the scenario should reach For details about filling in the scenario goal details see Edit Scenario Goal Dialog Box on page 78 6 Assign each script a percentage of the total scenario target In the Scenario Scripts pane s of Target column enter the percentage of the total goal you want each script to reach during the scenario Note Assign percentages to the scripts starting with the first script in the list and moving down the list 7 Define service level agreements for the scenario optional You can define service level agreements SLAs to measure scenario goals over time intervals or over a whole scenario run Whe
281. erators and view details about existing load generators For user interface details see Load Generators Dialog Box on page 124 Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner UI Elements A Z Description Run view only Initialize Vusers Initializes all Vusers ar those that are still in the Down state in a selected Vuser group The group s status changes from Down to Pending to Initializing to Ready If the group fails to initialize the status changes to Error By initializing all of the Vusers in a group before running them you can ensure that they all begin executing the scenario at the same time 4 Run view only Run Vusers Until Complete Runs all Vusers in a selected Vuser group until completion If you run a Vuser group in the Down or Error state LoadRunner initializes and then runs the group Note You can instruct LoadRunner to randomly run only one Vuser in a Vuser group by right clicking the group and selecting Run one Vuser Until Complete A Vuser script log opens displaying run time information about the Vuser For more information see Vuser Script Log on page 287 3g Run view only Gradual Stop Gradually stops a Vuser group in the Run state if you selected the Wait for the current iteration to end before exiting or Wait for the current action to end before exiting options in the Run Time Settings tab of the Options dialog box amp Run view only Stop Vus
282. erface on page 435 429 Chapter 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics Concepts amp J2EE NET Diagnostics Overview The HP Diagnostics integration with LoadRunner allows you to monitor and analyze the performance of Java 2 Enterprise Edition J2EE NET connected SAP Oracle and other complex environments For more information about working with diagnostics for J2EE and NET see the HP Diagnostics User Guide amp Monitoring Server Requests When configuring a LoadRunner scenario to use J2EE NET Diagnostics you can instruct LoadRunner to capture a percentage of server requests which occur outside the context of any Vuser transaction The benefit of enabling this functionality is that calls into a back end VM can be captured even in the case where gt The probe is not capturing RMI calls gt RMI calls cannot be captured perhaps because an unsupported application container is being used gt The application uses some other mechanism for communications between multiple VMs 430 Chapter 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics Tasks gt How to Specify J2EE NET Diagnostics Server Details in the Launcher The first time you use LoadRunner to capture J2EE or NET diagnostics data you need to identify the machine on which the Diagnostics Server in Commander mode is running and the port that it is using for communication with LoadRunner Note You must update this information if you want to integrate
283. ers For details see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Group Name The name of the group to which to add Vusers Load Generator Name The load generator assigned to the Vuser group To add a load generator to this list select Add from the list For user interface details see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 Quantity to add The number of Vusers to add to the Vuser group Select Script Lists the scripts available for the scenario When you select a script its name and path are displayed above the list To display the scripts with their full paths right click the list area and select Show Paths Design Tab Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios The Design tab enables you to design load test scenarios To access Design tab Relevant tasks gt How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 gt How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 gt How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 gt How to Define Service Level Agreements on page 164 gt How to Change the Scenario Mode Manual Scenario on page 65 gt How to View Modify Scripts in the Scenario on page 65 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Scenario Goal pane Goal oriented scenario In goal oriented scenarios displays information regarding the scenario goal For
284. ers Immediately stops all Vusers in selected Vuser groups from executing their scripts Run view only Analyze Results Opens diagnostics results z5 Invoke VuGen Invokes HP Virtual User Generator Invoke Analysis Invokes HP LoadRunner Analysis 29 Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner 30 UI Elements A Z Description Design tab Enables you to design scenarios For details see Design View User Interface on page 72 Diagnostics for J2EE NET tab Enables you to view J2EE NET diagnostics data collected from a scenario run For details see the HP Diagnostics User Guide Run tab Enables you to run and monitor scenario runs For details see Run View User Interface on page 270 lt Status bar gt Displays the following features of Controller if enabled gt Application Lifecycle Management Connection gt IP Spoofer gt Auto Collate Results gt Auto Load Analysis Part Il Designing Load Test Scenarios 32 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios This chapter includes Concepts gt Load Test Planning Overview on page 34 gt Load Testing Objectives on page 34 Tasks gt How to Plan a Load Test on page 39 gt How to Analyze the Application on page 40 gt How to Define the Load Test Objectives on page 43 gt How to Plan the LoadRunner Implementation on page 44 Reference gt Examining Load Testing Objectives on page 49 33
285. erver Use similar queries to verify that you can view the V SESSTAT V SESSION V INSTANCE V STATNAME and V PROCESS tables on the server 4 Modify the monitoring sample rate optional To change the length of each monitoring sample in seconds edit the dat monitors vmon cfg file in the LoadRunner root folder The default rate is 10 seconds The minimum sampling rate for the Oracle Monitor is 10 seconds If you set the sampling rate at less than 10 seconds the Oracle Monitor will continue to monitor at 10 second intervals 5 Configure the Oracle monitor from the Controller For task details beginning with step 2 see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring Reference DB2 Performance Counters This section includes gt DatabaseManager on page 538 gt Database on page 540 gt Application on page 547 DatabaseManager The following table lists the DatabaseManager counters Measurement Description rem_cons_in The current number of connections initiated from remote clients to the instance of the database manager that is being monitored rem_cons_in_exec The number of remote applications that are currently connected to a database and are currently processing a unit of work within the database manager instance being monitored local_cons The number of local applications that are currently connected to a database
286. es ysum_data E basic_script cfg bak E sap_c_and_s cfg bak E sap_c_and_s_1 cfg bak E basic_script cfg f sap_c_and_s cfg E sap_c_and_s_1 cfg E offline dat E _t_rep eve E localhost_1 eve E localhost_1 map E output mdb Sres lrr B collate txt B HostEmulatedLocation txt B remote_results txt E basic_script usp E sap_c_and_s usp E sap_c_and_s_1 usp SLAConfiguration xml E A Name E Type File Folder File Folder 2KB BAK File 3KB BAK File 3KB BAK File 2KB CFG File 3KB CFG File 3KB CFG File OKB DAT File 2KB EVE File 18KB EVE File 2KB MAP File 468 KB MDB File 1KB Mercury LoadRunne 1 KB Text Document 1KB Text Document 1 KB Text Document 2KB USP File 3KB USP File 3KB USP File 1KB XML Document The content of the results directory are described in the following table Directory File Description log directory Contains output information generated during replay for each Vuser sum_data directory Contains the graph summary data dat files bd directories Contain diagnostics breakdown information 325 Chapter 16 After the Scenario Run 326 Directory File Description cfg files Contain a listing of the script s run time settings as defined in VuGen think time iterations log Web and so on The results directory contains a cfg file for each script def files Definition files for graphs that describe the on
287. es not just the one you logged on to transactions used and the users that call them number of users working on the different instances performance history for recent periods of all instances response time distribution resource consumption for any application server application server workload for the current day or for a recent period Tasks Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring gt How to Set Up the PeopleSoft Tuxedo Resource Monitor This task describes the working order for setting up the monitoring environment If Tuxedo 7 1 or later is installed you can monitor more than one PeopleSoft Tuxedo application server at a time If Tuxedo 6 5 or earlier is installed you can monitor only one PeopleSoft Tuxedo application server at a time This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 565 gt Define the environment variables on the Controller machine on page 566 gt Check the Workstation Listener WSL Process on page 566 gt Configure the PeopleSoft Tuxedo Resource monitor from the Controller on page 566 1 Prerequisites Ensure that a Tuxedo workstation client not a native client version 6 3 or later is installed on the Controller machine Use a Tuxedo 6 x client if a Tuxedo 6 x server is used and Tuxedo 7 1 or later client if a Tuxedo 7 1 or later server is used If you use a Tuxedo 6 5 or earlier server you can still use a Tuxedo 7 1 or later client in o
288. es as a router between the LoadRunner agent and the Controller This section includes Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner gt To Configure the Windows LoadRunner Agent on page 363 gt To Configure and Run the UNIX LoadRunner Agent on page 363 gt To Restart the LoadRunner Agent on page 365 To Configure the Windows LoadRunner Agent 1 Stop the LoadRunner agent by right clicking its icon in the system tray and selecting Close and then setting the options in the Agent Configuration dialog box as described in Agent Configuration Dialog Box on page 368 2 Restart the LoadRunner agent by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop 3 A green or red light next to the LoadRunner agent in the system tray indicates a successful or unsuccessful connection respectively To Configure and Run the UNIX LoadRunner Agent 1 Open lt LoadRunner root folder gt dat br_Inch_server cfg in a text editor 2 In the Firewall section set FireWallServiceActive to 1 and save your changes 3 Run agent_config from the lt LoadRunner root folder gt bin directory to display the following menu Menu Show current settings Change a setting Save changes and exit Exit without saving Use default values 363 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 4 Enter 1 to display the current settings Settings HI Listener Hame Local Machine Key Connection Timeout seconds 20 Connection T
289. es output that cannot be deleted you should create a new user that does not generate output gt Verify that PuTTY commands are working without generating any errors Type the following at the DOS command prompt under the bin directory of the installation PLINK EXE lt server machine name gt ssh I lt UNIX user login name gt i lt private key full name if used gt pw lt password or passphrase gt lt command gt Example Security Level A PLINK EXE my_unix ssh I my_name pw my_password Is Security Level B PLINK EXE my_unix ssh my_name i my_private_key pw Is Security Level C PLINK EXE my_unix ssh I my_name i my_private_key pw my_passphrase Is gt Check the PSCP EXE command as follows PSCP EXE scp r q lt private key full name if used gt pw lt password or passphrase gt lt local file name gt lt UNIX user login name gt lt server machine name gt lt remote file name gt 2 Configure the server machine to enable diagnostics To configure Siebel application and Web servers for diagnostics data collection 392 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules a Enable Siebel Diagnostics on all Siebel application and Web servers involved in the load test scenario Set the environment variable on the Siebel server to SIEBEL_SarmEnabled true Then restart the server b Optimize the server performance settings You change the maximum memory caching and file size using the
290. es the diagnostics data is installed on the Controller machine as part of the LoadRunner Full Setup For information on installing the ERP CRM Mediator on a dedicated machine see the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide gt Make sure that the load test scenario is not already running 401 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules You must configure the diagnostics module before running the load test scenario gt Manually define transactions in the Vuser script To ensure that valid diagnostics data is generated manually define the transactions in the Vuser script rather than using automatic transactions Make sure to disable the following options in the Run Time Settings General Miscellaneous node Define each action as a transaction and Define each step as a transaction gt Clear the server of users while module is running Make sure that no real or other virtual users are working on the Oracle server while the diagnostics module is running as this may affect diagnostics results gt If connecting to a remote UNIX server with a remote shell RSH RCP connection gt Verify that the RSH and RCP daemons are running on the UNIX server gt Verify that the UNIX user has permission to run remote shell commands To check this type the following at the DOS command prompt rsh lt server machine name gt lt UNIX user login name gt n lt command gt Example rsh my_unix I my_name n cd pwd
291. es whether the scenario is Running or Down 285 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Transactions Dialog Box This dialog box indicates how many transactions have been executed successfully or unsuccessfully To access Run tab gt Scenario Status pane Click the Show Snapshot Q button by Passed Failed Transactions Important VuGen automatically defines each Init Action and End information unit as a transaction In addition you can insert a static transaction in your script using the Start Transaction and End Transaction functions For details see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Relevant tasks How to Run a Scenario on page 249 See also Scenario Status Pane on page 285 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Failed The number of times the transaction failed Name The names of the individual transactions in a script Passed The number of times the transaction passed Stopped The number of times the transaction stopped TPS The number of times per second the transaction has run Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Vuser Script Log This page enables you to view run time information about each running Vuser To access Manual scenario gt Run tab gt Scenario Groups pane gt Vusers fff In the Vusers dialog box select the Vuser whose log you want to view and click Show Vuser Log Important gt
292. eseeeeeeeeeeessseeereresse 355 How to Configure the Over Firewall System eeeeeeeeceeeerrrrerreree 357 How to Configure the System to Monitor Servers Over a Firewall 361 How to Configure the LoadRunner Agent on Each Monitor Over Firewall Machine cccc ccc cceecceeccecccecceeceesscesceesceessesseesseuss 362 How to Configure Monitors Over a Firewall eeeccccceeeseeeeneeeeeees 365 References dnni nnana aaa a a econ sain ve sbudusadusadutaesencbebene 368 Working With Firewalls in LoadRunner User Interface 368 Chapter 19 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 381 COMGE PES aera aa E S E A A R ES 383 ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Overview ceesseccceeeeeeeeetneeeeeees 383 ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Architecture ccccccceeeseseeeeeeeeees 383 Connecting the Mediator to a Remote Servel ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 385 Siebel and Siebel DB Diagnostics Modules Overview seese 387 Oracle 11i Diagnostics Module Overview ceeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 387 SAP Diagnostics Module Overview ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 387 BEE K EE AE E E ASSE eaespasds cat actevsbecuaseeasuseiooses 389 How to Configure Siebel Diagnostics eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeerrereerrereerrerrees 389 How to Configure Siebel DB Diagnostics eee eeeseeeeeeeereeeeeee 396 How to Configure Oracle 11i Diagnostics eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 401 How to Configure SAP Diagnostics 0 0 ee eee
293. essesssereerrrrssseerrerrrssssee 532 TASKS vasssasaintadaatecsvecevendeaegeecdvsuvcieaghs asso oabanscedevecsnndvoncdevsusenbeccceeeueeusnuees 533 How to Set Up the DB2 Monitoring Environment eee 533 How to Set Up the Oracle Monitoring Environment 00 00 534 Referente an a AA A 538 DB2 Performance Counters esssseeeseseeeerersssreersrrrereserserrersereeereseees 538 Oracle Performance Counters sssseeeessseesseessssrerssrrersseerereeeresrreeseees 552 SQL Server Performance Counters sssssssssssseeeeresssssseeerseerresss 554 Configuring Oracle JDBC Monitor Dialog BOX eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 555 Chapter 29 Streaming Media Monitoring cccccsssssesssseeeeeee 557 CONCEPUS i o2eccecesinnesesvecccscuunaaevsoospoustsssbbivbobstines ET 558 Streaming Media Monitoring Overview cece eeeessereeeeeeeeeee 558 Table of Contents Referen CO cicisevveeeeesseeeseeesess sovovs sos vob ooboponansacnandnanananchveveccveceveceeeedseeeess 559 RealPlayer Client Performance Counters 0 cece eeeeeeesseeeceeeeeeeeeee 559 Media Player Client Performance Counte s sc eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 561 Chapter 30 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring s000 563 CONCEDES sisiacscicccscscscccscssscovovevevevveesevevevesesseseesseeevecsseonswaseucsaxesenastadteaes 564 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring Overview ceecee 564 Tasks sscciccsccdesstnsceseteccuancnensncesesssosssipoassnea0s05eeisandeae
294. essor Queue Length The instantaneous length of the processor queue in units of threads This counter is always O unless you are also monitoring a thread counter All processors use a single queue in which threads wait for processor cycles This length does not include the threads that are currently executing A sustained processor queue length greater than two generally indicates processor congestion This is an instantaneous count not an average over the time interval Memory Page Faults sec This is a count of the page faults in the processor A page fault occurs when a process refers to a virtual memory page that is not in its Working Set in the main memory A page fault will not cause the page to be fetched from disk if that page is on the standby list and hence already in main memory or if it is in use by another process with which the page is shared 489 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring 490 Object Measurement Description PhysicalDisk Disk Time The percentage of elapsed time that the selected disk drive is busy servicing read or write requests Memory Pool Nonpaged Bytes The number of bytes in the nonpaged pool a system memory area where space is acquired by operating system components as they accomplish their appointed tasks Nonpaged pool pages cannot be paged out to the paging file They remain in main memory as long as they are allocated Mem
295. et a post collation command select Tools gt Options gt Execution tab and enter the command in the Post Collate Command box For details see Options gt Execution Tab on page 225 Enable Auto Load Analysis optional To invoke HP LoadRunner Analysis as soon as the scenario is finished running select Results gt Auto Load Analysis When this is enabled Auto Load Analysis is displayed in the status bar EF Auto Load Analysis Schedule scenario Optional Define a schedule for the scenario For details see How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 Provide scenario summary information optional Select Scenario gt Summary Information and enter the scenario s summary information For details see How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 Set up the scenario to run GUI Vusers optional If you have integrated a QuickTest script into the scenario gt Ensure that QuickTest is closed before running the scenario gt In the Run Time Settings for script dialog box only the General categories and sub categories General Iterations Miscellaneous Think Time are relevant for QuickTest and WinRunner tests The Replay options are not relevant Note You can run only one GUI Vuser concurrently per machine Reference Chapter 12 Before Running Your Scenario Scenario Pre Run Configuration User Interface This section includes in alphabetical or
296. etrics in Analysis This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisite on page 204 gt Determine emulated locations and define the WAN Emulation settings for each load generator on page 204 gt View WAN metrics in HP LoadRunner Analysis on page 205 1 Prerequisite Make sure that the relevant 3rd party components are installed on the load generator machines Note that in addition to the load generators you may be required to install the WAN Emulator on additional LoadRunner components For more information see the relevant WAN emulation software installation documentation 2 Determine emulated locations and define the WAN Emulation settings for each load generator Note For concept details about emulated locations see Emulated Locations Overview on page 201 On the main Controller toolbar click the Load Generator button to open the Load Generator Information dialog box Select the desired load generator then click Details Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings On the WAN Emulation tab gt In the Emulated Location box determine which locations you would like to emulate in your scenario gt Click WAN Emulation Settings to open the third party software WAN Emulation setting dialog box For detailed information on configuring WAN Emulation using this dialog box see the relevant third party software documentation If several load generators are being configured to emulate a specific lo
297. experience over a period of weeks or months Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Checking Hardware or Software Upgrades Perform regression testing to compare a new release of hardware or software to an older release You can check how an upgrade affects response time benchmark and reliability Application regression testing does not check new features of an upgrade rather it checks that the new release is as efficient and reliable as the older release Evaluating New Products You can run tests to evaluate individual products and subsystems during the planning and design stage of a product s life cycle For example you can choose the hardware for the server machine or the database package based on evaluation tests Identifying Bottlenecks You can run tests that identify bottlenecks on the system and determine which element is causing performance degradation for example file locking resource contention and network overload Use LoadRunner in conjunction with the new network and machine monitoring tools to create load and measure performance at different points in the system For more information see Part VI Monitoring a Scenario Application Server Database Clients Server 51 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Measuring System Capacity Measure system capacity and determine how much excess capacity the system can handle without performance deg
298. ext of the selected output message when the Details button is selected Message Displays all instances of the sample message text Script The script on which the message was generated If you click the blue link VuGen opens displaying the script Action The action in the script where the message was generated If you click the blue link VuGen opens the script to the relevant action Line The line in the script where the message was generated If you click the blue link VuGen opens the script and highlights the relevant line Lines The total number of lines in the script where the Vuser failed Time The time the message was generated Iteration The iteration during which the message was generated Vuser The Vuser that generated the message 275 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Generator The load generator on which the message was generated If you click the blue link the Load Generator dialog box opens Messages The number of messages generated by a specific Vuser Diff Texts amp Run Tab The Run tab enables you to run and monitor scenarios To access Run tab Relevant tasks gt How to Run a Scenario on page 249 gt Control Vusers During a Scenario Run Use Case Scenario on page 252 276 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in an
299. f SQL UPDATE INSERT and DELETE statements that were executed ddl_sql_stmts The number of SQL Data Definition Language DDL statements that were executed 551 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring Measurement Description int_auto_rebinds The number of automatic rebinds or recompiles that have been attempted int_commits The total number of commits initiated internally by the database manager int_rollbacks The total number of rollbacks initiated internally by the database manager int_deadlock_rollbacks The total number of forced rollbacks initiated by the database manager due to a deadlock A rollback is performed on the current unit of work in an application selected by the database manager to resolve the deadlock binds_precompiles The number of binds and pre compiles attempted Oracle Performance Counters The following measurements are most commonly used when monitoring the Oracle server from the V SYSSTAT table Measurement Description CPU used by this session The amount of CPU time in 10s of milliseconds used by a session between the time a user call started and ended Some user calls can be completed within 10 milliseconds and as a result the start and end user call time can be the same In this case O milliseconds are added to the statistic A similar problem can exist in the operating system reporting especially on systems that suffer from many
300. f clients and servers are passing large data sets back and forth instruct the network administrator to increase the MTU to yield better bandwidth utilization Ideally you want the MTU to be the same as the smallest MTU of all the networks between your machine and a message s final destination If you send a message that is larger than one of the MTUs it will be broken up into fragments slowing transmission speeds If the MTU is too high it may cause unintended degradation Trial and error is the only sure way of finding the optimal MTU but there are some guidelines that can help For example most Ethernet networks have an MTU of 1500 Chapter 39 Troubleshooting Online Monitors If the desired MTU reduces performance upgrade the network or reduce the MTU to improve performance Ethernet bus Based Networks The following guidelines apply to Ethernet bus based networks gt Networks with only 2 active machines communicating yield a maximum of 90 bandwidth utilization gt Networks with 3 active machines communicating yield a maximum of approximately 85 bandwidth utilization gt As the number of active machines on the network increases the total bandwidth utilization decreases Working on a WAN or Heavily Loaded LAN When you work with LoadRunner on a WAN or heavy loaded LAN you may notice some unusual LoadRunner behavior which indicates network problems The Output window may contain messages about retries lost packets
301. ferent points in the system For more information on monitoring see Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors on page 441 Analyzing Test Results During scenario execution LoadRunner records the performance of the application under different loads You use LoadRunner s graphs and reports to analyze the application s performance For more information about LoadRunner s reports and graphs see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner amp HP LoadRunner Vuser Technology On each Windows load generator you install the Remote Agent Dispatcher Process and a LoadRunner Agent r 7 Remote Agent Dispatcher Process gt Remote Agent Dispatcher The Remote Agent Dispatcher Process enables the Controller to start applications on the load generator gt Agent The LoadRunner Agent enables the Controller and the load generator to communicate with each other When you run a scenario the Controller instructs the Remote Agent Dispatcher Process to launch the LoadRunner agent The agent receives instructions from the Controller to initialize run pause and stop Vusers At the same time the agent also relays data on the status of the Vusers back to the Controller amp HP LoadRunner Vuser Types There are two categories of Vusers Protocol Based Vusers LoadRunner supports various types of Vusers using the most common protocols Each type is designed to handle
302. fied The Controller first runs the Vusers in your scenario that have not yet been run and then adds additional Vusers as required to reach the defined quantity Stop Stops the Vusers that are running The Controller stops the Vusers according to the settings you defined in the Run Time Settings tab For more information see Options gt Run Time Settings Tab on page 232 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description lt check box gt Selects the Vuser groups scripts you add Vusers to Notes gt To disable a Vuser group script clear the check box to the left of the group script name A group script automatically appear disabled if it is disabled in the Design view gt When you disable a Vuser group Vuser Group mode no Vusers are added to the group gt When you disable a script Percentage mode no Vusers are distributed to the script and the unused percentage of the Vusers are not distributed among the remaining scripts unless you define a zero percent value for the disabled script Example If you have three scripts A B and C and you enter 10 in the Distribute X Vusers among all the scripts box LoadRunner automatically distributes these Vusers as equally as possible among the scripts that is gt A 4 Vusers gt B 3 Vusers gt C 3 Vusers However if you want LoadRunner to distribute all 10 Vusers to A it is not sufficient to simply deselect B and C
303. following variables SIEBEL_SarmMaxMemory lt bytes gt SIEBEL_SarmMaxFileSize lt bytes gt The SIEBEL_SarmMaxMemory value controls the size of the buffer that Siebel keeps in the memory before writing the information to the Siebel log files You can improve server performance by increasing the parameter value However information from the end of the run will be missing from the Analysis graphs We recommend the following settings gt SIEBEL_SarmMaxMemory Value Number of Vusers 5000 Less than 20 low loads 1000000 More than 100 high loads gt SIEBEL_SarmMaxFileSize Value Number of Vusers 5000000 Less than 20 low loads 25000000 More than 100 high loads If more than one Siebel log file is generated on the server every 10 seconds you should increase the SIEBEL_SarmMaxFileSize 393 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 394 Note For Siebel 7 7 the parameters differ slightly c Generate a list of Siebel Server IDs On the Siebel server open a command window and run the following command lt Siebel bin directory gt srvrmgr u lt username gt p lt password gt g lt gateway server gt e lt entrpr server gt c list servers show SBLSRVR_NAME SV_SRVRID where u lt username gt is the server administrator username p lt password gt is the server administrator password g lt gateway server gt is the gateway server address e lt entrp
304. g Siebel diagnostics 393 generating application server IDs 394 optimizing server performance settings 393 Siebel Server Manager graph 310 Siebel Server Manager monitor troubleshooting 580 SiteScope Configuration dialog 460 SiteScope graph 308 SNMP Configuration dialog 460 SNMP Resources graph 308 Solaris configuring IP addresses 187 188 SQL Server graph 309 SSLs per Second graph 307 468 status Vusers 71 Streaming Media monitors 558 System Resource monitors 477 T Terminal Services 193 Throughput graph 306 464 Total Transactions Per Second Passed graph 306 Transaction monitors 471 Transaction Per Second Failed Stopped graph 306 Transaction Per Second Passed graph 305 Transaction Response Time graph 305 transactions 20 deciding which to define 47 Total Transactions per Second Passed graph 474 Transaction Response Time graph 474 Transactions per Second Failed Stopped graph 474 Transactions per Second Passed graph 474 troubleshooting monitors 659 network considerations 663 Troubleshooting and Knowledge Base 12 Tuxedo graph 310 Tuxedo performance counters 613 Tuxedo tpinit file 615 U UNIX activating rstatd 482 UNIX Resources graph 307 User Defined Data Points graph 305 473 v V SYSSTAT table 552 Index Vuser 23 Vuser quota 113 234 Vuser scripts 20 Vuser states Run Time graphs 472 Vuser statuses 71 Vusers defined 20 GUI Vusers 24 Vusers with Errors graph 305 474 Ww WAN emulation 1
305. g the command open sitescope templates applications commandline siebel and verify that you can run the following command from the command line CONNECT_COMMAND PATH srvrmgr g GATEWAY e ENTERPRISE s SERVERS u USERNAME p PASSWORD Note On a Windows 2000 Advanced Server platform this command must be changed to CONNECT_COMMAND PATHS srvrmgr exe g GATEWAY e SENTERPRISE s SERVERS u USERNAME p PASSWORD 581 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring 582 32 Application Component Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Application Component Monitoring Overview on page 584 Reference gt Microsoft COM Performance Counters on page 586 583 Chapter 32 Application Component Monitoring Concepts amp Application Component Monitoring Overview 584 Using LoadRunner s Application Component monitors you can monitor the Microsoft COM server during a scenario run in order to isolate server performance bottlenecks The Microsoft COM monitor is an Application Component monitor that provides performance information for the Microsoft COM server Before monitoring a Microsoft COM server you install the Microsoft COM Server Monitor Probe on the server machine You can then specify which Measurements and resources you want the Microsoft COM monitor to measure You select these counters using the Controller s monitor configuration dialog box This section also
306. g with LoadRunner Online Monitors Concepts amp Monitoring Process Overview Before monitoring a scenario you need to set up and configure the LoadRunner monitoring components Each monitor has different configuration requirements that are explained in the specific monitoring chapters The following diagram illustrates the LoadRunner monitoring process Monitor performance in Performance Metrics online graphs Controller Load Generators Configure the monitor Monitored Servers Configure the servers for monitoring Before monitoring a server perform the following steps gt Configure the monitoring environment on the server machine if necessary gt Configure the monitor on the Controller machine For details see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 442 Tasks Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors gt How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow This task describes how to set up the LoadRunner online monitoring environment You specify the machines and measurements that the Controller will monitor during a scenario execution in the Controller s Run tab During scenario execution the collected measurement data appears in the online graphs This task includes the following steps gt Yy vyv vyv y Configure the monitoring environment on the server machine on page 443 Add the monitored server to the Controller o
307. get cannot be reached gt Receive Notification If selected the Controller sends an error message indicating that the target could not be reached Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Group Information Dialog Box This dialog box displays details about the selected Vuser group and enables you to modify the group s settings To access Manual Scenario gt Design tab gt Scenario Groups pane gt Details a Important gt Relevant for manual scenarios in Vuser group mode information only gt Available when a group is selected in the Scenario Groups pane Relevant Tasks gt How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 gt How to View Modify Scripts in the Scenario on page 65 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Refresh Description Updates script settings as follows gt Script If a script was modified during a scenario run updates the script details in the scenario gt Run Time Settings If you modified a script s run time settings from the Controller restores the initial run time settings View Script Opens VuGen where you can view and edit the script For more information on editing scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Run Time Settings Opens the Run Time Settings dialog box where you can edit the Vuser script s run time settings When you modify the run time settings from the Con
308. gine Click Advanced In the Choose Monitor Engine dialog box select SiteScope For more information see the relevant monitoring section In the Monitored Server Machines section of the lt Monitor gt dialog box click Add The Add Machine dialog box opens gt Enter the server name or IP address of the machine you want to monitor Select the platform on which the machine runs gt For Sitescope monitors enter the name and port number of the SiteScope server and specify whether you are using a Secure HTTP connection To use an account enter the relevant account information For user interface details see Add Machine Dialog Box on page 450 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors 3 For SiteScope monitors configure the remote server You configure the remote machine according to your machine s platform Windows or Unix Windows platform When you add measurements to monitor for the first time the Configuring NT Remote Machine dialog box opens For user interface details see Configuring NT Remote Machine Dialog Box on page 452 UNIX platform When you add measurements to monitor for the first time the Configuring Unix Remote Machine dialog box opens For user interface details see Configuring Unix Remote Machine Dialog Box on page 455 4 Select the measurements that you want to monitor b Make sure that the monitor you are configuring is selected in the Monitored Server Machines area of the lt M
309. gle brackets UI Elements A Z Description e Start Scenario Instructs the Controller to initialize the Vusers and distribute them to their designated load generators where they begin running their Vuser scripts Notes gt The Controller begins running the scenario according to the start time defined in the scenario schedule gt We do not recommend changing the Time Date and Time Zone settings on the Controller and load generators during the load test run a Stop E Stop Now Terminates the scenario The behavior depends on your selection in the Tools gt Options gt Run Time Settings tab gt If you selected Stop immediately all Vusers in the scenario move to the Exiting status gt If you selected Wait for the current iteration to end before exiting or Wait for the current action to end before exiting the button text changes to Stop Now and the Vusers status changes to Gradual Exiting To stop the Vusers immediately click Stop Now For more information about the Run Time Settings options see Options gt Run Time Settings Tab on page 232 44 Reset Resets all Vuser groups to the Down status Vusers Opens the Vusers dialog box where you can view the status of each of the Vusers in a Vuser group H Run Stop Vusers Opens the Run Stop Vusers dialog box where you can activate additional Vusers 277 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 278
310. guration gt Terminal Services Tab This tab displays the Terminal Services Manager which enables you to distribute Vusers running in your load testing scenario on terminal servers To access Important information Controller toolbar gt Bal gt Add or Details This feature is not supported if the load generator is located over a firewall Relevant tasks gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 See also Terminal Services Overview on page 194 116 Chapter 5 Load Generators User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description Defaults Resets values to their defaults lt Connection Options gt gt Connect to existing Terminal Services Sessions Enables connection to existing open terminal sessions Note If you select this option you must open a terminal client session manually for each terminal that you want to run Vusers on during the scenario gt Create new Terminal Services Sessions Enables the Controller to open and close terminal sessions automatically using a user name password and domain for the Terminal Services session gt Show Terminal Services clients on the Controller machine Enables interaction with new Terminal Services sessions using the RDP client Enable Terminal Services Manager
311. h tables in the format Property Value for the protocols Citrix ICA Oracle NCA and WAP For example Oracle NCA Client Emulation node Relevant tasks Modify multiple scripts run time settings on page 67 83 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Individual RTS Opens a separate Run Time Settings dialog box one at a time for each selected script In this mode you modify each script s settings individually Shared RTS Opens the Run Time Settings Shared Mode dialog box containing all of the run time settings in blank mode In this mode any settings that are change are applied to all selected scripts All other run time settings remain unchanged See Important information above New Scenario Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to create a new scenario and select Vuser scripts to run in the scenario Controller toolbar gt New Scenario E Relevant tasks To access Important Before you create a scenario you should have a good idea information as to the type of scenario you want to create See Load Test Scenarios Overview on page 54 gt How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 gt How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Add gt gt Moves the script selected in the Ava
312. habetical order gt Adding Destination Machines for Network Delay Monitoring Dialog Box on page 505 gt Network Delay Time Dialog Box on page 506 gt Network Delay Time Graph on page 508 gt Network Monitor Settings for Defined Path Dialog Box on page 508 Adding Destination Machines for Network Delay Monitoring Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to add destination machines for network delay monitoring and configure additional network monitor settings To access Network Delay Time dialog box gt To machine s section gt Click Add Important The Network Delay Time Monitor cannot be configured information to work in TCP mode on Windows XP SP2 or Vista Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Network Monitoring Environment on page 500 505 Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Add Enter the name or URL of the machine at the final destination of the path you want to monitor in the New Machine Name dialog box Repeat this for each path you want to monitor Note If the destination machine is localhost enter the local machine s name and not localhost Delete Deletes the destination machine to remove this path from the monitor graph Rename Renames the destination machine HL Properties Opens the Configuring Network Monitor Settings for Defined Path dialog box From Machine
313. hanan Jr s The Art of Testing Network Systems John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1996 More details on these objectives appear after the table Objective Answers the Question Measuring end user response time How long does it take to complete a business process Defining optimal hardware configuration Which hardware configuration provides the best performance Checking reliability How hard or long can the system work without errors or failures Checking hardware or software upgrades How does the upgrade affect performance or reliability Evaluating new products Which server hardware or software should you choose Measuring system capacity Identifying bottlenecks How much load can the system handle without significant performance degradation Which element is slowing down response time This section also includes Measuring End User Response Time on page 36 Defining Optimal Hardware Configuration on page 36 Checking Reliability on page 36 Evaluating New Products on page 37 Identifying Bottlenecks on page 37 gt gt gt gt Checking Hardware or Software Upgrades on page 37 gt gt gt Measuring System Capacity on page 38 35 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios 36 Measuring End User Response Time Check how long it takes for the user to perform a business process and receive a response from the server For example s
314. he Display section select User and enter the required user name In the Profile field enter Utilities Diagnostics and click Find The Utilities Diagnostics profile values are displayed In the User column of the Utilities Diagnostics profile set the value to Yes Save your settings How to View Diagnostics Results This task includes the following steps gt Open Analysis on page 412 gt View results in the Analysis diagnostics graphs on page 412 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 412 1 Open Analysis In the Run tab of the Controller select Results gt Analyze Results or click the Analyze Results button View results in the Analysis diagnostics graphs You can use the Analysis diagnostics graphs and reports to view the performance data and drill down to pinpoint problem areas in any layer of the application For information about specific diagnostics graphs see the following sections in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide gt Siebel Diagnostics Graphs gt Siebel DB Diagnostics Graphs gt Oracle 11i Diagnostics Graphs gt SAP Diagnostics Graphs Reference LoadRunner Diagnostics Modules User Interface Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules This section includes in alphabetical order gt Diagnostics Distribution Dialog Box on page 413 gt Oracle 11i Configuration Dialog Box on page 417 gt Oracle 11i Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 4
315. he HP LoadRunner Testing Process Overview ssesseseeercrerrrrseeeeee 21 HP LoadRunner Vuser Technology seeseeesssssseeeesrreseerrerrrrssseerererreeeeee 23 HP LoadRunner Vuser Types ssseesesssseesssressssssseereressereeeersssssereeeesseeeee 23 Vuser Technolog yonne ereen eeaeee ea oes S EAS KERE Teaio 25 RETEREIN CE ics E E eR S E AAA TS 27 Controller WindOw os s cscsevivssovesersscccececccscsnssccceccutvenaatencecveseansecesaseseses 27 PART II DESIGNING LOAD TEST SCENARIOS Chapter 2 Planning Load Test Scenarios ccssescccessseceeeeeeeseeeee 33 CONCEDES sissies cicssscccscccovevevveveveversverscsseveveveesvecesseesesadacsasunducnecccecusescecteaes 34 Load Test Planning OVErVieW 0 0 ee ceeseseecccceecessreeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeee 34 Load Testing ODjectives 2 ccccceseccccenscegissecvsnnstvasesetvancacasadecstecstuatevedeven 34 Table of Contents TASKS svccccccccnneeveisevevennnnvanncvcesvenndsass vas sobs DEPTI N SS SSVI EESTE VTISE 39 How to Plan a Load TesSt eee e aaa ea aai 39 How to Analyze the Application sseesssessesesseressssseererssseereeeersssseeeees 40 How to Define the Load Test Objectives eee eeeeeeessteeceesseeeeeseees 43 How to Plan the LoadRunner Implementation eee cesta 44 RETEROM COs naira vate gaswan youn vost yeatyasncedeacacacecadecaccdadcenasseUeeeuveeesess 49 Examining Load Testing Objectives le eeeesseeeeeeessereeeeeeeeeeee 49 Chapter 3 Designing Scenarios
316. he Vusers gt ID The Vuser s ID number gt Status The Vuser s status For details see Vuser Statuses on page 71 gt Script The script run by the Vuser Load Generator The load generator on which the Vuser is running gt Elapsed Time Amount of time that has elapsed in the scenario since the Vuser began running 99 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 100 5 Load Generators This chapter includes Concepts gt Load Generators Overview on page 102 gt Load Balancing on page 102 Tasks gt How to Connect to a UNIX Load Generator Without Using RSH on page 104 gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 gt How to Connect Disconnect a Load Generator on page 106 Reference gt UNIX Environment Variables on page 107 gt Load Generators User Interface on page 107 101 Chapter 5 Load Generators Concepts amp Load Generators Overview Load generators are the machines that run the Vuser scripts in your scenario When you add a load generators to the list of load generators in the Controller you define its attributes You can modify these attributes at any time You can enable load generators to take part in the scenario and then indicate which specific load generators will run Vuser scripts in the scenario If an enabled load generator is unavailable for a particular scenario run you can exclude it tempor
317. he file paths for the host event files SLAConfiguration xml Contains SLA definition information for the scenario When you generate analysis graphs and reports the Analysis engine copies all of the scenario result files eve and Irr to a database After the database is created Analysis works directly with the database and does not use the result files Collating Results User Interface This section includes gt Collate Results Dialog Box on page 327 Collate Results Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to view the progress of result collation after a scenario run To access gt Results gt Collate Results gt Collate Results gt If Auto Collate Results is activated this dialog box opens automatically when LoadRunner starts collating the run results after a scenario run Relevant tasks gt How to Collate Scenario Run Results on page 324 gt Enable Automatic Result Collation optional on page 241 327 Chapter 16 After the Scenario Run 328 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Stops collating the results Close automatically General Status Select to automatically close the Collate Results dialog box after collation is completed The collation status and file size of the Event Diagnostics and Log files Note The file size shown is before compression Progress Details The status succeeded f
318. he following steps Prerequisites on page 165 Run through the SLA wizard on page 165 Define a tracking period optional on page 165 Yy v y y Results on page 166 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements 1 Prerequisites If you are defining an SLA for Average Transaction Response Time your scenario must include a script that contains at least one transaction 2 Run through the SLA wizard In the Service Level Agreement pane click New to open the Service Level Agreement wizard For user interface details see Service Level Agreement Wizard on page 174 Select a measurement for the SLA If you are defining an SLA for Average Transaction Response Time select the transactions to include in your goal c Optional When evaluating SLA statuses over a timeline select load criteria to take into account and define appropriate load value ranges for the load criteria For an example see How to Define Service Level Agreements Use Case Scenario on page 166 d Set thresholds for the measurements gt If the Average Transaction Response Time or Errors per Second exceed the defined thresholds Analysis will produce a Failed SLA status gt If Total Hits per run Average Hits hits second per run Total Throughput bytes per run or Average Throughput bytes second per run are lower than the defined threshold Analysis will produce a Failed SLA status 3 Define a tracking period optional For measurements whose
319. he load affects network and server response time Client Middleware Server gt Measuring GUI response time You can determine how the client application interface affects response time by subtracting the previous two measurements 45 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios GUI response time end to end network and server Client Middleware Server gt Measuring server response time You can measure the time it takes for the server to respond to a request without going across the network When you run Vusers on a machine directly connected to the server you can measure server performance Client Middleware Server gt Measuring middleware to server response time You can measure response time from the server to middleware if you have access to the middleware and its API You can create Vusers with the middleware API and measure the middleware server performance Client Middleware Server 46 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios 2 Define Vuser activities Create Vuser scripts based on your analysis of Vuser types their typical tasks and your test objectives Since Vusers emulate the actions of a typical end user the Vuser scripts should include the typical end user tasks For example to emulate an online banking client you should create a Vuser script that performs typical banking tasks You would browse the pages that you normally visit to transfer funds or check balances You decide which
320. he y axis and the graph s actual value gt Autoscale Automatically scales the measurement by calculating the best ratio for displaying the graph For some graphs this option is not available Default value Autoscale Example A scale of 1 indicates that the measurement s value is the value of the y axis If you select a scale of 10 you must multiply the y axis value by 10 to obtain the true value of the measurement gt Show Hide The resource selected in the legend is shown hidden in the graph By default all resource measurements are shown in the graph To show only a selected measurement right click the measurement and select Show Only Selected Note Alternatively right click a measurement in the graph legend and select Show Hide Information about the measurement gt Machine Displays the name of the machine whose resources are being monitored Note Displayed only when a machine s resources are being monitored gt Description Displays a description of the selected measurement Note Also accessible by right clicking a measurement in the legend and selecting Description Machine The name of the machine whose resources are being monitored Note Displayed only when a machine s resources are being monitored Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs UI Elements A Z Description Measurement The name of the selected measurement Network Type Appears only when
321. heduled gt Release when X of all running Vusers arrive at the rendezvous Releases the Vusers only when the specified percentage of all Vusers running in the scenario arrives at the rendezvous point gt Release when X Vusers arrive at the rendezvous Releases the Vusers only when the specified number arrives at the rendezvous point gt Timeout between Vusers The timeout value in seconds After each Vuser arrives at the rendezvous point LoadRunner waits up to the maximum timeout period specified for the next Vuser to arrive If the next Vuser does not arrive within the timeout period the Controller releases all the Vusers from the rendezvous Each time a new Vuser arrives the timer is reset to zero You set a timeout for each rendezvous point Default value 30 seconds Disable User Disables a Vuser from taking part in the rendezvous Enable User Enables a Vuser to take part in the rendezvous dd Reset ii Resets the Status Information removing the information currently displayed Chapter 15 e Rendezvous Points UI Elements A Z Description Release While a scenario is running enables you to manually release Vusers from a rendezvous before the Controller releases them Use this option if you want the scenario to continue running even though all the Vusers did not reach the rendezvous Rendezvous The names of the rendezvous points in the scenario Scr
322. hentication data as a hexadecimal string beginning with Ox in the data box The authentication data value can be obtained from the The user login name to access the Tuxedo server Note You can determine the client name from the Irt_tpinitialize statement in the recorded script Password The user password to access the Tuxedo server 619 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring 620 UI Elements Description Server Name Enter the name of the server The format of the server name is lt machine name gt lt port number gt Alternatively you can specify the IP address or the hexadecimal format used by old versions of Tuxedo Note You cannot use quotation marks Client Name Enter the name of the client machine If a Tuxedo server was previously monitored its name is displayed in the Server Name box 35 Infrastructure Resources Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Infrastructure Resources Monitoring Overview on page 622 Reference gt Network Client Performance Counters on page 623 621 Chapter 35 Infrastructure Resources Monitoring Concepts Infrastructure Resources Monitoring Overview 622 Using LoadRunner s Network Client monitor you can monitor network client resources for FTP POP3 SMTP IMAP and DNS Vusers during a scenario run and isolate client performance bottlenecks Activating the Network Client Monitor The
323. here is more than one card on the list run webtrace dev lt dev_name gt lt destination gt where lt dev_name gt is one of the network card names shown in the list If you discover that WebTrace is binding to the wrong card you can use webtrace set_device lt dev_name gt to set a registry key that instructs WebTrace to use a specified card instead of the default one gt Verify that the network card is of the Ethernet type gt Contact the Customer Support Web site with the output of webtrace exe debug for example webtrace exe debug www merc int com and ipconfig all on the machine 27 Web Server Resource Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Web Server Resource Monitoring Overview on page 514 Tasks gt How to change the Apache default server properties on page 515 Reference gt Apache Performance Counters on page 516 gt Microsoft IIS Performance Counters on page 516 gt Web Server Resource Monitoring User Interface on page 517 513 Chapter 27 Web Server Resource Monitoring Concepts amp Web Server Resource Monitoring Overview 514 Web Server Resource monitors provide you with information about the resource usage of the Microsoft IIS and Apache Web servers during scenario execution To obtain this data you need to activate the online monitor for the server and specify which resources you want to measure before executing the scenario Note Certain measurements or counters
324. hese goals 85 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Select the scripts you would like to use in your scenario Optional Select the scripts to use in the scenario gt Available Scripts Lists the fifty most recently used scripts gt Scripts in Scenario Lists the scripts selected for the scenario Click Add Remove to move selected scripts between the two lists Note You can change the maximum number of scripts displayed in the Available Scripts box by modifying the following registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Mercury Interactive RecentScripts max_num_of_scripts Show at startup When selected the New Scenario dialog box is displayed upon opening the Controller Note This option can also be enabled disabled from the Controller s View menu Select View gt Show New Scenario Dialog Scenario Goal Pane This pane displays the goals defined for the scenario To access Goal oriented scenario gt Design tab Important gt Available for goal oriented scenarios only information gt The goal profiles include the type of goal the minimum and maximum number of Vusers that should be used in the scenario the duration of the scenario and the load behavior Relevant tasks How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 86 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios User interface elements are described below UI
325. his value The average amount of time that an unprocessed dialog step waits in the dispatcher queue for a free work process Under normal conditions the dispatcher work process should pass a dialog step to the application process immediately after receiving the request from the dialog step Under these conditions the average wait time would be a few milliseconds A heavy load on the application server or on the entire system causes queues at the dispatcher queue Average load time The time needed to load and generate objects such as ABAP source code and screen information from the database Database calls The number of parsed requests sent to the database Database requests The number of logical ABAP requests for data in the database These requests are passed through the R 3 database interface and parsed into individual database calls The proportion of database calls to database requests is important If access to information in a table is buffered in the SAP buffers database calls to the database server are not required Therefore the ratio of calls requests gives an overall indication of the efficiency of table buffering A good ratio would be 1 10 572 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring Measurement Description Roll ins The number of rolled in user contexts Roll outs The number of rolled out user contexts Roll in time The processing time for roll ins Ro
326. his section describes how to modify run time settings of multiple scripts or of a Vuser group that includes multiple scripts 1 In the Scenario Groups Scripts pane select multiple scripts or the Vuser group that includes multiple scripts 2 Right click the selection and select Run Time Settings 67 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 68 3 In the Multiple Run Time Settings Mode dialog box that opens gt To modify run time settings for all of the scripts simultaneously click Shared RTS gt To modify run time settings per script click Individual RTS For user interface details see Multiple Run Time Settings Mode Dialog Box on page 83 Note gt For details about specific run time settings see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide gt When you modify the run time settings from the Controller LoadRunner runs the script using the modified settings View Edit a script in VuGen To view edit a script included in your scenario right click the script and select View Script The script opens in VuGen For more information on editing scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Specify command line options You can specify command line options to use when running a script 1 In the Scenario Groups Scripts pane right click the script and select Details 2 In the Group Script Information dialog box that opens if Command line is not displayed near the bottom click More 3 Enter a command in th
327. ialog Box on page 74 Ara Remove Deletes the selected Vuser script Run Time Settings Opens the Run Time Settings dialog box where you can edit the Vuser script s run time settings Notes gt When you modify the run time settings from the Controller LoadRunner runs the script using the modified settings gt If run time settings for a script were not defined in VuGen the Controller displays its own default settings for Log and Think Time Default VuGen settings are displayed for all other nodes EQ Details Opens the Script Information dialog box where you can view the Vuser script s settings See Script Information Dialog Box on page 94 LF View Script Opens the script in VuGen where you can view and edit the Vuser script For more information on editing scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description lt Right click menu gt gt Auto Sort When adding a script automatically sorts the table according to the defined sort gt Sort Scripts Enables you to sort the table by Vuser script name script path percentage of Vusers or load generator To sort the table in ascending descending order click the relevant table heading lt Scripts table gt Displays the following information about the Vuser scripts selected for the scenario gt D Indicates that the script is particip
328. iately created and move directly to the Run state Group Name Down Pending Init Ready Run Rendez Passed Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Sto zi 10 0 0 10 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 Script A 10 10 Script _B 5 5 Script_C 5 5 Note If there were still vusers in the Down state the new Vusers would be taken from them Initialize Run additional Vusers in Percentage mode The following procedure shows how David can initialize and run additional Vusers when he is working in Percentage mode Note The options to initialize or run additional Vusers can be done as two separate actions with no connection to each other They are being shown here together as a single workflow for demonstrative purposes only 1 Initialize new Vusers If he wants to initialize ten Vusers in Script_A immediately and not wait for them to initialize as per their defined schedules in the Run tab he clicks Run Stop Vusers to open the Run Stop Vusers dialog box 263 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 264 In the dialog box he makes sure that only the check box by script_a is selected and he enters 10 in the Distribute X Vusers among all the scripts box It is also important that the percentage values for Script_B and Script_C are set to 0 See the note below for a detailed explanation why Run Stop Vusers x Distribute fi 0 Vusers among all scripts Script Name Load Generators x script a 10 lt All Load Gene
329. ick Add Relevant tasks How to Configure Siebel DB Diagnostics on page 396 See also Siebel DB Configuration Dialog Box on page 422 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Domain Password Passphrase The Siebel server domain The user password or passphrase Private Key File The name of the file where the Private Key is stored This can be found on the Mediator If you specify the file name only without a path the configuration automatically looks for the file in the Mediator s lt LoadRunner gt bin directory 423 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules UI Elements A Z Description Server Log Directory A location where the Siebel application saves the log files The log files can be saved in a shared log directory on the Siebel server or in a separate folder Server Name The name of the Siebel server Server Platform The Siebel server platform Use Secure Shell Select if you are working with a Secure Shell connection User Name The user name of the server where log files are stored Note For Windows platforms the user should have administrator privileges Siebel Server Configuration Dialog Box 424 This dialog box enables you to add Siebel servers and to enter server information To access Select Diagnostics gt Configuration Click Configure next
330. ies right click the server you want to clone and select Clone In the Monitored Server box type the name or IP address of the clone server you want to create 367 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner Reference Working With Firewalls in LoadRunner User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Agent Configuration Dialog Box on page 368 gt Agent Configuration Settings Dialog Box on page 369 gt MI Listener Configuration Dialog Box on page 371 Agent Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to open the Agent Configuration Settings dialog box in order to configure the LoadRunner agent on Windows machines To access gt Run Agent Configuration from Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Advanced Settings gt Run lt LoadRunner root gt launch service bin AgentConfig exe Important Stop the LoadRunner agent before working with this information dialog box Relevant tasks How to Configure the LoadRunner Agent on Each Monitor Over Firewall Machine on page 362 See also Agent Configuration Settings Dialog Box on page 369 368 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Click to open the Agent Configuration Settings dialog box Enable Firewall Select of you are enabling or running Vusers over a Agent firewall Enable Terminal Select to enable
331. igure the firewall between the source and destination machines Optional on page 501 gt Specify the network monitor paths on page 502 Prerequisites To enable network monitoring you must install the LoadRunner agent on the source machine You do not have to install the LoadRunner agent on the destination machine To run the Network monitor you must have administrator privileges on the Windows source machine unless you are using the ICMP protocol Configure the UNIX source machine optional You can run the Network monitor on UNIX source machines using UDP or ICMP Before running the Network monitor from a UNIX source machine configure the source machine For task details see How to Configure the UNIX Source Machine for Network Monitoring on page 502 Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring 3 Configure the firewall between the source and destination machines Optional If you are monitoring a network in which there are firewalls between the source and the destination machines you must configure the firewalls to allow the network data packets to reach their destinations gt If you are using the TCP protocol the firewall that protects the destination machine should not block outgoing ICMP_TIMEEXCEEDED packets packets that are sent outside the firewall from the machine In addition the firewall protecting the source machine should allow ICMP_TIMEEXCEEDED packets to enter as well as TCP packets to exit gt
332. ilable Scripts box to the Scripts in Scenario box E Remove Removes the selected script from the Scripts in Scenario box 84 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Browse Enables you to add scripts to the list of available scripts Note To add a VB Vuser script select the usr file ie Record Opens VuGen where you can record a Vuser script For more information on recording Vuser scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide HP ALM iii Opens the Connection to HP ALM dialog box where you can connect to Application Lifecycle Management to download scripts Select Scenario Type Select the type of scenario to create For details see Load Test Scenarios Overview on page 54 gt Manual Scenario You manually build the scenario creating Vuser groups and specifying the script load generators and the number of Vusers to include in each Vuser group gt Use the Percentage mode You define the total number of Vusers to be used in the scenario and assign a percentage of the total number of Vusers to each Vuser script Note You can convert from one scenario mode to another at any time For details see How to Change the Scenario Mode Manual Scenario on page 65 gt Goal Oriented Scenario You define the goals you want your test to achieve and LoadRunner automatically builds a scenario for you based on t
333. ilable for a load generator running information Vusers or monitoring over a firewall gt Editable only when the load generator is on a UNIX platform Relevant tasks gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 gt How to Connect to a UNIX Load Generator Without Using RSH on page 104 118 Chapter 5 Load Generators User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Login as The user s credentials for logging in to the UNIX environment gt Name If the load generator is UNIX based set the login information for the load generator Default LoadRunner uses your Windows user name for the UNIX login That is if your Windows login is lrunner the Controller logs in to the load generator as lrunner To log in to a UNIX based load generator using a different login name select Name and specify the desired UNIX login name Using this option you can log in to the Windows Controller as bill and connect to the UNIX load generator as mike However you should make sure that mike allows bill to log in using his name This can be done by adding the line bill at the beginning of mike s rhosts file gt Use lower case for login names Instructs LoadRunner to use lower case names during login to avoid case sensitive issues with the UNIX operation system Local User Expert mode only UNIX loa
334. ile to the list click Add Example To run Visual C Vusers on a remote load generator you must add the dil of the Vuser to the list of files You can delete the files that you add but not the other files listed 69 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Reference Relative Paths for Scripts 70 You can specify a relative location for a script in your scenario The location can be relative to the current scenario directory or relative to the LoadRunner installation directory When you run a scenario the script is automatically copied from this relative location to a temporary directory on the load generator running the script This enables the load generator to access the script locally instead of over a network To specify a path relative to the current scenario director type either of the following notations at the start of the script path Notation Description iN Indicates that the path is relative to the location of the scenario directory aN Indicates that the path is relative to the location of the parent directory of the scenario directory For example if the current scenario is located at F scenarios to specify that the script user1 is located in F scenarios scripts you could type scripts user1 To specify a path relative to the LoadRunner installation directory type a percent sign at the beginning of the script path For example if the LoadRunner installation directory
335. ime Settings General Miscellaneous node Define each action as a transaction and Define each step as a transaction gt Avoid session ID conflicts Make sure that the Vusers log off from the Siebel system at the end of each session gt Add think time after transactions When preparing your script for collection of diagnostics data we recommend that you add think time at the end of each transaction using the ratio of one second per hour of testing 397 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 398 gt Synchronize clocks Windows Siebel Servers Ensure that all the machines clocks in the Siebel system are synchronized This ensures that the correlation of SQLs to transactions is correct Synchronize the Siebel Gateway and load generators clocks by running the following command from the load generator net time lt Gateway name gt set y Replace lt Gateway name gt with the name of the Siebel Gateway Synchronize clocks Unix Siebel servers Ensure that all the machines clocks in the Siebel system are synchronized This ensures that the correlation of SQLs to transactions is correct You can synchronize the clocks on a UNIX system in one of the following ways gt Use the date command on the UNIX Siebel Gateway server to change the time manually so it will be synchronized with the Load Generator s clock gt Change the time on the load generator so that it will be synchronized
336. index entry to display the corresponding topic If your selection occurs in multiple documents the right pane displays a list of possible locations enabling you to select a context gt Search tab Enables you to search for specific topics or keywords Results are returned in ranked order You can limit your search to a specific guide by selecting a value from the scope drop down list Note The search looks for each individual word in the phrase and not for full phrases regardless of whether you use quotations gt Favorites tab Enables you to bookmark specific topics for quick reference The Favorites tab is available only when using the Java implementation of the Help If your browser does not support Java the JavaScript implementation is automatically used and the Favorites tab is not displayed Show in Contents Displays the Contents tab in the navigation pane and highlights the entry corresponding to the currently displayed page This button is displayed only when the navigation pane is open Previous and Next Navigates to the previous or next page in the currently displayed guide Welcome to This Guide Option Description Send Documentation Feedback to HP We welcome your feedback Use this button in any topic to open an email addressed to us containing the page reference Send us your comments ideas for improvement and any errors you find Print Prints the currently displayed
337. ined objects are displayed in the Object name list To show all objects clear the Filter System Objects check box You can modify the filter settings in the lt LoadRunner_installation gt dat monitors maqseries cfg file Monitored Object list A list of monitored objects including the object s name events and attributes and alternate queue manager Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring Tuxedo Logon Dialog Box This dialog box configures the connection information for the Tuxedo server To access Right click the Tuxedo graph and select Add Measurements This dialog appears only when you add measurements for the first time Important information If you are using Tuxedo 6 5 or below the monitor can only connect to one application server during a scenario Once it connects to an application server the server is the only one used by the monitor until the Controller is closed This applies even when all of the counters are deleted from the monitor Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Tuxedo Monitor How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow User interface elements are described below UI Elements Description eS Browse recorded script rather than enter the values manually For more information see Tuxedo tpinit ini File on page 615 Advanced Login Name To authenticate the Tuxedo monitor click Advanced and enter the aut
338. ing non idle threads On a multi processor system if all processors are always busy this is 100 if all processors are 50 busy this is 50 and if 1 4 of the processors are 100 busy this is 25 It can be viewed as the fraction of the time spent doing useful work Each processor is assigned an Idle thread in the Idle process which consumes those unproductive processor cycles not used by any other threads System File Data Operations sec The rate at which the computer issues read and write operations to file system devices This does not include File Control Operations Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring Object Measurement Description Processor Processor Time Windows 2000 The percentage of time that the processor is executing a non idle thread This counter was designed as a primary indicator of processor activity It is calculated by measuring the time that the processor spends executing the thread of the idle process in each sample interval and subtracting that value from 100 Each processor has an idle thread which consumes cycles when no other threads are ready to run It can be viewed as the percentage of the sample interval spent doing useful work This counter displays the average percentage of busy time observed during the sample interval It is calculated by monitoring the time the service was inactive and then subtracting that value from 100 System Proc
339. ing the integrated Java Client in SiteScope Title Optional A title for the remote machine name This name will appear in the drop down list Trace Select to have trace messages to and from the subject server recorded to the SiteScope RunMonitor log file Configuring Unix Remote Machine Dialog Box Enables you to configure the remote Unix machine for SiteScope monitors Relevant Tasks To access Right click the graph and select Add Measurements This dialog appears only when you add measurements for the first time Important You configure the UNIX remote server machine for Information SiteScope monitors only How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 455 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description lt Test gt After defining the server for SiteScope you can test the settings by clicking the test link SiteScope attempts to display the working directory of the remote machine the pwd command on UNIX or cd on Windows as a test to ensure that the remote machine can be accessed and can run commands properly Connection Limit The maximum number of connections for this remote machine Connection Method The supported methods for connecting to the server gt Telnet Log in to the remote server using Telnet gt SSH Log in to the remote
340. ion Running Vusers Provides information about the status of the Vusers running in the current scenario on all load generators The graph shows the number of running Vusers while the information in the legend indicates the number of Vusers in each state User Defined Data Points Displays the real time values of user defined data points You define a data point in your Vuser script by inserting an Ir_user_data_point function at the appropriate place user_data_point for GUI Vusers and Ir user_data_point for Java Vusers Error Statistics Provides details about the number of errors that accrue during each second of the scenario run The errors are grouped by error source for example the location in the script or the load generator name Vusers with Errors Provides details about the number of Vusers that generate errors during scenario execution The errors are grouped by error source Transaction Response Shows the average response time of transactions in Time seconds y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis Transaction Per Second Shows the number of successful transactions Passed performed per second y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis 305 Chapter 14 e Online Monitor Graphs 306 Graph Description Transaction Per Second Failed Stopped Shows the number of failed and stopped transactions per second y axis as a function
341. ipts The Vuser scripts that are associated with the rendezvous points Status Information During and after a scenario displays gt Current Status The number of Vusers that arrived at the rendezvous point out of the total number of Vusers assigned to the rendezvous gt Time The time at which the Vusers at the rendezvous point were released gt Reason The reason the Vusers at the rendezvous point were released The possible reasons are Timeout or Arrived Vusers The Vusers associated with the rendezvous points 319 Chapter 15 e Rendezvous Points 320 16 After the Scenario Run This chapter includes Concepts gt Post Scenario Run Procedures Overview on page 322 gt Collating Run Data on page 322 Tasks gt How to Collate Scenario Run Results on page 324 Reference gt Results Directory File Structure on page 325 gt Collating Results User Interface on page 327 321 Chapter 16 e After the Scenario Run Concepts Post Scenario Run Procedures Overview After the scenario runs you analyze the results using HP LoadRunner Analysis If the run results are stored locally on each participating load generator they need to be gathered into one location so that they can be processed for analysis Diagnostics results on the mediators and severs must also be gathered This process is known as data collation For details about collating run results and diagnostics data see Col
342. is already configured on page 482 gt Configure the rstatd daemon on page 483 gt Configure the monitor for a UNIX machine over a firewall optional on page 483 gt Configure the monitor measurements in the Controller on page 483 1 Verify whether the rstatd daemon is already configured The rstatd daemon might already be configured because when a machine receives an rstatd request the inetd on that machine automatically activates the rstatd gt The rup command reports various machine statistics including rstatd configuration Run the following command on the UNIX machine to view the machine statistics gt rup host gt You can also use Ir_host_monitor and see if it returns any relevant statistics If the command returns meaningful statistics the rstatd daemon is already configured and activated If not or if you receive an error message the rstatd daemon is not configured 482 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring 2 Configure the rstatd daemon If the rstatd daemon is not yet configured follow these steps to configure it On the UNIX machine run the command su root Go to etc inetd conf and look for the rstatd row it begins with the word rstatd If it is commented out with a remove the comment directive and save the file c From the command line run kill 1 inet_pid where inet_pid is the pid of the inetd process This instructs the inetd to rescan the etc inetd conf file and register
343. ists all Vuser scripts their paths and the load generators and percentage of the total number of Vusers assigned to each script Note You can change from one scenario mode to another at any time For details see How to Change the Scenario Mode Manual Scenario on page 65 Relevant tasks gt How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 gt How to Change the Scenario Mode Manual Scenario on page 65 See also Load Test Scenarios Overview on page 54 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description gt Start Scenario Starts running the scenario 88 Virtual Users Opens the Vusers dialog box where you can define properties for individual Vusers within the Vuser groups you have defined To each Vuser you can assign a different Vuser script and or load generator For user interface details see Vusers Dialog Box on page 98 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description H Add Group gt Vuser group mode Opens the Add Group dialog box where you create Vuser groups for the scenario See Add Group Dialog Box on page 73 gt Percentage mode Opens the Add Script dialog box where you select Vuser scripts for the scenario See Add Script Dialog Box on page 74 Remove Group Deletes the selected Vuser group script Opens the Run Time Settings dialog box where you can edit the Vuser script s run
344. it from the SAP R 3 client on the Controller machine using the username and password defined in the Controller Configure the SAPGUI Server Resource monitor from the Controller The SAP server information comes from the SAP Logon application Before you configure this monitor from the Controller verify the logon information on the SAP server The first time you click Add to add a measurement in the Controller you specify the SAPGUI server logon information For user interface details see SAPGUI Logon Dialog Box on page 578 For task details beginning with step 2 see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring Reference PeopleSoft Tuxedo Performance Counters The following table describes the default counters that can be measured It is recommended to pay particular attention to the following measurements Busy Clients Active Clients Busy Clients Idle Clients and all the queue counters for the APPQ PSAPPSRV queue 569 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring 570 Monitor Measurements Machine Busy Clients The percent of active clients currently logged in to the Tuxedo application server that are waiting for a response from the application server Active Clients The total number of active clients currently logged in to the Tuxedo application server Busy Clients The total number of active clien
345. itability of a server for any given application gt Test the server before the necessary client software has been developed gt Emulate an environment where multiple clients interact with a single server application gt Test an application under the load of tens hundreds or even thousands of potential users amp The HP LoadRunner Solution 18 Traditional or manual testing methods offer only a partial solution to load testing For example you can test an entire system manually by constructing an environment where many users work simultaneously on the system Each user works at a single machine and submits input to the system However this manual testing method has the following drawbacks gt It is expensive requiring large amounts of both personnel and machinery Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner gt It is complicated especially coordinating and synchronizing multiple testers gt It involves a high degree of organization especially to record and analyze results meaningfully gt The repeatability of the manual tests is limited LoadRunner addresses the drawbacks of manual performance testing gt LoadRunner reduces personnel requirements by replacing human users with virtual users or Vusers These Vusers emulate the behavior of real users operating real applications gt Because numerous Vusers can run on a single computer LoadRunner reduces the amount of hardware required for testing gt The HP LoadRun
346. itialize Initialize each Vuser just before it runs Design pun Dew A een eee I 152 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Total 20 Yusers Displays the total number of Vusers scheduled to run in the scenario Note gt This is editable in basic schedules when the scenario is in percentage mode only gt When the scenario is in Vuser group mode and you are defining a basic schedule this value is updated when you modify the quantity of Vusers in the Vuser groups For details see Add Vusers Dialog Box on page 75 gt In real world schedules the total number of Vusers is the sum of all the Vusers defined in the Start Vusers actions Apply When you modify the Total lt gt Vusers field applies the specified total number of Vusers proportionately to the Vuser groups Percentages are visible in the column of the Scenario Scripts pane Note Appears only when Total lt gt Vusers is modified 153 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios 154 Interactive Schedule Graph This graph provides a graphical representation of the scenario s schedule From the graph you can watch the progress of the schedule during a scenario run Eaa aa Interactive Schedule Graph Global Schedule Vusers 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 00 00 06 00 00 08 00 00 01 00 00 03 00 00 05 00 00 07 00 00 09 00 Time To access M
347. itoring Environment Workflow on page 443 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring gt How to Set Up the IBM WebSphere MQ Monitor This task describes how to configure the Controller and IBM WebSphere MQ machines This task includes the following steps gt gt gt gt _ Prerequisites on page 605 Configure the server environment to monitor events on page 605 Add the monitored server to the Controller on page 606 Configure the IBM WebSphere MQ monitor on page 606 Prerequisites Ensure that an IBM WebSphere MQ Client Connection version 5 21 only is installed on the Controller machine For additional information on installing the IBM WebSphere MQ Server Client refer to the IBM Web site http www ibm com Configure the server environment to monitor events The LoadRunner MQ Monitor retrieves event messages from two standard MOSeries queues only gt SYSTEM ADMIN PERFM EVENT performance events such as queue depth high gt SYSTEM ADMIN CHANNEL EVENT channel events such as channel stopped a Events must be enabled for the queue manager and in many cases on the applicable object as well Performance events are enabled by setting attributes for the queue on the MQ Server Channel events are enabled by default and cannot be disabled Note The IBM WebSphere MQ monitor does not retrieve data from a queue manager after the queue manager has been restarted 60
348. ivity After installing a configuring all the necessary components check that you are able to establish a connection between the LoadRunner agent MI Listener and the Controller machine For more information see Checking Connectivity on page 375 gt How to Configure the Over Firewall System This task describes how to configure the Over Firewall System This task includes the following steps gt gt gt gt Prerequisites on page 357 Set Up Your Deployment TCP or HTTPS on page 357 Configure the Firewall to Allow Agent Access on page 359 Configure the MI Listener on page 360 Prerequisites Before configuring the over firewall system make sure you have installed the necessary components as described in Install Components and Perform Initial Configuration on page 355 Set Up Your Deployment TCP or HTTPS To run Vusers or monitor servers over the firewall configure your system according to one of the following configurations Note that these configurations contain a firewall on each LAN There may also be configurations where there is a firewall for the Over Firewall LAN only gt TCP Configuration 357 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 358 The TCP configuration requires every LoadRunner agent machine behind the customer s firewall to be allowed to open a port in the firewall for outgoing communication TCP Configuration Running Yusers ispmerSe ver m
349. k describes how to collate results after a scenario run Note gt Data collation includes result diagnostics and log files If you are working in Expert mode you can disable the collation of the log files Before collating the results select Tools gt Options gt General tab gt Do not collate log files gt You can set a command to run when collation is complete Select Tools gt Options gt Execution tab and enter the command in the Post Collate Command box To collate results automatically Select Results gt Auto Collate Results To collate results manually Select Results gt Collate Results gt Collate Results To stop the collation process In the Collate Results dialog box click Stop To resume the collation process If you stopped the collation process to resume select Results gt Collate Results gt Continue stopped collation If collation fails due to a lack of disk space To recollate select Results gt Collate Results gt Recollate LoadRunner attempts to collate the results again without compressing the eve file Reference Chapter 16 e After the Scenario Run Results Directory File Structure Before you run a scenario you specify where the run results should be stored LoadRunner saves all the data it gathers during the run to the specified directory A typical results directory has the following structure Address C Documents and Settings ltrnd Local Settings Temp r
350. l on page 365 354 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner Tasks gt How to Set Up Your System to Use Firewalls Setting up your system to use firewalls involves the following stages of configuration This task includes the following steps gt Install Components and Perform Initial Configuration on page 355 gt Set Up Your System to Run Vusers Over the Firewall on page 356 gt Configure Your System to Monitoring Servers Over a Firewall on page 357 gt Check Connectivity on page 357 1 Install Components and Perform Initial Configuration Perform the following steps a Install the over firewall components To enable over firewall communication ensure that you have installed the following LoadRunner components gt MI Listener Serves as a router between the Controller and the LoadRunner agent You install the MI Listener component on a dedicated machine For installation instructions refer to the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide For instructions on configuring the MI Listener machine see Configure the MI Listener on page 360 355 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 356 Note You can also use the Controller machine as the MI Listener without the need for a separate installation When acting as the MI Listener the Controller machine cannot have Vusers running on it In this case the Controller must be a pure Controller and not a Controller Load Generator
351. l Server Manager Shows the resource usage of your Siebel Server Manager server as a function of the elapsed scenario time PeopleSoft Tuxedo J2EE Shows the resource usage of your Tuxedo server as a function of the elapsed scenario time Shows the resource usage of Java 2 Platform Enterprise Edition J2EE objects as a function of the elapsed scenario time The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage Microsoft COM A series of graphs that provide performance information for COM interfaces and methods as a function of the elapsed scenario time Citrix MetaFrame XP Citrix MetaFrame is an Application Deployment solution which delivers applications across networks The Citrix MetaFrame Resource Monitor is an Application Deployment Solution monitor which provides performance information for the Citrix MetaFrame servers The Citrix MetaFrame XP graph displays statistics about resource usage on the Citrix server during the scenario run Tuxedo Provides information about the server load generator workstation handler and queue in a Tuxedo system IBM WebSphere MQ Shows the resource usage of IBM WebSphere MQ Server channel and queue performance counters as a function of the elapsed scenario time Network Client Shows statistics for FTP POP3 SMTP IMAP and DNS Vusers on the network client machine as a func
352. l the following use case scenario options refer back to the scenario explained above Control Vusers Option Use Case Scenario Manipulate an entire Initialize Run or Stop Vuser Groups Use Case Vuser group Scenario on page 254 Example Run or stop all the Vusers in a group simultaneously Run Stop individual Run Stop Individual Vusers or Add New Vusers Vusers or add new Vusers Use Case Scenario on page 256 Example 1 Run Stop a single Vuser currently in the down run state Example 2 Vuser Group mode Add a specified number of Vusers to a group without initializing or running them Initialize Run Stop any Initialize Run Additional Vusers or Stop Running number of Vusers within a Vusers Use Case Scenario on page 260 group 253 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 254 YP Initialize Run or Stop Vuser Groups Use Case Scenario This use case scenario describes how David can manipulate the behavior of the Vuser groups during the scenario run irrespective of their defined schedules The examples will show how he can initialize run and stop all the Vusers in a Vuser group simultaneously Initialize a Vuser group If David wants to initialize all the Vusers in Script_C simultaneously he selects the script in the Scenario Groups pane and clicks the Initialize Vusers button on the Controller toolbar All Vusers that are still in the Down state are immediately initialized in this
353. lating Run Data on page 322 For details about analyzing the scenario run see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide amp Collating Run Data 322 When you run a scenario by default all the run data is stored locally on each load generator After scenario execution the results must be collated that is the results from all of the load generators must be gathered and transferred to the results directory before any analysis data can be generated In addition data from the diagnostics servers or mediators must be collated as well You can set LoadRunner to collate the run data automatically as soon as the run is complete Alternatively you can collate the run data manually after the run This way you can save and close a scenario and collate the data after reopening the scenario in the Controller The data that is collated include the result diagnostics and log files After LoadRunner has successfully collated the data these files are deleted from the load generators and diagnostics mediators from which they were gathered Chapter 16 After the Scenario Run Note In Expert mode you can disable the collation of the log file collation see Configure general scenario options for Expert mode on page 217 For details on how to collate run data see How to Collate Scenario Run Results on page 324 323 Chapter 16 After the Scenario Run Tasks How to Collate Scenario Run Results 324 This tas
354. laying the Transactions view which contains performance metrics and drill down options for the selected transaction For more information about interpreting data in the Diagnostics Transactions view see the HP Diagnostics User Guide Chapter 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics gt How to View Offline J2EE NET Diagnostics Results 434 This task includes the following steps gt Open Analysis on page 434 gt View results in the Analysis diagnostics graphs on page 434 1 Open Analysis In the Run tab of the Controller select Results gt Analyze Results or click the Analyze Results button 2 View results in the Analysis diagnostics graphs You can use the Analysis diagnostics graphs and reports to view the performance data and drill down to pinpoint problem areas in any layer of the application For specific information about J2EE NET diagnostics graphs see JZ2EE amp NET Diagnostics Graphs in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide Reference Chapter 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics amp LoadRunner J2EE NET Diagnostics Module User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Diagnostics for J2EE NET Setup Dialog Box on page 435 gt J2EE NET Configuration Dialog Box on page 436 Diagnostics for J2EE NET Setup Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to update the LoadRunner configuration settings for HP Diagnostics To access In the LoadRunner launcher window
355. lect Configuration gt LoadRunner License 121 Chapter 5 Load Generators amp Load Generator Configuration gt Vuser Status Tab 122 This tab enables you to view the status of all the Vusers connected to the load generator To access Controller toolbar gt gt Add or Details Important This tab is visible only when the load generator is information connected Relevant tasks gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 See also Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z lt Vuser Status gt Description The status of the Vusers gt Pending Vusers are waiting to initialize gt Initializing Vusers are in the initialization state gt Active Vusers are actively running in the scenario GUI WinRunner The number of GUI WinRunner Vusers that are in the Pending Initializing and Active states Other Vusers The number of Vusers other than GUI WinRunner and RTE Vusers that are in the Pending Initializing and Active states RTE The number of RTE Vusers that are in the Pending Initializing and Active states Totals The total number of Vusers that are in the Pending Initializing and Active states Chapter 5 Load Generators amp
356. ler settings Run Rendez Passed Failed Error Gradual Exiting Exiting Stopped Note The additional initialized Vusers are taken from the Vusers that are in the Down state If you initialize a greater number of Vusers than there are in the Down state then all of them will be initialized In the example above there were five Vusers in the Down state All of them have been initialized while an additional five have been created Run additional Vusers If David then wants to run five additional Vusers in Script_A immediately and not wait for them to run as per their defined schedules in the Run Stop Vusers dialog box he makes sure that only the check box by script_a is selected and he enters 5 in the Distribute X Vusers among all the scripts box at the top of the dialog box It is also important that the percentage values for Script_B and Script_C are set to 0 See the note in the step above for a detailed explanation why Run Stop Vusers Load Generators lt All Load Generators gt lt All Load Generators gt lt All Load Generators gt He then has the following two options for how to actually run these additional Vusers 265 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 266 gt Run initialized Vusers He can run five Vusers from those he initialized in the previous step To do this he clicks the arrow on the Run button and selects Run Initialized Five Vusers immediately move from the Ready state to the Run State
357. line and other custom monitors usp files _t_rep eve Contain the script s run logic including how the actions sections run The results directory contains a usp file for each script Contains Vuser and rendezvous information lt Controller gt eve Contains information from the Controller host lt Load_Generator gt eve gzl files The lt load generator gt eve files contain information from the load generators in the scenario These files are zipped and saved to the results directory in gzl format lt Load_Generator gt map Maps transactions and data points on the load generator to IDs lt results_name gt directory Contains the scenario run results lt results_name gt rr collate txt Contains information about the scenario run such as the name duration scripts included and so on Contains the file paths of the result files and collation status information collateLog txt Contains the status succeeded failed of result diagnostics and log file collation from each load generator HostEmulatedLocation txt Contains the emulated locations defined for WAN Emulation offline dat Contains sample monitor information output mdb The database created by the Controller Stores all the output messages reported during the scenario run Chapter 16 e After the Scenario Run Directory File Description remote_results txt Contains t
358. line Monitor Graphs 0 0 eee eeeesteeeeeeeee 291 How to Customize Online Graph and Measurement Settings 293 How to Manage Online Graphs oo eee ec ceeesseeeceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeee 296 Referen CEs iiccciccccncccsscoeninsss sabi EEr E E iSSi EEE OESS SENEI iiie 298 Online Monitor Graphs User Interface eseseeeeeeeeereereerrereereerrees 298 Available Graphs Tree tecscicsccccscecseteseseseccetecesssuestscscccnsDebetenetbeccseveieeess 305 Chapter 14 Rendezvous Points eeeseseesseseessesessseeessseeessseeersseessseees 313 Concepts oeeie n a a aaa ai ee e 314 Rendezvous Points Overview sssseessserseeesrerrrssssseeeeessesereeeersssssereeessee 314 a A TTS T T E E 315 How to Set Up a Rendezvous in a Scenario sseesssseeeeererrrrsssseeeeresse 315 Refer ncies ios Sebssdscheb ovensdesstescuavssneechesesdssss sacehensSeveceneeeedtes ties 317 Rendezvous User Interface ee eeeceeesssnececesseeecseeeceessaeeseessaeeeees 317 Table of Contents Chapter 15 After the Scenario RUM cece ceteeecesseeeeesseeeeeeeeee Concepts oanrinnen i e a i cesuswendeosssnsauacteacacasesns Post Scenario Run Procedures OvervieW sseseessessessercersessrssrsee Collating Run Data arreteeris E E E E a Reference iniseti iiiaae eE EASE a oee Results Directory File Structure sssseeeeeessseeeeerrrssssserrrrssssrreeersssssse Collating Results User Interface eee eessececessreeesesseeeesseeeeeeeee Chapter 16 Using QuickTest
359. ll 1 Performance Counters The following FireWall counters can be monitored Measurement Description fwRejected The number of rejected packets fwDropped The number of dropped packets fwLogged The number of logged packets Server Resources Performance Counters The following monitor measurements are available on the server machine Monitor Measurements Description CPU Monitor Utilization Measures CPU utilization Disk Space Monitor Disk space Measures the percentage of disk space used 485 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring Monitor Measurements Description Memory Monitor MB free Measures the amount of disk space free in MB Pages sec Measures the number of virtual memory pages that are moved between main memory and disk storage Services Monitor Percent used Measures the percentage of memory and paging file space used Monitors processes locally or on remote systems Can be used to verify that specific processes are running UNIX Resources Performance Counters 486 The following default measurements are available for the UNIX machine Measurement Average load Description Average number of processes simultaneously in Ready state during the last minute Collision rate Collisions per second detected on the Ethernet Context switches rate Number of switches between processes or threads per second
360. ll out time The processing time for roll outs Roll wait time The queue time in the roll area When synchronous RFCs are called the work process executes a roll out and may have to wait for the end of the RFC in the roll area even if the dialog step is not yet completed In the roll area RFC server programs can also wait for other RFCs sent to them Average time per logical The average response time for all commands sent to DB call the database system in milliseconds The time depends on the CPU capacity of the database server the network the buffering and on the input output capabilities of the database server Access times for buffered tables are many magnitudes faster and are not considered in the measurement Siebel Server Manager Performance Counters The following table shows the default counters that can be measured Measurement Description Average Connect Time The average connection time Average Reply Size The average size of a user reply Average Request Size The average size of a user request Average Requests Per The average number of user requests per Session session Average Response Time The average amount of time that it takes the server to respond to a request 573 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring 574 Measurement Description Average Think Time The average amount of think time taken to respond to a request Avg SQL E
361. located The total number of allocated pages of sort heap space for all sorts at the level chosen and at the time the snapshot was taken total_sorts The total number of sorts that have been executed total_sort_time The total elapsed time in milliseconds for all sorts that have been executed sort_overflows The total number of sorts that ran out of sort heap and may have required disk space for temporary storage Chapter 29 e Database Resource Monitoring Measurement Description active_sorts The number of sorts in the database that currently have a sort heap allocated total_hash_joins The total number of hash joins executed total_hash_loops The total number of times that a single partition of a hash join was larger than the available sort heap space hash_join_overflows The number of times that hash join data exceeded the available sort heap space hash_join_small_overflows The number of times that hash join data exceeded the available sort heap space by less than 10 pool_data_l_reads Indicates the number of logical read requests for data pages that have gone through the buffer pool pool_data_p_reads The number of read requests that required I O to get data pages into the buffer pool pool_data_writes Indicates the number of times a buffer pool data page was physically written to disk pool_index_l_reads pool_index_p_re
362. log Box on page 317 Rendezvous Information Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to view and modify the attributes of each rendezvous point in the scenario It displays general information about the rendezvous point which script is associated with the rendezvous and release history To access Manual scenario gt Design tab gt Scenario gt Rendezvous Important Available only if one of the Vuser scripts participating in information the scenario contains a rendezvous point Relevant tasks How to Set Up a Rendezvous in a Scenario on page 315 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description 3 Disable Ren dezvous Disables the rendezvous excluding it from the scenario thereby influencing the level of server load of Enable Rendezvous Enables a disabled rendezvous point 317 Chapter 15 e Rendezvous Points 318 UI Elements A Z Description Policy Opens the Policy dialog box where you can set the number Vusers to be released from a rendezvous at a time as well as the amount of time the Controller waits before releasing Vusers from a rendezvous gt Release when X of all Vusers arrive at the rendezvous Releases the Vusers only when the specified percentage of all Vusers arrives at the rendezvous point Note This option interferes with the scheduling of your scenario If you select this option your scenario will not run as sc
363. lowing settings in the dialog box gt System Name lt server name gt gt Remote Instance DB2 gt Host Name lt server name gt gt Service Name The DB2 server port The default value is 50000 e Click Retrieve and then OK Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring Note If you receive an error message after clicking Retrieve repeat steps c and d and click OK 3 Add the Database Manager instance to the server You can only work with a single Database Manager instance during each monitoring session Expand the lt server name gt node in the console tree Right click Instance and select Add c Enter the following settings in the dialog box gt Remote Instance DB2 gt Instance Name the database instance to be called from the Controller gt Host Name lt server name gt gt Service Name The DB2 server port The default value is 50000 d Click OK and close the Control Center 4 Configure the DB2 monitor from the Controller For task details beginning with step 2 see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 gt How to Set Up the Oracle Monitoring Environment This task describes how to set up the monitor environment before monitoring an Oracle database server using the native LoadRunner monitor Note If a problem occurs in setting up the Oracle environment check the Oracle server to view the error messages 534 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring
364. lowing steps Y Y YY Y YV V Vv Specify result file name and location on page 238 Specify Scenario Run Time Settings on page 240 Set up the monitoring environment optional on page 241 Delete diagnostics log files from servers on page 241 Enable Automatic Result Collation optional on page 241 Schedule scenario Optional on page 242 Provide scenario summary information optional on page 242 Set up the scenario to run GUI Vusers optional on page 242 Specify result file name and location Select Results gt Results Settings 1 Enter a descriptive name for the result file This is especially useful for cross results analysis in which LoadRunner superimposes the results of several scenario runs in a single graph and lets you compare the results of multiple scenario runs Giving each run a descriptive name enables you to distinguish between the results of the multiple runs displayed later in the analysis graph Enter the full path to the directory where the result file will be stored This depends on the run time file storage options configured Chapter 12 Before Running Your Scenario For details on setting global run time file storage options see Options gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 231 To set run time file storage options for an individual load generator see Load Generator Configuration gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 112 gt If you are using the default file storage setting
365. ly reported as a member of a cluster when they are actively participating in the cluster or shortly thereafter Measurement Description ServerState The state of the WebLogic server as inferred by the SNMP agent Up implies that the agent can contact the server Down implies that the agent cannot contact the server ServerLoginEnable This value is true if client logins are enabled on the server ServerQueueThroughput ServerMaxHeapSpace The maximum heap size for this server in KB ServerHeapUsedPct The percentage of heap space currently in use on the server ServerQueueLength The current length of the server execute queue The current throughput of execute queue expressed as the number of requests processed per second ServerNumEJBDeployment The total number of EJB deployment units known to the server ServerNumEJBBeansDeployed The total number of EJB beans actively deployed on the server 526 Chapter 28 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring Listen Table The Listen Table is the set of protocols IP addresses and port combinations on which servers are listening There will be multiple entries for each server one for each protocol ipAddr port combination If clustering is used the clustering related MIB objects will assume a higher priority Measurement Description ListenPort Port number ListenAdminOK True if admin requests are allowed on this
366. m router string of the SAP server The system number of the SAP server User name The user s unique name for logging onto the SAP server Password The user s password for logging onto the SAP server Client number The client number of the selected user Siebel Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to set up the Siebel Diagnostics module to communicate with the Mediator To access Relevant tasks Select Diagnostics gt Configuration Click Configure next to Siebel Diagnostics How to Configure Siebel Diagnostics on page 389 See also gt Siebel Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 424 gt Siebel Diagnostics Graphs in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide 420 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Opens the Siebel Server Configuration dialog box where you can add Siebel servers and to enter server information For user interface details see Siebel Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 424 Test Connection Tests the connections between the Siebel Diagnostics module and the Mediator Note This does not check the connections to the Siebel servers Enable Firewall Select if the Mediator is over a firewall Enable Siebel Enables Siebel Diagnostics and allows you to configure Diagnostics the Siebel Diagnosti
367. machine name gt lt UNIX user login name gt n lt command gt Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Example rsh my_unix I my_name n cd pwd Note Only RSH commands that work from the DOS command prompt window work with LoadRunner gt Verify that no output is generated after executing the RSH command Note You should not generate output from the login profile and cshrc files for example by echo or in any other way including commands that generate output indirectly such as biff Where an existing user generates output in the RSH step that cannot be deleted you should create a new user that does not generate output and who has permissions to run RSH and RCP commands on the server machine gt If connecting to a remote UNIX server with a secured shell PLINK PSCP connection Note Before proceeding with the following prerequisite steps if you are not familiar with the PuTTY application see Secured Shell PLINK PSCP Connection on page 385 gt Verify that the SSH daemon is running on the UNIX server gt Verify that no output is generated after executing the PuTTY commands 391 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Note You should not generate output from the login profile and cshrc files for example by echo or by any other form including commands that generate output indirectly such as biff Where an existing user generat
368. mark and reliability Application regression testing does not check new features of an upgrade rather it checks that the new release is as efficient and reliable as the older release Evaluating New Products You can run tests to evaluate individual products and subsystems during the planning and design stage of a product s life cycle For example you can choose the hardware for the server machine or the database package based on evaluation tests Identifying Bottlenecks You configure the LoadRunner monitoring components to identify bottlenecks on the system and determine which element is causing performance degradation for example file locking resource contention and network overload Use LoadRunner in conjunction with the new network and machine monitoring tools to create load and measure performance at different points in the system For more information on monitoring see Monitoring Process Overview on page 442 Router Jom Jamm Application Server Database Clients Server 37 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Measuring System Capacity Measure system capacity and determine how much excess capacity the system can handle without performance degradation To check capacity you can compare performance versus load on the existing system and determine where significant response time degradation begins to occur This is often called the knee of the response time curve Response Time seconds Unaccep
369. me Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Oracle Monitoring Environment See also Oracle Performance Counters User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Instance Database Connection URL The database SID Example ORCL The connection URL to the database you want to monitor The URL should contain a database user name and password in the following format including the colons and symbol jdbc oracle thin lt tcp addr gt lt tcp port gt lt db sid gt Example To connect to the ORCL database on a machine using port 1521 you would use jdbc oracle thin 206 168 191 19 1521 ORCL 555 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring UI Elements A Z Description Database User Name The user name that SiteScope should use to connect to the database Important You must have a valid Oracle user login that SiteScope will use to access the Oracle server for the Oracle JDBC Monitor To verify that SiteScope will be able retrieve the Oracle database counters sign in to the Oracle server with your user and try to execute the SQL statements found in the file SiteScope templates applications commands oraclejdbc Database Password The password for the user name that SiteScope should use to connect to the database Database Driver The driver used to connect to the database Specify the the Oracle Database Driver that was installed on th
370. mon_setup remove This stops the m_agent_daemon If successful you receive the following message m_agent_daemon is down How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario amp The following steps describe how to add load generators to a scenario Note When you add a load generator it remains in the Down state until it is connected For details about the Load Generator configuration tabs see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 To add a load generator 1 Open the scenario gt Click to open a new scenario gt Click to open an existing scenario The scenario is displayed in the Design tab 2 Click the Load Generators button 3 Click Add and enter the details of the load generator 105 Chapter 5 Load Generators 4 Optional Click More to display the configuration tabs and configure other load generator s details gt How to Modify Load Generator Details The following steps describe how to edit load generator settings ac 5 Open the scenario The scenario is displayed in the Design tab Hl 6 Click the Load Generators button 7 Select the load generator and click Details 8 Modify the details displayed in the configuration tabs For details see Load Generator Configuration Tabs on page 109 P How to Connect Disconnect a Load Generator This task describes how to connect or disconnect a load generator E3 9 On the Controller toolbar click Load Generators
371. ms on page 43 gt Decide when to test on page 44 1 Decide on general objectives For a list of suggested testing objectives see Examining Load Testing Objectives on page 49 2 State the objectives in measurable terms Once you decide on your general load testing objectives you should identify more focused goals by stating your objectives in measurable terms To provide a baseline for evaluation determine exactly what constitutes acceptable and unacceptable test results Example General Objective Product Evaluation choose hardware for the Web server 43 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Focused Objective Product Evaluation run the same group of 300 virtual users on two different servers HP and NEC When all 300 users simultaneously browse the pages of your Web application determine which hardware gives a better response time 3 Decide when to test Load testing is necessary throughout the product life cycle The following table illustrates what types of tests are relevant for each phase of the product life cycle Planning o and Design Development Deployment Production Evolution Evaluatenew Measure Check Measure Check HW or products response time reliability response SW upgrades time Measure Check optimal Measure Identify Measure response hardware response time bottlenecks system time configuration capacity Check HW or Measure SW upgrades system capacity Check
372. mum and maximum number of Vusers to the minimum maximum range of customers you want to be able to serve simultaneously If the scenario does not reach the maximum transaction response time that you defined your server is capable of responding within a reasonable period of time to the number of customers you want to be able to serve simultaneously If the defined response time is reached after only a portion of the Vusers has been executed or if you receive a message that the defined response time will be exceeded if the Controller uses the maximum number of Vusers defined you should consider revamping your application and or upgrading your server software and hardware Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Notes about Transactions per Second or Transaction Response Time goals gt To achieve a Transactions per Second or Transaction Response Time goal your script must contain transactions For each of these goal types you define the transaction in the script that you want to test gt Fora Transaction Response Time goal oriented scenario to be effective you must choose your transaction carefully ensuring that it performs effective hits on the server 59 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Tasks gt How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario 60 E This task describes how to design a goal oriented scenario In this type of scenario you define the goals you want your test to achieve and LoadRunner automatically builds a s
373. n For more information see Fire wall Server Performance Monitoring on page 481 Web Server Resource Measure statistics related to the Microsoft IISand Monitors Apache Web servers during the scenario run For more information see Web Server Resource Monitor ing on page 513 448 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors Web Application Server Resource Monitors Measure statistics related to the Microsoft ASP and WebLogic SNMP application servers during the sce nario run For more information see Web Applica tion Server Resource Monitoring on page 521 Database Server Resource Monitors Measure statistics related to the SQL server Oracle and DB2 databases during the scenario run For more information see Database Resource Monitoring on page 531 Streaming Media Monitors Measure statistics related to the RealPlayer Client and Media Player Client servers during the scenario run For more information see Streaming Media Moni toring on page 557 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitors Measure statistics related to the SAP Portal SAP CCMS SAPGUI Siebel Server Manager Siebel Web Server and PeopleSoft Tuxedo servers during the scenario run For more information see ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring on page 563 J2EE amp NET Diagnostics Monitors Provide information to trace time and troubleshoot individual transactions through J2EE Web applica tion and
374. n 630 master key 630 668 How 533 HP Software Support Web site 12 HP Software Web site 13 HP configuring IP addresses 187 HTML exporting graphs to 296 HTTP Response per Second graph 465 HTTP Responses per Second graph 306 IBM WebSphere MQ graph 310 Infrastructure Resources monitors Network Client 621 ing 523 initialization quota 113 IP addresses configuring on HP 187 configuring on Linux 187 188 configuring on Solaris 187 188 J J2EE graph 310 K Knowledge Base 12 L Linux configuring IP addresses 187 188 load balancing 102 load generator 101 183 load generator configuration disabling load generators 102 initializing quota 113 WAN emulation 199 load generators 20 balancing 102 defined 20 LoadRunner 381 emulating human users with Vusers 20 LoadRunner Analysis User s Guide 7 LoadRunner Controller User s Guide 7 LoadRunner Installation Guide 7 log files excluding from data collation 324 lr_user_data_point 473 lution 18 manual scenario Percentage mode 53 161 627 measurements customizing in online graph 293 Media Player Client graph 309 Microsoft Active Server Pages graph 309 Microsoft COM graph 310 Microsoft IIS counters 516 Microsoft IIS graph 308 middleware response time measurements 46 system configuration 41 monitoring over a firewall 353 monitors application deployment solutions 589 database server resources 531 ERP CRM server resources 563 infrastructure resources 621 network 497
375. n Event or Attribute to an object Remove Enables you to remove a monitored object event or attribute from the Object name list Alternate Queue Enter the name of an alternate queue manager if the event is from a remote queue manager 617 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring 618 UI Elements Description Connections Information Server The name of the server you are monitoring Client Channel Enter the name of the channel through which a client connection is made to an MQ Server gt Note You can set up a specific channel on an MQ Server instance or use the default SYSTEM DEF SVRCONN channel If the client channel is undefined the MQ Server will be inaccessible via client connections the MQ Monitor will not work as it will not be able to connect to the queue manager which it is supposed to monitor Queue Manager Enter the name of the queue manager to be monitored gt Note The monitor is not restricted to monitoring only the queue manager to which it is connected You can configure multiple queue managers to write to the event queue of a central queue manager for centralized monitoring this applies to Events only not polled object attributes All events contain a queue manager attribute identifying their source gt Note A queue manager can only be accessed by one Controller or monitoring application at any one time Filter system objects By default only user def
376. n Machines for Network Delay Monitoring Dialog Box on page 505 c Configure the monitor settings for the defined path For details see the Network Monitor Settings for Defined Path Dialog Box on page 508 How to Configure the UNIX Source Machine for Network Monitoring 502 This task describes how to configure a UNIX source machine before running the network monitor This task includes the following steps gt gt Assign permissions where LoadRunner is installed locally on page 502 Assign permissions where LoadRunner is installed on the network on page 503 Connect to the Unix Source Machine Through RSH on page 504 Connect to the Unix Source Machine Through the Agent on page 504 Assign permissions where LoadRunner is installed locally Follow these steps to assign root permissions to the merc_webtrace process a Login to the source machine as root b Type cd lt LoadRunner_installation gt bin to change to the bin directory Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring Type chown root merc_webtrace to make the root user the owner of the merc_webtrace file Type chmod s merc_webtrace to add the s bit to the file permissions To verify type Is I merc_webtrace The permissions should look like this rwsrwsr x 2 Assign permissions where LoadRunner is installed on the network In a LoadRunner network installation the merc_webtrace process is on the network not on the source machine disk
377. n machines for example the database server and Vuser load generator The graph maps the delay as a function of the elapsed scenario time CheckPoint FireWall 1 Shows statistics on Check Point s Firewall server as a function of the elapsed scenario time The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage Apache Displays statistics about the resource usage on the Apache server during the scenario run The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage Microsoft IIS Shows server statistics as a function of the elapsed scenario time The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage 308 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs Graph Description Microsoft Active Server Pages Displays statistics about the resource usage on the ASP server during the scenario run The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage WebLogic SNMP Displays statistics about the resource usage on the WebLogic SNMP server version 6 0 and earlier during the scenario run The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage DB2 O
378. n page 444 For SiteScope monitors configure the remote server on page 445 Select the measurements that you want to monitor on page 445 Change the monitor s default counters Optional on page 446 Improve the level of measurement information Optional on page 446 Configure the monitoring environment on the server machine To use the following monitors you must first install or configure monitoring components on the server machine For details about configuring the monitoring components see the specific monitoring sections gt Citrix gt Oracle gt DB2 gt PeopleSoft Tuxedo gt IBM WebSphere MQ gt SAPGUI gt J2EE amp NET Diagnostics gt Tuxedo gt Network Delay gt UNIX 443 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors 444 2 Add the monitored server to the Controller Select the server whose monitors you want to configure To monitor a server from the Controller you need to add the machine and the measurements that you want to monitor b Click the desired monitor graph in the graph tree and drag it into the right pane of the Run tab Right click the graph and select Add Measurements or click anywhere on the graph and select Monitors gt Add Measurements The lt Monitor gt dialog box opens Some monitors are native LoadRunner monitors by default but you can also monitor through the SiteScope monitor engine If you want to monitor a server through the SiteScope monitor en
379. n the scenario have started running the new group will not run in the scenario Relevant tasks How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description eS Browse 72 Record Enables you to add Vuser scripts to the list of scripts Note To add a VB Vuser script select the usr file Opens VuGen where you can record a Vuser script For more information on recording Vuser scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Group Name The name of the Vuser group When you select a script the Vuser group is automatically given the same name as the script You can modify the group name Note The name is limited to a maximum of 55 characters Load Generator Name The load generator assigned to the Vuser group To add a load generator to this list select Add from the list For user interface details see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 73 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Select Script Vuser Quantity Lists the available scripts that have been added to the scenario When you select a script its name and path are displayed above the list To display the scripts with their full paths right click the list area and select Show Paths Note If a script uses Unique file parameterization running more than
380. n you later analyze the run using HP LoadRunner Analysis this data is compared against the SLAs and SLA statuses are determined for the defined measurements To define SLAs see How to Define Service Level Agreements on page 164 gt How to Design a Manual Scenario This task describes how to design a manual scenario This task includes the following steps Open a scenario or create a new one on page 63 Add Vuser groups scripts to the scenario on page 64 Define a schedule for the scenario on page 64 Yy vyv Yy iy Define service level agreements for the scenario optional on page 65 62 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 1 Prerequisites gt When designing a manual scenario plan how you want to distribute the Vusers in the scenario For more details see Manual Scenarios on page 54 gt Before you start designing the scenario record the VuGen scripts that will run in the scenario For details see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide 2 Open a scenario or create a new one EJ a On the main Controller toolbar click the New Scenario button b In the New Scenario dialog box select Manual Scenario c Optional To distribute the Vusers by percentage select the Use the Percentage mode option Note You can convert from one scenario mode to another at any time For details see How to Change the Scenario Mode Manual Scenario on page 65 d Optional Select scripts to participate in the scen
381. nables you to add Oracle 11i servers and to add server information To access Select Diagnostics gt Configuration Click Configure next to Oracle 11i Diagnostics then click Add Relevant tasks How to Configure Oracle 11i Diagnostics on page 401 See also Oracle 11i Configuration Dialog Box on page 417 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Domain Password Passphrase The Oracle server domain The user password or passphrase Private Key File The name of the file where the Private Key is stored This can be found on the Mediator If you specify the file name only without a path the configuration automatically looks for the file in the Mediator s lt LoadRunner gt bin directory 418 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules UI Elements A Z Description Server Log Directory A location where the Oracle application saves the trace files The trace files can be saved in a shared directory on the Oracle server or in a separate folder Server Name The name of the Oracle server Server Platform The Oracle server platform Use Secure Shell Select if you are working with a Secure Shell connection User Name The user name of the server where trace files are stored Note For Windows platforms the user should have administrator privileges SAP Configuration
382. nario 53 161 627 Q Quality Center command line arguments 651 R Ready Vuser state Running Vusers graph 472 RealPlayer Client graph 309 relative paths for scripts 70 Remote Agent Dispatcher Process 23 remote security configuration 630 remote_host 220 remote_path 219 rendezvous attributes 316 response time measurement end to end 45 GUI 45 middleware to server 46 network and server 45 server 46 results manual collation 251 Retries per Second graph 307 467 rsh connection for UNIX network monitor 504 rstatd process activating 482 resource monitors 482 Running Vuser state Running Vusers graph 472 running over firewall 349 Running Vusers graph 305 Run Time graphs 471 670 S SAPGUI monitor measurements 572 SAPGUI graph 310 scenario conversion to Percentage mode 55 running 247 scenario execution 247 overview 248 scenario mode changing 65 scenario run freezing graphs 296 scenario schedules by scenario group 128 run modes 130 Scenarios ALM integration 337 scripts relative path locations 70 secure host communication best practices 632 configuring security settings 629 overview 628 remote security configuration 630 UNIX load generator 631 server monitors cloning a server 367 configuring properties 365 Server Resource monitor 479 Server Resources Configuration dialog 460 Server Resources graph 308 Services UserDataPoint Value Name 473 show hide measurements 302 Siebel Diagnostics enablin
383. nched the maximum number of Vusers LoadRunner attempts to reach the defined target once more by recalculating the target number of hits transactions or pages per Vuser and running the maximum number of Vusers simultaneously A Pages per Minute or Hits Transactions per Second goal oriented scenario is assigned a Failed status if gt The Controller has twice attempted to reach the goal using the maximum number of Vusers specified and the goal could not be reached 57 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 58 gt No pages per minute or hits transactions per second were registered after the first batch of Vusers was run gt The number of pages per minute or hits transactions per second did not increase after the Controller ran a certain number of Vuser batches gt All the Vusers that ran failed gt There were no available load generators for the type of Vusers you attempted to run Transaction Response Time This goal tests how many Vusers can be run simultaneously without exceeding a desired transaction response time You specify the name of the transaction in your script that you want to test and a minimum maximum range of Vusers for LoadRunner to run The transaction response time you specify should be a predefined threshold value For example if you do not want a customer to wait more than five seconds to log in to your e commerce site specify a maximum acceptable transaction response time of five seconds Set the mini
384. nd Windows 2000 measurements correspond to the built in counters available from the Windows Performance Monitor UNIX Resources Shows the UNIX resources measured during the scenario The UNIX measurements include those available by the rstatd daemon average load collision rate context switch rate CPU utilization incoming packets error rate incoming packets rate interrupt rate outgoing packets error rate outgoing packets rate page in rate page out rate paging rate swap in rate swap out rate system mode CPU utilization and user mode CPU utilization 307 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs Graph Description Server Resources Shows the resources CPU disk space memory or services used on remote Unix servers measured during the scenario This helps you determine the impact of Vuser load on the various system resources The x axis represents the elapsed time The y axis represents the resource usage SNMP Resources Shows statistics for machines running an SNMP agent using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The x axis represents the elapsed time The y axis represents the resource usage SiteScope Network Delay Time Displays statistics about the resource usage on the SiteScope machine during the scenario run The x axis represents the elapsed time The y axis represents the resource usage Shows the delays for the complete path between the source and destinatio
385. ne analysis file For more information refer to the HP Diagnostics Installation and Configuration Guide MI Listener server Enter the name of the MI Listener server when the Diagnostics server or a Diagnostics server in Mediator mode in a distributed environment is located behind a firewall 437 Chapter 21 Configuring J2EE NET Diagnostics 438 UI Elements A Z Description Monitor server requests Select to capture a percentage of server requests which occur outside the context of any Vuser transaction For more information see Monitoring Server Requests on page 430 Notes gt The server requests will be captured at the same percentage that was selected for the percentage of Vusers in the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box Enabling this option imposes an additional overhead on the probe Troubleshoot Diagnostics for J2EE NET connectivity Click to open the HP Diagnostics System Health Monitor to enable you to investigate any connectivity issues between the Diagnostics components Part VI Monitoring Load Test Scenarios 440 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors This chapter includes Concepts gt Monitoring Process Overview on page 442 Tasks gt How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 Reference gt Monitor Types on page 448 gt Configuring Monitors User Interface on page 450 441 Chapter 22 Workin
386. ner amp Vuser Technology Vusers except for GUI Vusers generate load on a server by submitting input directly to the server Vusers do not operate client applications they access the server using LoadRunner API functions These API functions emulate the input from an actual application Vuser Server Because Vusers are not reliant on client software you can use Vusers to test server performance even before the client software has been developed Further since Vusers do not have a user interface the amount of system resources required is minimal This allows you to run large numbers of Vusers on a single workstation The following example illustrates the use of Vusers Suppose that you have a Web based database server that maintains your customer information The information is accessed by numerous customer service personnel who are located throughout the country The server receives the queries processes the requests and returns responses via the Web to field personnel You want to test the response times of the entire system when numerous service personnel simultaneously access the server Using LoadRunner you could create several hundred Vusers each Vuser accessing the server database The Vusers enable you to emulate and measure the performance of your database and Web servers under the load of many users You develop a Vuser script to define the actions of a Vuser A Vuser script includes functions that control the script ex
387. ner Controller allows you to easily and effectively control all the Vusers from a single point of control gt LoadRunner monitors the application performance online enabling you to fine tune your system during test execution gt LoadRunner automatically records the performance of the application during a test You can choose from a wide variety of graphs and reports to view the performance data gt LoadRunner checks where performance delays occur network or client delays CPU performance I O delays database locking or other issues at the database server LoadRunner monitors the network and server resources to help you improve performance gt Because LoadRunner tests are fully automated you can easily repeat them as often as you need amp HP LoadRunner Terminology gt Scenario A scenario is a sequence of events that emulate the hypothetical actions of real users on your application 19 Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner 20 gt Vusers In the scenario LoadRunner replaces real users with virtual users or Vusers While a workstation accommodates only a single human user many Vusers can run concurrently on a single workstation In fact a scenario can contain tens hundreds or even thousands of Vusers Vuser Scripts The actions that a Vuser performs during the scenario are described in a Vuser script When you run a scenario each Vuser executes a Vuser script The Vuser scripts include functions that measu
388. nerator status changes to Error Configure Vuser run time settings Select Tools gt Options gt Run Time Settings tab You can specify gt The Vuser quota for a scenario gt How to stop running Vusers Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options gt Whether to use a seed number for random sequencing For user interface details see Options gt Run Time Settings Tab on page 232 Configure general scenario options for Expert mode Select Tools gt Options gt General tab to specify the following general scenario settings that apply when in Expert mode gt Specify the directory for data table storage gt Disable collation of log files after a scenario run For details see How to Collate Scenario Run Results on page 324 gt Enable multiple IP address allocation For details see Multiple IP Addresses on page 183 For user interface details see Options gt General Tab on page 226 Configure the default schedule run mode Select Tools gt Options gt Execution tab Under Default Scheduler select a default run mode For user interface details see Options gt Execution Tab on page 225 For details about schedule run modes see Schedule Run Modes on page 130 Define a command to run after scenario results are collated Select Tools gt Options gt Execution tab Under Post Collate Command enter a command to run after collating scenario results For user interface details see Options gt Execu
389. ngs Browser Emulation node you should have no more than one new SSL connection per Vuser per iteration Ideally you should have very few new TCP IP and SSL connections each second Reference HTTP Status Codes The following table displays a list of HTTP status codes These codes appear in the HTTP Responses per Second Graph Chapter 23 Web Resource Monitors Code Description Code Description 200 OK 406 Not Acceptable 201 Created 407 Proxy Authentication Required 202 Accepted 408 Request Timeout 203 Non Authoritative Information 409 Conflict 204 No Content 410 Gone 205 Reset Content 411 Length Required 206 Partial Content 412 Precondition Failed 300 Multiple Choices 413 Request Entity Too Large 301 Moved Permanently 414 Request URI Too Large 302 Found 415 Unsupported Media Type 303 See Other 416 Requested range not satisfiable 304 Not Modified 417 Expectation Failed 305 Use Proxy 500 Internal Server Error 307 Temporary Redirect 501 Not Implemented 400 Bad Request 502 Bad Gateway 401 Unauthorized 406 Not Acceptable 402 Payment Required 407 Proxy Authentication Required 403 Forbidden 503 Service Unavailable 469 Chapter 23 Web Resource Monitors 470 Code Description Code Description 404 Not Found 504 Gateway Timeout 405 Method Not Allowed 505 HTTP Version not supported For more information on the a
390. ning Vusers in Percentage mode If David wants to stop three of the five running Vusers in Script_A and not wait for them to stop as per their defined schedules in the Run tab he clicks Run Stop Vusers to open the Run Stop Vusers dialog box In the dialog box he makes sure that only the check box by script_a is selected and he enters 3 in the Distribute X Vusers among all the scripts box It is also important that the percentage values for Script_B and Script_C are set to 0 See the note below for a detailed explanation why Run Stop Yusers Load Generators 10 lt All Load Generators gt 0 lt All Load Generators gt 0 lt All Load Generators gt Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Note When a check box is deselected no Vusers are distributed to that script However the amount of Vusers that would have been assigned to it are not redistributed to the scripts that remain selected unless you specify 0 in the percentage column For example in our use case scenario when David enters 3 in the Distribute X Vusers among all the scripts box LoadRunner automatically distributes these Vusers as equally as possible among the available scripts that is gt script_a 1Vuser gt script_b 1 Vuser gt script_c 1Vuser However should David wish to distribute all 3 Vusers to script_a it is not sufficient to simply deselect script_b and script_c This only ensures that no Vusers are added to these scripts but it does not ch
391. nitialized at one time all load generators The maximum number of Vusers the load generator can initialize at a time when an Initialize command is sent Default 999 When stopping Controls how Vusers stop running when the Stop button Vusers is clicked gt Wait for the current iteration to end before stopping Default The Vuser completes the iteration it is running before stopping The Vusers move to the Gradual Exiting status and exit the scenario gradually gt Wait for the current action to end before stopping The Vuser completes the action it is running before stopping The Vusers move to the Gradual Exiting status and exit the scenario gradually gt Stop immediately The Vusers stop running immediately The Vusers move to the Exiting status and exit the scenario immediately 234 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Options gt Timeout Tab This tab enables you to specify timeout values for certain commands related to the load generator To access Tools gt Options gt Timeout tab Important LoadRunner enables you to set the timeout interval for information commands and Vuser elapsed time The command timeouts are the maximum time limits for various LoadRunner commands When a command is issued by the Controller you set a maximum time for the load generator or Vuser to execute the command If it does not complete the command within the timeout interval the Controller issues an er
392. nitor gt Configuration Dialog Box on page 460 R Add Machine Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to add the machine that you want to monitor to the Monitored Server Machines list To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements gt Monitored Servers section of Monitored Server Machine gt Add Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 450 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors Monitored Machine Information User interface elements are described below UI Element A Z Description Name The name or IP address of the machine that you want to monitor gt Server Resource monitors If you are using the HTTP method enter the full URL of the CGI script Example http demo thiscompany com cgi bin run sh gt DB2 monitor Enter the DB2 server machine name followed by the sign and the database instance you specified in the DB2 Control Center Example localhost DB2 gt CheckPoint FireWall 1 monitor You can specify a machine name and port number using the format lt machine name gt lt port number gt gt iPlanet SNMP monitor If the iPlanet SNMP agent is running on a different port than the default SNMP port you need to define the port number using the format lt server name gt lt port number gt gt MS COM monitor To the monitor over a firewall use the format lt MI Listener machine gt lt server machine key gt where
393. nlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description Displays the details of the previous next action in the lt Previous Actions grid Next gt di lt Action details area gt Displays the current details of the selected action Action type Displays the type of action selected Scenario Schedule Pane This pane enables you to define a schedule for running your scenario To access Manual scenario gt Design tab Relevant tasks How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 See also gt Scheduling Manual Scenarios Overview on page 128 gt Scheduling by Scenario or Group on page 128 gt Schedule Run Modes on page 130 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Actions grid Displays a list of scenario s schedule actions See Actions Grid on page 150 149 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios 150 UI Elements A Z Description Interactive schedule graph Displays a graphical representation of the scenario schedule The lines in the graph correspond to the actions defined in the Actions grid See Interactive Schedule Graph on page 154 Schedule definition area Displays the selected schedule s details See Schedule Definition Area on page 157 R Actions Grid You define the actions for a schedule in this
394. nning of the scenario Note If no step is running clock time is displayed Example In the left image below the time is not displayed on the x axis In the right image the time is displayed Transactions per Second Persad Whole scenario j Transactions per Second Passed Whole scenario 3 8 7 6 5 5 P 3 Re 4 41 11 45 11 a 41 1215 11 1230 Elapsed Time Hour MircSec Time Hour Min Sec Don t Show Clock Time Displays graphs using the selected y axis scale gt Automatic Displays the default y axis values gt Maximum Y Axis Value The maximum value for the y axis gt Minimum Y Axis Value The minimum value for the y axis Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs Measurement Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to configure settings for measurements in a graph You can gt Change line colors gt Configure a measurement s scaling gt Show hide measurements gt View descriptions of the measurements To access In the Run tab right click a measurement in the graph or legend and select Configure Relevant tasks How to Customize Online Graph and Measurement Settings on page 293 301 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs 302 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Configuration tab Description tab gt Color The color assigned to the selected measurement gt Scale The relationship between t
395. ntact the Customer Support Web site with the following information gt the Controller log file drv_log txt located in the temp directory of the Controller machine gt the traceroute_server log file located on the source machine gt the debug information located in the TRS_debug txt and WT_debug txt files in the path directory These files are generated by adding the following line to the monitors_server section of the lt LoadRunner root folder gt dat mdrv dat file and rerunning the Network monitor ExtCmdLine traceroute_debug path 3 If you do not receive results by running webtrace exe the problem is related to the WebTrace technology on which the Network Delay monitor is based Perform the following procedures on the source machine gt Verify that the packet sys file the Webtrace driver exists in the WINNT system32 drivers directory Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring 512 Check whether a driver such as Cloud or Sniffer is installed on top of the network card driver If so remove it and run WebTrace again gt Verify that there are administrator permissions on the machine gt Using ipconfig all check that only one IP address is assigned to the network card WebTrace does not know how to handle multiple IP addresses assigned to the same card IP spoofing Check the number of network cards installed Run webtrace devlist to receive a list of the available network cards If t
396. nter the name IP address of the MI Listener that the host uses to communicate over the firewall P How to Update Host Security Settings Remotely This task describes how to use Host Security Manager to update security settings on the LoadRunner hosts remotely from the Controller This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 635 gt Update the security settings on page 635 gt Results on page 637 Prerequisites gt Hosts to be updated must be registered in Host Security Manager For details see How to Register Hosts in Host Security Manager on page 634 gt Hosts in the Host Security Manager list that are not relevant must be deleted from the list gt Each host must have a security key defined on it and all of the hosts security keys must be identical gt Host Security Manager must have a master security key that is identical to the security key on all of the hosts For details see Master Security Key on page 630 Update the security settings 1 Open Host Security Manager Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Tools gt Host Security Manager Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication 636 2 Update the desired security setting gt Security key Click Update Security Key enter the new key and enter it again for confirmation gt Security Mode Select the hosts in the list that you want to update To select multiple hosts hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard while
397. nto account each resource and its size for example the size of each gif file the size of each Web page gt The Pages Downloaded per Second graph takes into account simply the number of pages In the following example the Throughput graph is compared with the Pages Downloaded per Second graph It is apparent from the graph that throughput is not proportional to the number of pages downloaded per second For example between 15 and 16 seconds into the scenario the throughput decreased while the number of pages downloaded per second increased Chapter 23 Web Resource Monitors Example Retries per Second Graph The Retries Per Second graph shows the number of attempted Web server connections y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis A server connection is retried when gt the initial connection was unauthorized gt proxy authentication is required gt the initial connection was closed by the server gt the initial connection to the server could not be made gt the server was initially unable to resolve the load generator s IP address 467 Chapter 23 Web Resource Monitors 468 Connections Graph The Connections graph shows the number of open TCP IP connections y axis at each point in time of the scenario x axis One HTML page may cause the browser to open several connections when links on the page go to different Web addresses Two connections are opened for each
398. o arguments in the command line the Controller uses its default settings gt The Controller will always overwrite results gt The Controller will automatically terminate upon scenario termination and results will be collected If you don t want the Controller to automatically terminate upon scenario termination add the flag DontClose to the command line gt The Controller launched through the command line behaves normally except when using the Run option Using the Run option dialogs and message boxes that usually open and require the user to close them in a usual launch do not open in a command line launch gt The Controller s settings are loaded from wlrun5 ini located in Windows directory Chapter 37 Controller Command Line Arguments Application Lifecycle Management Arguments These arguments define the LoadRunner integration with Application Lifecycle Management For more information about the LoadRunner Application Lifecycle Management integration see Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management on page 337 ConnectToQC Specifies whether the Controller should connect to ALM on startup 0 1 or ON OFF QCServer Application Lifecycle Management server name Must be a machine where Application Lifecycle Management is installed QCDB Application Lifecycle Management database name Use the format lt Domain name gt lt Project name gt UserName User name for connecting to
399. oad generator to stop a load test manually stop the WAN Emulation as well 206 Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings Q Limitations gt Selecting either Use bandwidth or Use custom bandwidth in the Network Speed Simulation node in the Run Time Settings may interfere with the WAN Emulation settings and could lead to unexpected behavior For more information on Run Time Settings refer to the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide gt There is no backward compatibility between the current LoadRunnetr WAN Emulation integration and any previous integrations gt The integrated WAN emulation software may not comply with accepted Internationalization I18N conventions gt The WAN emulation software may consume large amounts of memory since the technology delays traffic and captures traffic for later analysis To verify that the load generator machine has sufficient memory compare the load generator memory consumption with and without the emulation gt WAN emulation software integration may not be available on the Unix platform 207 Chapter 10 Configuring WAN Emulation Settings 208 Part Ill Running Load Test Scenarios 210 11 Configuring Scenario Options This chapter includes Concepts gt Configuring Scenario Options Overview on page 212 gt Expert Mode on page 212 gt Run Time File Storage Locations on page 213 gt Path Translation on page 214 Tasks gt How to Configure Scen
400. ocation make sure that each load generator is configured with the same settings If you are connecting to the load generator remotely but do not have the necessary permissions to retrieve third party monitors you can retrieve these monitors with additional credentials that do have the necessary permissions If you have these additional credentials enter them in the User Name and Password boxes Emulated Location Enable WAN Emulation on Load Generator The name of the emulated location For details see Emulated Locations Overview on page 201 Enables the WAN Emulator on the load generator Load Generators Dialog Box 124 This dialog box enables you to manage the load generators defined for the scenario To access Controller toolbar gt Fal Chapter 5 Load Generators Relevant tasks How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 See also Load Generators Overview on page 102 Load Balancing on page 102 User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description yh Add Opens the Add New Load Generator dialog box where you define a new load generator See Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 Note When you add a load generator its status is set to Down until it
401. ocesses 5 150 customers terminal connection ib _ 6 managers 2 4 4 Choose testing hardware software The hardware and software should be powerful and fast enough to emulate the required number of virtual users Refer to the HP LoadRunner Installation Guide for specific hardware requirements To decide on the number of machines and correct configuration consider the following gt It is advisable to run HP LoadRunner Controller on a separate machine gt Each GUI Vuser requires a separate Windows based machine several GUI Vusers can run on a single UNIX machine gt Configuration of the test machine for GUI Vusers should be as similar as possible to the actual user s machine Note The results file requires a few MB of disk space for a long scenario run with many transactions The load generators also require a few MB of disk space for temporary files if there is no NFS For more information about run time file storage see Run Time File Storage Locations on page 213 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Reference Examining Load Testing Objectives Your test plan should be based on a clearly defined testing objective This section presents an overview of common testing objectives This section includes gt Measuring End User Response Time gt Defining Optimal Hardware Configuration gt Checking Reliability gt Checking Hardware or Software Upgrades gt Evaluating New Pro
402. ode only Enables you to determine the extent of the trace to be performed during a scenario run For details see Options gt Debug Information Tab on page 223 Execution tab Enables you to configure the following miscellaneous scenario settings gt The default schedule run mode for a new scenario gt The command to run after collating scenario results For details see Options gt Execution Tab on page 225 General tab Expert mode only Monitors tab Enables you to specify global settings for data table storage log file collation and multiple IP address allocation For details see Options gt General Tab on page 226 Enables you to configure the online monitoring settings For details see Options gt Monitors Tab on page 227 Output tab Expert mode only Enables you to configure how running Vusers are displayed on the Controller machine For details see Options gt Output Tab on page 229 Path Translation Table tab Enables you to perform path translation when storing result and script files stored on a shared network drive For details see Options gt Path Translation Tab on page 230 Run Time File Storage tab Enables you to specify where LoadRunner should save and store the run time files Default value On the current Vuser machine For details see Options gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 231 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario
403. of hits transactions per second or pages per minute that each Vuser should reach The Controller then begins loading the Vusers according to the load behavior settings you defined as follows gt If you selected to run the Vusers automatically LoadRunner loads 50 Vusers in the first batch If the maximum number of Vusers defined is less than 50 LoadRunner loads all of the Vusers simultaneously gt If you chose to reach your target after a certain period of the scenario elapses LoadRunner attempts to reach the defined target within this period of time It determines the size of the first batch of Vusers based on the time limit you defined and the calculated target number of hits transactions or pages per Vuser gt If you chose to reach your target by gradation x number of pages hits every x amount of time LoadRunner calculates the target number of hits or pages per Vuser and determines the size of the first batch of Vusers accordingly Not relevant for the Transactions per Second goal type After running each batch of Vusers LoadRunner evaluates whether the target for the batch was achieved If the batch target was not reached LoadRunner recalculates the target number of hits transactions or pages per Vuser and readjusts the number of Vusers for the next batch to be able to achieve the defined goal By default a new batch of Vusers is released every two minutes If the goal has not been reached after the Controller has lau
404. of the current shell on the remote machine export PATH PATH usr local sbin gt The remote shell may not be initializing the pseudo terminal correctly The following command increases the terminal width to 1024 characters stty cols 1024 SHELL gt There have been cases where the remote Telnet Server does not echo back the command line properly This may cause strange behavior for monitors that rely on this behavior The following command forces the remote terminal to echo stty echo gt Certain UNIX shells have been known to behave erratically with SiteScope This includes bash ksh and csh The following command changes the shell to sh for the SiteScope connection bin sh Login The log in string for the remote server Login Prompt Enter the prompt to be displayed when the system is waiting for the log in string to be entered Default login 457 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors UI Elements A Z Description os Select the operating system running on the remote server The following versions of UNIX are supported gt AIX gt OPENSERVER gt FreeBSD gt SCO gt HP UX gt SGI Irix gt HP UX 64 bit gt Sun Solaris gt Linux gt Tru64 5 x gt MacOSX gt Tru64 Pre 4 x Digital Password The password for the remote server Password Prompt The prompt to be displayed when the system is waiting for the password to be entered Defaul
405. of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis Total Transactions Per Second Passed Shows the total number of completed successful transactions per second y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis Hits Per Second Throughput Shows the number of hits HTTP requests to the Web server y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis You can compare this graph to the Transaction Response Time graph to see how the number of hits affects transaction performance Shows the amount of throughput on the Web server y axis during each second of the scenario run x axis Throughput is measured in bytes and represents the amount of data that the Vusers received from the server at any given second You can compare this graph to the Transaction Response Time graph to see how the throughput affects transaction performance HTTP Responses per Second Shows the number of HTTP status codes which indicate the status of HTTP requests for example the request was successful the page was not found y axis returned from the Web server during each second of the scenario run x axis grouped by status code You can group the results shown in this graph by script using the Group By function to locate scripts which generated error codes Pages Downloaded per Second Shows the number of Web pages y axis downloaded from the server during each second of the
406. on Guide Explains how to install LoadRunner and additional LoadRunner components including LoadRunner samples Welcome to This Guide LoadRunner References gt LoadRunner Function Reference Gives you online access to all of LoadRunner s functions that you can use when creating Vuser scripts including examples of how to use the functions gt Analysis API Reference This Analysis API set can be used for unattended creating of an Analysis session or for custom extraction of data from the results of a test run under the Controller You can access this reference from the Analysis Help menu gt Error Codes and Troubleshooting Provides clear explanations and troubleshooting tips for Controller connectivity and Web protocol errors It also provides general troubleshooting tips for Winsock SAPGUI and Citrix protocols Welcome to This Guide Searching and Navigating the Documentation Library The following functionality is available from the Documentation Library Option Description Search and Navigate Displays the navigation pane This button is displayed only when the navigation pane is closed The navigation pane includes the following tabs gt Contents tab Organizes topics in a hierarchical tree enabling you to directly navigate to a specific guide or topic gt Index tab Displays a detailed alphabetical listing of topics along with the numbers of the pages on which they are mentioned Double click an
407. on and Define each step as a transaction gt If you are monitoring a Siebel Web Server in a DMZ 389 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 390 Install the Mediator on the internal over firewall LAN and enable SMB CIFS communication from the internal machine to the file server in the DMZ SMB CIFS are the file sharing services that use the NBT NetBIOS over TCP IP as the transport protocol To enable the NBT protocol between the client over firewall machine and the file server use the following port configuration File Sharing Service Port SMB CIFS over NBT TCP 139 SMB CIFS over TCP IP Direct SMB TCP 445 Example Configure the firewall settings as follows Service enabled nbsession for TCP 139 connection Service enabled Microsoft ds for TCP 445 connection Note CIFS over TCP 445 direct SMB over TCP IP is optional with Windows 2000 and above since it is a more secure way of communicating with the file server To enable CIFS over TCP IP you must disable the NetBIOS over TCP IP protocol using the operating system configuration gt If connecting to a remote UNIX server with a remote shell RSH RCP connection gt Verify that the RSH and RCP daemons are running on the UNIX server gt Verify that the UNIX user has permission to run remote shell commands To check this type the following at the DOS command prompt rsh lt server
408. on page 339 2 Open the scenario Select File gt Open and specify the location of the scenario 3 Save the scenario Select File gt Save as If the scenario is in a project that uses version control and is not checked out the scenario is only saved as a temporary file on your local machine Y Connect to ALM To store and retrieve scenarios from ALM you need to connect to an ALM project You can connect or disconnect from an ALM project at any time during the testing process The connection process has two stages First you connect to an ALM Web server This server handles the connections between the Controller and the ALM project Next you select the project you want to access The project stores the scenarios that you created in the Controller 339 Chapter 18 e Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management To connect to Application Lifecycle Management 1 2 3 Select Tools gt HP ALM Connection Complete the HP ALM Connection dialog box and select Connect For user interface details see HP ALM Connection Dialog Box on page 343 4 To disconnect from ALM click Disconnect gt How to Save Scenarios to ALM Projects 340 The following steps describe how to save a scenario to an ALM project gt gt gt Open create the scenario on page 340 Connect to HP Application Lifecycle Management on page 340 Save the scenario to ALM on page 341 Open create the scenario Cr
409. one and that scripts have been selected for the scenario For more details see How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 Define the schedule In the Scenario Schedule pane select a schedule from the list or define a new schedule by clicking New Schedule Scenario Schedule P Schedule Name Schedule 1 Schedule by Scenario C Group 12 Run Mode Real world schedule Basic schedule 10 Global Schedule 8 yR t Total 10 Yusers 2 k o 6 ee r Define the schedule in the definition area as follows Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios a Optional To rename the schedule type a new name in the Schedule Name box and click Save New Name Select the type of schedule Scenario or Group For details see Scheduling by Scenario or Group on page 128 c Select a run mode Real world or Basic For details see Schedule Run Modes on page 130 Note The default run mode for all schedules is Real world You can change the default to Basic in the Tools gt Options gt Execution tab Define actions for the schedule The Actions Grid displays the default actions that correspond to the type of schedule you selected in step 2 above Run Mode Real world schedule Basic schedule Global Schedule vw Rt Total 10 Yusers Action Properties Initialize Start Vusers Duration Stop Vusers Initialize each Vuser just before it runs Start 10 Vusers 2 every 00 00 15 HH
410. one Vuser group with that script in the same scenario may cause unexpected scenario results For more information about Unique file parameterization see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide The number of Vusers to add to the group Add Script Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to add Vuser scripts to a scenario To access Use one of the following gt All scenarios Design tab gt Right click in Scenario Scripts pane gt Add Script gt Goal oriented scenario Design tab gt Scenario Scripts pane gt Add Script gt Manual scenario percentage mode Design tab gt Add Group iej Important information While a scenario is running you can add scripts to the scenario and enable them However if you add a script after all the Vusers in the scenario have started running the added script will not run in the scenario Relevant tasks gt How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 gt How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 74 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Browse Enables you to add Vuser scripts to the list of scripts Note To add a VB Vuser script select the usr file 78 Record Opens VuGen where you can record a Vuser script For more information on recording Vuser scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Select Script
411. onfiguration gt Run Time File Storage Tab This tab enables you to specify the results directory for the performance data that LoadRunner gathers from this load generator during a scenario run To access Controller toolbar gt E gt Add or Details Important information Relevant tasks gt The directory specified here stores the result files gathered on the selected load generator A global results directory for all load generators is specified in the Tools gt Options dialog box For details see Options gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 231 Note If the settings specified here differ to the global load generator settings the settings specified here take preference for this particular load generator gt If the load generator is localhost then LoadRunner stores the scripts and results on a shared network drive and the options on this tab are all disabled gt If you are monitoring over a firewall the settings in this tab are not relevant gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 See also 112 gt Run Time File Storage Locations on page 213 gt Options gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 231 Chapter 5 Load Generators User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Scripts and results Select where to store the results of the scenario run and stored or Vu
412. onitor gt dialog box In the Resource Measurements section of the lt Monitor gt dialog box click Add The lt monitor gt Configuration dialog box opens Choose the measurements for the specific server Note For the Citrix monitor if the dialog box freezes after clicking Add you may need to rebuild the localhost cache on the Citrix server machine For more information refer to Document IDs CTX003648 and CTX759510 in the Citrix Knowledge Base http knowledgebase citrix com cgi bin webcgi exe New KB CitrixKB For user interface details see lt Monitor gt Configuration Dialog Box on page 460 For details about each monitor s default measurements refer to the relevant reference section for the monitor 445 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors 446 5 Change the monitor s default counters Optional When you configure the System Resource Microsoft IIS Microsoft ASP and SQL Server monitors you are presented with a list of default counters that you can measure on the server you are monitoring You can change the default counters for these monitors by editing the res_mon dft file found in the LoadRunner dat directory Open a new scenario and click the Run tab For each of the monitors select the counters you want to measure c Save the scenario and open the scenario Irs file and res_mon dft file with an editor d From the scenario Irs file copy the MonlItemPlus section of the each
413. onnect from any load generator If a disconnection is not successful within this time the status of the load generator changes to Failed Default value 120 seconds Command Timeout gt Init The timeout value for the Initialize command Vuser Default value 180 seconds gt Run The timeout value for the Run command Default value 120 seconds gt Pause The timeout value for the Pause command Default value 120 seconds gt Stop The timeout value for the Stop command Default value 120 seconds Update Vuser The frequency at which LoadRunner updates the value elapsed time every displayed in the Elapsed Time column in the Vusers dialog box Default value 4 seconds Example If you select a Vuser and click the Initialize button LoadRunner checks whether the Vuser reaches the READY state within 180 seconds the default Init timeout period if it does not the Controller issues a message indicating that the Init command timed out 236 12 Before Running Your Scenario This chapter includes Tasks gt How to Prepare a Scenario to Run on page 238 Reference gt Scenario Pre Run Configuration User Interface on page 243 Chapter 12 Before Running Your Scenario Tasks gt How to Prepare a Scenario to Run 238 This task describes steps to take before you start running your scenario For details on designing the scenario see Designing Scenarios on page 53 This task includes the fol
414. ontroller should monitor during the scenario run For details see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 Delete diagnostics log files from servers gt Siebel Diagnostics Delete Siebel Diagnostics logs sarm files from all servers involved in the load test gt Siebel DB Diagnostics Delete log files from all servers involved in the load test gt Oracle 11i Diagnostics Delete trace log files from all servers involved in the load test Enable Automatic Result Collation optional If you are using the default file storage setting local machine see Specify result file name and location above prior to running the scenario you can enable auto collation As soon as the scenario run is complete LoadRunner automatically collates the results from all the load generators and diagnostics mediators servers Note Alternatively you can collate the results manually after the scenario run is complete For details see How to Collate Scenario Run Results on page 324 To enable automatic collation select Results gt Auto Collate Results When this feature is enabled Auto Collate Results is displayed in the status bar te IP Spoofer ce Auto Collate Results _ Ui If you are working in Expert mode you can disable the collation of the log files Select Tools gt Options gt General tab gt Do not collate log files 241 Chapter 12 Before Running Your Scenario 242 To s
415. ope SNMP by MIB monitor The native LoadRunner SNMP monitor can only monitor up to 25 measurements Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring amp SiteScope Resource Monitoring The SiteScope Resources monitor graph shows the SiteScope resources measured during the scenario run The SiteScope monitor can measure server network and processor performance counters For detailed information on the performance counters that SiteScope can monitor refer to the relevant SiteScope documentation Before setting up the SiteScope monitor ensure that SiteScope has been installed on a server You can install SiteScope on the same machine as the Controller or on a dedicated server If SiteScope is installed on a machine other than the Controller verify that the SiteScope machine is accessible from the Controller machine amp Firewall Server Performance Monitoring The Firewall server online monitor measures the performance of a Firewall server during scenario execution which enables isolation of server performance bottlenecks The Check Point FireWall 1 monitor displays statistics about the resource usage on Check Point s FireWall during the scenario run 481 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring Tasks gt How to Set up the UNIX Monitoring Environment This task describes how to configure the UNIX environment before setting up the UNIX monitor This task includes the following steps gt Verify whether the rstatd daemon
416. or 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeee 106 RETERON CO i e ice casds vad A tedecetoneeedacedeceusnctaccnsvsvaeedss 107 UNIX Environment Variables ec ecssscccceceeeesseeeeeeeenssseneeeees 107 Load Generators User Interface eeeeeeeccessreeeeseeeeenseeeeeesee 107 Table of Contents Chapter 5 Scheduling Manual Scenarios cscccesseeesesseeeeeee 127 GONCE PES sehccssisisssssiisesessssnecrreccsvecseruvacivesssvsnsuSecugess a a aaa 128 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Overview 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeee 128 Scheduling by Scenario Or Gr u Dessers naiaiae 128 Schedule Run Modes ccceccseccsccseseccccesccecenscesscecssesscesseessesscessess 130 EEE K E EEEE E EATA AAA csssienicectiwccdentchs 132 How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow 132 How to Add Actions to the Scenario Schedule ccccccecceceeeeees 136 How to Edit Schedule Actions cccc ccc cecccecceeccessceesesceessessesseeeees 139 Referente nonren o O TEE 142 Schedule AONO N e EE A A E E EEEE A ASR 142 Scheduler User Interface cccccccccccccccesecccsesceeesceseccccescsescsescseasecees 146 Chapter 6 Service Level Agreements ccsccscssessesseeesesseeeeeeee 161 COMGCE PES foes Seer ctc ais ates eiiasds schosshaasdcacaes svenncadecnccensusuteasecseseuseaunaseceets 162 Service Level Agreements OVervieW eseeeeeeesseseesesseeeeneeseeeeeeeeee 162 Tracking POtiOd 2 3 8 ise sec cede e deli ie enaa
417. or on the machine To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of the IBM WebSphere MQ dialog Important User entries for any text box are limited to 48 characters information Relevant tasks How to Set Up the IBM WebSphere MQ Monitor See also IBM WebSphere MQ Performance Counters 616 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements Description Alternate Queue If the event configured for monitoring is from a remote queue manager other than the one identified in the queue manager field of the IBM WebSphere MQ Add Measurements dialog box click Alternate Queue to enter the name of an alternate queue manager Note When you add an alternate queue manager this becomes the default queue manager for any events that you subsequently add To return to the queue manager to which you are connected enter that name in the Alternate Queue Manager dialog box Available Measurements Object Type Select an object type from either Channel or Queue Object Name Enter a name for object you want to monitor Event Attribute Select the events and attributes you want to monitor for the selected object Filter System Objects Select to enable the system objects filter Add Object Enables you to add a new object name to the Object name list Add Enables you to add a
418. ork and indicates possibly on a per transaction level the rate at which buffers are being dirtied Total file opens The total number of file opens being performed by the instance Each process needs a number of files control file log file database file to work against the database 553 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring R SQL Server Performance Counters The following table describes the default counters that can be monitored on version 6 5 of the SQL Server Measurement Description Total Processor The average percentage of time that all the processors on Time the system are busy executing non idle threads On a multi processor system if all processors are always busy this is 100 if all processors are 50 busy this is 50 and if 1 4 of the processors are 100 busy this is 25 It can be viewed as the fraction of the time spent doing useful work Each processor is assigned an Idle thread in the Idle process which consumes those unproductive processor cycles not used by any other threads Processor Time The percentage of time that the processor is executing a non idle thread This counter was designed as a primary indicator of processor activity It is calculated by measuring the time that the processor spends executing the thread of the idle process in each sample interval and subtracting that value from 100 Each processor has an idle thread which consumes cycles when no other th
419. ormance Network cards are manufactured to handle the bandwidth of the physical network layer Packets are transferred over an Ethernet at a rate that complies with IEEE 803 x standards If the network becomes a bottleneck the issue is not the brand of the network card but rather the bandwidth limitations on the physical layer i e Ethernet FDDI ATM Ethernet Token ring etc That is instead of load testing over a T10 line upgrade your line to DS3 45Mbps or T100 100Mbps Below are a few tips that will help qualify the need to upgrade the network gt Run the performance monitor on the Vuser load generators As the number of Vusers increases check the network byte transfer rate for saturation If a saturation point has been reached do not run any more Vusers without upgrading the network otherwise performance of Vusers will degrade Degradation is exponential in networking environments gt Run the performance monitor on the server machine Run many Vusers on several load generator machines Check the kernel usage and network transfer rate for saturation If saturation is reached with less than the desired Vuser load upgrade the network gt Every network has a different Maximum Transmission Unit or MTU which is set by the network administrator The MTU is the largest physical packet size in bytes that a network can transmit If a message is larger than the MTU it is divided into smaller packets before being sent I
420. ort Rate of client calls to SetComplete on a context SetComplete declares that the transaction in which the object is executing can be committed and that the object should be deactivated on returning from the currently executing method call Rate of client calls to SetAbort on a context SetAbort declares that the transaction in which the object is executing must be aborted and that the object should be deactivated on returning from the currently executing method call Method Events Measurement Description Method Duration Average duration of method Method Frequency Frequency of method invocation Method Failed Frequency of failed methods i e methods that return error HRESULT codes Method Exceptions Frequency of exceptions thrown by selected method 588 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring This chapter includes Concepts gt Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Overview on page 590 Tasks gt How to Set up the Citrix Monitoring Environment on page 591 Reference gt Citrix MetaFrame Performance Counters on page 593 gt Citrix Monitor Dialog Box on page 600 589 Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Concepts amp Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Overview 590 Using LoadRunner s Application Deployment Solution monitor you can isolate server performance bottlenecks by monitoring the Citrix ser
421. ory System Pages sec Total Interrupts sec The number of pages read from the disk or written to the disk to resolve memory references to pages that were not in memory at the time of the reference This is the sum of Pages Input sec and Pages Output sec This counter includes paging traffic on behalf of the system cache to access file data for applications This value also includes the pages to from non cached mapped memory files This is the primary counter to observe if you are concerned about excessive memory pressure that is thrashing and the excessive paging that may result The rate at which the computer is receiving and servicing hardware interrupts The devices that can generate interrupts are the system timer the mouse data communication lines network interface cards and other peripheral devices This counter provides an indication of how busy these devices are on a computer wide basis See also Processor Interrupts sec Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring Object Measurement Description Objects Threads The number of threads in the computer at the time of data collection Notice that this is an instantaneous count not an average over the time interval A thread is the basic executable entity that can execute instructions in a processor Process Private Bytes The current number of bytes that the process has allocated that cannot be shared with other processes R
422. os Add new Vusers Vuser Group mode only If David is working in Vuser Group mode he can add new Vusers to a group without initializing them as follows In the Run tab he clicks Vusers to open the Vusers dialog box then he clicks Add Vusers to open the Add Vusers dialog box om MP Script C He then enters the following information as shown in the image above gt Group Name script_a gt Quantity to add 5 gt Load Generator Name localhost or any load generator on which the group is running Vusers gt Select Script Script_A These settings instruct LoadRunner to add five Vusers to Script_A and that the additional Vusers should run Script_A when they run 259 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 260 Note For full information on how to work with the Add Vusers dialog box see Add Vusers Dialog Box on page 75 He clicks OK Five Vusers are added to Script_A in the down state from where they run according to the group s defined schedules Group Name Down 3 16 Script_A 10 Script_B 5 5 Script C 5 5 Pending 0 Init Ready 2 0 P Initialize Run Additional Vusers or Stop Running Vusers Use Case Scenario This use case scenario describes how David can manipulate the behavior of Vusers during a scenario run irrespective of their defined schedules The examples will show how he can initialize or run specified numbers of additional Vusers or stop specified number
423. period for load test scenario To access Design tab gt Service Level Agreement pane gt Advanced Important Information The tracking period is calculated by Analysis according to a built in algorithm and as a function of the value entered here Relevant tasks gt How to Define Service Level Agreements on page 164 gt How to Define Service Level Agreements Use Case Scenario on page 166 See also Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 171 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Internally calculated tracking period Analysis sets the tracking period to the minimum value possible taking into account the aggregation granularity defined for the scenario This value is at least 5 seconds It uses the following formula Tracking Period Max 5 seconds aggregation granularity Tracking period of at least X seconds Determines the minimum amount of time for the tracking period This value can never be less than 5 seconds Analysis sets the tracking period to the nearest multiple of the scenario s aggregation granularity that is greater than or equal to the value X that you selected For this option Analysis uses the following formula Tracking Period Max 5 seconds m Aggregation Granularity where m is a multiple of the scenario s aggregation granulari
424. phs Overview 290 You can view the data collected by the online monitors using the online monitor graphs About Online Monitor Graphs Online monitor graphs display performance measurements for those resources being monitored during scenario run Each measurement is represented on the graph by a colored line Information about the measurements is listed in the legend below the graph The legend displays the measurements for the selected graph only For details about selecting monitor graphs and customizing the graph display area see How to Display Online Monitor Graphs on page 291 For details about customizing graph layout and measurements see How to Customize Online Graph and Measurement Settings on page 293 Viewing Monitor Data Offline After monitoring resources during a scenario run you can view a graph of the data that was gathered using HP LoadRunner Analysis Analysis processes the data from the scenario run results files and generates a graph for each measurement that was monitored For details about working with Analysis at the end of the scenario run see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide Tasks Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs gt How to Display Online Monitor Graphs This task describes how to open other monitor graphs and customize the graph display area This task includes the following steps gt gt gt Prerequisites on page 291 Open a monitor graph on page 291 Customi
425. pter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules where u lt username gt is the server administrator username p lt password gt is the server administrator password g lt gateway server gt is the gateway server address e lt entrpr server gt is the enterprise server name s lt siebel server gt is the siebel server the default server b Enter the following commands change evtloglvl ObjMgrsqllog 4 for comp lt component name gt evtloglvl EventContext 3 for comp lt component name gt evtloglvl ObjMgrSessionI nfo 3 for comp lt component name gt Example For the Call Center component enter sccobjmgr_enu as the component name as follows change evtloglvl ObjMgrsqllog 4 for comp sccobjmgr_enu To disable logging on the Siebel server Perform the following steps a Open a command window and run the following command lt Siebel bin directory gt srvrmgr g lt gateway server gt s lt Siebel server gt e lt enterprise server name gt u lt username gt p lt password gt where u lt username gt is the server administrator username p lt password gt is the server administrator password g lt gateway server gt is the gateway server address e lt entrpr server gt is the enterprise server name 408 b Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules s lt siebel server gt is the siebel server the default server Enter the following commands change evtloglvl ObjMgrsqllog 0 for comp
426. pter 25 System Resource Monitoring UI Elements A Z Description SNMP V3 Privacy Password The privacy password if DES privacy encryption is desired for version 3 connections Leave blank if you do not require privacy SNMP V3 Username The user name for version 3 connections SNMP Version The version of SNMP to use when connecting Timeout The total time in seconds that SiteScope should wait for all SNMP requests including retries to complete Default 5 seconds Update every How frequently the monitor should read the server statistics The drop down list to the right of the text box lets you specify time increments of seconds minutes hours or days You must specify a time increment of at least 3 seconds Default 3 seconds V1 V2 Community The community string for version 1 or 2 connections UNIX Kernel Statistics Dialog Box The UNIX Kernel Statistics dialog box lets you select the UNIX measurements and server properties to monitor Relevant tasks To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements In the UNIX Resource Measurements section of the UNIX Resources dialog click Add Important Ensure that the rstatd daemon is correctly configured and information running on the monitored UNIX machine gt How to Set up the UNIX Monitoring Environment on page 482 gt How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 4
427. r load on the various system resources The Server Resources monitor includes the following monitors gt CPU Monitor Monitors CPU usage gt Disk Space Monitor Monitors disk space 479 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring gt Memory Monitor Monitors pages per second and percentage of virtual memory used gt Service Monitor Verifies that specific processes are listed as running and checks CPU usage To display server resource data during a scenario run you need to first select the desired measurements for the online monitor from the Controller before running the scenario Server Resource Monitor Environment gt Ensure that SiteScope has been installed on a server You can install SiteScope on the same machine as the Controller or on a dedicated server gt Verify that SiteScope is collecting the required data from the servers it is monitoring From the SiteScope Panel select the monitor group polling the Server Resource machines and check that the monitor displays a list of server measurements in the Status column amp SNMP Resource Monitoring 480 The SNMP Resource monitor shows statistics for a Windows or UNIX machine using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The SNMP Resources monitor is available for monitoring any machine that runs an SNMP agent using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP You can configure this monitor as a native LoadRunner SNMP monitor or as a SiteSc
428. r Resource monitors 563 Error Vuser state Running Vusers graph 473 Error Statistics graph 305 474 Ethernet bus based network 665 F Finished Vuser state Running Vusers graph 473 Firewall Server monitors Check Point FireWall 1 481 firewalls monitoring over 353 running Vusers over 349 firewalls network monitoring 501 G Getting Started 6 graphs CheckPoint FireWall 1 308 Citrix MetaFrame 310 Connections 307 Connections per Second 307 DB2 309 Error Statistics 305 Hits Per Second 306 667 Index HTTP Responses per Second 306 IBM WebSphere MQ 310 J2EE 310 Media Player Client 309 Microsoft Active Server Pages 309 Microsoft COM 310 Microsoft IIS 308 Network Client 310 Network Delay Time 308 Oracle 309 Pages Downloaded per Second 306 PeopleSoft Tuxedo 310 RealPlayer Client 309 Retries per Second 307 Running Vusers 305 SAPGUI 310 Server Resources 308 Siebel Server Manager 310 SiteScope 308 SNMP Resources 308 SQL Server 309 SSLs per Second 307 Throughput 306 Total Transactions Per Second Passed 306 Transaction Per Second Failed Stopped 306 Transaction Per Second Passed 305 Transaction Response Time 305 Tuxedo 310 UNIX Resources 307 User Defined Data Points 305 Vusers with Errors 305 WebLogic SNMP 309 Windows Resources 307 graphs See online graphs GUI Vusers defined 24 Hits Per Second graph 306 Hits per Second graph 464 hme0 device 187 188 Host Security Manager utility introductio
429. r as the Controller or on a dedicated server Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring If you want to monitor a remote Windows server that does not use Windows domain security you must authenticate the Controller on the remote Windows server To authenticate the Controller create an account or change the password of the account used to log on to the Controller so that it matches the password and user name used to log on to the remote monitored Windows machine When the remote Windows machine requests another machine s resources it sends the logged in user name and password of the machine requesting the resources amp UNIX Resource Monitoring The UNIX Resources monitor shows the UNIX resources measured during the scenario This graph helps you determine the impact of Vuser load on the various system resources The UNIX kernel statistics measurements include those available by the rstatd daemon For a description of the measurements see UNIX Resources Performance Counters on page 486 Note You must configure an rstatd daemon on all UNIX machines being monitored For information refer to the UNIX man pages or see How to Set up the UNIX Monitoring Environment on page 482 amp Server Resource Monitoring The Server Resources monitor shows the resources of monitors CPU disk space memory or applications used on remote Windows and UNIX servers measured during the scenario This helps you determine the impact of Vuse
430. r interface elements are described below UI Element Description lt note writing area gt Enter your notes in this area Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Output Window This window displays error notification warning debug and batch messages that are sent to the Controller by the Vusers and load generators during a scenario run To access Use one of the following gt Run tab gt Scenario Status pane gt Errors gt Q gt Select View gt Show Output Important gt LoadRunner clears the messages in the Output information window at the start of each scenario execution If you reset a scenario messages remain in the Output window unless you instruct LoadRunner to delete messages from the window upon reset For more information see Options gt Output Tab on page 229 gt The Summary tab is displayed by default when you open this window Relevant tasks gt How to Run a Scenario on page 249 gt Configure output display options Expert mode only on page 218 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Filtered Tab See Filtered Tab on page 274 Summary Tab See Summary Tab on page 271 R Summary Tab This tab displays summary information about the messages sent during a scenario run To access Output window gt Summary tab Important You can drill down further on any information displayed Information in blu
431. r scripts include functions that measure and record system performance during load testing sessions During a scenario run you can monitor the network and server resources Following a scenario run you can view performance analysis data in reports and graphs Chapter 2 Understanding LoadRunner amp The HP LoadRunner Testing Process Overview The following section provides a general overview of the HP LoadRunner testing process This section also includes Yy y Y YV Yy yY _ Planning the Test on page 21 Creating the Vuser Scripts on page 21 Designing the Scenario on page 22 Running the Scenario on page 22 Monitoring the Scenario on page 22 Analyzing Test Results on page 22 Planning the Test Successful load testing requires that you develop a thorough test plan A clearly defined test plan will ensure that the LoadRunner scenarios that you develop will accomplish your load testing objectives For more information see Planning Load Test Scenarios on page 33 Creating the Vuser Scripts Vusers emulate human users interacting with your Web based application A Vuser script contains the actions that each Vuser performs during scenario execution In each Vuser script you determine the tasks that will be gt Performed by each Vuser gt Performed simultaneously by multiple Vusers gt Measured as transactions For more information on creating Vuser scripts see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guid
432. r server gt is the enterprise server name c lt command gt is the execute a single command This command generates a list of all the Siebel application servers and their IDs Keep a record of the server IDs since this information is required in the Siebel Server Configuration dialog box For more information see Siebel Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 424 Copy files from the Siebel Application Server to the Mediator After configuring the application server copy the files listed below from the Siebel Application server bin directory to either the lt LR Mediator installation gt bin directory lt Windows gt System32 directory or any other directory in PATH on the Mediator machine For Siebel 7 53 copy the following files gt sarmanalyzer exe gt sslcshar dll gt sslcver dll gt sslcosa dll gt ssicsym dll Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules For Siebel 7 7 copy the following files gt sarmanalyzer exe gt sslcosa dll gt libarm dll gt sslcosd dll gt msvcp70 dll gt sslcrsa dll gt msvecr70 dll gt ssicscr dll gt ssicacln dll gt sslcshar dll gt sslccore dll gt sslcsrd dll gt sslcevt dll gt sslcsym dll gt sslcos dll gt sslcver dll 4 Enable the Siebel Diagnostics Module To enable the Siebel Diagnostics module a Select Diagnostics gt Configuration to open the Diagnostics Distribution dialog box Then select Enable the following
433. racle Shows the resource usage on the DB2 database server machine as a function of the elapsed scenario time The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage Displays information from Oracle V tables Session statistics V SESSTAT system statistics V SYSSTAT and other table counters defined by the user in the custom query SQL Server Shows the standard Windows resources on the SQL server machine The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage RealPlayer Client Shows statistics on the RealPlayer client machine as a function of the elapsed scenario time The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage Media Player Client Shows statistics on the Windows Media Player client machine as a function of the elapsed scenario time The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage 309 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs 310 Graph Description SAPGUI Shows the resource usage of a SAP R 3 system server as a function of the elapsed scenario time The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage Siebe
434. racle database server in your environment Before defining the monitoring measurements for the DB2 and Oracle monitors in the Controller you must set up the monitoring environment on the database server gt For details about the DB2 monitor configuration see How to Set Up the DB2 Monitoring Environment on page 533 gt For details about the Oracle monitor configuration see How to Set Up the Oracle Monitoring Environment on page 534 You then enable each database resource monitor from the Controller by selecting the counters you want the monitor to measure Chapter 29 e Database Resource Monitoring Tasks gt How to Set Up the DB2 Monitoring Environment This task describes how to set up the monitor environment before monitoring a DB2 database server This task includes the following steps Prerequisites on page 533 gt gt Connect to the DB2 server and define the monitor client on page 533 gt Add the Database Manager instance to the server on page 534 gt Configure the DB2 monitor from the Controller on page 534 Prerequisites Install all the DB2 client files and libraries on the Controller machine 2 Connect to the DB2 server and define the monitor client Select Start gt Programs gt DB2 for Windows NT gt Control Center Enter your DB2 server username and password with administrative privileges In the console that opens right click Systems and select Add d Enter the fol
435. radation To check capacity you can compare performance versus load on the existing system and determine where significant response time degradation begins to occur This is often called the knee of the response time curve Response Time seconds Unacceptable Acce ptable Number of Users Once you determine the current capacity you can decide if resources need to be increased to support additional users 52 4 Designing Scenarios This chapter includes Concepts gt Load Test Scenarios Overview on page 54 gt Manual Scenarios on page 54 gt Goals Types for Goal Oriented Scenarios on page 56 Tasks gt How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 gt How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 gt How to Change the Scenario Mode Manual Scenario on page 65 gt How to View Modify Scripts in the Scenario on page 65 Reference gt Relative Paths for Scripts on page 70 gt Vuser Statuses on page 71 gt Design View User Interface on page 72 53 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios Concepts amp Load Test Scenarios Overview To test your system with LoadRunner you must create a load test scenario A scenario defines the events that occur during each testing session It defines and controls the number of users to emulate the actions that they perform and the machines on which they run their emulations Before you design a scenario you should have a a well defined test plan in mind
436. raph that displays the Web Throughput and Hits per Second as a function of the elapsed time To access In the Run tab right click one of the online graphs you want to overlay and select Overlay Graphs Important gt In order to overlay graphs the x axis of both graphs information must be the same measurement gt When you overlay the contents of two graphs that share a common x axis the left y axis on the overlaid graph shows the current graph s values The right y axis shows the values of the graph that was overlaid Relevant tasks How to Manage Online Graphs on page 296 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Current Graph The name of the current graph Select graph to overlay with The name of the graph to be merged with the current graph Note The drop down list displays only the active graphs that have a common x axis with the current graph Title of overlaid graph The title given to the overlaid graph 304 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs Available Graphs Tree The Available Graphs Tree displays the online monitor graphs Tip Graph names displayed in blue contain data To select measurements to monitor in a particular graph see the monitor configuration instructions for each specific monitor For details see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 Graph Descript
437. rators Relevant tasks gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 See also gt Options gt Run Time Settings Tab on page 232 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Defaults Resets values to their defaults Vuser Quota gt Number of Vusers that may be initialized at one time lt current load generator gt The maximum number of Vusers that the current load generator can initialize simultaneously Default 50 Maximum value 999 gt Limit the number of users that may be stopped at one time to The maximum number of Vusers that the current load generator can stop simultaneously Default 50 amp Load Generator Configuration gt Security Tab 114 Enables monitoring or running Vusers over a firewall To access Controller toolbar gt a gt Add or Details Chapter 5 Load Generators Important information gt If the load generator is connected you cannot change values in the Security tab To disconnect a load generator select the load generator in the Load Generators dialog box and click Disconnect The load generator status changes to Down and you can change the settings gt If the load generator is localhost this tab is disabled Relevant tasks gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page
438. rators gt O script b 0 lt All Load Generators gt O script c 0 lt All Load Generators gt Note When a check box is deselected no Vusers are distributed to that script However the amount of Vusers that would have been assigned to it are not redistributed to the scripts that remain selected unless you specify 0 in the percentage column For example in our use case scenario when David enters 10 in the Distribute X Vusers among all the scripts box LoadRunner automatically distributes these Vusers as equally as possible among the available scripts that is gt script_a 4 Vusers gt script_b 3 Vusers gt script_c 3 Vusers However should David wish to distribute all 10 Vusers to script_a it is not sufficient to simply deselect script_b and script_c This only ensures that no Vusers are added to these scripts but it does not change the original Vuser distribution In other words should David complete the step now the four Vusers that are assigned to script_a will be added while the three each assigned to script_b and script_c will not though they will still appear under the number column To distribute these six Vusers to script_a instead David must first change the percentage columns for these scripts to 0 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios He then clicks Initialize Ten Vusers are immediately initialized and move to the Ready state From there they run according to their defined Schedu
439. rder to monitor it provided that you set the WSINTOPPRE7Z1 environment variable to yes 565 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring 566 Note A Tuxedo workstation client communicates with the application server over the network and is not required to run the Tuxedo application server on the same machine A native client can only communicate with the Tuxedo application server if it is part of the relevant Tuxedo domain Define the environment variables on the Controller machine a Set the TUXDIR variable to the Tuxedo installation directory for example V environ 32 Tuxedo 8 0 b Add the Tuxedo bin directory to the PATH variable Check the Workstation Listener WSL Process Ensure that the workstation listener WSL process is running This enables the application server to accept requests from workstation clients The address and port number used to connect to the application server must match those dedicated to the WSL process Note For information on configuring the WSL refer to the BEA Tuxedo Web site http edocs beasys com tuxedo tux81 rf5 rf5101 htm 1534543 Configure the PeopleSoft Tuxedo Resource monitor from the Controller The first time you click Add to add a measurement in the Controller you specify the PeopleSoft Tuxedo server logon information For user interface details see PeopleSoft Tuxedo Logon Dialog Box on page 577 Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring
440. re and record the performance of your application s components Transactions To measure the performance of the server you define transactions A transaction represents an action or a set of actions that you are interested in measuring You define transactions within your Vuser script by enclosing the appropriate sections of the script with start and end transaction statements For example you can define a transaction that measures the time it takes for the server to process a request to view the balance of an account and for the information to be displayed at the ATM Rendezvous points You insert rendezvous points into Vuser scripts to emulate heavy user load on the server Rendezvous points instruct Vusers to wait during test execution for multiple Vusers to arrive at a certain point so that they may simultaneously perform a task For example to emulate peak load on the bank server you can insert a rendezvous point instructing 100 Vusers to deposit cash into their accounts at the same time Controller You use the HP LoadRunner Controller to manage and maintain your scenarios Using the Controller you control all the Vusers in a scenario from a single workstation Load Generator When you execute a scenario the Controller distributes each Vuser in the scenario to a load generator The load generator is the machine that executes the Vuser script enabling the Vuser to emulate the actions of a human user Performance analysis Vuse
441. reads are ready to run It can be viewed as the percentage of the sample interval spent doing useful work This counter displays the average percentage of busy time observed during the sample interval It is calculated by monitoring the time the service was inactive and then subtracting that value from 100 Cache Hit Ratio The percentage of time that a requested data page was found in the data cache instead of being read from disk 1 O Batch Writes The number of 2K pages written to disk per second using sec Batch I O The checkpoint thread is the primary user of Batch I O 1 O Lazy Writes sec The number of 2K pages flushed to disk per second by the Lazy Writer 1 O Outstanding The number of physical reads pending Reads 554 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring Measurement Description I O Outstanding Writes The number of physical writes pending I O Page Reads sec The number of physical page reads per second 1 O Transactions sec The number of Transact SQL command batches executed per second User Connections The number of open user connections Configuring Oracle JDBC Monitor Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to configure the connection parameters for the SiteScope Oracle JOBC monitor To access Right click the graph and select Add Measurements This dialog appears only when you add measurements for the first ti
442. reshold value is exceeded during a particular time interval during the run Analysis displays an SLA status of Failed for that time interval Apply to all To apply one set of threshold values to all transactions selected for the goal enter the threshold values in this table and click Apply to all transactions These values are applied to all the transactions in the Thresholds table at Average Transaction Response Time goal only the top of the page Note Threshold values for selected transactions do not have to be the same You can assign different values for each transaction Selected The measurement selected for the goal Measurement 180 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Whole Run This wizard page enables you to set minimum thresholds for the measurements you are evaluating in your goal Important information gt General information about this wizard is available here Service Level Agreement Wizard on page 174 Wizard map Goal measured over whole scenario run The Service Level Agreement Wizard contains Welcome gt Select a Measurement Page gt Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Whole Run See also Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Selected The measurement selected for the goal measurement Threshold The
443. ress Allocates IP addresses when the multiple IP address mode option is enabled Scenario gt Enable IP Spoofer The Controller can allocate an IP address per process or per thread Allocation per thread results in a more varied range of IP addresses in a scenario Note If the IP Spoofer is not enabled this option is not available 226 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Options gt Monitors Tab In this tab you can enable the Transaction monitor configure the behavior of the transaction data and set the data sampling rate error handling debugging and frequency settings for the online monitors To access Tools gt Options gt Monitors tab Relevant tasks How to Configure Scenario Options on page 216 See also How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Defaults Sets the default timeout values Debug If Display debug messages is selected debug related messages are sent to the Output window For the Network monitor the messages are sent according to the specified debug level 1 9 Error Handling Controls the way in which LoadRunner issues error messages gt Send errors to the Output window gt Pop up an error message box Send Expert mode only gt Summary Sends a summary of the collected data back to the Cont
444. ressssreeerrsssseereeerrssreeeeesssseereeeeess 200 Typical Network Emulation Settings eseeeeseeressseeserererserrrrerrrssseeeree 200 Emulated Locations OvervieW ssssseeesessssseereeerrsssssrersssserreeeressssee 201 Viewing WAN Emulation MOMitors sssseeeesssseseeeeeerrssereeessssseereeeeess 202 Excluding Machines from WAN Emulation sssseeeeeeereerrereereererees 202 TASKS er E oa e ooa neS KETE EEEE ETE 204 How to Integrate WAN Emulation Into Your Scenario 00 00 204 REPEFONCE arutsa ei aa AAAA A EAE cane aeh Seeschestanevedddededss 206 WAN Emulation Best Practices eeeesssseeeessssseeeeeerrrssrrerersssseereeeeess 206 PART III RUNNING LOAD TEST SCENARIOS Chapter 10 Configuring Scenario Options eesessessessessseesssseseseseees 211 COMCE DUS inin n E e e E E E EE 212 Configuring Scenario Options Overview esesessseeseeererrrereereererees 212 EXpeit Modernos etsea eae etae iena oesa itt Seas EEAS EE RRISTE 212 Run Time File Storage LOCationS sseeseesrsssseeeserrrssereerrrsssserrrerrssseee 213 Path Translationin es aa a ia ASOS 214 a E A ANARA EEEE E E 216 How to Configure Scenario Options sessesssseersesereereerserrersereeeseseees 216 RETERENCE oo oscccuestessceesuevecceasessvea tates stn euvivates cbt se tastetessoos REEE 219 Path Translation Table ccc ccc cessssecceeenssseesceeeseesseseeeeeeees 219 Configuring Scenario Options User Interface eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 221 Table of Content
445. rface details see Measurement Configuration Dialog Box on page 301 293 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs 294 Example Measurement Scale In the following example the same graph is displayed with a scale of 1 and 10 Scale 1 Scale 10 The actual graph values range from 0 1 as shown in the left graph You can view the information more accurately using a larger scale for the display as shown in the right graph However to obtain the actual values you need to divide the displayed value by the scale In the example above the highest value shown in the graph is 5 Since the scale is 10 the actual value is 0 5 The legend below the graph indicates the scale factor Ha o gt rozessor Jueue Lengtk System zeus 3 1 823529 0 705882 a File Dara Cperaticns sec System zeus 127 1463 76 64241 43 569583 24 31799 49 978041 scale factor Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs Example Shown Hidden Measurements In the following example the first image displays a line for each of the four measurements In the second image the second measurement listed in the legend is hidden in the graph N 10 DOGBER 0 5 0 013158 0 080036 0 013158 0 080036 0 013158 0 080036 0 013158 0 080036 295 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs gt How to Manage Online Graphs 296 The following sections describe ways to work with the online monitor graphs gt Freeze graphs on page 296 gt Overl
446. right of the endpoint of the last line of the graph 137 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios For example Example of Appending a Duration Action From the Schedule Graph 7 Wma a8 Interactive Schedste Gmph Mime 000630 Vusers 3 000000 0001 00 00 0200 0030 0004 00 Tine Click anywhere directly to the right of the end Appended Duration action point of the last action 0005 00 coocoo 0000o 0o20 00000 GONE 0000 00600 000700 Tire gt Stop Vusers action Click the graph anywhere below and to the right of the endpoint of the last line of the graph For example Example of Appending a Stop Vusers Action From the Schedule Graph EE RFREYS y Interactive Schedule Gmph Interactive Schedule Gmph 12 12 10 3 gt 4 Mime 0006 30 wsos I 2 Click here 929099 EETA 9990409 0996 09 0998 09 000000 COCTOD coc2oo C0000 COOECD CORSO 000600 000700 LLLE 090300 020500 no 00 08 09 Tee Click anywhere below and to the right of the end Appended Stop Vusers action point of the last action 4 Edit the actions For details see How to Edit Schedule Actions on page 139 138 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios How to Edit Schedule Actions IS This task describes how to edit schedule actions both in the Actions grid and from the schedule graph This task includes the following steps gt Edit an action from the Actions grid on page 139 gt E
447. ring Multiple IP Addresses on UNIX on page 187 185 Chapter 8 Multiple IP Addresses 186 2 Update the server s routing table with the new addresses Once the client machine has new IP addresses the server needs the addresses in its routing table so that it can recognize the route back to the client If the server and client share the same netmask IP class and network the server s routing table does not require modification Note If there is a router between the client and server machines the server needs to recognize the path via the router Make sure to add the following to the server routing table route from the Web server to the router and routes from the router to all of the IP addresses on the load generator Update the Web server routing table as follows a Edit the batch file that appears in the IP Wizard Summary screen An example bat file is shown below REM This is a bat file to add IP addresses to the routing table of a server REM Replace CLIENT_IP with the IP of this machine that the server already recognizes REM This script should be executed on the server machine route ADD 192 route ADD 192 route ADD 192 route ADD 192 route ADD 192 168 168 168 168 168 1 50 MASK 255 1 51 MASK 255 1 52 MASK 255 1 53 MASK 255 1 54 MASK 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 CLIENT_IP CLIENT_IP CLIENT_IP CLIENT_IP CL
448. ription Vuser Script files When you run a Vuser the Controller sends a copy of the associated Vuser script to the load generator The script is stored in the load generator s temporary run time directory If you specify that all Vusers access their Vuser scripts directly at some shared location no transfer of script files occurs at run time This method often necessitates path translation For details see Path Translation on page 214 This method may be useful in either of the following situations gt The file transfer facility does not work gt The Vuser script files are large and therefore take a long time to transfer Remember that Vuser script files are transferred only once during a scenario Result files While you run a scenario the participating Vusers write their results to the temporary run time file directory After scenario execution these result files are collated or consolidated results from all of the load generators are transferred to the results directory After collating the results the temporary run time directory is deleted For user interface details see Options gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 231 Path Translation 214 Path translation might be required when storing scripts and run time data results from a scenario on a shared network drive Tools gt Options gt Run Time File Storage tab Path translation is a mechanism used by LoadRunner to convert a remote
449. roller Use this option if the speed at which the data is transferred is significant to you gt Raw Data Sends all of the data in raw form back to the Controller Sending the data in raw form saves time because the data does not need to be processed However since all of the data is being transferred to the Controller it may cause more network traffic 227 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options 228 UI Elements A Z Description Transaction Data Configures the behavior of data for the Transaction Data Point and Web Resource online graphs gt Enable Transaction Monitor Enables the online Vuser Transaction monitor to start monitoring transactions at the start of a scenario gt Frequency The frequency in seconds at which the online monitor samples the data to produce the Transaction Data Point and Web Resource online graphs For a small scenario use a lower frequency for example 1 For a large scenario use a higher frequency for example 3 5 The higher the frequency the less network traffic there will be The data is averaged for the frequency period defined and only one value is sent to the Controller Default value 5 seconds For information on enabling and disabling the Transaction monitor and Web Page Diagnostics see Run Time and Transaction Monitoring on page 471 Note gt Disabling this option conserves resources gt You cannot modify these settings during
450. ronously into the buffer pool by a pre fetcher pool_async_read_time The total elapsed time spent reading by database manager pre fetchers pool_async_write_time The total elapsed time spent writing data or index pages from the buffer pool to disk by database manager page cleaners pool_async_data_read_reqs The number of asynchronous read requests pool_Isn_gap_clns The number of times a page cleaner was invoked because the logging space used had reached a pre defined criterion for the database pool_drty_pg_steal_clns pool_drty_pg_thrsh_clns The number of times a page cleaner was invoked because a synchronous write was needed during the victim buffer replacement for the database The number of times a page cleaner was invoked because a buffer pool had reached the dirty page threshold criterion for the database prefetch_wait_time The time an application spent waiting for an I O server pre fetcher to finish loading pages into the buffer pool Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring Measurement Description pool_data_to_estore The number of buffer pool data pages copied to extended storage pool_index_to_estore The number of buffer pool index pages copied to extended storage pool_data_from_estore The number of buffer pool data pages copied from extended storage pool_index_from_estore The number of buffer pool index pages copied from e
451. roperties Start Group Start immediately after the scenario begins Initialize Initialize each Vuser just before it runs gt Start Vusers Start 10 Vusers 2 every 00 00 15 HH MM SS Design pun Diagn Pec eed Pence eee eee d 5 Schedule a start time for the scenario optional In the Schedule Definition area click the Start Time button and select when to start running the scenario Scenario Schedule Schedule Namefsvart Time Start Time dule 1 7 135 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios How to Add Actions to the Scenario Schedule 136 Note You can add actions to a real world schedule only Add an action to the schedule from the Actions grid 1 In the Action grid do one of the following gt To insert an action after a specific action select the action and click Add Action After gt To add an action after the last action double click the last row in the Actions grid marked by an asterisk 2 In the Add Action dialog box define the new action For schedule action details see Schedule Actions on page 142 3 Click Apply 4 To add another action while in the Add Action dialog box click Add Another Action and repeat steps 2 through 3 Add an action from the schedule graph You can add Start Vusers Duration and Stop Vusers actions from the graph by splitting an action into two actions or appending a new action after the last action in the graph To add an action
452. ror message Note LoadRunner recognizes the fact that the number of active Vusers influences the timeout values For example 1000 Vusers trying to initialize will take much longer than 10 Vusers LoadRunner adds an internal value based on the number of active Vusers to the specified timeout value Relevant tasks How to Configure Scenario Options on page 216 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description ETE Sets the default timeout values Command Timeout If Enable timeout checks is selected this area defines how seconds LoadRunner should monitor the status of load generators and Vusers after a command is issued by the Controller If the load generator or Vuser does not complete the command within the timeout interval you specified the Controller issues an error message If Enable timeout checks is not selected LoadRunner waits an unlimited time for the load generators to connect and disconnect and for the Initialize Run Pause and Stop commands to be executed 235 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options UI Elements A Z Description Command Timeout gt Connect The time limit that LoadRunner waits to Load Generator connect to any load generator If a connection is not successful within this time the status of the load generator changes to Failed Default value 120 seconds gt Disconnect The time limit that LoadRunner waits to disc
453. rough several states from STOPPED inactive state to RUNNING fully active state Channel states range from 0 STOPPED to 6 RUNNING 609 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring 610 Measurement Description Status Messages Transferred The count of messages that have been sent over the channel If no traffic is occurring over the channel this measurement will be zero If the channel has not been started since the queue manager was started no measurement will be available Status Buffer Received The count of buffers that have been received over the channel If no traffic is occurring over the channel this measurement will be zero If the channel has not been started since the queue manager was started no measurement will be available Status Buffer Sent Status Bytes Received The count of buffers that have been sent over the channel If no traffic is occurring over the channel this measurement will be zero If the channel has not been started since the queue manager was started no measurement will be available The count of bytes that have been received over the channel If no traffic is occurring over the channel this measurement will appear as zero If the channel has not been started since the queue manager was started no measurement will be available Status Bytes Sent The count of bytes that have been sent over the channel If no traffic is occurring ov
454. rsion e Document Release Date which changes each time the document is updated e Software Release Date which indicates the release date of this version of the software To check for recent updates or to verify that you are using the most recent edition of a document go to http h20230 www2 hp com selfsolve manuals This site requires that you register for an HP Passport and sign in To register for an HP Passport ID go to http h20229 www2 hp com passport registration html Or click the New users please register link on the HP Passport login page You will also receive updated or new editions if you subscribe to the appropriate product support service Contact your HP sales representative for details Support Visit the HP Software Support web site at http www hp com go hpsoftwaresupport This web site provides contact information and details about the products services and support that HP Software offers HP Software online support provides customer self solve capabilities It provides a fast and efficient way to access interactive technical support tools needed to manage your business As a valued support customer you can benefit by using the support web site to Search for knowledge documents of interest Submit and track support cases and enhancement requests Download software patches Manage support contracts Look up HP support contacts Review information about available services Enter into discussions wi
455. rver and RealPlayer audio video servers as well as the RealPlayer and Media Player clients Note For instructions on recording a script containing streaming media functions see the HP Virtual User Generator The streaming media monitors provide you with performance information for the Windows Media Server and RealPlayer audio video servers as well as the RealPlayer and Media Player clients To obtain data for the Windows Media Server and RealPlayer Server you need to activate the streaming media monitor before executing the scenario and indicate which statistics and measurements you want to monitor The RealPlayer Client and Media Player Client do not require pre session or scenario activation or configuration gt The Real Client monitor graph shows statistics on the RealPlayer client machine as a function of the elapsed scenario time The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage gt The Media Player Client monitor graph shows statistics on the Windows Media Player client machine as a function of the elapsed scenario time The x axis represents the time that has elapsed since the start of the scenario run The y axis represents the resource usage Chapter 30 Streaming Media Monitoring Reference RealPlayer Client Performance Counters The following table describes the RealPlayer Client measurements that are monitored Measurement
456. s Chapter 11 Before Running Your Scemari0 ccccsseeeeessereeeeee 237 Task siisssctcnsceactessscssesecscesetnasbpecesedeecoctudecdecuccvsueusecusosebtccesusdeasbaasdensoaate 238 How to Prepare a Scenario to RUM eee eee eecesteeceeeeeeeessseeeseeens 238 Referen CE sii icccccccsccvcssecwereisdsasssvbsaebl estebsbisasedeacesssdeesluavencosseeensuvateasesses 243 Scenario Pre Run Configuration User Interface eee eeeeeeeeeee 243 Chapter 12 Running Scenarios eek cessececteeeeeeseeseseenseeeeees 247 COMCE PtSi sce saecceteeeivades Peciacis ish osteaadeassesosonauacdensccusossnacassnseseusususauaseves 248 Running Scenarios OVETVIEW cece eeeessseecceeeeeessseeeeeseeeeessseeeseeees 248 Tasks iseenesest eiie Er eS MAN Mie desaedededadelecatbs eevee a teee tee 249 HOW tO RUN A SCCM APIO sitae indecctedesossonnceadinsdssessdbaceceeds 249 Control Vusers During a Scenario Run Use Case Scenario 252 Referente eesti cccecs sis sdeshskectes cushscaansssaversssccsasecesssseseeverecevesvensaessoyssesd 270 Run View User Interface eee eeesseccessseeeceessecesesseeecessaeeesenseeeeeees 270 Chapter 13 Online Monitor Graphs cc ceescscsseecesseeeeeesseeeeeeee 289 CONCEPTS foveiicccccivsnssnsvcoocccsssssdosdoosbovsssgssssascecsecee c ssteaceneeesesvenennwusaessend 290 Online Monitor Graphs Overview ccc cee eceeseesteseeeeeeeeessseeseeeee 290 VeaskS E besetez desteeeohade eeaates 291 How to Display On
457. s Tab on page 122 Enables WAN Emulation on your scenario See Load Generator Configuration gt WAN Emulation Tab on page 123 Chapter 5 Load Generators Load Generator Configuration gt Connection Log Tab This tab displays the standard output and standard errors generated as the Controller connects to the selected UNIX load generator and enables you change the command that the Controller sends to the remote bridge in order to connect to the load generator To access Controller toolbar gt Fa gt Details Important This tab is displayed only when the Controller is in information Expert mode Relevant tasks See also gt How to Add Load Generators to a Scenario on page 105 gt How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 gt Load Generators Overview on page 102 gt Expert Mode on page 212 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Bridge cmd The command sent by the Controller to the remote bridge in order to connect the UNIX load generator Note This command replaces the default bridge command sent by the Controller Rsh standard errors Displays rsh standard errors as the Controller connects to the selected UNIX load generator Rsh standard output Displays rsh standard output as the Controller connects to the selected UNIX load generator 111 Chapter 5 Load Generators Load Generator C
458. s The number of Vusers that have arrived at the rendezvous and are waiting to be released by the Controller Running The number of Vusers that are running and the Vuser script is being executed on a load generator Stopped The Vuser stopped when the Stop command was invoked Scenario Status Pane Chapter 13 Running Scenarios This pane displays a synopsis of the running scenario To access Run tab Important To detach the Scenario Status pane from the Run tab Information click the detach pane a button in the upper right corner Relevant tasks How to Run a Scenario on page 249 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Elapsed Time Indicates how much time has elapsed since the scenario started running Errors Indicates the number of Vusers with errors To display the errors click the Show Snapshot Q button to display the Output Window For more information see Output Window on page 271 Hits Second Indicates how many hits HTTP requests there have been to the Web site being tested per second that each Vuser has been running Passed Failed Transactions Indicates how many transactions have been executed successfully or unsuccessfully For more information see Transactions Dialog Box on page 286 Running Vusers Indicates the number of Vusers that are currently running Scenario Status Indicat
459. s chapter includes Concepts gt About Using Firewalls in LoadRunner on page 350 gt Monitors Over a Firewall on page 353 Tasks gt How to Set Up Your System to Use Firewalls on page 355 gt How to Configure the Over Firewall System on page 357 gt How to Configure the System to Monitor Servers Over a Firewall on page 361 gt How to Configure the LoadRunner Agent on Each Monitor Over Firewall Machine on page 362 gt How to Configure Monitors Over a Firewall on page 365 Reference gt Working With Firewalls in LoadRunner User Interface on page 368 Troubleshooting on page 375 349 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner Concepts amp About Using Firewalls in LoadRunner 350 Working with a firewall means that you can prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network on specific port numbers For example you can specify that there is no access to any port from the outside world with the exception of the mail port 25 or you can specify that there is no outside connection from any ports to the outside except from the mail port and WEB port 80 The port settings are configured by the system administrator In a regular LoadRunner load test scenario not over a firewall the Controller has direct access to the LoadRunner agents running on remote machines This enables the Controller to connect directly to those machines ee i Ts fi i y eam pl to ae Two way communication
460. s disabled 1 Indicates that the diagnostics type is enabled Enable the following diagnostics Enables LoadRunner to generate offline Web Page Siebel Siebel DB Oracle 11i and SAP Diagnostics graphs and online and offline J2EE amp NET Diagnostics graphs Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules UI Elements A Z Description For X of all the relevant Vusers in the current scenario Specify the percentage of Vusers for which you want to collect diagnostics data This value determines how many of the transactions on the application server are reported to the Controller Reducing this percentage will reduce the overhead on the application server for Web Page Oracle 11i and J2EE amp NET Diagnostics Example If you enter a sampling value of 25 and run 12 Vusers in group 8 Vusers in group2 and 1 Vuser in group3 diagnostics data will be collected for 3 Vusers in group 2 Vusers in group2 and 1 Vuser in group3 Note The minimum percentage of Vuser sampling allowed is 1 or 1 Vuser per group whichever is more The maximum percentage allowed is the lowest of the Max Vuser Sampling values of all the selected diagnostics types Example If you enable Web Page max 10 Oracle 11i max 5 and J2EE NET max 100 diagnostics the percentage of Vuser participation for J2EE NET Diagnostics cannot exceed 5 J2EE NET Generates online and offline J2Z2EE NET Diagno
461. s follows gt To change the security mode enter 1 gt To change the security key enter 2 5 If you are changing the security mode gt To turn the security on enter 1 gt To turn the security on enter 0 6 If you are changing the security key enter the new key A valid key is 6 16 characters long gt How to Register Hosts in Host Security Manager This task describes how to register hosts in Host Security Manager This task includes the following steps gt Add hosts to the Hosts list on page 634 gt For hosts over a firewall specify the MI Listener on page 634 1 Add hosts to the Hosts list In Host Security Manager Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Tools gt Host Security Manager click Add Hosts Enter the names or IP addresses of the Controllers and load generators you want to add When entering multiple hosts separate entries by a comma For user interface details see Add Hosts Dialog Box on page 638 2 For hosts over a firewall specify the MI Listener In the main Host Security Manager window a Select the host that is over the firewall If other hosts over a firewall communicate through the same MI Listener select these hosts as well to set the MI Listener for all of the hosts simultaneously 634 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication Tip To select multiple hosts hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard while selecting the relevant hosts b Click Set MI Listener and e
462. s of running Vusers Note The examples presented in this section demonstrate options in the Run Stop Vusers dialog box Not all information relevant for working with this dialog box necessarily appears here For full information about working with the Run Stop Vusers dialog box see Run Stop Vusers Dialog Box on page 279 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Initialize Run additional Vusers in Vuser group mode The following procedure shows how David can initialize and run additional Vusers when he is working in Vuser Group mode Note The options to initialize or run additional Vusers can be done as two separate actions with no connection to each other They are being shown here together as a single workflow for demonstrative purposes only 1 Initialize additional Vusers If he wants to initialize ten Vusers in Script_A immediately and not wait for them to initialize as per their defined schedules in the Run tab he clicks Run Stop Vusers to open the Run Stop Vusers dialog box In the dialog box he makes sure that only the check box by script_a is selected and he enters 10 in the number column Run Stop Vusers Eil Group Name Load Generators K script_a localhost O seript_b localhost oO scripte localhost To initialize these Vusers he clicks Initialize Ten Vusers are immediately initialized and move to the Ready state From there they run according to their defined schedules ae Pending Init
463. s on the Controller and load generator do not match the scenario run fails and the status of the load generators changes to Resource Failure To re enable the load generators manually reset the status on each affected load generator to Operational 645 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication 646 37 Controller Command Line Arguments This chapter includes Concepts gt Controller Command Line Arguments Overview on page 648 Tasks gt Invoke the Controller from the command Line on page 649 Reference gt Command Line Arguments Rules on page 650 gt Application Lifecycle Management Arguments on page 651 gt Run Time Arguments on page 652 647 Chapter 37 Controller Command Line Arguments Concepts amp Controller Command Line Arguments Overview 648 When you invoke the Controller from the command line you can pass arguments to instruct the Controller how to behave By passing arguments in the command line you configure Controller scenario settings without the need to manually define them using the Controller UI When invoked the Controller checks all of the received arguments and sets its start up environment accordingly If no arguments are passed the Controller uses its default settings For example you can instruct Controller to Connect to HP Application Lifecycle Management on start up save results to a directory other than the directory defined in the scenario and invoke Analysis upon scenario
464. s that are currently executing A sustained processor queue length greater than two generally indicates processor congestion This is an instantaneous count not an average over the time interval Threads The number of threads in the computer at the time of data collection Notice that this is an instantaneous count not an average over the time interval A thread is the basic executable entity that can execute instructions in a processor 595 Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring 596 Measurement Description Latency Session Average This value represents the average client latency over the life of a session Latency Last Recorded This value represents the last recorded latency measurement for this session Latency Session Deviation This value represents the difference between the minimum and maximum measured values for a session Input Session Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic for a session in bps Input Session Compression This value represents the compression ratio for client to server traffic for a session Output Session Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from server to client traffic for a session in bps Output Session Compression This value represents the compression ratio for server to client traffic for a session Output Session Linespeed This value represen
465. s the application client s machine configuration hardware memory operating system software development tool and so forth gt What types of database and Web servers are used hardware database type operating system file server and so forth gt How does the server communicate with the application client gt What is the middleware configuration and application server between the front end client and back end server gt What other network components may affect response time modems and so forth gt What is the throughput of the communications devices How many concurrent users can each device handle 41 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios 42 Example The schematic diagram of the online banking system specified that there are multiple application clients accessing the system Front End Client Configuration Anticipated number of application 50 concurrent application clients clients Hardware Memory Pentium IV 1GB Operating system amp version Windows 2003 Client browser Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 3 Analyze the usage mode Define how the system is typically used and decide which functions are important to test Consider who uses the system the number of each type of user and each user s common tasks In addition consider any background load that might affect the system response time Example Suppose 200 employees log on to the accounting system every morning
466. sbl_bd directory gt Oracle 11i results are transferred to the ora_bd directory gt SAP results are transferred to the sap_bd directory You can view the status of diagnostics file collation in the Collate Results dialog box For details see Collate Results Dialog Box on page 327 Load Generator When you execute a scenario the Controller distributes each Vuser to a load generator and the load generator executes the Vuser script Analysis Displays detailed diagnostics graphs and reports For more information about the diagnostics graphs see the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules amp Connecting the Mediator to a Remote Server When you set up the ERP CRM Diagnostics modules you define a server to monitor by entering the user name of the server where trace log files are stored This section explains how the Mediator connects to the server when it is a remote Windows or UNIX server This section includes gt Connecting to a Remote Windows Server on page 385 gt Connecting to a Remote UNIX Server on page 385 D Connecting to a Remote Windows Server When monitoring a remote Windows server the Mediator attempts to connect to the server using the configuration details which you enter in the lt diagnostics type gt Server Configuration Dialog Box during the diagnostics configuration process This configuration should give administrator permissions to the remote m
467. scenario run x axis This graph helps you evaluate the amount of load Vusers generate in terms of the number of pages downloaded Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs Graph Description Retries per Second Shows the number of attempted Web server connections y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis A server connection is retried when the initial connection was unauthorized when proxy authentication is required when the initial connection was closed by the server when the initial connection to the server could not be made or when the server was initially unable to resolve the load generator s IP address Connections Shows the number of open TCP IP connections y axis at each point in time of the scenario x axis One HTML page may cause the browser to open several connections when links on the page go to different Web addresses Two connections are opened for each Web server Connections per Second SSLs per Second Shows the number of new TCP IP connections y axis opened and the number of connections that are shut down each second of the scenario x axis Shows the number of new and reused SSL Connections y axis opened in each second of the scenario x axis An SSL connection is opened by the browser after a TCP IP connection has been opened to a secure server Windows Resources Shows the NT and Windows 2000 resources measured during the scenario The NT a
468. schedule starting the Vuser running the for a given amount of time and stopping them For more details see Schedule Run Modes on page 130 Post Collate Command Enables you to define a command that the Controller will run directly after it collates the results of a scenario run Example You can define a command to run a customer application that runs the Analysis API to extract data Note In the command you can use the keyword ResultDir to refer to the scenario s results directory This keyword is not case sensitive 225 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Options gt General Tab This tab enables you to specify global settings for data table storage log file collation and multiple IP address allocation To access Tools gt Options gt General tab Important This tab is available only when the Controller is Information operating in Expert mode Relevant tasks gt How to Configure Scenario Options on page 216 gt How to Add IP Addresses to a Load Generator on page 185 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Data tables global The network location for data tables used as a source for directory parameter values Note This setting is only required for scripts created with earlier versions of LoadRunner Do not collate log LoadRunner collates only result files and not log files files Multiple IP add
469. se sensitive points Another advantage of using a GUI Vuser script as part of your LoadRunner scenario is that the GUI Vuser script runs on your screen during the scenario enabling you to watch the actual steps executed by the Vuser in real time amp About GUI Vuser Scripts 330 GUI Vusers enable you to measure and monitor end to end user response times while your client server system is under load A GUI Vuser emulates the complete environment of a human user For example a human user sits at a machine operates applications using the keyboard and the mouse and reads information on the machine s monitor Similarly a GUI Vuser runs on its own machine and operates applications A GUI Vuser can be programmed to read and act on information that appears on its machine s display Chapter 17 Using QuickTest Scripts in LoadRunner Suppose that you have a bank server that services many automatic teller machines ATMs You could create a GUI Vuser script that opens the ATM application enters an account number enters the amount of cash to be withdrawn withdraws cash from the account checks the balance of the account closes the ATM application Y Yy yV YV YV yV y repeats the process The actions of each GUI Vuser are described in a GUI Vuser script You use QuickTest to create GUI Vuser scripts You monitor and manage GUI Vusers using the LoadRunner Controller For instance you can use the Controller to run pause or
470. secede sedsaavedavevevevetunens 565 How to Set Up the PeopleSoft Tuxedo Resource Monitor 565 How to Set Up the SAPGUI Server Resource Monitot 008 567 Referen CO iicicccvccceceececevcesessosssbsnoboo ESES EENAA EASAN KEE 569 PeopleSoft Tuxedo Performance Counters eessssssrseessssssssreesssee 569 SAPGUI Performance Counters sssssseeressssssseresssssrreeessssssssreeessee 572 Siebel Server Manager Performance Counters eeeeeeeeerrereereereees 573 ERP CRM Server Resounce Monitoring User Interface 0 575 Chapter 31 Application Component Monitoring sceeeeee 583 GOMGCE PtSi TETTES sees vesebe vedecesind 584 Application Component Monitoring Overview cccc eee eeeee 584 Reference seia eaaa ATE E a 586 Microsoft COM Performance Counters sseeseeseseereesrerreerrerereeresee 586 Chapter 32 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring 589 CONCEPTS ices E EA AO EEA SE AA A A sutaustaceets see 590 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Overview 590 FaSk iieii iiti eni te E EAEN O REEE N T ESEETO SEE I IEE SA 591 How to Set up the Citrix Monitoring Environment 591 REFETON COren e AEAEE A dssesesess 593 Citrix MetaFrame Performance Counters sseseesseeeererreereereererereees 593 Citrix Monitor Dialog BOX oo ec eeesseeeceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeessseseseeeee 600 Chapter 33 Middleware Performance Monitoring s cseee 60
471. ser you can run multiple GUI Vusers on the same application A terminal server client can have multiple terminal sessions running simultaneously Using LoadRunner s Terminal Services Manager you can select the number of terminals to be used in your scenario provided that you have sufficient terminal sessions running and the maximum number of Vusers that can be run per terminal The Terminal Services Manager then evenly distributes the number of virtual users among the client sessions Note This feature is not supported if the Controller and the load generators connect over a firewall To configure terminal services on a load generator over a firewall see How to Configure Terminal Sessions Over a Firewall on page 197 About Terminal Services Terminal services allows centralized management of computing resources for each client connected to the server and provides each user with their own working environment Using a terminal server client you can operate in a server based computing environment from a remote machine The terminal server transmits applications over the network and displays them via terminal emulation software Each user logs on and sees only his individual session which is managed transparently by the server s operating system independent of any other client session Chapter 9 Configuring Terminal Services Settings Note Only users with administrator privileges can connect from the Controller to a lo
472. ser scripts gathered from the selected load generator during a scenario run gt As defined in Tools gt Options gt Run Time File Storage Stores the results as specified in the global settings gt In temporary directory on lt load generator name gt Instructs the Controller to save the run time files on a hard drive of the load generator machine gt On a shared network drive Instructs the Controller to save the scenario results and or the Vuser scripts on a shared network drive A shared network drive is a drive to which the Controller and all the load generators in the scenario have read and write permissions Load Generator Configuration gt Run Time Quota Tab This tab enables you to specify a maximum number of Vuser types that the load generator should initialize or stop simultaneously so as to reduce load on the load generator To access Controller toolbar gt Fa gt Add or Details Important The settings specified here are relevant for the selected Information load generator You can set run time quotas for all load generators in a scenario from the Tools gt Options gt Run Time Settings tab For details on setting global run time quotas see Options gt Run Time Settings Tab on page 232 Note If the settings specified here differ to the global load generator settings the settings specified here take preference for this particular load generator 113 Chapter 5 Load Gene
473. sers have completed their scripts when the duration runs out or when you terminate it At the conclusion of the test run the Scenario Status pane shows the Down status This indicates that the Vusers have stopped running Tasks Chapter 13 Running Scenarios How to Run a Scenario This task describes how to run a scenario This task includes the following steps gt gt gt gt y Prerequisite on page 249 Prepare to run the scenario on page 249 Run the scenario on page 250 Manually control the behavior addition and stopping of Vusers during the scenario run optional on page 250 Log execution notes during the scenario run Optional on page 251 Monitor the scenario optional on page 251 Collate run results on page 251 Prerequisite Open an existing scenario or design a new one gt To design a manual scenario see How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 gt To design a goal oriented scenario see How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 Prepare to run the scenario Before you run the scenario specify a location for the scenario results and other run time related settings For details see How to Prepare a Scenario to Run on page 238 249 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios 250 3 Run the scenario In the Run tab click the Start Scenario button to begin running the scenario The scenario runs according to its defined schedule 4 Manually control the
474. server using the SSH protocol This may require additional software and setup depending on the version of UNIX you are working with gt Rlogin Log in to the remote server using the Rlogin protocol gt HTTP Connect to an HTTP server on the remote server and run the command via a CGI For this method the Login and Password are optional and are used for authorizing logging in to the remote machine if required Custom Commandline The command for execution of the external SSH client For substitutions use host user and password respectively This setting is supported only for connections using an external process Disable Connection Caching Select this to disable SSH connection caching 456 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors UI Elements A Z Description Initialize Shell Environment Enter any shell commands to be executed at the beginning of the session Separate multiple commands with a semicolon This option allows you to specify shell commands to be executed on the remote machine directly after a Telnet or SSH session has been initiated These commands can be used to customize the shell for each SiteScope remote machine Note Commands after a shell invocation will not be executed Examples gt The remote shell may not have the correct path set for SiteScope scripts to run The following command will add the directory usr local bin into the path
475. settings 190 Chapter 8 Multiple IP Addresses IP Wizard Step 2 of 3 Optional User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description lt Web Server Address box gt If you have more than one network card enables you to choose the card to use for IP addresses This step enables the IP Wizard to check the server s routing table to see if it requires updating after new IP addresses are added to the load generator IP Wizard Step 3 of 3 Optional User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Opens the Add dialog box where you can add a new IP address gt Private Address Spaces Classes that represents the correct submask for the machine s IP addresses gt From IP Adds IP addresses starting with this number gt Submask IP addresses include two components a netid and hostid The submask determines where the netid portion of the address stops and where the hostid begins gt Number to add The number of IP addresses to add gt Verify that new IP addresses are not already in use Instructs the IP Wizard to check the new addresses The IP Wizard adds only the addresses that are not already in use Remove Removes a selected IP Address IP Address The IP addresses on the load generator machine 191 Chapter 8 Multiple IP Addresses 192 UI Elements A Z Description
476. sks How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Rename Description Enables you to rename the selected goal profile Delete ae Ea Enables you to delete the selected goal profile Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description New Enables you to define a new goal profile Scenario Start Time Opens the Scenario Start dialog box where you can set the scenario start time as follows gt Without delay As soon as the Start Scenario command is issued gt With a delay of HH MM SS The specified time after the Start Scenario command is issued gt At HH MM SS on lt date gt At a specified time on a specified date Define Scenario Goal The scenario goal gt Goal Type The type of goal For more details see Goals Types for Goal Oriented Scenarios on page 56 gt Transaction Name When goal type is Transactions per second Transaction Response Time The static script transaction for your scenario to test or the name of an automatic dynamic script transaction that you have recorded gt Reach Goal of lt value gt lt goal type gt The desired goal limits gt Using a minimum of lt value gt and a maximum of lt value gt Vusers The minimum and maximum number of Vusers to use in the scenario Do not change recorded think time If selected LoadRunn
477. source Monitoring Tasks gt How to Set Up the WebLogic SNMP Monitoring Environment This task describes the working order for setting up the monitoring environment This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 523 gt Set the port on page 523 gt Configure the WebLogic SNMP monitor from the Controller on page 524 1 Prerequisites gt Verify that a version prior to WebLogic 6 0 is installed on the server gt Install and activate the SNMP agent on the server For instructions on installing the SNMP agent see http edocs bea com wls docs5 1 admindocs snmpagent html 2 Set the port To monitor a WebLogic SNMP server use port 161 or 162 depending on the configuration of the agent To define a different default port for your WebLogic server modify the configuration file snmp cfg located in lt LoadRunner root folder gt dat monitors For example if the port used by the SNMP agent on your WebLogic server is 8888 you should edit the snmp cfg file as follows WebLogic cm_snmp_mon_isp port 8888 523 Chapter 28 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring 3 Configure the WebLogic SNMP monitor from the Controller For task details beginning with step 2 see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 524 Chapter 28 Web Application Server Resource Monitoring Reference MS Active Server Pages Performance Counters The following t
478. specified number of Vusers gradually That is LoadRunner stops YY Vusers and waits the specified time in hours minutes and seconds before stopping another YY Vusers until all XX Vusers have stopped running Scheduler User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Add Action Dialog Box on page 147 gt Edit Action Dialog Box on page 148 gt Scenario Schedule Pane on page 149 146 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Add Action Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to add actions to a real world scenario schedule to simulate a more true to life schedule by which to run your scenario To access Important information gt Available for real world schedules only In the Design tab gt Scenario Schedule pane gt Actions grid do one of the following gt Double click the last row in the Actions grid marked by an asterisk gt In the Actions grid select the action after which you want to add a new action and click Add Action After a gt You can add Start Vusers Duration and Stop Vusers actions only Relevant tasks How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 See also gt Actions Grid on page 150 gt Schedule Actions on page 142 User interface elements are described below unlabeled elements are shown in angle brackets UI Elements A Z Description Add Another Action
479. st from HP ALM Project dialog box opens 4 Select the script and click OK The Script Path field displays TD the full subject path and the script name For example TD Subject System test_alm 5 Click OK The script is displayed in the Scenario Groups pane Add a Vuser script to a goal oriented scenario 1 Open a connection to the ALM server and project where the scripts are located For task details see Connect to ALM on page 339 2 On the Scenario Scripts pane toolbar click the Add Script button The Add Script dialog box opens 341 Chapter 18 e Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management 3 Click Browse The Open Test from HP ALM Project dialog box opens and displays the test plan tree 4 Select the script and click OK The Script Path field displays TD the full subject path and the script name For example TD Subject System test_alm 5 Click OK to close the Add Script dialog box The script appears in the Script Path column in the Scenario Scripts pane 342 Chapter 18 Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management Reference Application Lifecycle Management User Interface This section includes gt HP ALM Connection Dialog Box on page 343 gt Upload Scenario Dialog Box on page 346 HP ALM Connection Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to connect to an ALM project from within the Controller To access Tools gt HP ALM Connection gt Connect
480. stics graphs The maximum percentage of Vusers for which J2EE NET Diagnostics data can be collected is 100 of the amount of Vusers selected in the For X of all the relevant Vusers in the current scenario setting To enable and configure J2EE NET Diagnostics click Configure Oracle 11i Generates offline Oracle 11i Diagnostics graphs The maximum percentage of Vusers for which Oracle 11i Diagnostics data can be collected is 5 of the amount of Vusers selected in the For X of all the relevant Vusers in the current scenario setting To enable and configure oracle 11i Diagnostics click Configure For user interface details see Oracle 11i Configuration Dialog Box on page 417 415 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 416 UI Elements A Z Description SAP Diagnostics Generates offline SAP Diagnostics graphs The maximum percentage of Vusers for which SAP Diagnostics data can be collected is 100 of the amount of Vusers selected in the For X of all the relevant Vusers in the current scenario setting To enable and configure SAP Diagnostics click Configure For user interface details see SAP Configuration Dialog Box on page 419 Siebel Diagnostics Generates offline Siebel Diagnostics graphs The maximum percentage of Vusers for which Siebel Diagnostics data can be collected is 10 of the amount of Vusers selected in the For X of all the relevant Vusers in the
481. sure that the load test scenario is not already running You must configure the diagnostics module before running the load test scenario If you are monitoring a Siebel Web Server in a DMZ Install the Mediator on the internal over firewall LAN and enable SMB CIFS communication from the internal machine to the file server in the DMZ SMB CIFS are the file sharing services that use the NBT NetBIOS over TCP IP as the transport protocol Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules To enable the NBT protocol between the client over firewall machine and the file server use the following port configuration File Sharing Service Port SMB CIES over NBT TCP 139 SMB CIFS over TCP IP Direct SMB TCP 445 Example Configure the firewall settings as follows Service enabled nbsession for TCP 139 connection Service enabled Microsoft ds for TCP 445 connection Note CIFS over TCP 445 direct SMB over TCP IP is optional with Windows 2000 and above since it is a more secure way of communicating with the file server To enable CIFS over TCP IP you must disable the NetBIOS over TCP IP protocol using the operating system configuration gt Manually define transactions in the Vuser script To ensure that valid diagnostics data is generated manually define the transactions in the Vuser script rather than using automatic transactions Make sure to disable the following options in the Run T
482. surement Description lock_escals The number of times that locks have been escalated from several row locks to a table lock x_lock_escals The number of times that locks have been escalated from several row locks to one exclusive table lock or the number of times an exclusive lock on a row caused the table lock to become an exclusive lock lock_timeouts lock_waits The number of times that a request to lock an object timed out instead of being granted The total number of times that applications or connections waited for locks lock_wait_time The total elapsed time waited for a lock locks_waiting Indicates the number of agents waiting on a lock uow_lock_wait_time The total amount of elapsed time this unit of work has spent waiting for locks rows_deleted The number of row deletions attempted rows_inserted rows_updated The number of row insertions attempted The number of row updates attempted rows_ selected The number of rows that have been selected and returned to the application rows_written The number of rows changed inserted deleted or updated in the table rows_read The number of rows read from the table int_rows_deleted The number of rows deleted from the database as a result of internal activity int_rows_updated int_rows_inserted The number of rows updated from the database as a result of internal activity
483. t ing from live pause Chapter 30 Streaming Media Monitoring Media Player Client Performance Counters The following table describes the Media Player Client measurements that are monitored Measurement Description Average Buffering The number of times Media Player Client had to Events buffer incoming media data due to insufficient media content Average Buffering Time The time spent by Media Player Client waiting for suf sec ficient amount of media data in order to continue playing media clip Current bandwidth The number of kbits per second received Kbits sec Number of Packets The number of packets sent by server for a particular media clip Stream Interruptions The number of interruptions encountered by media player client while playing a media clip This mea surement includes the number of times Media Player Client had to buffer incoming media data and any errors that occurred during playback Stream Quality The percentage ratio of packets received to total pack Packet level ets Stream Quality Sam The percentage of stream samples received on time pling level no delays in reception Total number of recov The number of lost packets that were recovered This ered packets value is only relevant during network playback Total number of lost The number of lost packets that were not recovered packets This value is only relevant during network playback 5
484. t password Prompt The prompt to be displayed when the system is ready to handle a command Default Secondary Prompt The prompt to be displayed if the Telnet connection to the remote server causes the remote server to prompt for more information about the connection Separate multiple prompt strings by commas Example For Telnet connections to some remote servers the remote server may ask what terminal type should be emulated for the connection In this case you might need to enter Terminal type as the secondary prompt The response to the secondary prompt is entered in the Secondary Response field below 458 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors UI Elements A Z Description Secondary Response The responses to secondary prompts required to establish connections with this remote server Separate multiple responses with commas Server Address Displays the IP address or host name of the server that you entered in the Add Machine Dialog Box SSH Authentication Method SSH Connection Method Select the method to use to authenticate to the remote server for SSH connections only gt Password Authenticate using a password gt Keyfile Authenticate using public private key authentication When this option is selected SiteScope uses the private key in the file SiteScope groups identity to authenticate The corresponding public key must be listed in
485. t Configuration Settings on page 355 Example 12 12 12 3 vds To machine s Displays the network path in the format of sourcemachine gt destination machine To add a new destination machine click _ 44d and define the machine in the Adding Destination Machines for Network Delay Monitoring dialog box 507 Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring Network Delay Time Graph The Network Delay Time graph shows the delay for the complete path between the source and destination machines y axis as a function of the elapsed scenario time x axis Each path defined in the Add Destination Machines for Network Delay Monitoring dialog box is represented by a separate line with a different color in the graph Network Delay Time Last 180 sec 00 00 30 00 01 00 00 01 30 00 02 00 Elapsed Time Hour Min Sec Network Monitor Settings for Defined Path Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to set the network protocol port monitoring frequency and monitoring packet retries To access Add Destination Machines for Newtork Delay Monitoring gt Click Properties Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Network Monitoring Environment on page 500 508 Chapter 26 Network Delay Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Monitor Settings gt Send request using X protocol Select the network protocol you want the monitor to use
486. t is the number of sub agents for all applications The total number of sorts that have been executed total_sort_time The total elapsed time in milliseconds for all sorts that have been executed sort_overflows The total number of sorts that ran out of sort heap and may have required disk space for temporary storage total_hash_joins The total number of hash joins executed total_hash_loops The total number of times that a single partition of a hash join was larger than the available sort heap space hash_join_overflows hash_join_small_overflows The number of times that hash join data exceeded the available sort heap space The number of times that hash join data exceeded the available sort heap space by less than 10 pool_data_l_reads The number of logical read requests for data pages that have gone through the buffer pool pool_data_p_reads The number of read requests that required I O to get data pages into the buffer pool pool_data_writes The number of times a buffer pool data page was physically written to disk 547 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring 548 Measurement Description pool_index_l_reads The number of logical read requests for index pages that have gone through the buffer pool pool_index_p_reads The number of physical read requests to get index pages into the buffer pool pool_index_writes The number
487. t max_dump_file_size 2048000 b Edit the init ora file on ORACLE_HOME admin lt sid gt pfile init lt sid gt ora Find the line of the parameter change its value and then save the file Note Verify that you have enough disk space on the database server since these trace files can be very large gt How to Set and Disable the Oracle Server Diagnostics Password To help LoadRunner deal with the Oracle server diagnostics password you can either set the password in the Vuser script or you can disable the password request on the server itself gt Set the diagnostics password in the Vuser script on page 410 gt Disable the diagnostics password request on the Oracle server on page 411 Set the diagnostics password in the Vuser script In VuGen add the nca_set_diagnostics_password lt password gt function to your script and select a password 410 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Note The nca_set_diagnostics_password function must come after the nca_connect_server function Disable the diagnostics password request on the Oracle server Perform the following steps Log on to the Oracle server with administrator privileges and select the desired module in the Oracle application The Responsibilities dialog box opens Select System Administrator and click OK In the Functions tab select Profile gt System and click Open The System Profile Values dialog box opens In t
488. t script in the table and moving down the list Note The total number of Vusers for the scenario is defined in the scenario schedule See below 5 Define a schedule for the scenario Define a schedule by which to run the Vusers in the scenario For details see How to Define a Schedule for the Scenario Workflow on page 132 64 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 6 Define service level agreements for the scenario optional You can define service level agreements SLAs to measure scenario goals over time intervals or over a whole scenario run When you later analyze the run using HP LoadRunner Analysis this data is compared against the SLAs and SLA statuses are determined for the defined measurements To define SLAs see How to Define Service Level Agreements on page 164 gt How to Change the Scenario Mode Manual Scenario This task describes how to change a manual scenario from Vuser group mode to percentage mode and vice versa For details about the scenario modes and the effects of changing from one to another see Manual Scenarios on page 54 gt To convert the scenario from Vuser group mode to percentage mode select Scenario gt Convert Scenario to the Percentage Mode gt To convert the scenario from percentage mode to Vuser group mode select Scenario gt Convert Scenario to the Vuser Group Mode Note By default every time you convert from one mode to another a message appears warning you
489. table Acceptable Number of Users Once you determine the current capacity you can decide if resources need to be increased to support additional users 38 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Tasks How to Plan a Load Test This task describes how to plan a load test This task includes the following steps gt Analyze the application on page 39 gt Define the load testing objectives on page 39 gt Plan LoadRunner implementation on page 39 1 Analyze the application You should become thoroughly familiar with the hardware and software components the system configuration and the typical usage model This analysis ensures that the testing environment you create using LoadRunner will accurately reflect the environment and configuration of the application under test For task details see How to Analyze the Application on page 40 2 Define the load testing objectives Before you begin testing you should define exactly what you want to accomplish For task details see How to Define the Load Test Objectives on page 43 3 Plan LoadRunner implementation Decide how to use LoadRunner to achieve your testing goals For task details see How to Plan the LoadRunner Implementation on page 44 39 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios gt How to Analyze the Application 40 This task describes how to analyze the application under test as part of the load test planning process Each s
490. tasks to measure based on your test objectives and define transactions for these tasks Transactions measure the time that it takes for the server to respond to tasks submitted by Vusers end to end time For example to check the response time of a bank Web server supplying an account balance define a transaction for this task in the Vuser script In addition you can emulate peak activity by using rendezvous points in your script Rendezvous points instruct multiple Vusers to perform tasks at exactly the same time For example you can define a rendezvous to emulate 70 users simultaneously updating account information 3 Select Vusers Before you decide on the hardware configuration to use for testing determine the number and type of Vusers required To decide how many Vusers and which types to run look at the typical usage model combined with the testing objectives Some general guidelines are gt Use one or a few GUI users to emulate each type of typical user connection gt Run multiple Vusers to generate the rest of the load for each user type For example suppose that you have five kinds of users each performing a different business process Usage Model GUI Other 100 customer service users in New York LAN connection 2 98 30 customers in Europe dial in ISDN connection 2 28 47 Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios 48 Usage Model GUI Other 5 background batch pr
491. te Security Configuration on page 630 gt Host Security Best Practices on page 632 Tasks gt How to Configure Security Settings Locally on Hosts on page 633 gt How to Register Hosts in Host Security Manager on page 634 gt How to Update Host Security Settings Remotely on page 635 Reference gt Secure Host Communication Interface on page 638 Troubleshooting on page 645 627 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication Concepts amp Secure Host Communication Overview The need to secure communication channels from hackers attacking the corporate networks is critical Securing communication channels ensures confidentiality integrity and the user s authenticity within the scope of the load testing application Secure communication is established between the Controller and load generator hosts using a security key Each host in the system must be set up with the identical security key If security keys on the hosts do not match secure communication cannot be established Secure channel Controller Secure channel SK1 Non secure channel Security key mismatch A host is in secure mode when it has a security key and security is enforced A host is in non secure mode gt if it has no security key gt if it has a security key but security is not enforced 628 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication When a host in secure mode tries to communicate with a host in non secure mode security is automa
492. tep in this task contains example information relating to an online banking system This task includes the following steps gt Identify system components on page 40 gt Describe the system configuration on page 41 gt Analyze the usage mode on page 42 gt Examine task distribution on page 42 1 Identify system components Draw a schematic diagram to illustrate the structure of the application If possible extract a schematic diagram from existing documentation If the application under test is part of a larger network system you should identify the component of the system to be tested Make sure the diagram includes all system components such as client machines network middleware and servers Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Example The following diagram illustrates an online banking system that is accessed by many Web users The Web users each connect to the same database to transfer funds and check balances The customers connect to the database server through the Web using multiple browsers m Banking Application Client Communications ma Device Web Server AP Database Server EE Banking Application Client Describe the system configuration Enhance the schematic diagram with more details Describe each system component s configuration You should be able to answer the following questions gt How many users are anticipated to connect to the system gt What i
493. ter key and security key on a particular host do not match Host Security Manager cannot update security settings on that host Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication When you open Host Security Manager for the first time you are prompted for a key Host Security Manager stores this key as a master key for secure communication with the hosts If you do not enter the key at this point you are prompted for it again when you try to update the security settings Admin Site Server Master Key SK1 Controller SK1 Master key matches security key Master key and security key do not match Considerations for Updating UNIX Load Generators gt UNIX load generators that use rsh remote shell to connect to the Controller cannot be updated using Host Security Manager To update security settings on such load generators use the local Host Security Setup utility See How to Configure Security Settings Locally on Hosts for UNIX load generators on page 633 gt To update security settings on a UNIX load generator using Host Security Manager you must launch the load generator daemon fora user and manually grant write permissions to the user on lt installation folder gt config Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication amp Host Security Best Practices gt To avoid sending security settings over a non secure channel perform initial configuration of the security settings on each host locally see How to Configure Security Set
494. th other software customers Research and register for software training Most of the support areas require that you register as an HP Passport user and sign in Many also require a support contract To register for an HP Passport ID go to http h20229 www2 hp com passport registration html To find more information about access levels go to http h20230 www2 hp com new_access_levels jsp Table of Contents Welcome to LoadRunner Controller cc cscescscsssecesessecssseesessenee 5 How This Guide Is Organized eee cseeeecccccesssreeeeeeeeeeesssaneeeeeees 5 Who Should Read This Guide ce eee eeecssecceccnsssseeeeeeeeeeeesseneeeseees 6 Documentation Library Guides lees eeeesseseeeeeeeeeesseeseeseseeee 6 Searching and Navigating the Documentation Library 00 000 9 Topic Typis enenu n i i EE ESEESE SEESE SESE EEEE cuban TTEN NS 10 Additional Online ReESOULCES ssssesesssseeeesrrrssssssrrrssssserrerersssseerersssse 12 Documentation Updates raor eanes ananas ean a SEE E EEE ER 13 PART I INTRODUCING HP LOADRUNNER Chapter 1 Understanding LoadRunner essessesssessssseeessseeessseeseseees 17 GOMGCE o PEETER E EEEE 18 Application Load Testing Overview eeesseeessseerrrrsssseeeeeeerssreeeerssssee 18 The HP LoadRunner Solution essssssseessssssseseeersssseeerrsssssereeererssseeeess 18 HP LoadRunner Terminology seeeessssseesssersrsssssressssserrreerrssssseresssseeeeee 19 T
495. that scenario and schedule settings may change To show hide this warning message select Scenario gt Show Convert Scenario Mode Warning How to View Modify Scripts in the Scenario This section describes how to view and modify scripts used in your load test scenario You view modify the details of the scripts in the Group Information dialog box see Group Information Dialog Box on page 81 or in the Script Information dialog box see Script Information Dialog Box on page 94 65 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 66 View script details on page 66 Modify a script s run time settings on page 67 View Edit a script in VuGen on page 68 Specify command line options on page 68 View rendezvous points included in the script on page 69 View Vusers associated with the script on page 69 Y YYYY NV y View files associated with the script on page 69 View script details You can view the details of a script by right clicking the script in the Scenario Groups Scripts pane and selecting Details In the Group Script Information dialog box that opens you can gt View details about the script including Note If you do not see some of the details listed below click More gt Script path gt Command line options see Specify command line options on page 68 gt Rendezvous points included in the script see View rendezvous points included in the script on page 69 gt Vusers associated
496. the authorized_keys file on the remote host Select the method to use to connect to the remote server gt Internal Java Libraries Connect using the Java SSH client integrated with SiteScope gt Plink Connect using an external SSH client On Windows SiteScope ships with Plink SSH Port Number The port on which the SSH service is running SSH Version 2 Only Select to force SSH to only use SSH protocol version 2 This option is only supported when using the internal Java libraries connection method Title A title for the remote machine name This name will appear in the drop down list in monitors that can connect to this server Trace Select this option to trace messages to and from the remote server in the RunMonitor log file 459 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors lt Monitor gt Configuration Dialog Box 460 This dialog enables you to select the measurements to monitor during a scenario run To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of lt monitor name gt dialog Important informa tion For DB2 monitors If there is no application working with a database you can only monitor the database manager instance Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description
497. the following at the DOS command prompt under the bin directory of the installation PLINK EXE lt server machine name gt ssh I lt UNIX user login name gt i lt private key full name if used gt pw lt password or passphrase gt lt command gt 403 Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Example Security Level A PLINK EXE my_unix ssh my_name pw my_password Is Security Level B PLINK EXE my_unix ssh my_name i my_private_key pw Is Security Level C PLINK EXE my_unix ssh I my_name i my_private_key pw my_passphrase Is gt Check the PSCP EXE command as follows PSCP EXE scp r q lt private key full name if used gt pw lt password or passphrase gt lt local file name gt lt UNIX user login name gt lt server machine name gt lt remote file name gt 2 Enable logging on the Oracle server For task details see How to Enable Logging on the Oracle Server on page 409 3 Set or Disable the Oracle Server Diagnostics Password Optional To help LoadRunner deal with the Oracle server diagnostics password you can either set the password in the Vuser script or you can disable the password request on the server itself For task details see How to Set and Disable the Oracle Server Diagnostics Password on page 410 404 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules 4 Select the Oracle NCA application version The Oracle 11i Diagnostics module supports Oracle NC
498. the scripts full paths fl 4 message_functions_ C Program Files HP LoadRunner scripts Message_Functions M A message_functions web_2 message_functions_2 C Program Files HP LoadRunner scripts Message_Functions C Program Files HP LoadRunner scripts web If you want to access the script from a location that is relative to the current scenario directory you can replace the actual path with the relative path For details see Relative Paths for Scripts on page 70 gt Quantity Vuser group mode The number of Vusers assigned to the Vuser group This column is read only when the defining a real world schedule default schedule In this case the quantity of Vusers is defined when designing the scenario schedule gt Percentage mode The percentage of Vusers assigned to run the Vuser script If you modify the percentage assigned to one group the percentages assigned to the other scripts change to create a total of 100 for all of the Vuser scripts Note Modify percentages to the scripts starting with the first script in the list and moving down the list Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description lt Groups Scripts table gt continued gt Load Generators The load generators assigned to the Vuser group script If you select multiple load generators for a group script the Vusers assigned to the Vuser group script are distributed evenly among the load genera
499. this scenario again you will need to reconfigure the measurements that are instance oriented To monitor the different instances ensure that the server login and logout procedures are recorded in the Vuser_init and Vuser_end sections respectively and not in the Action section of the script For more information see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide 2 Map the Network Drive From the Controller machine map a network drive to the Citrix server machine This ensures that the required authentication is provided to the Controller to access the resource counters 591 Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring 3 Launch PerfMon Launch PerfMon from the Controller machine to enable the counters on the Citrix server This allows you to monitor the same counters for the ICA Session object on the Citrix monitor 4 Open the Connection with the Citrix Server You can configure the Citrix monitor to view ICA Session object counters only if at least one session is being run on the Citrix server If no real user has opened a connection with the Citrix server you need to first initialize or run a Citrix Vuser against the server and only then configure the Citrix Monitor and add the ICA Session counters If you configure the Citrix monitor without first initializing or running a Citrix Vuser or connecting to the Citrix server as a real user you will not be able to view the ICA Session object 5 Configure the Ci
500. tically enforced on the non secure host assuming their security keys match allowing secure communication to be established Note gt When you run a scenario if secure communication cannot be established between a secure host Controller or load generator and another host participating in the scenario run the scenario cannot run gt By definition non secure hosts can communicate with each other and participate in scenario runs over non secure channels This can be summarized in the following table Security keys match Both Hosts in Secure Mode Scenario runs over secure channel Security Mode on Hosts Differ Scenario runs over secure channel Both Hosts in Non Secure Mode Scenario runs over non secure channel Security keys do not match Scenario does not run Scenario does not run Scenario runs over non secure channel amp Host Security Configuration When you install the hosts Controllers and load generators by default no security settings are defined on them and communication channels between the hosts are not secure To enforce secure communication between the hosts you must configure security settings on each host machine immediately after installing the hosts When configuring these settings for the first time to avoid configuration over non secure channels we recommend setting the security on each host locally using the Host Security Setup utility For
501. ting to Vuser quotas stopping Vusers and the seed for random sequences To access Tools gt Options gt Run Time Settings tab Relevant tasks gt How to Configure Scenario Options on page 216 gt How to Prepare a Scenario to Run on page 238 232 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Defaults Sets the default run time setting values Use random sequence with seed Allows LoadRunner to use a seed number for random sequencing Each seed value represents one sequence of random values used for test execution Whenever you use this seed value the same sequence of values is assigned to the Vusers in the scenario This setting applies to parameterized Vuser scripts using the Random method for assigning values from a data file It also affects the random percentage of recorded think time see information on the Run Time Settings dialog box in the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Enable this option if you discover a problem when running the test and want to repeat the test using the same sequence of random values Default 0 233 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options UI Elements A Z Description Vuser Quota To prevent your system from overloading you can set quotas for Vuser activity The Vuser quotas apply to Vusers on all load generators gt Number of Vusers that may be i
502. tings Locally on Hosts on page 633 gt Security settings should be changed once a month gt Security settings can be updated gt manually on each host gt remotely on all hosts simultaneously using the Host Security Manager utility If when using the Host Security Manager utility updating a host s settings fails update the settings manually 632 Chapter 36 Secure Host Communication Tasks gt How to Configure Security Settings Locally on Hosts This task describes how to configure security settings locally on Controllers and load generators Windows Hosts 1 On the host launch the Host Security Setup utility Start gt Programs gt LoadRunner gt Tools gt Host Security Setup For user interface details see Host Security Setup Dialog Box on page 642 2 Select a security mode for the host 3 If you selected to enforce secure communication enter a security key 6 16 characters Enter the key a second time for confirmation UNIX Hosts 1 Log in as root user and change for tcsh 2 Go to the opt HP HP_LoadGenerator directory and type gt source env csh 3 Run SecurityKeyConsole exe located in lt Installation_folder gt bin directory ex C Program Files HP Performance Center bin SecureKeyConsole Fim Ea Enter your selection 1 Change security mode 2 Change security key 9 Exit Chapter 36 e Secure Host Communication 4 In the Console window enter an option a
503. tion Displays the name and description of an action gt X End iteration Indicates the end of an iteration gt pf Errors Indicates that the Vuser encountered a problem but test execution continued Displays the error code and a description of the error gt EZ Notifications Provides action information gt amp Start End Transaction Indicates the start or end of a transaction gt Start iteration Indicates the start of an iteration gt 4 Start User Script Indicates the start of the Vuser script lt Right click options gt Refresh every 1000 milliseconds gt Copy Enables you to copy selected text from the Vuser log gt Copy path from status bar Enables you to copy the path of the Vuser log When selected instructs LoadRunner to refresh the run time information displayed every 1000 milliseconds Note For information on how to change the default refresh settings see Options gt Output Tab on page 229 14 Online Monitor Graphs This chapter includes Concepts gt Online Monitor Graphs Overview on page 290 Tasks gt How to Display Online Monitor Graphs on page 291 gt How to Customize Online Graph and Measurement Settings on page 293 gt How to Manage Online Graphs on page 296 Reference gt Online Monitor Graphs User Interface on page 298 gt Available Graphs Tree on page 305 289 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs Concepts amp Online Monitor Gra
504. tion Tab on page 225 For more details about collating run results see How to Collate Scenario Run Results on page 324 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options 218 Configure global run time file storage options Select Tools gt Options gt Run Time File Storage tab and specify where LoadRunner should save and store scenario run time files collected on remote load generators gt On the load generator gt On a shared network drive For user interface details see Options gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 231 Note gt LoadRunner applies these settings to all the load generators participating in a scenario You can change the settings for individual load generators as described in How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 gt Storing the files on a shared network drive is not recommended as it increases network traffic and necessitates path translation For details about path translation see Path Translation on page 214 Configure monitoring options Select Tools gt Options gt Monitors tab and configure the online monitoring settings For user interface details see Options gt Monitors Tab on page 227 Configure debug information options Expert mode only Select Tools gt Options gt Debug Information tab and determine the extent of the trace to be performed during a scenario run For user interface details see Options gt Debug Information Tab on page 223 Configur
505. tion of the elapsed scenario time Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs 311 Chapter 14 e Online Monitor Graphs 312 15 Rendezvous Points This chapter includes Concepts gt Rendezvous Points Overview on page 314 Tasks gt How to Set Up a Rendezvous in a Scenario on page 315 Reference gt Rendezvous User Interface on page 317 Chapter 15 e Rendezvous Points Concepts amp Rendezvous Points Overview 314 During a scenario run you can instruct multiple Vusers to perform tasks simultaneously by using rendezvous points A rendezvous point creates intense user load on the server and enables LoadRunner to measure server performance under load Suppose you want to measure how a Web based banking system performs when ten Vusers simultaneously check account information To emulate the required user load on the server you instruct all the Vusers to check account information at exactly the same time You ensure that multiple Vusers act simultaneously by creating a rendezvous point When a Vuser arrives at the rendezvous point it is held there by the Controller You then set a rendezvous policy according to which the Controller releases the Vusers from the rendezvous point either when the required number of Vusers arrives or when a specified amount of time has passed You define rendezvous points in the Vuser script For information about inserting rendezvous points into Vuser scripts see the HP Virtual User G
506. tion relevant for working with this dialog box necessarily appears here For full information about working with the Vusers dialog box see Vusers Dialog Box on page 98 Run an individual Vuser If David wants to immediately run an additional Vuser from Script_A in the Run tab he clicks Vusers to open the Vusers dialog box By selecting script_a and All Vusers in the filter options at the top of the dialog box the table displays a list of all the Vusers in Script_A and indicates that five are currently running and that five are still down Vusers 30 Running Script localhost Running Script A localhost 00 00 53 S Running Script A localhost 00 00 33 Running Script A localhost 00 00 23 Running Script A localhost 00 00 03 n Down Script localhost n Down Script A localhost n Down Script localhost n Down Script A localhost n Down Script amp localhost 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 David then selects Vuser number 6 or any Vuser in the Down state that he wishes to run and clicks Run Chapter 13 Running Scenarios That Vuser is immediately initialized and moved to the Run state Stop an individual Vuser If David wants to stop one of the running Vusers in Script_A in the Run tab he clicks Vusers to open the Vusers dialog box By selecting script_a and All Vusers in the filter options at the top of the dialog box the table displays a list of all the Vusers in Script_A
507. tion server that are waiting for a response from the application server Active Clients The total number of active clients currently logged in to the Tuxedo application server Busy Clients The total number of active clients currently logged in to the Tuxedo application server that are waiting for a response from the application server Current Accessers The number of clients and servers currently accessing the application either directly on this machine or through a workstation handler on this machine Current Transactions The number of in use transaction table entries on this machine Idle Clients The total number of active clients currently logged in to the Tuxedo application server that are not waiting for a response from the application server Workload Completed second The total workload on all the servers for the machine that was completed per unit time Workload Initiated second The total workload on all the servers for the machine that was initiated per unit time 613 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring 614 Monitor Measurements Queue Busy Servers The percent of active servers currently handling Tuxedo requests Active Servers The total number of active servers either handling or waiting to handle Tuxedo requests Busy Servers The total number of active servers currently busy handling Tuxedo requests Idle Servers The
508. tions and SSL Connections You can view the following resource monitor graphs during a scenario run Hits per Second Graph The Hits Per Second graph shows the number of hits HTTP requests to the Web server y axis as a function of the elapsed time in the scenario x axis This graph can display the whole step or the last 60 180 600 or 3600 seconds You can compare this graph to the Transaction Response Time graph to see how the number of hits affects transaction performance Throughput Graph The Throughput graph shows the amount of throughput y axis on the Web server during each second of the scenario run x axis Throughput is measured in bytes and represents the amount of data that the Vusers received from the server at any given second You can compare this graph to the Transaction Response Time graph to see how the throughput affects transaction performance In the following example the Transaction Response time graph is compared with the Throughput graph It is apparent from the graph that as the throughput decreases the transaction response time also decreases The peak throughput occurred at approximately 1 minute into the step The highest response time also occurred at this time Chapter 23 e Web Resource Monitors Example Throughput Whole scenario 4 000 000 800 000 3 600 000 D 400 000 a 200 000 00 01 00 00 02 00 00 03 00 00 04 00 Elapsed Time Hour Min Sec Transaction Response Time Whol
509. to the specified time interval in hours minutes and seconds before running them Initialize each Vuser just before it LoadRunner initializes each Vuser just runs before it starts running Default Note This option is not available for group schedules when the Wait for all groups to initialize option is selected For details see page 158 Note gt The Initialize action appears in the Actions grid for all schedule types gt The Initialize action cannot be deleted 143 Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios Start Vusers The Start Vusers action instructs LoadRunner to start running Vusers Options Description Start XX Vusers Simultaneously LoadRunner runs the specified number Default of Vusers simultaneously Start XX Vusers YY Vusers every LoadRunner runs the specified number lt 00 00 00 gt HH MM SS of Vusers XX gradually That is LoadRunner runs YY Vusers and waits the specified time in hours minutes and seconds before running another YY Vusers Note gt LoadRunner starts running Vusers only when they have reached the Ready state gt Ina basic schedule LoadRunner always runs all the Vusers whether simultaneously or gradually In a real world schedule you can select how many Vusers to start running gt While a scenario is running you can add Vuser groups scripts to participate in the scenario When starting the Vusers gradually if
510. to the list of rendezvous points You can the list of all the rendezvous points in your scenario by selecting Scenario gt Rendezvous Note In goal oriented scenarios a script s rendezvous points are disabled 2 Set the level of emulated user load Select the rendezvous points to take part in the scenario and the number of Vusers to participate in each rendezvous For user interface details see Rendezvous Information Dialog Box on page 317 315 Chapter 15 e Rendezvous Points 316 You can temporarily disable a rendezvous and exclude it from the scenario You can disable a rendezvous point for all Vusers in a scenario or you can temporarily disable specific Vusers from participating in the rendezvous By disabling and enabling a rendezvous you influence the level of server load Set the attributes for the rendezvous policy Optional In the Rendezvous Information dialog box for each rendezvous a Select the rendezvous and click the Policy button b In the Policy dialog box set the policy attributes as follows gt Release How many Vusers will be released from a rendezvous at a time gt Timeout How long the Controller waits before releasing Vusers from a rendezvous For user interface details see Rendezvous Information Dialog Box on page 317 Chapter 15 Rendezvous Points Reference Rendezvous User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Rendezvous Information Dia
511. tors Default value in percentage mode All Load Generators Note To add a load generator to this list select Add from the list For more details see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 lt Right click menu gt gt Auto Sort When adding a Vuser group script automatically sorts the table according to the defined sort gt Sort Groups Scripts Enables you to sort the table by Vuser group script name script path quantity percentage of Vusers or load generator To sort the table in ascending descending order click the relevant table heading Scenario Scripts Pane Goal Oriented Scenarios This pane lists the Vuser scripts selected for the goal oriented scenario To access Relevant tasks Goal oriented scenario gt Design tab How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 See also Load Test Scenarios Overview on page 54 91 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 92 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description e Start Scenario Starts running the scenario gh Generators Opens the Load Generators dialog box where you can add new load generators and view details about existing load generators See Load Generators Dialog Box on page 124 GP Add Script Opens the Add Script dialog box where you can select Vuser scripts to add to the scenario See Add Script D
512. tors map the network drive as m loadtest merlin I mnt m loadtest win Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Configuring Scenario Options User Interface This section includes in alphabetical order gt Options Dialog Box on page 221 gt Options gt Debug Information Tab on page 223 gt Options gt Execution Tab on page 225 gt Options gt General Tab on page 226 gt Options gt Monitors Tab on page 227 gt Options gt Output Tab on page 229 gt Options gt Path Translation Tab on page 230 gt Options gt Run Time File Storage Tab on page 231 gt Options gt Run Time Settings Tab on page 232 gt Options gt Timeout Tab on page 235 Options Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to configure scenario options To access Tools gt Options Important The settings configured in this dialog box information gt Generally need to be set only once gt Apply to all future scenarios gt Apply globally to all the load generators in a scenario Note You can change the settings for individual load generators see How to Modify Load Generator Details on page 106 Individual load generator settings override global scenario settings Relevant tasks How to Configure Scenario Options on page 216 221 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Debug Information tab Expert m
513. tory of the Controller machine At the end of the scenario all these files are automatically deleted When selected this option instructs the Agent and Controller not to delete these files so that you can use them for debugging Trace Flags For debugging purposes you can configure the type of trace performed by LoadRunner during the scenario run Select the appropriate options to enable the detailed trace The available trace flags are gt General gt File Transfer gt Incoming Communication gt Outgoing Communication The trace information appears in the log file located in the specified Agent log directory Note Select only the flags relating to your problem For example if you encounter specific problems with the transfer of files select the File Transfer flag 224 Chapter 11 Configuring Scenario Options Options gt Execution Tab This tab enables you to configure miscellaneous scenario execution settings To access Tools gt Options gt Execution tab Relevant tasks How to Configure Scenario Options on page 216 See also gt Schedule Run Modes on page 130 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Default Scheduler Enables you to set the default schedule run mode for new scenarios gt Real world schedule Runs the scenario according to a real world set of events gt Basic schedule Runs a basic
514. total number of active servers currently waiting to handle Tuxedo requests Number Queued The total number of messages which have been placed on the queue Server Requests second The number of server requests handled per second Workload second Workload is a weighted measure of the server requests Some requests could have a different weight than others By default the workload is always 50 times the number of requests Workstation Handler WSH Bytes Received sec The total number of bytes received by the workstation handler per second Bytes Sent sec The total number of bytes sent back to the clients by the workstation handler per second Messages Received sec The number of messages received by the workstation handler per second Messages Sent sec The number of messages sent back to the clients by the workstation handler per second Number of Queue Blocks sec The number of times the queue for the workstation handler blocked per second This gives an idea of how often the workstation handler was overloaded Chapter 34 e Middleware Performance Monitoring Tuxedo tpinit ini File The tpinit ini file is saved in the recorded script s directory It contains information for connecting the Tuxedo monitor to the server The client logon information is located in the Logon section of the tpinit ini file epe l Ge configured for a server named psft1 using port 7000
515. trix monitor from the Controller For task details beginning with step 2 see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 592 Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Reference Citrix MetaFrame Performance Counters The following sections describe some of the counters that can be measured gt Non Virtual Counters on page 593 gt Virtual Channel Counters on page 596 Non Virtual Counters The following table describes non virtual counters Measurement Description Disk Time The percentage of elapsed time that the selected disk drive services read or write requests Processor Time The percentage of time that the processor executes a non Idle thread This counter is a primary indicator of processor activity It is calculated by measuring the time that the processor spends executing the thread of the Idle process in each sample interval and subtracting that value from 100 Each processor has an Idle thread which consumes cycles when no other threads are ready to run It can be viewed as the percentage of the sample interval spent doing useful work This counter displays the average percentage of busy time observed during the sample interval It is calculated by monitoring the time the service was inactive and then subtracting that value from 100 File data Operations sec The rate that the computer issues Read and Write operations to file system devices This
516. troller LoadRunner runs the script using the modified settings To restore the initial settings previously set using VuGen click the Refresh button and select Run Time Settings 81 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios 82 UI Elements A Z Description Command Line The command line options to use when running the script Example x value y value For information about passing command line argument values to a script see the HP Virtual User Generator User Guide Files tab Displays all files used by the script including the configuration settings file the init run and end portions of the script the parameterization definitions file and the usr file gt To exclude a file from the list clear the check box adjacent to it gt To add a file or directory used by the script click the Add button Note To run Visual C Vusers on a remote load generator you must add the dll of the Vuser to this list gt You can delete the files that you add but not the other files listed Group Name Load Generator Name The name of the Vuser group To modify type a new name in the Group Name box The name is limited to a maximum of 55 characters The load generator assigned to the Vuser group To add a load generator to this list select Add from the list For user interface details see Add Load Generator Load Generator Information Dialog Box on page 108 Rendezvous tab Displays th
517. ts currently logged in to the Tuxedo application server that are waiting for a response from the application server Current Accessers The number of clients and servers currently accessing the application either directly on this machine or through a workstation handler on this machine Current Transactions The number of in use transaction table entries on this machine Idle Clients The total number of active clients currently logged in to the Tuxedo application server that are not waiting for a response from the application server Workload Completed second The total workload on all the servers for the machine that was completed per unit time Workload Initiated second The total workload on all the servers for the machine that was initiated per unit time Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring Monitor Measurements Queue Busy Servers The percent of active servers currently handling Tuxedo requests Active Servers The total number of active servers either handling or waiting to handle Tuxedo requests Busy Servers The total number of active servers currently busy handling Tuxedo requests Idle Servers The total number of active servers currently waiting to handle Tuxedo requests Number Queued The total number of messages which have been placed on the queue Server Requests second The number of server requests handled per second
518. ts are described below UI Elements A Z Description Opens the Oracle 11i Server Configuration dialog box where you can add Oracle 11i servers and to enter server information For user interface details see Oracle 11i Server Configuration Dialog Box on page 418 Test Connection Tests the connections between the Oracle 11i Diagnostics module and the Mediator Note This does not check the connections to the Oracle servers Enable Firewall Select if the Mediator is over a firewall Enable Oracle 11i Diagnostics MI Listener Enables Oracle 11i Diagnostics and allows you to configure the Oracle 11i Diagnostics settings The name full name or IP address of the MI Listener machine if you are monitoring over a firewall 417 Chapter 20 LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules UI Elements A Z Description Name The name of the Mediator used to collect and process the Oracle 11i diagnostics data Only one Mediator is supported for each diagnostics module Note If you are using a Mediator that is over a firewall enter the local machine key of the Mediator instead of the Mediator machine name Servers Table gt Server Name The name of the Oracle server gt Platform The platform of the Oracle server gt Log Directory The directory where the Oracle trace files trc are written Oracle 11i Server Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box e
519. ts the line speed from server to client for a session in bps Virtual Channel Counters The following table describes virtual channel counters Measurement Description Input Audio Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the audio mapping channel This is measured in bps Input Clipboard Bandwidth Input COM1 Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the clipboard mapping channel This is measured in bps This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the COM1 channel This is measured in bps Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Measurement Description Input COM2 Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the COM2 channel This is measured in bps Input COM Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the COM channel This is measured in bps Input Control Channel Bandwidth Input Drive Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the ICA control channel This is measured in bps This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the client drive mapping channel This is measured in bps Input Font Data Bandwidth This value represents the bandwidth from client to server traffic on the local text echo font and keybo
520. ty such that m Aggregation Granularity is greater than or equal to X Example If you select a tracking period of X 10 and the aggregation granularity for the scenario is 6 then the tracking period is set to the nearest multiple of 6 that is greater than or equal to 10 that is Tracking Period 12 Goal Details Dialog Box This dialog box displays the thresholds that were set for the selected SLA 172 To access Design tab gt Service Level Agreement pane gt 4 Details Important If you defined load criteria as part of your SLA the information threshold values are displayed per the defined load value ranges See also Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Service Level Agreement Pane This pane lists all the service level agreements SLAs defined for the scenario To access Design tab Relevant Tasks gt How to Design a Goal Oriented Scenario on page 60 gt How to Design a Manual Scenario on page 62 gt How to Define Service Level Agreements on page 164 gt How to Define Service Level Agreements Use Case Scenario on page 166 See also Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description New E Starts the Service Level Agreement wizard where you can define new goals for the load test scenario
521. u to configure the remote Windows machine for SiteScope monitors To access Right click the graph and select Add Measurements This dialog appears only when you add measurements for the first time Important informa tion Relevant tasks You configure the NT remote server machine for SiteScope monitors only How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 452 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors User interface elements are described below UI Element A Z Description Connection Limit Controls the number of open connections that SiteScope will allow for this remote machine If you have a large number of monitors configured to use this connection then set this number high enough to relieve the potential bottleneck Note This setting does not affect the number of tests running on the remote machine Tests will always create a new connection Connection Method SiteScope can use the following connection types for monitoring remote Windows server resources gt NetBIOS The default server to server communication protocol for Windows networks gt SSH Secure Shell a more secure communication protocol that can be installed on Windows based networks This connection method normally requires installing SSH libraries on each server to which you want to connect Custom Commandline The custom command line for a remote connection using
522. unner native monitors gt To monitor a server through SiteScope select SiteScope This button is enabled only for those monitors that can be configured as both a SiteScope monitor or a native LoadRunner monitor Description Displays a description of the selected resource measurement 461 Chapter 22 Working with LoadRunner Online Monitors 462 UI Elements A Z Description Monitored Server Machines The machines whose resources are being monitored Add Displays the Add Machine dialog box which adds the machine that you want to monitor to the existing list Delete Removes the selected machine from the list Resource Measurements on lt machine name gt Displays the resource measurements being monitored on the selected machine Add Displays the Resources dialog box that lets you create a list of resource measurements on the selected machine Delete Removes the selected resource measurement from the list 23 Web Resource Monitors This chapter includes Concepts gt Web Resource Monitoring Overview on page 464 Reference gt HTTP Status Codes on page 469 463 Chapter 23 Web Resource Monitors Concepts amp Web Resource Monitoring Overview 464 The Web Resource monitor enables you to analyze the following resources on the Web server during a scenario run throughput HTTP requests downloaded pages server retries TCP IP connec
523. uppose that you want to verify that while your system operates under normal load conditions the end users receive responses to all requests within 20 seconds The following graph presents a sample load vs response time measurement for a banking application Check account Response information Time seconds Login 10 20 30 40 50 Number of Users Defining Optimal Hardware Configuration Check how various system configurations memory CPU speed cache adaptors modems affect performance Once you understand the system architecture and have tested the application response time you can measure the application response for different system configurations to determine which settings provide the desired performance levels For example you could set up three different server configurations and run the same tests on each configuration to measure performance variations Checking Reliability Determine the level of system stability under heavy or continuous work loads You can use LoadRunner to create stress on the system force the system to handle extended activity in a compressed time period to simulate the kind of activity a system would normally experience over a period of weeks or months Chapter 3 Planning Load Test Scenarios Checking Hardware or Software Upgrades Perform regression testing to compare a new release of hardware or software to an older release You can check how an upgrade affects response time bench
524. ur network administrator to change the Web server port To check connectivity between the agent and the MI Listener when running the LoadRunner agent as a service MI Listener Load Generator Machine Agent Machine If there is a red light on the right side of the LoadRunner Agent icon ta when running the LoadRunner agent as a service do the following gt Check that port 443 is open See the troubleshooting tip above gt Check that the Agent Settings and Agent Configuration are correctly set See Agent Configuration Settings Dialog Box on page 369 gt Run the agent as a Process Launch lt Installation gt Launch_service bin magentproc exe If this works this indicates an authentication issue with the LoadRunner Agent Service Browse to the Service gt LoadRunner Agent Service and change the properties of this service to System User Account or provide the user name and password of someone who has administrative privileges on this machine Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner Check Solution To check connectivity between gt Check that you entered the servers that the agent and the Controller you want to monitor in the Monitor when monitoring over a Configuration dialog box See Monitor firewall Configuration Dialog Box on page 373 gt Start the LoadRunner Agent Process on the Monitor Over Firewall machine See How controler a to Configure the Loa
525. urces to monitor using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements In the Resource Measurements section of the Monitored Server Machine dialog click Add Important The CheckPoint FireWall 1 monitor can monitor up to information 25 measurements Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 492 Chapter 25 System Resource Monitoring User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Add Adds the selected measurement to the monitor graph Hides the ID number and description of the selected object Displays an ID number and description of the selected object CheckPoint FireWall 1 SNMP Objects Select each required object and click __ Add i Configuring SNMP by MIB Monitor Dialog Box This dialog box enables you to configure the SiteScope SNMP by MIB monitor properties before you add monitor measurements To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements In the Resource Measurements section of the Monitored Server Machine dialog click Add Important Many of these properties are applicable for specific information versions of SNMP connections as noted in the user interface descriptions below Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 493 Chapter 25 Syst
526. uring the scenario run Optional The Controller provides you with a dialog box in which you can log comments while a scenario is running To open the dialog box select Scenario gt Execution Notes The notes are automatically saved by clicking OK to close the dialog box 8 Monitor the scenario optional During the scenario run you can view data collected by the online monitors using the online monitor graphs If you did not set up the monitors before you started the run you can do so during the run The data collected by the monitors can be viewed using the LoadRunner online graphs gt For details about setting up the online monitors see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 gt For details about viewing the monitor graphs see Online Monitor Graphs on page 289 9 Collate run results If you are using the default file storage setting local machine when the scenario run is complete the run results must be collated or consolidated in preparation for result analysis If LoadRunner is not set up to collate the results automatically upon completion of the run you need to collate the results manually after the run Select Results gt Collate Results gt Collate Results For details see How to Collate Scenario Run Results on page 324 For details about result collation see Collating Run Data on page 322 251 Chapter 13 Running Scenarios Control Vusers During a Scenario Run
527. user interface details see Scenario Goal Pane on page 86 Scenario Groups pane Manual scenario in Vuser Group mode Displays the Vuser groups created for the scenario For user interface details see Scenario Groups Scripts Pane Manual Scenarios on page 88 Scenario Scheduler pane Manual scenario Displays the scenario schedule For user interface details see Scenario Schedule Pane on page 149 77 Chapter 4 Designing Scenarios UI Elements A Z Description Scenario Scripts pane Displays the Vuser scripts selected for the scenario For user interface details gt See Scenario Groups Scripts Pane Manual Scenarios on page 88 gt See Scenario Scripts Pane Goal Oriented Scenarios on page 91 Service Level Agreement pane Lists the service level agreements defined for the scenario For user interface details see Service Level Agreement Pane on page 173 Edit Scenario Goal Dialog Box 78 This dialog box enables you to set goals for your scenario To access Goal oriented scenario gt Design tab gt Scenario Goal pane gt Edit Scenario Goal Important gt Available for goal oriented scenarios only information gt When you run a goal oriented scenario the goal you defined is displayed in the appropriate graph along with the scenario results This enables you to compare the results with your target goal Relevant ta
528. vel Agreement Wizard contains Welcome gt Select a Measurement Page gt Select Transactions Page gt Set Load Criteria Page gt Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Time Interval Wizard map Goal measured over whole scenario run See also The Service Level Agreement Wizard contains Welcome gt Select a Measurement Page gt Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Whole Run Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 Chapter 7 Service Level Agreements Select a Measurement Page This wizard page enables you to select a measurement for your goal Important information gt General information about this wizard is available here Service Level Agreement Wizard on page 174 gt There are two modes for the Service Level Agreement wizard The wizard pages that follow depend on the measurement that you select on this page See the wizard maps below Wizard map Goal measured per time interval The Service Level Agreement Wizard contains Welcome gt Select a Measurement Page gt Select Transactions Page gt Set Load Criteria Page gt Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Time Interval Wizard map Goal measured over whole scenario run See also The Service Level Agreement Wizard contains Welcome gt Select a Measurement Page gt Set Threshold Values Page Goal Per Whole Run Service Level Agreements Overview on page 162 175 Chapter 7
529. ver during a scenario run LoadRunner s Citrix monitor provides you with information about the application deployment usage of the Citrix server during a scenario execution The Citrix monitor allows you to monitor the server performance statistics from Citrix servers You can monitor multiple parameters counters with a single monitor instance This allows you to watch server loading for performance availability and capacity planning To obtain performance data you need to activate the online monitor for the server and specify which resources you want to measure before executing the scenario Chapter 33 Application Deployment Solution Monitoring Tasks gt How to Set up the Citrix Monitoring Environment This task describes the working order for setting up the monitoring environment This task includes the following steps gt Prerequisites on page 591 gt Map the Network Drive on page 591 gt Launch PerfMon on page 592 gt Open the Connection with the Citrix Server on page 592 1 Prerequisites gt Make sure that Citrix Server has been installed and is running gt If Citrix Server machine is running Windows 2000 make sure that the server machine is also running the Remote Registry service gt Make sure that the LoadRunner machine has administrator privileges to access the Citrix server gt Measurements that monitor instances are valid for the currently running Citrix session only If you run
530. vided that you set the WSINTOPPRE71 environment variable to yes 603 Chapter 34 Middleware Performance Monitoring 604 Note A Tuxedo workstation client communicates with the application server over the network and is not required to run the Tuxedo application server on the same machine A native client can only communicate with the Tuxedo application server if it is part of the relevant Tuxedo domain Define the Tuxedo Environment Variables Define the Tuxedo environment variables on the Controller machine set the TUXDIR variable to the Tuxedo installation directory for example V environ 32 Tuxedo8 0 and add the Tuxedo bin directory to the PATH variable Check the Workstation Listener WSL Process Ensure that the workstation listener WSL process is running This enables the application server to accept requests from workstation clients The address and port number used to connect to the application server must match those dedicated to the WSL process Note For information on configuring the WSL refer to the BEA Tuxedo Web site http edocs beasys com tuxedo tux81 rf5 rf5101 htm 1534543 Configure the Tuxedo monitor from the Controller The first time you click Add to add a measurement in the Controller you specify the Tuxedo server logon information For user interface details see Tuxedo Logon Dialog Box on page 619 For task details beginning with step 2 see How to Set Up the Mon
531. w on page 532 Tasks gt How to Set Up the DB2 Monitoring Environment on page 533 gt How to Set Up the Oracle Monitoring Environment on page 534 Reference gt DB2 Performance Counters on page 538 gt Oracle Performance Counters on page 552 gt SQL Server Performance Counters on page 554 gt Configuring Oracle JDBC Monitor Dialog Box on page 555 531 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring Concepts amp Database Resource Monitoring Overview 532 LoadRunner s Database Server Resource monitors measure database resource usage statistics for DB2 Oracle or SQL Servers during a scenario run You use these monitors to isolate database server performance bottlenecks The DB2 monitor is a native LoadRunner monitor The SQL monitor can be configured as a native LoadRunner monitor or as a SiteScope monitor There are two methods of monitoring Oracle database servers gt The Oracle native LoadRunner monitor displays information from Oracle V tables Session statistics V SESSTAT system statistics V SYSSTAT and other table counters defined by the user in the custom query gt The SiteScope Oracle JDBC Monitor monitors the server performance statistics from Oracle Database servers You can monitor multiple parameters or counters with a single monitor instance This allows you to watch server loading for performance availability and capacity planning You can create a separate Oracle JOBC Monitor instance for each O
532. w to Add Vuser Scripts from a Application Lifecycle Management Project on page 341 Reference gt Application Lifecycle Management User Interface on page 343 Chapter 18 Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management Concepts amp Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Managment Overview The Controller works together with Application Lifecycle Managment ALM HP s Web based test management tool HP ALM provides an efficient method for storing and retrieving Vuser scripts scenarios and results You can store scenarios in an ALM project and organize them into unique groups In order for the Controller to access an ALM project you must connect it to the Web server on which HP Application Lifecycle Managment is installed You can connect to either a local or remote Web server For more information on working with Application Lifecycle Managment see the Application Lifecycle Management User s Guide 338 Chapter 18 Managing Scenarios Using Application Lifecycle Management Tasks gt How to Work with Scenarios in ALM Projects The following steps describe the workflow of how to work with scenarios saved in an Application Lifecycle Managment project gt Connect to ALM on page 339 gt Open the scenario on page 339 gt Save the scenario on page 339 1 Connect to ALM Open a connection to the ALM server and project that contains the scenario For task details see Connect to ALM
533. walls in LoadRunner gt How to Configure the System to Monitor Servers Over a Firewall This task describes how to set up your system to monitor the servers over a firewall This task includes the following steps gt Install Components and Perform Initial Configuration on page 355 gt Set Up Your System to Run Vusers Over the Firewall on page 356 gt Configure Your System to Monitoring Servers Over a Firewall on page 357 gt Check Connectivity on page 357 1 Prerequisites Before configuring the system to monitor servers over a firewall make sure that you have completed the task How to Configure the Over Firewall System on page 357 2 Configure the LoadRunner Agent on Each Monitor Over Firewall Machine See How to Configure the LoadRunner Agent on Each Monitor Over Firewall Machine on page 362 3 Configure the Controller for Running Over a Firewall To run or monitor Vusers over a firewall you need to create a unique connection between the Controller and the agent machines Agent machines include load generator machines that will be running over a firewall and all Monitor Over Firewall machines This connection is made through the MI Listener which serves as a router between the Controller and the LoadRunner agent To establish this connection you configure the Controller machine to define the agent machine as a load generator 361 Chapter 19 e Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner To configure
534. with the UNIX Siebel Gateway server gt Configure the time difference in Analysis For more information see the chapter about Siebel DB Diagnostics Graphs in the HP LoadRunner Analysis User Guide If connecting to a remote UNIX server with a remote shell RSH RCP connection gt Verify that the RSH and RCP daemons are running on the UNIX server gt Verify that the UNIX user has permission to run remote shell commands To check this type the following at the DOS command prompt rsh lt server machine name gt lt UNIX user login name gt n lt command gt Chapter 20 e LoadRunner ERP CRM Diagnostics Modules Example rsh my_unix I my_name n cd pwd Note Only RSH commands that work from the DOS command prompt window work with LoadRunner gt Verify that no output is generated after executing the RSH command Note You should not generate output from the login profile and cshrc files for example by echo or in any other way including commands that generate output indirectly such as biff Where an existing user generates output in the RSH step that cannot be deleted you should create a new user that does not generate output and who has permissions to run RSH and RCP commands on the server machine gt If connecting to a remote UNIX server with a secured shell PLINK PSCP connection Note Before proceeding with the following prerequisite steps if you are not familiar with the
535. xecute Time The average SQL execute time Avg SQL Fetch Time The average SQL fetch time Avg SQL Parse Time The average SQL parse time CPU Time The CPU time used in the work process Elapsed Time The total amount of elapsed time Num of DBConn Retries The number of database connection retries Num of DLRbk Retries The number of DLRbk retries Num of Exhausted Retries Number of SQL Executes The total number of retries that expired The total number of SQL executes Number of SQL Fetches The total number of SQL fetches Number of SQL Parses The total number of SQL parses Number of Sleeps The number of sleeps Object Manager Errors The total number of object manager errors Reply Messages Request Messages The total number of reply messages The total number of request messages SQL Execute Time The total SQL execute time SQL Fetch Time The total SQL fetch time SQL Parse Time The total SQL parse time Sleep Time The total sleep time Tests Attempted The number of tests attempted Tests Failed The number of tests that failed Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring Measurement Description Tests Successful The number of tests that were successful Total Reply Size The total reply size measured in bytes Total Request Size The total request size measur
536. xtended storage direct_reads The number of read operations that do not use the buffer pool direct_writes The number of write operations that do not use the buffer pool direct_read_reqs The number of requests to perform a direct read of one or more sectors of data direct_write_reqs The number of requests to perform a direct write of one or more sectors of data direct_read_time direct_write_time The elapsed time in milliseconds required to perform the direct reads The elapsed time in milliseconds required to perform the direct writes cat_cache_lookups The number of times that the catalog cache was referenced to obtain table descriptor information cat_cache_inserts The number of times that the system tried to insert table descriptor information into the catalog cache cat_cache_overflows The number of times that an insert into the catalog cache failed due the catalog cache being full cat_cache_heap _full The number of times that an insert into the catalog cache failed due to a heap full condition in the database heap 543 Chapter 29 Database Resource Monitoring 544 Measurement Description pkg_cache_lookups The number of times that an application looked for a section or package in the package cache At a database level it indicates the overall number of references since the database was started or monitor data was reset
537. y if the Connection Type setting is HTTP Connection Type HTTP Proxy User Name The user name of a user with connection rights to the proxy server Connection Type TCP HTTP Local Machine Key Select either TCP or HTTP depending on the configuration you are using Default TCP A symbolic string identifier used to establish a unique connection between the Controller host and the agent machine via the MI Listener machine MI Listener Name The name full name or IP address of the MI Listener MI Listener Password The password needed to connect to the MI Listener machine MI Listener User Name The user name needed to connect to the MI Listener machine Server Domain The domain name needed to connect to the MI Listener machine This field is required only if NTLM is used Use Secure Connection SSL Enable to connect using the Secure Sockets Layer protocol Default disabled Use Secure Connection SSL Private Key Password The password that might be required during the SSL certificate authentication process This option is relevant only if the Client Certificate Owner option is enabled Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner UI Elements A Z Description Use Secure Connection SSL user Client Certificate Enable to load the SSL certificate if required by the server to allow the connection to be made This option is relevant
538. you can let the groups run over and over again until the scenario schedule instructs them to stop running You can schedule a scenario to run in one of the following modes gt Real world schedule Default The scenario runs according to a user defined group of actions that simulate a real world schedule of events Vuser groups run according to the iterations defined in their run time settings but you can define how many Vusers to run at a time how long Vusers should continue to run and how many Vusers to stop running at a time gt Basic schedule All enabled Vuser groups run together on one schedule each according to its own run time settings You can schedule how many Vusers to start running at a time and how long they should run before stopping Note You can change the default run mode in the Tools gt Options gt Execution tab Chapter 6 Scheduling Manual Scenarios The following table illustrates how the given schedule types run in real world vs basic run mode Run Mode Schedule by Real world Basic Scenario All participating Vuser groups All participating Vuser groups run together on one schedule run together on one schedule The scenario runs according to each according to its own a user defined group of actions run time settings You can that emulate a true to life schedule the Vusers to start and schedule of events You can stop running simultaneously or schedule how many Vusers to
539. you to select the Siebel Server Manager resources to monitor To access Right click a graph gt Add Measurements Click Add in the Resource Measurements section of Siebel Server Manager monitor dialog Relevant tasks How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow See also Siebel Server Manager Performance Counters Troubleshooting and Limitations User interface elements are described below UI Elements A Z Description Component Counter Displays a description of the highlighted component Description Host Displays the name of the monitored machine Measured Displays the available components Browse the tree and Components select the component you want to monitor Performance Displays the available counters for the selected Counters component Select the resource counter to monitor Q Troubleshooting and Limitations 580 This section describes troubleshooting for the Siebel Server Manager Monitor The Siebel Server Manager monitor uses a Siebel command line utility srvrmgr to gather it s statistics If you are having trouble getting the Siebel Server Manager monitor to work run this command from the Siebel Server Manager client srvrmgr s lt server gt g lt gateway gt e lt enterprise gt u lt user gt p lt pw gt Chapter 31 ERP CRM Server Resource Monitoring If this command works from the command line but SiteScope has trouble executin
540. ype TCP Use Secure Connection SSL False Check Server Certificates False Client Certificate Owner False Private Key User Name Private Key Password Proxy Name Proxy Port Proxy User Hame Proxy Password Proxy Domain Henu Show current settings Change a setting Save changes and exit Exit without saving Use default values 5 To change a setting enter 2 to display the settings menu Settings HI Listener Hame Local Machine Key Connection Timeout seconds 20 Connection Type TCP Use Secure Connection SSL False Check Server Certificates False Client Certificate Owner False Private Key User Name Private Key Password Proxy Name Proxy Port Proxy User Hame Proxy Password Proxy Domain Enter mmber of setting to change or 0 to go back to menu Enter the setting and continue according to the menu instructions Set each option according to the Agent Configuration Settings Dialog Box on page 369 364 Chapter 19 Working with Firewalls in LoadRunner 6 Restart the agent for the configuration changes to take effect To Restart the LoadRunner Agent 1 To remove the LoadRunner agent run the command m_daemon_setup remove from the lt LoadRunner root folder gt bin directory Note When the LoadRunner agent is configured to run over a firewall and the agent is connected to the MI Listener a file called lt local_machine_key gt _connected_to_MI_
541. ze the graph display area Optional on page 292 Prerequisites To see data in the online monitor graphs the relevant monitoring environments must be configured For details see How to Set Up the Monitoring Environment Workflow on page 443 Open a monitor graph By default LoadRunner displays the following graphs in the graph display area gt Running Vusers gt Transaction Response Time gt Hits per Second gt Windows Resources You can open other graphs one at a time as follows 291 Chapter 14 Online Monitor Graphs 292 Method 1 a Select Monitors gt Online Graphs gt Open a New Graph or right click a graph and select Open a New Graph b In the Open a New Graph dialog box click the in the left pane to expand the category nodes and select a graph You can view a description of the selected graph in the Graph Description box c Click Open Graph or drag the selected graph into the right pane of the Run view Method 2 In the graph tree on the left of the Run tab click the to expand the category nodes Double click a graph or alternatively select it and drag it to the graph display area on the right Note If the graph tree is not displayed select View gt Show Available Graphs To hide the graph tree view select View gt Hide Available Graphs Customize the graph display area Optional By default LoadRunner displays four graphs in the graph display area To change th

HP LoadRunner Controller User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents